North Vancouver 1615 Lonsdale Ave. • 986-0911 • Vancouver 412 W. Hastings St. • 682-5288 • Langley #305 - 6339 200th St. • 530-8704 • Victoria 911 Fort Street •385-3413 Vancouver Island Toll Free: 1 1 -888-230-6443 >— • • O Electronics Division: 520 Seymour St., Vancouver • 683-2345 BC Toll Free: 1-800-663-1351 Canada Toll Free: 1-800-661-3761 www.wardmusic.com Calendar^ CAPILANO COLLEGE NORTH VANCOUVER CAMPUS A N D A D M I N I S T R A T I V E OFFICES 2 0 5 5 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, BC V7J 3 H 5 6 0 4 9 8 6 1911 TDD (FOR DEAF) 6 0 4 9 8 0 9921 FAX 6 0 4 9 8 4 4 9 8 5 SECHELT CAMPUS 5 6 2 7 Inlet A v e n u e PO Box 1 6 0 9 Sechelt, BC VON 3A0 604 885 9310 TOLL-FREE FROM VANCOUVER 6 0 4 9 8 7 1535 FAX 6 0 4 8 8 5 9 3 5 0 SQUAMISH CAMPUS 1 1 5 0 C a r s o n Place PO Box 1538 S q u a m i s h , BC VON 3 G 0 6 0 4 892 5322 TOLL-FREE FROM VANCOUVER 604 986 3515 FAX 6 0 4 892 9 2 7 4 www.capcollege.bcca Capilano College Frequently Called Numbers Web Site: www.capcoHege.fac.ca Early Childhood Care & Education Accounting Assistant Program 984-4959 Accounting Support Program 984-4959 Program 984-4960 Achievement Resource Centre ( A R C ) 984-4945 Eldercollege 984-4906 Administrative Assistant Program 984-4959 E n g l i s h as a Second Language ( E S L ) 984-4971 983-7562 Admissions 984-4913 Environmental Science Program A d u l t Basic Education 984-4971 Faculty Association 984-4948 A d u l t Special Education 984-1759 Financial A i d 984-4966 A d v i s i n g Centre 984-4990 First A i d 984-1772 Alternative Career Training 984-1711 First Nations College Preparatory Program 983-7573 A l u m n i Relations 984-1765 First Nations Student Services A p p l i e d Business Technology 984-4959 Fisheries Science - Sechelt 984-1727 Foundations for Independent L i v i n g / 984-1762 (toll free) 987-1535 A p p l i e d Information Technology (Infotec) Program Art or (604) 885-9310 984-4911 A s i a Pacific Management C o - o p SARAW 983-7552 Graphic Design & Illustration Program 990-7820 984-4981 Health Programs 984-4960 Athletics and Recreation 984-4977 Health Services 984-4964 Bookstore 984-4972 H o m e Support Attendant Program 984-4960 Humanities D i v i s i o n 984-4957 329-5171 Program Business Administration General Information 984-4960 Impark C o - o p Education 984-1735 International Student Centre or 983-7557 Manager 983-7544 Business Fundamentals Program 984-4959 International Student A d v i s o r 983-7539 C A N A S E A N Program 984-1706 International Student Counsellor 983-7535 Capilano College Foundation 983-7566 Jazz Studies 984-4951 Capilano Review 984-1712 Labour Studies Program 984-4954 Career Access Centre 984-1784 Landscape Horticulture Program 984-4947 Cashiers' Office 984-1786 Legal Assistant Program 983-7594 984-4959 984-4950 Legal Secretarial Program College Relations 984-4983 Library Commercial Animation Program 990-7820 C h i l d Care Centre Communications 990-7820 Computer Services 984-4952 Circulation 984-4944 Reference 984-1769 L o c a l Gov't Administration Professional Certificate Program 984-4960, ext. 2340 Continuing Education 984-4901 Contract Services 984-4920 Counselling 984-1744 M e d i a Resources Program Courier Newspaper 984-4949 M e d i c a l Office Assistant Program M u s i c Therapy Program Deans' Offices Arts 984-1747 Business, Human Services & 984-4951 984-4959 984-4923 Outdoor Recreation Program 984-4924 Peer Support Centre Science & M e d i a Technology 984-1748 Programs 984-4959 986-1911, ext. 2307 M u s i c Transfer Program International Education Disability Services 984-4940 Office Assistant Program College/Community Partnerships 984-4960 986-1911, ext. 2229 Personal Care Attendant Program 984-4960 President's Office 984-4987 984-1749 Prior Learning Assessment 984-1788 983-7526 Pure & A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n 984-4955 Student Services & Foundation 2 or 983-7570, ext. 2340 Registration 984-4913 Student Employment Centre Resident Care Attendant Program 984-4960 Student Records 984-4973 Retail Marketing C o - o p Program 984-1721 Student U n i o n 984-4969 or 983-7555 Sechelt Campus (604) 885-9310 Toll-free from Vancouver 987-1535 984-4965 Studio A r t Program Television L a b 984-4911 986-1911, ext. 2171 Textile Arts Program 984-4911 Security 984-1763 Sexual Harrassment A d v i s o r 983-7547 Box Office 990-7810 Social Sciences D i v i s i o n 984-4953 Manager 984-1775 Sports Medicine C l i n i c 984-4964 Sportsplex '. 984-1737 Squamish Campus (604) 892-5322 Toll-free from Vancouver 986-3515 Theatre Program Information Tourism Management Program 984-4911 .• 984-4960 V i c e President, A c a d e m i c Affairs 984-1738 V i s u a l and Performing Arts Division 984-491 1 1998-99 Capilano College Calendar Published by: College Relations Department Design and Layout: M e d i a Production Services C o v e r Design: Jana Hotkova iij^'i t'i Photo courtesy of North Shore News 3 4 N o r t h V a n c o u v e r tcunpus C a l l 9 8 3 - 7 5 2 6 for a wheelchair access map. 5 DUTHIE BOOKS Duthie B o o k s a r e full service b o o k s t o r e s w i t h large and v a r i e d i n v e n t o r i e s a n d k n o w l e d g e a b l e a n d helpful staff. W e n o w have t e n l o c a t i o n s i n V a n c o u v e r as w e l l as mail order, special o r d e r S out-ofp r i n t search services, a n d a n o n - l i n e b o o k s t o r e where y o u may b r o w s e a n d o r d e r from our database of over 100,000 titles; search by title, author, ISBN, o r category. W e mean it w h e n w e s< Wherever you are you are never far from a good bookstoi f Duthies on Georgia 650 West Georgia (689-1802) jLy Main Store 919 Robson Street (684-4496) i t duthiebooksa>vfs 394 West Hastings (687-2725) Library Square 345 R o b s o n Street (602-0610) Manhattan B o o k s 8 Magazines 1089 Robson Street (681-9074) duthies & y v r International T e r m i n a l B u i l d i n g (303-3073) 4255 Arbutus Street (738 1833) 2239 West 4th Avenue (732-5344) ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 4 4 4 4 West 10th Avenue (224-7012) Technical 8 Professional Books 1701 West 3rd Avenue (732-1448) • toll-free: 1-800/785-4408 Mail Order 650 West Georgia Street, Vancouver, BC V6B 4N7 (604/687-0083) • fax: 604/689-3629 • toll free: 1 -800/663-1174 Virtual Bookstore E-mail http://www.lit.erascape.com/ infodeska>literascape.com Duthie Books: Vancouver Booksellers since 1957 6 Tciblc of Co Child Care Frequently Called Numbers 2 Maps 4 About Capilano College 12 47 Health Services and Sports Medicine Clinic 47 Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor 48 Security 48 Career Advising 48 Campus Activities GENERAL INFORMATION Academic Schedule 21 Admission and Readmission 22 Athletics and Recreation 48 Student Union 49 Campus Publications The Capilano Review 49 Student Newspaper 50 Application Dates 23 English Language Requirement 23 Admission Requirements 23 Transfer Credit 26 Bookstore 50 27 Student Store - Cap Corner 50 Registration General Campus Services 27 Parking 50 Instructional Year 27 Lost and Found 51 Math Placement Test (MPT) 27 Food and Beverage Service 51 English Diagnostic Test (EDT) 28 College Policies 51 Governance and Administration 55 Right to Register Add/Drop/Withdrawal Procedures 28 Course Overload 30 Course Challenge 31 Fees 31 Graduation 33 Academic Policies and Procedures 36 PREPARATORY PROGRAMS General Information 59 Prc-Collcgc Level Courses 59 Achievement Resource Centre Courses 59 Student Services Adult Basic Education 60 Educational Advice Alternative Career Training 62 62 64 The Advising Centre 40 English as a Second Language Registrar's Office 40 First Nations College Preparation Program Disability Services 41 Speech Assisted Reading and Writing (SARAW) 66 First Nations Student Services 41 Learning Support Services Library UNIVERSITY TRANSFER 41 General Information 69 Achievement Resource Centre Writing Centre 43 43 Anthropology 73 Art History 73 The Mathematics Learning Centre 43 Biology 74 International Student Centre 43 Chemistry 75 International Exchanges 44 Student Financial Support Employment Centre for Students 44 Financial Aid and Awards 44 Alternative Learning Formats Chinese 75 Commerce 76 Computing Science 77 Criminology 78 Economics 78 Engineering 79 Distance Education 46 English 81 Co-operative Education 46 French 82 Geography 83 46 Geology 83 Personal Support Services Counselling 7 John Yu's CGA designation and his vision of technology have made him a driving force on the information superhighway. He's just one of 27,000 Certified General Accountants who are managing the future. Whether they work in industry, government or serve small- and medium-sized businesses, CGAs are changing the way Canada does business. If you are working toward a diploma and are aiming for a career you can count on, add to that achievement with a CGA designation. The CGA professional accounting program combines real, practical experience with the latest developments in Internet CD technology. And that means the future is at your fingertips. - You may already qualify for advanced placement in the C G A Program. To find out how the CGA Program fits into your future, call: 604-732-1211 or 1 -800-565-1211 or visit our website: www.cga-bc.org. Certified General Accountants Association of British Columbia CGA CGA. 8 W E ' R E T H E 1555 West 8th,Avenue Vancouver, B C V6J 1T5 Telephone: 604-732-121 1 or 1-800-565-1211 Fax: 604-732-1252 E-mail: into«( cga-bc.org Website: www.cga-hc.org NAME BRAND F O R B U S I N E S S IN C A N A D A . German 84 Labour Studies 139 History 85 Landscape Horticulture 140 Japanese 85 Legal Assistant 141 Kinesiology 86 Legal Secretarial 143 Linguistics 86 M e d i a Resources 145 Mathematics and Statistics 86 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 146 88 M u s i c Therapy, Bachelor o f 147 M u s i c Transfer, Bachelor o f i Philosophy 91 Office Assistant 150 Physics 91 Outdoor Recreation Management 150 Political Studies 92 Personal Care Attendant W o r k i n g for Persons Psychology 93 with Disabilities Sociology 93 Resident Care Attendant 154 Spanish 94 Studio Art 155 Thai 94 Textile Arts 157 Theatre 94 Tourism Management 159 Women's Studies 98 152 POST-GRADUATE PROGRAMS CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS Art Institute 163 General Information 103 A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative 163 Accounting Assistant 104 Environmental Science 165 Accounting Support 104 Administrative Assistant 105 A p p l i e d Information Technology (Infotec) 106 Business Administration 107 Bachelor o f Business Administration Degree (BBA) 111 Co-op Education D i p l o m a 111 Advanced D i p l o m a 112 Business Computing C o - o p D i p l o m a 114 D i p l o m a Programs - Two-year 114 Accelerated Business Administration D i p l o m a 116 Accelerated Computer Systems Management ..117 Professional Accounting Transfer 117 Certified Financial Planner 1 18 Retail Marketing C o - o p 118 Evening Certificate Programs 119 L o c a l Government Administration Professional Certificate 120 International Business 120 Network Specialist Certificate 121 Business Fundamentals 121 Commercial Animation 122 Communications 123 Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education 124 Fisheries Science 127 Graphic Design and Illustration 128 Home Support Attendant 130 Jazz Studies 131 CONTINUING EDUCATION AND CONTRACT SERVICES Continuing Education 169 Community M u s i c School 169 Natural History Educational Travel 169 Certified Financial Planner Program 170 Eldercollege 170 F i l m and Television Studies 170 Special Education Teacher Assistant ( S E T A ) 170 Contract Services 170 International Projects and Initiatives 171 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 175 INDEX 271 C h a n g e s to C u r r i c u l a , R e g u l a t i o n s , a n d Services Capilano College reserves the right to make such changes in the College Calendar as necessary, including the cancellation or adjustment of programs or courses, and changes in fee structure or other regulations or services, without liability for any resulting loss or damage. Although every effort is made to ensure accuracy at the time of printing, the statements in the Calendar are not to be regarded as an irrevocable contract between the student and the College. 9 University Courses Without University Waiting Lists. There's nothing more frustrating than missing out on a course you need because it's full. It can throw your whole academic schedule off. So why wait until next term to pick up that course you need now? A s a fully accredited university and college, we offer a range of courses that are transferable to your institution i n everything from business, health and human services to arts and science. A n d with our on-line computer conferencing, print and video based courses, and personal tutoring, you can study what and when you want. N o time conflicts. N o waiting lists. N o problem. Register today. For a complete course schedule call 431-33CO i n the Lower Mainland or 1-800-663-9711 within R . C . SERVICE5 OF THE _ .. , „ . . . OPEN LEARNING AGENCY fc - in a 11: s t u d e n t s e r v w 1)1 ;t . b c . c a 10 Internet: . . www.ola.bc.ca OPEN IVERSITY OPEN OLLEGE FULL SERVICE ART SUPPLIES 1 110% OFF TO CAP COLLEGE STUDENTS* CUSTOM FRAMING OF | DIPLOMAS & CERTIFICATES 1 Have a Place? Need a Place? m mm 12 years experience matching $59 POSTER FRAMING DECOR PRINTS THE LOWEST PRICE OH NORTH SHORE 1 NORTH SHORE'S LARGEST SELECTION J * some items exempt Roommates. 50% of our clients find a roommate in the first week. For information on Student Rates and Services call Osterson s Framing & A r t 1 3 2 4 Lonsdale • North Van • 9 8 8 - 8 1 0 2 ROOMMATE SERVICE Rob or Marilyn (604) 732-4350 www.roomies.com Oscar's ICBC Auto Plan I Come and see our wide ranging selection of books on. 1 Travel & Home Owner Insurance 1 Mon-Wed 9-6 Thur & Fri 9 9 Sat 10 5 Sun 12 5 http://mastermall.com/fawcett 929-3494 106 - 1169 Mt Seymour R o a d , North Van Drawing Photography Interior Design Painting Topography Fashion Pottery Design Crafts Illustration Architecture Coffee Table Books Oscar's Books and Art 1533 West Broadway VANCOUVER'S ART BOOK STORE 731-0553 11 A B O U T CAPILANO COLLEGE In 1968 C a p i l a n o College opened its doors to just over 7(X) students. Since then, it has grown steadily to become one of British C o l u m b i a ' s most outstanding colleges, with enrolment nearing 6,000 students. The College is a dynamic source o f leadership within the communities its serves. The main campus is in North Vancouver, nestled in a natural setting on the slopes o f the North Shore mountains. Regional campuses in Squamish and Sechelt provide educational opportunities to students in the communities o f H o w e Sound and the Sunshine Coast. Approximately 40 per cent of student enrolment comes from the rest of the L o w e r M a i n l a n d . British C o l u m b i a , Canada and around the world. Capilano College has earned a reputation for teaching excellence and innovation. Faculty members arc experts in their fields and bring extensive knowledge to the classroom. In support of a wide range of educational goals, the College offers a quality learning experience in a variety o f program areas: University Transfer Capilano College provides a solid academic foundation that can lead to many educational and career opportunities. The College offers a wide range o f courses which are transferable to universities in British Columbia and elsewhere in Canada. Capilano College offers several options, including: • • Associate degrees in Arts or Science Bachelor degrees, offered in partnership with the Open University: Bachelor of M u s i c in Jazz Studies. Bachelor of M u s i c in M u s i c Therapy, Bachelor of Administrative Studies, and Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management • Post-baccalaureate programs in Environmental Science and A s i a Pacific Management. Career/Vocational Programs Capilano College offers a variety o f employmentoriented programs leading to certificates, diplomas and degrees. They are constantly reviewed to ensure that students arc taught the latest techniques and skills required in today's workplace. A d v i s o r y committees, composed o f business and community leaders and employers, advise on the content of all career and vocational programs. Preparatory Courses The College offers a full range o f preparatory courses to assist students in meeting their educational and career goals. After upgrading or refreshing their skills, students may seek employment or move into a career program or university transfer courses. 12 International Education Capilano College is an active participant in the international community and maintains strong links with a number o f post-secondary institutions in A s i a Pacific countries. The College's multicultural character is enhanced by international students from more than 40 countries worldwide. Continuing Education Each year, thousands o f students enrol in non-credit courses, seminars, workshops and lectures for personal and professional development, or just for pure enjoyment. Contract Services Capilano College specializes in flexible, customized, short-term training, adapted for the classroom, conference room or computer lab, and offered on-campus or at the worksite. MISSION A N D VALUES At Capilano College our mission is to enable student success in current and continuing studies, in a chosen career, in the pursuit o f knowledge, and in contributing effectively as responsible citizens in a rapidly changing and diverse global community. To accomplish its mission, Capilano College strives to produce a dynamic and secure learning environment committed to excellence in education and to equity of access. It seeks to offer, either selectively within its own resources, or more broadly in partnership with others, high-quality and flexible preparatory, academic, career and vocational programs that provide opportunities for a wide range o f students. It does so in the context of the following values: Students Student needs arc the first concern of Capilano College. The College values the diverse backgrounds and cultures from which our students come and strives to provide curricula and support services that w i l l sustain all students' personal growth and cultural enrichment. It believes that students should leave the College with the knowledge, skills and attitudes that w i l l enable them to become independent learners and thinkers: with enhanced skills in literacy, numeracy, and critical thinking, and with a positive attitude toward learning. The College expects and values the commitment of students to the learning process and to the maintenance o f secure and supportive learning conditions. Community Accountability The College is an important resource in the educational, economic and cultural life of all the communities it serves. The College is accountable fiscally, educationally, and socially. It commits itself to allocating resources fairly to ensure that students receive an education suited to their needs; to explaining its policies and achievements to the public; and to exercising its influence within the community in a thoughtful and ethical way. T o this end it establishes policies and procedures that reflect the best standards o f financial management, graduate assessment, personnel practice, and environmental stewardship. It recognizes the unique needs of its regional centres, and of the diverse populations served by its programs. The College offers its expertise and leadership by actively helping all its communities anticipate future problems and opportunities, and actively seeking partnerships to meet those needs which are identified. The College serves as a model for its community by providing equality o f access to its services, its facilities and its employment opportunities. Employees The College values everyone involved in the teaching and learning process. It regards its employees as its greatest assets in providing excellent programming and services. The College recognizes that faculty, staff and administrators serve as active models o f citizenship, scholarship and professionalism, and expects that they w i l l work together in a responsive, equitable, and collegial manner. The College strives to establish and maintain exemplary teaching, learning, and working conditions. Innovation The College encourages rigorous, continuing analysis and evaluation of its o w n effectiveness. It supports those wishing to develop instructional methods and curricula to improve the teaching of present programs and to meet the emerging needs of students and the community. It supports the use o f appropriate partnerships and technologies to meet these needs. The College accepts the reality o f constant change and the need for planning and flexibility to meet the demands of change. 13 SAVINGS ON ALL TRANSIT DAY, ANY DAY JustTrax ALL-ZONE TRAVEL POST-SECONDARY FOR PUBLIC STUDENTS FastTrax Makes the Grade Using FastTrax on R C Transit's buses, SkyTrain and SeaBus makes travel to and from Capilano College fast, easy and affordable. lVst ot all, there's no parking to consider. Many campus hound routes are also wheelchair lift-equipped. A n d each time you use public transit, you are helping to preserve our environment. FastTrax - The Smart Choice industry. M a n y a r e e n t r e p r e n e u r s . A n d m a n y w o r k The FastTrax strip is available to tull-time students attending (qualified) post-secondary institutions in the Lower Mainland. Simply pick up the FastTrax strip ar your student union office and attach it to your student IP card. You may be charged a small tec by your university or college tor the FastTrax strip. When combined with your One Zone monthly FareCard, the FastTrax strip allows you to travel all day, am day, throughout B C Transit's system (one, two ot three rones) tor the price of I )ne Zone lire navel. Remember to always carry your One Zone monthly FareCard and vour student 10 Card, with attached FastTrax srnp. o u t s i d e of t h e a c c o u n t i n g f i e l d in a w i d e r a n g e o f Information at Your Fingertips KICK BUTT. IN ACCOUNTING A s a Certified M a n a g e m e n t Accountant, you'll h a v e t h e s k i l l s t o d o a lot m o r e t h a n c r u n c h n u m b e r s . T o d a y C M A s a i e in i n f l u e n t i a l p o s i t i o n s in all s e c t o r s o f g o v e r n m e n t , b u s i n e s s a n d senioi m a n a g e m e n t roles. S o what's the C M A d i f f e r e n c e ? In a d d i t i o n t o b e i n g t r a i n e d i n a l l f a c e t s of a c c o u n t i n g , C M A s a r e trained to lead a n d « Departure times are listed on the stops al the College bus loop. » View B C Transit's internet weh site at www.bctransit.com. innovate. To c o m m u n i c a t e a n d negotiate. To think s t r a t e g i c a l l y . It's t h i s k i n d o f s p e c i a l i z e d m a n a g e m e n t tiaining that gives C M A s the e d g e on success. T a k e control of y o u r futuie. F o i more information about the C M A Professional P r o g r a m or the C M A ' s A s s o c i a t e Accounting T e c h n o l o g i s t ( A A T ) p r o g r a m , call u s at 6 8 7 - 5 8 9 1 • I rec timetables are available .a the student union and mam other campus locations. • Call Talking Yellow Pages at 299-9000. local 2233 tor pre-recorded transit information. • C a l l B C Transit Customer Information: 521-0400 or West Vancouver 985-7777. ( V a n c o u v e r ) or 1 - 8 0 0 - 6 6 3 - 9 6 4 6 or visit o u i w e b site at w w w . c m a b c . c o m ClVtA T h e M s t a n d s for M a n a g e m e n t . 14 BCTransit $ 9 www. Vancouver Regional Transit System bctransit. com r^f)) [X^JI of the best^ corUputer bargain " s o m e ^V^*""" i^^>2J Economic computer ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ s o l u t i o n s for a l l y o u r needs. W e have a ever changing c o m b i n a t i o n of new, 15 VISITS $15 INTRODUCTORY STUDENT OFFER INCLUDES: 0Exclusive Women's Only Facilities 0 C o - e d Facilities used, consignment, refurbished and end-of-line BChildmiridinn computer systems and notebooks, Experience our unm a t c h e d facilities for o n l y $ 1 5 . Let o u r also a ElBody composition test friendly qualified staff c o m p l e t e line o f parts and u p g r a d e s . H a v e us [ZlFitness evaluation show you how we can HEquipment orientation make fitness enjoyable. u p g r a d e or r e p a i r y o u r c u r r e n t c o m p u t e r i n o u r full service deparlment by our experienced technicians. Hlmtial program design C a l l or s t o p b y t o d a y to 0lnitial nutritional consultation find out more about ElProgram monitoring exercising with us! This package Serious Fitness since 1965 C O M P U T E R valued fsom^r|i||o^p/W ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ M mm at $ 100 0 v e r 5 0 0 clubs Worldwide S #1 In Fitness Worldwide 119 Lonsdale Ave., North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 M 2 E 7 Telephone: (604) 990-0547 Fax: (604) 990-0548 V w w w . encorecomputers. regularly corr^ 125 986-9177 9 4 9 West 3rd Street, North Vancouver 1 Block South of Capilano Mall 15 Souv\ak North Vancouver 5 Lonsdale Ave North Vans Pest Souvlaki Since 1985 Open for lunch and dinner 7 days a week Reservations TRAVEL CUTS •r^The Student Travel Experts BACKPACKER BUSPASSES • ADVENTURE TOURS RAILPASSES • CAMPING TOURS • WORKING HOLIDAYS • HOSTEL MEMBERSHIPS • ApPIcSQN INSURANCE INC See us for i n s u r a n c e o n C a r s , H o m e s , Boats. B u s i n e s s , T r a v e l LANGUAGE C O U R S E S STUDENT DISCOUNT CARDS WORLDWIDE AIRFARES Toll free: 1 -888-FLY-CUTS 16 985-9853 3010 Lonsdale Street (at Queens) North Vancouver, B.C. V 7 N 3 J 5 983-3323 email :addison@mindlink. be. ca The Little Computer Store BIG FOR S T U D E N T S ONLY ft Subscribe to T h e Globe and Mail n o w a n d save °/(0 PCs and Macs Complete customization service Knowledgeable Professional Staff Free delivery and installation Fully Equipped Service Center FINANCE PACKAGES Get Canada s best daily information package delivered Monday through Saturday-plus-at no extra cost. Report on Business Magazine monthly. Your choice of 13-week term/26-week term/or 52-week term. Serving the North Shore since "84 A VAILABLE FOR STUDENTS APPLE ACER COMPAQ DTK IBM NEC NEC MOTOROLA TOSHIBA PANASONIC AND MANY MORE WESTCOAST COMPUTERS 120 - 9 3 0 West 1st Street North Vancouver, B.C. Just South of Capilano Mall CANADA'S 986-7680 A Career For Yon In The R.C.M.P. R . C . M . P . Recruiting Information Basic Qualifications Regular Member / Constable 1 Speak, read & write either of Canada's "official" languages. either French or English 2 Be over the age of 19 years Application ma) be made at the age of 18 years 3 Be a Canadian citizen 4 Possess a valid Canadian Drivers License in good standing 5 Be a graduate of Grade 12 or its equivalency Some post secondary education is preferred 6 Successfully pass medical and dental exams I 7. Vision standards Uncorrected-20/60, 20/60. 20/40. 20/100 Correctable to 20/20. 20/30 Good colour vision Be able to obtain a security clearance 19 Successfully complete the physical abilities requirement evaluation 10.Have the desire and ability to perform the duties of a general duty police officer 11 Base salary for a top level Constable attainable after four years service is $50,508 00 For More Information call (604) 264-2580 Not just a police force! Royal Canadian Mounted Police Gendarmerie royale du Canada To subscribe and save 35%, all now: 604-687-4435. Canada ^THE NATIONAL NEWSPAPER G L O B E A N D MAIL^ A NAME TO K AIR LIQUIDE Air Liquide features an extensive line of specialty gases, pressure and flow contol devices for all lab and environmental applications. Student Discount 10% off list prices on all products and supplies VISIT AN AIR LIQUIDE STORE Ca/i{604) 606-4277 Toll Free In BC 1 (800) 332-1662 •Abbottsford •Langley •Surrey •Burnaby •Richmond •Vancouver 17 How Can I Save Money and Still Stay in Touch? 4—1 U 0 y o • Make long distance calls for as little as 5c' per minute. • 40% off all your International calls anytime. • N o fees or monthly minimums — no fine print! 19 /mth 9 5 INTERNET • Unlimited Internet access (with ACC's long distance service) • F R E E software. • N o sign-up fees, or hidden charges. ACC® Your 0) support participation Capilano A p 1 L A N O C O Li V E C f FOUNDATION helps College. 1-888-274-7920 ACC makes it easy to Get Connected 1998 1999 JANUARY S M 4 5 T W 6 7 M A R C H FEBRUARY T f S S 1 2 3 1 2 8 9 10 8 M 9 JANUARY T W T F S S M T W T F S 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 15 14 8 9 10 II 10 II S 12 13 14 3 M T 4 5 W 6 T 7 FEBRUARY F 5 1 2 8 9 S M T T F S 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 M A R C H W 10 II 12 13 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4' 5 6 8 9 10 II 7 J 12 15 II 12 13 14 13 16 17 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 10 II 12 15 14 15 16 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 25 24 25 26 27 28 22 2 5 24 25 26 27 28 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 21 22 25 24 25 26 27 21 22 23 24 25 2e 27 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 50 51 ""ii 25 26 27 28 29 30 28 28 29 50 51 S M S M S M APRIL I W MAY T 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 F S 3 4 5 10 1! 5 12 15 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 50 S M M W 6 7 8 6 F S 5 4 9 10 II 8 9 14 "''ii 25 26 27 28 29 50 28 29 30 S M T W '. 2 5 4 5 26 27 28 29 50 51 \> % O C T O B E R 6 APRIL W T F S 5 4 5 6 10 11 12 15 S M S S 7 8 12 15 14 15 S 1 2 3 8 9 10 S M T JUNE W T F S T 1 W T F 3 4 5 10 II 12 1 2 S II 12 15 14 15 16 17 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 14 18 14 20 21 22 25 24 16 17 18 14 20 21 22 20 21 22 25 24 25 2o 25 26 27 28 24 50 "\ "''ii 25 26 27 28 24 27 28 24 30 S M W 1 2 6 F 15 16 17 18 19 20 T 7 8 9 7 MAY T 22 25 24 25 26 27 M 6 W 5 S E P T E M B E R F T 4 1 10 II 7 7 21 17 18 |9 6 9 12 15 14 15 16 9 5 8 1 2 II 16 4 2 18 19 20 21 22 25 15 14 15 16 17 18 W 1 T 17 20 21 22 25 24 25 T S 10 19 M 7 F 5 12 S JUNE T AUGUST T 1 2 5 W 4 JULY T T 2 F S 5 4 5 10 II 12 4 5 T 6 W 7 4 5 6 7 8 6 AUGUST JULY T 3 7 8 4 S E P T E M B E R T F S S M T W T F S 1 2 3 I 2 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 11 12 15 14 5 S M T W T 1 2 6 7 8 9 F S 3 4 10 II li 14 15 16 17 18 19 II 12 15 14 15 16 17 15 16 17 18 14 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 20 21 22 25 24 25 26 18 14 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24 25 2c 27 28 19 20 21 22 25 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 50 25 2b 27 28 24 50 31 29 50 51 26 27 28 29 30 N O V E M B E R T F S S M T W T F S 1 2 5 1 2 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 ID 11 12 15 14 S 6 D E C E M B E R ' M 7 O C T O B E R T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 8 4 10 11 12 S 5 M 4 T 5 W N O V E M B E R F S 1 2 8 4 13 14 15 6 T 7 S 7 M T W T 1 2 ) 8 4 10 11 4 D E C E M B E R F 5 S 5 M f 6 12 15 W T 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 F S 3 4 10 II II 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 If 17 18 14 20 21 13 14 15 16 l-T 18 19 10 11 12 It 14 15 IP 17 18 14 20 12 15 14 15 Ic IH |4 20 21 22 23 24 22 2! 24 25 26 27 28 20 21 22 25 24 25 26 17 18 14 20 21 22 25 21 22 23 24 25 2c 27 14 20 21 22 25 24 25 25 26 27 28 24 50 51 2" 50 '\l 25 2e 27 28 24 50 28 24 50 26 27 28 24 50 31 27 28 24 50 51 COMPLETE YOUR BACHELOR D E G R E E IN O N E YEAR. B . S C . IN E N V I R O N M E N T A L SCIENCE B . C O M . IN ENTREPRENEURIAL M A N A G E M E N T C O M M U N I T Y C O L L E G E A N D UNIVERSITY TRANSFER STUDENTS: If you have completed an environmentrelated or business diploma and have a strong academic background, you may be eligible for a block transfer into the 3rd year of one of our Bachelor's degrees. Both programs start in September 1998. They are challenging and exciting programs focused on the development of strategic thinking, problem solving and decision making skills necessary to compete effectively in the national and international marketplace in the 21sl century. MID CAREER STUDENTS: With prior learning assessment, based upon your academic and work experience, you may qualify for direct entry into the 3rd year of either of these programs. Fax (250) 391-2522, E-mail: rruregistrar@royalroads.ca For program information, call toll free 1-800-788-8028. or visit o u r website: www.royalroads.ca You can also write to: Royal Roads University's unique quarter system allows students to complete their 3rd and 4th years in only 12 months. The Registrar, Royal Roads University, 2005 Sooke Road, Victoria, B.C. V 9 B 5 Y 2 RpYAL RpADS UNIVERSITY 20 17 18 1999 SPRING T E R M (991^ 1998-1999 JF m^WK%ral ^ W H R ^ffljW 88 » S S£S S S *8SJS» SSSSS^ ^BSHS KB 888 ^%&a» *wwS ^BSBwK 88 ^te»8( JANUARY 4 -8: University Transfer and Business Administration In-person Registration. (This date under review and subject to change.) JANUARY 11: Classes commence. Note: Career/ 1998 F A L L T E R M (983) Vocational JULY 13 - AUGUST 7: Registration for selected Career/Vocational programs. Consult your program coordinator for further AUGUST 3: B.C. Day. College closed. JANUARY 11 - 22: Add/Drop Period. AUGUST 17-26: University Transfer and Business Administration In-person Registration. (This date under review and subject to change.) JANUARY 22: Last day to add or drop a course, change sections, change from credit to audit or change from audit to credit. Students will be invoiced for full fees after this date. SEPTEMBER 7: Labour Day. College closed. SEPTEMBER 8: Classes commence. Note: Career/ Vocational courses commence on various days. Consult your program Coordinator for further information. SEPTEMBER 8 - 21: Add/Drop Period. SEPTEMBER 21: Last day to add or drop a course, change sections, change from audit to credit or from credit to audit. Students will be invoiced for full fees after this date . SEPTEMBER 22-OCTOBER 19: Withdrawal Period. During this period, withdrawals will be noted on the permanent student record as a "W". OCTOBER 9: Last day to submit application for program evaluation for 1998 Fall Graduation. OCTOBER 12: Thanksgiving Day. College closed. courses commence on various days. informa- tion. JANUARY 25 TO FEBRUARY 19: Withdrawal Period. During this period, withdrawals will be noted on the permanent student record as a "W". FEBRUARY 19: Last day to withdraw from a course and final date for payment of tuition fee balance for 1999 Spring Term. FEBRUARY 25 - 26: Reading Break. No classes. APRIL 2 - 5 : Easter Break. College closed. APRIL 16: Last day of classes. Note: Some courses/ programs continue on until the last day of the examina- tion period. Consult your program instructor for further information. APRIL 19 - 30: Examination Period, 1999 Spring Term. OCTOBER 19: Last day to withdraw from a course and final date for payment of tuition fee balance for 1998 Fall Term. DATE TBA: Registration for 1999 Summer Tenn. NOVEMBER I I : Remembrance Day. College closed. MAY 10: First day of Summer Term, Session I. NOVEMBER 19: Fall Convocation, Sportsplex, 7:30 p.m. MAY 24: Victoria Day. College closed. NOVEMBER 16 - DECEMBER 4: Early registration for 1999 Spring Term for Career/Vocational programs, "open" Career courses, and Art, Music, Asia Pacific Management, Engineering, Environmental Science, and Commerce (coordinator signature required.) DECEMBER 4: Last day of classes. Note: Some courses/programs MAY 27: Spring Convocation. JULY I: Canada Day. College closed. JULY 5: First day of Summer Term, Session II. JULY 12 - AUGUST 6: Registration for selected Career/Vocational programs for Fall 1999. AUGUST 2: B.C. Day. College closed. continue on until the last day of the examination period. Consult your program for further 1999 S U M M E R T E R M (992) instructor information. DECEMBER 7-18: Examination Period, 1998 Fall Term. DECEMBER 24 - 28: Christmas Break. College closed. DECEMBER 31 and JANUARY I: New Year's Break. College closed. General Information — Academic Schedule Admission and Readmission BECOMING A CAPILANO COLLEGE STUDENT 1. Read t h e C a l e n d a r f o r more i n f o r m a t i o n o n y o u r area of interest The tabic of contents and index w i l l be helpful in finding particular subjects in the Calendar. Contact A d v i s i n g at 984-4990 to sec i f there are information nights available for the program you are interested in information sheets arc available. The College's W e b site is a useful source of information as well: 2. www.capcoUege.bc.ca Submit an Application Y o u r application must include: • Application for A d m i s s i o n form • high school and post-secondary transcripts • a $20 application fee (plus an additional $25 evaluation fee if your post-secondary transcript is from outside British C o l u m b i a ) or a $100 application fee for international students (document evaluation fee is included) Submit your application in person or by m a i l to: Registrar's Office. Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B C V 7 J 3H5 There may be other documents or procedures required. Sec A d m i s s i o n Requirements. Notices o f acceptance are issued b y t h e A d m i s s i o n s Office 3. Register University Transfer Students: The Registration Office w i l l send you complete information on how and when to register, as well as a timetable of all the courses to be offered in the coming term. This information w i l l arrive a month prior to the beginning of term. Career/Vocational Students: If you have been accepted into a specific Career/Vocational program, consult the department for your timetable and registration procedures. 4. Pay y o u r t u i t i o n A non-refundable deposit is due on the day you register. The remainder of the tuition is due by the sixth week of each term; check your timetable for the specific date. Note regarding medical insurance: 1. Students arc not covered by W o r k e r s ' Compensation while attending C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Students are responsible for acquiring their o w n M e d i c a l Services Plan ( M S P ) and accident insurance coverage. 2. International students must have medical insurance while studying at the C o l l e g e . M e d i c a l insurance for the first 90 days in British C o l u m b i a is available at the cost of approximately $115 C d n . A f t e r the first 9 0 days, international students are eligible to subscribe to the government-operated M e d i c a l Services Plan ol" B . C . This plan costs approximately $40 C d n per month, single person rate. Contact the International Student Centre for information (604) 983-7544. General Information — 22 Admission APPLICATION DATES • A secondary school or post-secondary degree or diploma, the grades received and the level o f English required. Generally, applications for admission to the College may be submitted at any time. However, early applica- If the College then decides you need additional instruc- tion deadlines have been established for specific tion in English you w i l l be asked to take an English programs and terms. Acceptance of applications after examination suitable to the program area in which you the deadlines may not be possible. wish to enrol. Specific testing requirements for admission: Term Early Application Date A c c e p t a n c e Deadline Mailed Fall March 31 July 15 Spring September 30 December 15 Summer M a r c h 31 as processed University Transfer, Career or Vocational Programs TOEFL 560 ELA 145 IELTS 6.5 overall, and no one score less than 6 English as a Second Language ( E S L ) Program Applicants from other countries who require a student E S L Placement Test authorization (student visa), must submit their applications at least two months prior to the commencement o f TOEFL 400 OR the term in order to be considered for admission to that ELA 55-144 term. ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS ENGLISH LANGUAGE REQUIREMENT A l l students must have a level of English sufficient to ADULT BASIC EDUCATION PROGRAMS write assignments, understand class lectures, and take Applicants to the Adult Basic Education program part in class discussions. should be at least 18 years old and have been out of the If English is not your first language, or you have public school system for at least one year. Exceptions received your education in another language, you are will be made only with departmental approval. required to submit, along with your application, one o f W h i l e there is no educational prerequisite for entering the following: the A B E program, placement in courses is based upon T O E F L Score (Test o f English as a Foreign L a n - an assessment of writing and mathematical skills. guage, contact: Educational Testing Service, B o x 898, Princeton, N e w Jersey U S A 03540) OR: E L A (English Language Assessment Test, contact: Vancouver Community College, K i n g Edward Campus, 1155 East Broadway.) OR: E S L Placement Test (Contact: E S L Department, Capilano College, (604) 986-1911, ext. 2971 for testing appointment.) UNIVERSITY TRANSFER PROGRAMS • British C o l u m b i a Secondary School Graduation (Grade 12) or equivalent with English 12 and three academic Grade 12 courses selected from: Biology 12 Calculus 12 Chemistry 12 Comparative Civilization German 12 History 12 Information Technology 12 Japanese 12 Latin 12 N o t e : If you have written the IELTS this will also be Computer Science 12 L a w 12 Mandarin 12 Economics 12 acceptable. English Literature 1/ Mathematics 12 The College reserves the right to also give considera- French 12 Physics 12 tion to the following: Francais-Languc 12 Probability & Statistics 12 • H o w long you have lived in an English-speaking Geography 12 Spanish 12 country Geology 12 Survey Math 12 The number of years o f secondary school or post- Geometry 12 Western C i v i l i z a t i o n 12 • secondary education (e.g. college or university) and W r i t i n g 12 if English was the language o f instruction General Information — Admission OR • Adult Basic Education ( A B E ) Provincial D i p l o m a , or • General Education D i p l o m a ( G E D ) , or Saskatchewan Applicants must supply evidence o f completion o f academic level three (grade 12) leading to graduation, • Mature Student Status including at least five academic subjects selected as Additional admission requirements are noted in the follows: individual program descriptions in this publication. 1. English A 3 0 and B 3 0 ; and 2. at least three additional 30 numbered courses Concurrent Admission Secondary students with superior academic records may apply for limited admission which w i l l allow selected from among: Algebra, B i o l o g y , Calculus, Chemistry, Francais A or B , French or other languages or Physics enrolment in one or two university transfer courses A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on E n g l i s h A 3 0 , B 3 0 while still attending secondary school. and the best courses in group two. The application must be co-signed by the applicant's N o t e : English parent or legal guardian and must be accompanied by a over five courses is a double course bur only four so this average subject is areas. letter of recommendation from the school principal or designate, and an official copy of the secondary school Manitoba academic record. Inquiries should be directed to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Applicants must supply evidence o f completion o f an academic program which w i l l lead to graduation and includes at least four courses selected as follows: Mature Student and DiscretionaryAdmission Status 1. English 4 0 G or 40S (except Language and Technical Applicants who lack the m i n i m u m admission require- 2. at least three additional courses selected from ment may apply as mature students provided they have Communication); and B i o l o g y 40S, Chemistry 40S, Computer Science not attended secondary school for at least two years. 40S, History 40S, Language 40S, Mathematics 4 0 G Written requests for admission as a mature student w i l l or 40S, Physics 40S. N o t e : Mathematics be considered by the Admissions Office. Applicants not be used. 45A may should provide details o f other qualifications or A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on E n g l i s h 4 0 G or experiences and an academic transcript of education 40S and the three best courses in group two. completed. A n interview may be required. Ontario Other Canadian Provinces The admission average is calculated on the required senior English course or courses (i.e. group requirement #1) and on the three best academic courses offered in the other course groups as shown below. Alberta and Northwest Territories Applicants must supply evidence o f academic grade 12 completion leading to graduation and include at least Applicants must supply evidence of completion o f the O S S D (or O S S H G D ) including four O A C s and including the following: 1. one O A C E n g l i s h (Language and Literature recommended) or O A C Francais; and 2. at least three additional O A C courses selected from English, Francais, other languages, A l g e b r a and Geometry, Calculus, Finite Mathematics, B i o l o g y , Chemistry, C o m p u t i n g Science, Physics, Geography, History, E c o n o m i c s or L a w . four courses, selected as follows: 1. English 30; and 2. at least three additional courses selected from A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on O A C E n g l i s h or Francais and the three best courses in group two. among: B i o l o g y 30, Chemistry 30, Language 30, Language 3 1 , M a t h 30, Math 31, Physics 30, Social Studies 30, Science 30, W o r l d Geography 30 Admission average w i l l be based on English 30 and the three best courses in group two. Quebec C E G E P : Applicants from a C E G E P must present either a completed D E C or at least one year o f an approved academic program. Grade 12: Applicants from Quebec Grade 12 must present the following: General Information — Admission 24 1. English 12 or Francais 12; and 2. at least three additional university preparatory grade 12 courses selected from Mathematics, Sciences, Languages, Literature, Social Sciences, History, Geography A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on one course from group one and the three best courses in group two. Newfoundland Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an academic program which w i l l lead to graduation and includes at least 13 credits as follows: 1. Language 3101 and cither English 3201 or 3202; and 2. any three o f B i o l o g y 3201, Chemistry 3202, G e o l ogy 3203, Physics 3204, Mathematics 3201 or 3203, New Brunswick Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an academic (i.e. college preparatory) program which w i l l lead to graduation and includes at least four courses as follows: Geography, History or languages at the 3000 level. A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English and the three best courses in group two. Other Countries 1. English 12, 121 or 122 (or Francais 121 or 122); and 2. at least three additional grade 12 academic (college preparatory) courses selected from among B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Computer Science, English, Francais, French, Geography, History, Mathematics, Physics. International students arc eligible for admission if they have completed the equivalent of secondary school graduation (Grade 12) in British C o l u m b i a . Examples of Equivalence: A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 120, 121 China or 122 and the three best courses in group two. Senior M i d d l e School D i p l o m a F ranee P r i n c e E d w a r d Island Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an Baccalaureate (2icme partie) (Scries A - E ) G e r m a n y and Austria Reifczcugnis or Arbitur academic or advanced academic program which w i l l Hong Kong lead to graduation and includes at least four academic Passes in five G C E / H K C E E subjects, two o f and/or advanced academic subjects selected as follows: which must be at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . 1. English 621 or English 611; and Indonesia 2. at least three additional courses numbered 621 and/ Sckolah Mcnengah Atas ( S M A ) Leaving Certificate or 611 selected from among B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Japan Francais, French, Geography, History, other lan- Grade 12 D i p l o m a from K o t o G a k k o guages, Physics, or Mathematics (621 or 611). Korea A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 621 or H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a 611 and the three best courses in group two. Malaysia S P M / S T P M or C O S C / C O H S C N o v a Scotia Singapore Singapore-Cambridge General Certificate o f Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an academic (i.e. university preparatory) program which w i l l lead to graduation, including at least four subjects selected as follows: 1. English 441 or English 541; and 2. at least three additional courses numbered 441 and/ Education ( G C E ) with two Advanced level subjects Taiwan H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a United K i n g d o m and Commonwealth Passes in five G C E subjects, two o f which must be at the Advanced Level or 541 selected from among the following subjects: Biology, Chemistry, Computer Science, Francais, French, History. Math, other languages. Physics o r Math 442, Economics, Geography or L a w . CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS British C o l u m b i a secondary school graduation (grade Admission average w i l l be based on English 441 or 12) or equivalent. 541 and the three best courses in group two. Additional admission requirements are noted in the individual program descriptions in this publication. General Information — Admission TRANSFER CREDIT All public B.C. colleges accept each other's credit upon transfer if applicable to a program at the admitting college and if there is suitable equivalency. Transfer credit may be granted for courses completed at other post-secondary institutions. Students seeking transfer credit must complete the "Request for Transfer Credit" form, attach official transcripts, if not already submitted, or note that transcripts will be sent from another institution, and submit to the Office Manager, Registrar's Office. For courses completed at out-of-province institutions, detailed course outlines must also be submitted. All approved transfer credit is noted on the permanent student record. While the credit awarded does not affect the grade point average, the credit will be included in the total number of credits completed and may be used to complete certificate or diploma requirements if applicable. Limit of Transfer Credits For diplomas and certificates, the final 50 percent of the credit required must be completed while in attendance at Capilano College. For students who are no longer residents of the College region and lack one or two courses for certificate or diploma completion, credit may be granted for an additional one or two courses from another institution. This arrangement must be made in consultation with the Registrar's Office in advance of enrolment at another institution. For the Associate degrees, at least 30 of the 60 term credits must be completed at Capilano College within five years preceding the awarding of the degree. A D V A N C E D PLACEMENT Applicants who have passed an Advanced Placement Examination administered by the College Entrance Examination Board, with a mark of 4 or better will receive credit as follows: credit for COMP 110 or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 111. Economics - those completing AP Economics will receive credit for Economics unassigned (6). English - those completing English Language will receive credit for ENGL 100 (3). Those completing English Literature will receive credit for ENGL 103 (3). In addition, the EDT requirement will be waived. Mathematics - those completing Calculus AB will receive credit for MATH 110 (4.5). Those completing Calculus BC will receive credit for MATH 110 (4.5) and MATH 111 (4.5) (under review). Physics - those completing Physics B will receive credit for PHYS 110 (3) and PHYS 111 (3). Those completing Physics C (Mechanics) will receive credit for PHYS 114 (3). Those completing Physics C (Electricity) will receive credit for PHYS 115 (3). N o t e : Transfer credit granted for International Bacca- laureate and Advanced Placement courses will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not accept these courses for transfer credit. INTERNATIONAL BACCALAUREATE COURSES Applicants who have completed the International Baccalaureate Diploma will receive credit or waivers for some higher level subjects passed as follows: Anthropology -students presenting a mark of 4 will receive credit for ANTH 121 (3). Biology - students presenting mark of 6 will receive credit for BIOL 110 (3) and BIOL 111 (3). Chemistry - students presenting mark of 4 or better will receive credit for Chem 110 (3) and Chem 1 1 1 (3). Computing Science - students presenting mark of 4 or better in Computing Science A will receive credit for COMP 102 (3) or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 110. Students presenting a mark of 4 or better on Computing Science AB will receive credit for COMP 110 (4) or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 111. • Biology - those completing AP Biology will receive credit for BIOL 110 (3) and BIOL 111 (3). Chemistry - those completing AP Chemistry will receive credit for CHEM 110 (3) and CHEM 111 (3). Computer Science - those completing AP Computer Science A will receive credit for COMP 102 (3) or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 110. Those completing Computer Science AB will receive Genera! Information —Admission 26 Economics - students presenting mark of 4 or better in Economics will receive credit for Economics unassigned (6). English - students presenting mark of 6 or better for English Language A will receive credit for ENGL 103 (3). Students presenting a mark of 6 or better for English Language B will receive credit for ENGL 100 (3). In addition, the EDT requirement is waived for those with a mark of 6 or better on English Language A or B. Mathematics - students presenting mark of 6 or better for Higher Level Mathematics will receive credit for Registration IMP M A T H 110 (4.5). Students presenting a mark of 6 or better for Further Mathematics will receive credit for M A T H 110 (4.5) and M A T H 111 (4.5) (under RIGHT TO REGISTER review). Physics - students presenting a mark of 6 or better will receive credit for P H Y S 110 (3) and P H Y S 111 (3). A student who has not maintained satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied permission to register in that program in a subsequent term. Indi- PRIOR LEARNING ASSESSMENT vidual programs may require a G P A higher than that stated in the Probation P o l i c y to continue enrolment. A n innovative process is available at Capilano College whereby students may receive college credits for learning acquired in formal and informal situations. T h i s process, called Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) , INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR w i l l be o f immense benefit to mature students who have work and life experiences that equate to courses The instructional year is comprised of three terms: offered at the College. Fall: September through December For example, if you have on-the-job work experience in computers you may be able to receive credits offered in one or more office or business administration courses. Spring: January through A p r i l Y o u w i l l need to prove that you have acquired the knowledge, skills and values required in the formal course you are requesting credit for. This is done by providing evidence of what you have learned. T h i s might include any one or combination of the following: a work site visit, documentation, interview and oral presentation, portfolio. At present only the following program areas offer P L A credits: A p p l i e d Business Technology, Business Administration, Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education, Legal Assistant. Music Therapy (prerequisite courses only). Tourism Management. M o r e courses w i l l be assessed as the number of individual inquiries increases. For more information, contact the C o l l e g e ' s P L A Office at 984-1788. Summer: Session #1: M a y through June. (Some courses may be scheduled for M a y through August.) Session #2: July through August. Note: A limited number of courses are offered during the Summer terms. MATH PLACEMENT TEST (MPT)* Students wanting to enrol in a Precalculus course ( M A T H 105 or 107), a C a l c u l u s I course ( M A T H 108 or 1 10 or 116), or a discrete mathematics course ( M A T H 124), must write a mathematics placement test if cither (or both) of the following two conuitions apply: (a) Their mathematics prerequisite course was completed prior to 1997 for admission into Fall 1998 courses: prior to 1998 for admission into Spring 1999 and Summer 1999 courses. (b) Their mathematics prerequisite course was c o m pleted at a B . C . secondary school (or equivalent) with a final letter grade standing below: " C " in Math 12 for admission to M A T H 105 or M A T H 107: " B " in Math 12 for admission to M A T H 108; " A " in Math 12, or at least a " B " in both Math 12 and Calculus 12, for admission to M A T H 110 or 116 or 124. General Information — Registration T o write the Precalculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade in M a t h 11 or at least a " C - " grade in Math 12. ADD, DROP, WITHDRAWAL PROCEDURES T o write the Calculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade in M a t h 12. W i t h i n a given year students arc not allowed to rewrite the Calculus or Precalculus M P T . See also: procedure for condensed courses!terms and procedure for summer term in this section BEFORE CLASSES C O M M E N C E A study guide is available for the M P T which provides topic coverage and suggested review material as well Course Change Procedure as a list o f the scheduled test dates. 1. Students may drop or add courses or change Please contact the Registrar's Office or the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n for more information. sections following their registration appointment and until the first day of classes. A course change form must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. 2. Faculty signatures are not required before classes ENGLISH DIAGNOSTIC TEST* The E D T (or the L P I ) is required before registration in any English course at the College, unless the student has achieved one of the following which allows exemption: commence. 3. Drops w i l l not be printed on the official transcript, but w i l l be maintained in the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. Complete Withdrawal Procedure For complete withdrawal before classes commence, a course change form listing all the courses to be dropped must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. A " A " in English 12, or copy of the course change form listing the complete " A " in Literature 12, or withdrawal w i l l be forwarded to the career or voca- - A " in B E N G 42, or 4 or higher in A . P . English Composition, or tional department by the Registrar's Office. 4 or higher in A . P . English Literature, or 6 or higher in I.B. English A or B " B - " or better in an English transfer course from another college or university A D D / D R O P PERIOD A d d / D r o p P e r i o d : 1st t h r o u g h the 10th day o f each term. a degree from an English-speaking university, or a pass on U B C ' s E C T (English Competency Test) N o t e : Successful completion of ESL 099 does not qualify a student to directly enter a regular English 010 or English 100. Students who wish to enrol in any university transfer Add/Drop Procedure 1. Students wishing to add or drop a course(s), change from credit to audit, or change from audit to credit, must complete a Course Change form, and take the form to the instructor for approval and signature. 2. W i t h the instructor's signature appearing on the English course who do not qualify for an exemption Course Change form, students must then submit the must submit the results o f the Language Proficiency form to the Registrar's Office. Forms w i l l be Index Test ( L P I ) , or must sit the Capilano College accepted until 6:30 p.m. on the 10th instructional English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) prior to registration. day of the term. E D T schedules w i l l be printed in the timetable. 3. Instructors may indicate a 48 hour deadline for submission of the Course Change form, in order to * Note: You may register for both the EDT and MPT. through the Registrar's Office. North Vancouver campus. A writing fee is charged for both exams. allow other students to gain entry to the class during this period. 4. Course drops w i l l not be noted on the student transcript during this period: however, a record for drops w i l l be maintained on the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. 5. If a course change is requested by the instructor or student to a lower or less difficult level o f instruction in a subject, the course change form must bear the signatures of the instructor of each course. General Information 28 Registration COURSE CHANGE PROCEDURES (ADD, DROP/WITHDRAWAL) ALLOWED TO DROP/ CHANGE REQUIRES BETWEEN FACULTY APPEARS O N TRANSACTION PERIOD ADD WITHDRAW CREDIT AND AUDIT SIGNATURE TRANSCRIPT FEE** REFUND** before classes start yes yes not applicable no no no partial 1st to 10th day of term yes yes yes yes no yes partial 11 th to 30th day of term no yes no yes yes yes no 31st until end of term no no* no no yes not applicable no * check "WE". Grading System section. ** please refer to Fees section. 6. If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request w i l l be granted with the signature o f the instructor o f each course. - The Course Change form listing the request for complete withdrawal must be submitted to the Registrar's Office no later than the end o f the 30th instructional day (end o f the sixth week) of term. N o t e : Failure to attend classes does not constitute a course drop. Students who do not formally drop a course(s) will be assessed tuition fees, refunds will not - A withdrawal ("W") w i l l be noted on the official transcript and the permanent student record. be made, and a grade of Fail (F) will be noted on the permanent student record. Requests for late adds or late drops will not be granted simply because the student was unaware of, or neglected to comply with, the College policies and procedures. WITHDRAWAL PERIOD W i t h d r a w a l p e r i o d : 11th t h r o u g h the 30th day o f each t e r m ( t h i r d week t h r o u g h the end o f the sixth week). Withdrawal Procedure: 1. During this period, with the signature of the appropriate instructors) on the Course Change form, students may withdraw from a course(s). 2. The Course Change form must be submitted to the Registrar's Office no later than 6:30 p.m. o f the 30th instructional day (sixth week) of each term. AFTER THE WITHDRAWAL PERIOD After the 30th day (or after the end o f the sixth week) o f the term, and until the end o f the term, course withdrawals or complete withdrawals are not permitted except for the reasons listed below: 1. the student record is incorrect as the result of an error by the College; 2. the student transfers to a lower level of the same course by instructor request. In this instance, only the final course of enrolment w i l l show on the official transcript. A record of the change w i l l also be maintained on the permanent student record; 3. the student must withdraw for circumstances beyond his/her control. Official documentation is required to substantiate all claims o f such circumstances and should be submitted on the Request for Course W i t h drawal form available from the Registrar's Office. T h i s 3. A withdrawal ("W") w i l l be noted on the permanent form must be supplemented with official documentation student record. such as a typed letter from the physician, an official 4. Complete Withdrawal: If a complete withdrawal is copy o f an accident report, or official documentation o f requested, the request w i l l be granted if the Course a family emergency, death certificate, and so forth. Change form bears the signature o f each faculty member instructing each course of withdrawal. N o t e : A completed Course Change form is required for (I), (2) or (3) listed above. General Information — Registration 29 Procedure PROCEDURE FOR SUMMER TERM 1. Students who wish to apply for special status under 1. Same process as above, with the following restric- (3) above must submit the Request for Course W i t h - tions: drawal form with a letter explaining the circumstances a) F o r Summer courses seven or eight weeks in length: leading to withdrawal, and the Course Change form, to the Registrar with official documentation. If, in the opinion o f the Registrar, the request does not fall under (3) above, or the documentation is insufficient to support the request, the request w i l l be denied. If the request is granted, the Registrar w i l l inform the student's instructors o f the W E status. 2. The permanent student record w i l l be annotated as b) The A d d / D r o p Refund Period is five instructional days. c) The Withdrawal Period ends on the 10th instructional day. 2. F o r Summer courses 12 to 15 weeks in length: a) The regular Add/Drop/Refund/Withdrawal policies apply. withdrawal for extenuating circumstances ( " W E " ) . 3. Withdrawal with extenuating circumstances w i l l not REFUNDS — A d d / D r o p / W i t h d r a w a l be granted for lack o f academic performance on the Periods part o f the student. 1. If a course is dropped and another course is added at the same time and on the same course change form, the AFTER THE ELEVENTH WEEK OF CLASSES INCOMPLETE GRADE "I" deposit w i l l be applied to the course added, provided 1. If the student believes an exceptional circumstance 2. If the number o f credits falls below the original the number of credits remains the same. exists which prevents him/her from completing the number of credits o f enrolment, the difference o f the course during the regular time frame, the student may deposit fee for the course dropped w i l l be retained and petition the course instructor for an incomplete ("I") the m i n i m u m deposit w i l l not be refunded . grade. 3. If a course add increases the number of credits, the 2. A n incomplete ("I") grade may be given where, in student w i l l be responsible for the non-refundable the judgment o f the instructor, the student should have m i n i m u m payment o f the deposit at the time o f the reasonable expectation of passing the course, but has addition. not completed the required work. 4. However, if the deposit is paid before June 30 for 3. A n incomplete is assigned only when the instructor Fall term and/or November 30 for Spring term, stu- and student have arranged for the work to be c o m - dents may have the deposit refunded by withdrawing pleted by a specified date which is noted on the grade from the College on or before June 30 or November 30. sheet class list. If the student does not complete the Those who pay this deposit after June 30 or N o v e m b e r work by the specified date, the instructor w i l l automati- 30 are not eligible for any refund of deposit. cally assign a predetermined grade reflecting the work not completed. 4. If the student completes the work by the specified COURSE O V E R L O A D time, the instructor w i l l assign the final grade. 5. If this incomplete procedure cannot be applied in the opinion of the instructor, the instructor is directed to contact the Registrar directly for resolution of the issue. 1. Registration in more than five academic courses or more than the full requirements specified for a career program constitutes a course overload. 2. Students may choose to register for a course overload (up to a total o f 21 credits) as long as they PROCEDURE FOR CONDENSED COURSES/TERMS have discussed their need or wish for an overload with a counsellor or advisor and the Course Change form bears the counsellor's or advisor's signature. Science Deadline w i l l be prorated to the duration o f the inten- students, however, are automatically allowed to sive courses. register for more than 16 credits, as long as the total credits do not exceed 21 credits and does not arise from registration in more than five courses. 3. Students may not register for a course overload until after the in-person registration period. General Information — Registration 30 COURSE CHALLENGE Registered students may request a course challenge Fees listed in this calendar are those in effect at the whereby an examination for achievement may be time o f publication and arc subject to change subse- awarded for a very specific and limited selection o f quent to the printing of this publication. courses at the institution. Certain courses may not be challenged. Tuition fees arc generally $42.50 per credit hour. A typical full-time student who enrols in 15 credits w i l l pay fees o f $711.25 per tenn or $ 1.422.50 for a twoterm academic year. Students interested in this procedure should contact a counsellor for further information. The regular tuition fee must be paid for a challenged The table below includes some examples of tuition fees course. A course challenged successfully w i l l be plus incidental fees for the Students' U n i o n , Student recorded on the permanent student record. Newspaper and Application/Enrolment fees. Some N o t e : Credit for courses challenged successfully will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not grant credit or transfer credit for credit received by course challenge. program or course tuition fees w i l l vary from those stated above. INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS International student tuition fees are $235 per credit hour. T y p i c a l l y , a full-time international student w o u l d pay approximately $7,200 in tuition and incidental fees annually for a two-term, 32-wcck program. FEE EXAMPLES Canadian & Landed Immigrant Students International Students Application: admission/rc-admission $20.(K) Document Evaluation (Tuition and Related Fees) English Diagnostic Test $25.00 Math Placement Test $10.00 $10.00 Registration $20.00 $20.00 $45.00 $3.00 ( m i n i m u m $25.00) $45.00 $3.00 ( m i n i m u m $25.00) $25.00 Late Registration Penalty (past 10th day o f term) Late Payment Penalty ($/crcdit) Tuition ($/credit) $100.00 no fee (included above) $25.00 $42.50 $235.00 $20.00 $20.00 Course Change Transaction (per form) Grade Appeal $10.00 $42.50 $10.00 Student Card Replacement $5.00 $10.00 Graduation O t h e r Fees: T 2 2 0 2 A Education Deduction Form Replacement Transcript Fee (each transcript) $5.00 $42.50 $5.00 $10.00 0.75 (max $10.00) $5.00 $3.67 (max $36.70) 0.75 (max $10.00) Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) ($/crcdit) $42.50 $235.00 Diploma/Certificate Replacement $20.00 $20.00 Student Union Fees ($/credit) $3.67 (max $36.70) Student Paper (Capilano Courier) Refunds A l l fees are non-refundable unless specified as "partial refund" in the Course Change Procedures section. Partial refund - course fee minus deposit Deposits retained for the purpose of refunds = $16.00/credit for Canadian and Landed Immigrant students and $90/credit for international students. General Information Registration/Fees 31 by all students in their final term of enrolment and TUITION AND RELATED FEES must be submitted with their application for program evaluation at registration or within the first 30 days of term. • APPLICATION FEE A N D TERM laboratory or materials fees in specific courses or ENROLMENT FEE A $20 ($100 for International Students) non-refundable application fee is payable by all applicants, and a $20 non-refundable term enrolment fee is payable by students registering in subsequent terms. D O C U M E N T EVALUATION FEE This non-refundable fee is assessed for applicants whose academic records originate outside B.C. and are required for admission, transfer credit or advance standing. The fee is waived if the documents originate from a secondary school located in Canada. TUITION FEES The standard tuition fee for most programs is $42.50 per credit hour with no maximum. The following programs or courses have varying tuition fees: • Early Childhood Education, Fisheries Science, Landscape Horticulture, Legal Secretarial, Medical Office Assistant, Personal Care Attendant, Resident Care Attendant, all Office Technology programs, and Adult Basic Education programs: $42.50 per credit hour to a maximum of $637.50 per term. • Bachelor of Music Transfer, Bachelor of Music Therapy a n d J a z z Studies: $42.50 per credit hour with a possible fee maximum of $1,225 per term. • Business Administration 300 and 400 level Evening courses: $75 per credit hour. • Private Music Instruction: $43 per instructional hour • Senior Citizens: Persons 60 years and older, providing proper identification may enrol in most courses on a tuition-free basis. There arc exceptions, and these include all Art Institute courses, Private Music Instruction and courses where the standard tuition fee exceeds $42.50 per credit hour. • Students' Union Fees: A compulsory fee of $2.75 per credit hour, to a maximum of $41.25 per term, is payable by all North Vancouver campus students. This fee is optional for students at other campuses. • Capilano Courier Newspaper Fee: A compulsory fee of $.75 per credit hour to a maximum of $10 per term is payable by all students. • Graduation Fee: A graduation fee of $20 is payable General Information — Fees 32 Laboratory Fee: The College may assess additional programs. Students will be notified of these fees. • Late Payment Fee: A fee of $25 or $3 per credit, whichever is greater, is charged to all students paying tuition fees later than the fee deadline dates established by the College. REFUNDS Students who officially withdraw within the first 10 days of the term will receive a refund of $26.50 per credit. Students withdrawing after the 10th day are not eligible for a refund of tuition or tuition-related fees and are responsible for all fees incurred. CjradiJcition with a m i n i m u m program cumulative grade point average o f 3.75, with no grade lower than a C + in the program requirements, w i l l be awarded Graduated with Convocation ceremonies arc held in the Spring and Fall Distinction. terms. Diplomas and certificates are issued only at these two ceremonies. Students completing all coursework before the ceremonies w i l l have their permanent student records and transcripts annotated as Program Requisites complete. The date that the d i p l o m a or certificate is awarded w i l l then be placed on the permanent student record and transcript at the date of the appropriate graduation. Diplomas Capilano College offers a variety of diplomas upon completion o f two years o f study at the university transfer level. N o t e : A previously-awarded ploma may be exchanged Academic Studies for an Associate Di- Degree in Students who believe they w i l l complete their program Arts or Science of study by the end o f their current semester o f enrol- degree meets all the requirements for the ment must submit a Request for Program Evaluation degree. This includes the five-year requirement which form to the Registrar's Office, together with the $20 is applied to the date of exchanging a diploma for an program evaluation fee at Registration (See Fee Associate as appropriate, provided that the Associate Degree. Schedule), or no later than the following deadline: Fall Graduation in November: September 15 Associate of Arts Degree Spring Graduation in M a y : February 15 Students arc strongly encouraged to submit this T o be eligible for the Associate o f Arts, a student must have: application and fee at in-person registration. 1. completed 60 credits o f courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level Minimum Duration and Number of Credits Required for Certificates and Diplomas or higher at the University o f British C o l u m b i a , S i m o n Fraser University, or the University o f Victoria; 2. completed at least 30 o f these 60 credits within five years preceding the awarding o f the Associate Degree; D i p l o m a : requires at least two academic years or four terms and completion o f 60 credits, O R at least one academic year, or two terms, and 60 credits, with 30 credits and the final 50% taken at Capilano College and following completion o f a prior 3. completed at least 30 o f these 60 credits at C a p i l a n o College within five years preceding the awarding o f the degree, o f which at least 12 credits arc in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; credential and/or the granting of one or more of: • Transfer Credit • Prior Learning Assessment (under review) • Challenge Credit • Equivalence to another Capilano College program C e r t i f i c a t e : requires at least one academic tenn anil completion o f 15 credits. C i t a t i o n : requires six to 14 credits. 4. completed at least six credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 1 (K)-lcvel in English; 5. completed at least 18 credits in Arts courses (other than English) that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; at least six o f these credits must be in the Humanities, and at least six of these credits must be in the Social Sciences, and no more that six credits shall be in any one subject area; 6. completed at least 18 credits in Arts courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit Statement o f C o m p l e t i o n : offered tor particular courses in Labour Studies, and other contract courses at the 200-level or higher, these credits must be in at least two different subject areas; to fulfil Ministry and business requests, and where documentation other than a transcript is required. 7. completed at least nine credits in Science courses, W i t h D i s t i n c t i o n D e s i g n a t i o n : A student completing Computing Science or Statistics (i.e. any statistics university transfer, career, vocational, adult basic- course that transfers to a university as a 100-level or education, or English as a second language program higher Science course) and at least three credits in a including at least three credits in Mathematics or Laboratory Science course (i.e. any course in the General Information — Graduation 33 Sciences list worth three credits or more and with a lab 2. completed at least 30 of these 60 credits within five of at least two hours, but excluding any course in years preceding the awarding o f the Associate Degree; A p p l i e d Science or Computing Science); 3. completed at least 30 o f these 60 credits at Capilano 8. completed at least nine credits in courses that have College within five years preceding the awarding of the assigned or unassigned transfer credit at the 100-level degree, o f w h i c h at least 12 credits are in courses or higher; credits may be for university transfer courses which have assigned or unassigned university transfer in subjects listed on the following page or for univer- credit at the 200-level or higher, sity transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, 4. completed at least six credits in courses that have Physical Education, Business Administration, C o m m u - assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the nications, M e d i a Resources); 100-level in English; 9. achieved a grade of at least C - in each course 5. completed a least six credits from the following counting towards the 60-credit requirement, and a Capilano Calculus courses: Mathematics 108, 109, 110, cumulative grade point average o f at least 2.0 over all 111, 116, 117, 126, 127, 230, or 231: of the courses counting towards the requirement. N o t e : History courses will be considered as Humani- ties courses for the purpose of the Associate Degree. 6. completed at least 18 credits in Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; no more than six credits shall be in one subject area; G e n e r a l C o u r s e R e q u i r e m e n t s for Associate o f A r t s 7. completed at least 18 credits i n Science courses that Courses/Programs Credits Conditions have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit English 6 100 L e v e l at the 200-level or higher; these credits must be in at least two subject areas; 100 L e v e l - excludes English - only six credits max. in one subject area Arts Courses Humanities Social Sciences Arts and Science (e.g. Mathematics); assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 6 100-level or higher; these credits may be for university 18 Arts Courses 100-level or higher, excluding E n g l i s h and excluding any course that has university transfer credit in both 9. completed at least six credits in courses that have Social Sciences or Humanities 8. completed at least six credits in Arts courses at the 18 200 L e v e l o r H i g h e r - credits must be in at least two subject areas 18 transfer courses in subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, Physical Education. Business Administration, Communications, M e d i a Resources); 100 L e v e l o r H i g h e r 10. achieved a grade o f at least C - in each course - *requires m i n . two-hr. counting towards the 60-credit requirements, and a C o m p . Science or lab and excludes any cumulative grade point average o f a least 2.0 over all Statistics 3 Laboratory Science* 3 Science Course 3 course in A p p l i e d or Computing Science the courses counting towards the requirement. Science C o u r s e s Mathematics or Associate i n Science 9 Electives** 9 Courses/Programs Credits Conditions English 6 100 L e v e l Mathematics 6 - from Mathematics 100 L e v e l o r H i g h e r 9 Total G e n e r a l C o u r s e R e q u i r e m e n t s for a n 60 108, 109, 115. 116. 230 or 231 Associate of Science Degree Science 18 100 L e v e l - only six credit T o be eligible for the Associate of Science, a student max. in one subject must have: area 1. completed 60 credits of courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level or higher at the University o f British C o l u m b i a , S i m o n Fraser University, or the University o f Victoria; General Information 34 Graduation Science Arts Elective Electives** 18 200 L e v e l or Higher Geology - must be in at least Human Kinetics and Kinesiology two subject areas Mathematics & Statistics I(X) L e v e l or Higher Physics 6 - excluding English N o t e : Some courses and courses that not carry have transfer credit in the subjects above may satisfy major require- ments at a particular university. Please consult the in both Arts and B.C. university calendars, Science Advising Transfer credit listed and/or _6 transfer Guide, or the Centre. 100 L e v e l or Higher 60 Diploma in Academic Studies T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a in A c a d e m i c Studies, a * * M a y be Arts or Science courses or other subjects, student must have: e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Physical Education with university transfer credits. 1. completed 60 credits, 50% o f which must be completed at Capilano C o l l e g e ; C l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f Subjects for Associate Degrees 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or better; Only those Capilano College courses with university transfer credit at the U n i v e r s i t y of B r i t i s h C o l u m - 3. Successfully completed at least 45 credits from the b i a , S i m o n F r a s e r U n i v e r s i t y , o r the U n i v e r s i t y of following subject areas (List A and B ) , including at V i c t o r i a , w i l l count towards the Associate Degree. least six credits from English (100-level or higher), at For the purpose o f the above requirements, Capilano College courses are categorized as follows: least six credits from subjects in List A ; and at least 15 credits selected from 200-level courses; 4. A l l courses must be university transferable courses. ARTS A Humanities: B Art History Music A p p l i e d Science Biology Chinese Philosophy Chemistry Chinese Philosophy English Spanish Computing Commerce Political French Studio A r t Science Criminology Studies German Theatre Geography Psychology History Thai Economics English Japanese W o m e n ' s Studies (100, 104, Geology French Spanish 106, 130) Human Kinetics Geography Studio A r t Kinesiology Mathematics Physics (Human) German History Thai Theatre Women's Social Sciences: Anthropology Criminology (Physical) Anthropology Japanese A r t History Music Sociology Studies Economics Geography (Human) (100, 101, 102, 106, 108, 200, 201,205) Diploma in General Studies Political Studies Psychology Sociology W o m e n ' s Studies (100, 110, 122, 140, 220) T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a in General Studies, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits at the 100 level or higher, 50% of which must be completed at Capilano College; SCIENCES A p p l i e d Science Biology 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. Chemistry Computing Science Geography (Physical) (112, 114, 214, 221) General Information — Graduation Diplomas in Career/Vocational Programs T o be eligible for a Career/Vocational Program diploma, a student must have: Academic Polici and Procedures 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % o f which must be completed at Capilano College; ATTENDANCE 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. Students are expected to attend all classes, seminars, labs in which they are officially registered, as evalua- Certificates in Career/Vocational tion o f progress in any course is cumulative and based on class assignments, participation and examinations. Programs T o be eligible for a career or vocational certificate, a student must have: ENROLMENT STATUS 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % o f which must be completed at Capilano College. F u l l - t i m e status: A student registered in a m i n i m u m of 12 credits is classified as a full-time student. 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. Generally, for provincial and federal financial aid purposes, a student registered in a m i n i m u m o f nine Diplomas/Certificates in Adult Basic Education/ESL credits is classified as a full-time student. A u d i t : A n audit enrolment indicates the student has registered in and w i l l attend a course without writing T o be eligible for a d i p l o m a or certificate, a student examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, must have: etc. F u l l fees are required for audit enrolment. Attend- 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % o f which must be completed at Capilano College. ance at lectures, labs and seminars is required. H o w ever, for those students who do not meet the attendance requirement, their permanent student record and 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or transcript w i l l be annotated with the comment A U D I T higher. D E N I E D . Audit status in a particular course is not calculated in the G P A , does not have credit attached, may not be used toward completion o f a d i p l o m a , certificate, associate degree, or degree. Students are permitted to register for audit status in a particular course only after the last day o f in-person registration, on a space available basis, with the instructor's signature. Students may change their registration in a course from credit to audit or audit to credit on or before the last day o f the two week A d d / D r o p Period with the instructor's approval and signature. S e c o n d Y e a r S t a n d i n g : Second year standing is based on the number of credits completed within a program; U n i v e r s i t y T r a n s f e r : successful completion o f 24 credits in that program: C a r e e r p r o g r a m s : successful completion o f 5 0 percent o f the total credits required for a two-year d i p l o m a in a specified program, or 30 credits. General Information — Graduation/Academic Policies and Procedures 36 EXAMINATION PERIOD The last two weeks of each instructional term is designated as an examination period. If a final examination is to be given, it w i l l take place during the PROTECTION OF PRIVACY AND ACCESS TO INFORMATION examination period and w i l l be up to three hours in Capilano College gathers and maintains information duration. F o r some Career/Vocational programs, classes w i l l continue as regularly scheduled throughout the examination period. In addition, a special examination schedule may be set. Detailed information is available from instructors or program coordinators. used for the purposes o f admission, registration, alumni and other fundamental activities related to being a member o f the Capilano C o l l e g e community and attending a public post-secondary institution in British C o l u m b i a . In signing an application for admission, graduation, or registration form, all applicants arc The examination schedule w i l l be posted each term by advised that both the information they provide and any the end of the eighth week o f instruction. other information placed into the student record w i l l be protected and used in compliance with the B . C . Freedom of Information and Privacy Protection A c t (1992). STUDENT RECORDS 1. A l l official permanent student records arc kept in the Registrar's Office, and are considered confidential. The information on file for a student is always available to that individual. Information w i l l not be given to any agency or person other than the student, unless the EQUIVALENCE, EXEMPTION SUBSTITUTION, TRANSFER CREDIT student has given their permission in writing, or for institutional research projects approved by the College. Release of Information forms are available in the Records and Registration Office and from your local college campus. 2. Grade statements: • Grade statements are mailed from the Registrar's Office at the end of each session: 3. Transcripts: • Official transcripts are issued by the Registrar's Office, only at the request of the student, and are mailed directly to the institution or agency or to the student in a sealed envelope. • A l l requests for equivalence, exemption, substitution or transfer credit must be submitted to the Office M a n ager, Registrar's Office, on the Transfer Credit Request form. A decision w i l l be made with the recommendation of an appropriate program coordinator, i f applicable. The credit or action w i l l be noted and approved by the Registrar's Office. Students w i l l be notified in writing o f the final decision. Unofficial transcripts are issued by the Registrar's Office at the request of the student. 4. The records of First Nations students (including registration, transcripts and grades) held by the Registrar's Office may be released to the sponsoring band or the Capilano College First Nations A d v i s o r only i f a release has been signed by the student. A copy o f this E q u i v a l e n c e : A n equivalence indicates two courses within the institution deemed to be practically equal in content and credits, although they may be offered in two different program areas under different course numbers. E x e m p t i o n : A n exemption indicates a student is not required to complete a particular course(s) in a program because o f successful completion of a combination o f post-secondary courses w h i c h , overall, constitute equal content. release must be on file in the Registrar's Office. S u b s t i t u t i o n : A substitution indicates a Capilano Alternatively, a band may submit a copy o f a release course used in lieu o f another Capilano course to signed by the student, together with their request for complete a program requirements. Credit must be information. Requests must be received in writing and equal. shall be responded to by letter from the Registrar or the T r a n s f e r C r e d i t : Transfer credit is credit given for Registrar's designate. Requests w i l l not be received by work successfully completed at another institution. The telephone. Band officials are to direct their inquiries to transfer credits reduce the total number o f credits designated College representatives, including the required to complete a certificate, diploma, or associate Registrar and/or project coordinator. Genera! Information — Academic Policies and Procedures 37 degree. Approved transfer credit is noted on the grade point value for each grade is multiplied by the Permanent Student Record as type one, two or three credit hours to produce a number of grade points for credit, as per the B . C . Transfer Guide. While grades are each course. F o r example: an " A " received in a three- noted, they are not included in the calculation of the credit course w o u l d become, for purposes o f the GPA. calculation: A = 4.00 x 3cr = 12 grade points GRADING SYSTEM T o find the tenn G P A , the sum o f the grade points is then divided by the number of credit hours taken in one term only. Similarly, the cumulative G P A recorded is The College employs a letter grade system. the sum o f total grade points for all terms, divided by the number of credits for all terms o f enrolment. Grade Point Letter Value A+ 4.33 A 4.00 A- 3.67 B+ 3.33 B 3.00 The m i n i m u m grade point average for graduation is Classification 2.00. Audit Excellent A n audit indicates the student has registered in and attended a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. A n A u d i t status is not calculated in the G P A , does not have credit Good attached, and may not be used toward completion o f a B- 2.67 diploma, certificate, associate degree or degree. C+ 2.33 Withdrawal - Extenuating Circumstances C 2.00 C- 1.67 Satisfactory Withdrawal from a course after the end o f the withdrawal period given for circumstances beyond the control o f the student. D 1.00 M i n i m a l Pass F 0.00 Fail C R or N C Grade The grades " C R " or " N C " are assigned to courses in which a level of mastery is required for successful N o n - G r a d e Designation CIP* CR* NC* I* W* WE* - - Course in Progress Credit Granted ADN* - F Grade A l l Fail or " F " grades recorded on the student's N o Credit Granted transcript are assigned a value o f zero in the calculation Incomplete of a student's term and cumulative G P A . Withdrawn Withdrawal — Extenuating Circumstances AUD* completion but is not included in the G P A calculation. I Grade A n I grade or Incomplete may be assigned in exceptional circumstances when the student can achieve a Audit passing grade by completing one or more units o f the Audit Denied course. It is the student's responsibility to determine * not calculated in grade point average from the instructor what must be done to complete the course. If an Incomplete is not cleared within four months, the grade w i l l be changed to the evaluation attained at the time the " I " was assigned. G r a d e Point Average ( G P A ) Grade performance is expressed in terms of a grade point average ( G P A ) . G P A s are reported on each permanent student record. T o find the term G P A , the Genera! information — Academic Policies and Procedures 38 GRADE APPEALS REPEATED TERMS Students must take immediate action for a grade Students who enrol but withdraw from all courses in appeal. Students must contact a counsellor no later than two consecutive terms w i l l be ineligible to re-register two weeks after receipt o f grades or Change o f Grade for one term, Fall or Spring. Students who receive Notification. The counsellor w i l l discuss the grade and grades o f F (fail), W (withdraw), or a combination o f appeal procedure with the student and with the instruc- these grades in all courses o f enrolment in two con- tor, w i l l provide the student with a " F i n a l Grade secutive terms shall be ineligible to re-register for one A p p e a l " form, and w i l l submit a report to the Appeals term, Fall or Spring. If following a third term of Committee. enrolment, students who receive grades o f F , W , or a If the student wishes to pursue the appeal, he/she must combination of these grades in all courses o f enrol- complete the " F i n a l Grade A p p e a l " form and submit it ment, w i l l not be allowed to enrol for two terms, Fall to the Appeals Committee, along with a fee o f $42.50 and Spring. for each grade to be appealed, within 14 days after the Students who must withdraw from all courses in two counsellor's report has been received by the Appeals consecutive terms due to medical reasons, or due to Committee Secretary. Failure to meet this timeline w i l l circumstances beyond their control, may appeal to the be grounds for dismissal of the appeal. Registrar for a permit to re-enrol. Appeals are considered by an Appeals Committee chaired by one o f the College deans. The Committee consists o f representatives from faculty, students, and a counsellor. During the appeal process all term grades, including the final examination mark, arc taken into consideration. In all cases the students are informed in writing o f the Committee's decision. Should the mark be changed, the fee is refunded. ACADEMIC PERFORMANCE Students at Capilano College are expected to maintain acceptable standards of scholarship. Specifically, they are expected to maintain a m i n i m u m 1.80 C G P A (cumulative grade point average). A student who docs O n l y those appeals that follow the above process w i l l not maintain this m i n i m u m C G P A w i l l be considered be considered. to be performing unsatisfactorily. T h e following procedures w i l l apply for evaluating the student performance in accordance with policy governing REPEATED COURSES A course may be repeated for the purpose o f improving a grade, but no more than once. T h e grade for each attempt w i l l be recorded with the higher grade used in the computation o f the cumulative G P A . N o course may be taken more than twice i f the student has received t w o failures, or made t w o withdrawals or any combination of failure and withdrawal. Subsequently, a student w i l l not be allowed to enrol in a third attempt unless all of the following have been satisfied: a. a term G P A o f 2.5 or better is achieved; continuance, withdrawal and readmission. 1. A c a d e m i c performance w i l l be evaluated on courses for which Capilano College grades have been assigned. (Assigned grade w i l l include grades A + through D . F , but w i l l exclude W , C R and A U D ) . 2. F o l l o w i n g admission, no formal assessment w i l l take place until the student has completed a minimum of nine credits o f assigned grades. 3. Students who were admitted to the College with an admission average below 1.80, and who have attempted nine credits at a previous post-secondary institution, w i l l be admitted on academic probation. b. the signature of either an advisor, or counsellor is entered on the registration form; c. the signature o f the faculty coordinator responsible ACADEMIC PROBATION for that subject is entered on the registration form. Students who have received assigned grades for at least The Repeated Courses Policy also applies to courses nine Capilano College credits with a G P A o f less than deemed to be equivalent, have a similar curriculum, 1.80 based on the four-point scale, w i l l be placed on and the same subject material: for example. B i o l o g y academic probation. Students w i l l be notified in I OH and Biology 110. writing o f their status and may be advised to book an appointment with an advisor or counsellor prior to rc- General Information — Academic Policies and Procedures 39 rvices Students permitted to register w i l l be limited to enrolling in nine credits or a m a x i m u m o f three courses. F o l l o w i n g completion o f the nine credits or three courses, the student records w i l l be reassessed. EDUCATIONAL ADVIC If, at the end o f the probation period: • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation period and the cumulative G P A are 1.80 or THE ADVISING CENTRE higher, the student w i l l be returned to good academic standing; • the term G P A on assigned grades during the proba- A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s i n g / Educational P l a n n i n g / High School Liaison tion period is 1.80 or higher, but the cumulative A n n a L e e B O U L T O N , Supervisor, B . A . (Alberta) G P A is less than 1.80, the student w i l l continue on Jean B E R R Y , A d v i s o r and International Student academic probation; • the term G P A on assigned grades during the proba- A d v i s o r , B . S c . (Wisconsin) E l i n B R N J A C , Educational Planning Assistant tion period is less than 1.80, the student w i l l be M a r n i B U S H , Educational Planning Assistant required to withdraw from the College for at least Jeri K R O G S E T H , A d v i s o r , B . A . ( U B C ) , B . C . one term (fall or spring). Teachers' Certificate The A d v i s i n g Centre REQUIRED TO WITHDRAW • • Students who have been Required to Withdraw ( R T W ) , may not apply for readmission for one full term. W e • an easy and successful transition into college • • assists students in planning their transfer to other • provides the general public with information on all institutions readmission w i l l be granted by the Registrar in consul- college programs through the " A d v i s i n g H o t l i n e " or counsellor, i f necessary. If admitted, the nine credit telephone enrolment limit w i l l apply, as consistent with the probation policy. Required to Withdraw students granted readmission in the original program of registration or a new program must achieve a grade point average o f 2.00 or better on those credits attempted. Students who do not achieve this level w i l l be required to withdraw from the College for one full year and may only be readmitted by application to, and with the approval o f the Admissions Appeal Committee. Note: Some Career and Vocational programs reserve the right to review performance after each term. This review could result in denied permission to register. provides on-going educational planning for students on campus Students who have been required to withdraw must tation with the appropriate department and an advisor organizes application and pre-registration workshops on campus to help prospective students make counsellor before submitting an application for re- make application for readmission. Permission for assists students and prospective students in making course selections consistent with their career goals strongly advise students to contact an advisor or a admission. provides prospective students with educational planning consistent with their career goals • visits high schools in the lower mainland to provide information on all college programs and to assist students in their transition from high school to college. Appointments may be made at the A d v i s i n g Centre desk in B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 238 or by calling the A d v i s i n g Hotline at 984-4990. Drop-in advising is also available. REGISTRAR'S OFFICE Itidal S A D E K , Registrar, B . A r c h , B . S c . (Egypt) Barbara R O B E R T S O N , Associate Registrar, B.Ed.(UBC) C h e r y l H E L M , Office Manager, Records and Registration, B . A . ( U B C ) The Registrar's Office is responsible for maintenance of all permanent student records, admission and registration procedures for all prospective and continuing students, and administration of College policies General Information — Academic Policies and Procedures/Student Services 40 pertincTit to those areas. In addition, all semester and examination timetables and official course articulation Darcll G A D D I E , B . A . ( U o f Regina), L i a i s o n Officer The First Nations Student A d v i s o r provides direct and graduation is coordinated by the Registrar's Office. services to First Nations students in a variety of ways: Questions should be directed as follows: assistance with course selection and registration; Admissions and Records: 984-4913 information concerning College resources; advisor for Transcripts: 986-1911, ext. 2084 special programs; liaison with First Nations Band Fax:604-984-1798 education officers and college instructors; consultation regarding personal and educational matters. The DISABILITY SERVICES advisor also acts as resource to the student-based First Nations Issues Committee. Faculty Jolene B O R D E W I C K , B . S c . (Ed) (Idaho), M . E d . ( U B C ) , P . D . P . ( S F U ) , A . R . W . — Office of Educational Planning Lucas F O S S , B . A . (Carleton), M , A . Counselling The L i a i s o n Officer is responsible for special programs and services to First Nations students and prospective students in regions served by the Sechelt, Squamish and M t . Currie campuses. Internal calls 3067, external calls 986-1911. Psychology, (Adler School o f Professional Psychology), R . C . C . , A . R . W . — Office of Presently located in the Achievement Resource Centre Educational Support at the North Vancouver campus, B i r c h B u i l d i n g , third floor, the advisor also coordinates advice provided to Support Staff Margaret M A C A U L A Y , Secretary the College from its First Nations A d v i s o r y C o m m i t tee, an externa] advisory group. Internal calls 1762, external calls 984-1762. Services to students with disabilities arc provided by the Office o f Educational Planning for Students with Disabilities (located in the A d v i s i n g Centre — B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 241) and the Office of Educational Support for Students with Disabilities (located in Counselling — B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 272). Students with learning disabilities may be referred to the LEARNING SUPPORT SERVICES Achievement Resource Centre. LIBRARY Contact with the Office o f Educational Planning must Administration be made at least four months before students plan to Frieda W I E B E , B . A . ( U of S), M . L . S . , M . B . A . ( U B C ) , begin courses. College Librarian F o l l o w i n g an intake interview and provision of appro- Faculty priate and current documentation, a variety of services Karin H A L L , B . A . M . L . S . ( U B C ) David L A M B E R T , B . A . ( U of A), M . L . S . ( U B C ) Annette L O R E K , B . A . , M . L . S . ( M c G i l l ) George M O D E N E S I , B . A . , M . L . S . ( U B C ) Sidney M Y E R S , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . L . S . (Western) Maureen W I T N E Y , B . A . (Trent), M . L . S . ( U of T ) can be provided for students: • transition and educational planning • college orientation and access information • registration assistance • instructor notification for classroom accommodation • exam invigilation • individualized support services • taped texts • interpreting services • notetakers and scribes • exit planning Staff Kathleen C O S G R O V E , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services Heike F A E R B E R , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services Sharon F E Y E R , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services June H U N T E R , M e d i a Production Services Karen K L A V E R , Circulation Services Faculty are available Monday through Thursday. C a l l Dianella K N I G H T , M e d i a Production Services 983-7526 for more information. James K W O K , Circulation Services Anne M O Y E , Secretary FIRST NATIONS STUDENT SERVICES Carol N O O N A N , Technical Services N o l a O ' B R I E N , Technical Services Faculty Peggy S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) , First Nations G a i l O W E N , Circulation Services Diane P A R K E R , Technical Services Advisor Genera/ Information Student Services Edna S A K A T A , Media Production Services Karyn S C H M I D , Circulation Services Joanna S P U R L I N G , Circulation Services Judy S T E A R , Circulation Services Deborah S W I G A R T , Circulation Services Karen W A U G H , Technical Services Library Hours - North V a n c o u v e r C a m p u s Monday - Thursday 8:00 am - 10:30 pm Friday 8:00 am - 4:30 pm Saturday - Sunday 1:00 pm - 5:00 pm A u d i o V i s u a l Services Monday - Thursday 8:00 a m - 10:30 pm Friday 8:00 a m - 4 : 3 0 pm Circulation Services Students are required to present current Capilano College I.D. to borrow library materials. I.D. cards must be renewed each term. For loan periods and other policies see the "Library Guide for Students" available in the library. Note: Fines are charged on all overdue library materials. Hourly and daily charges vary depending on whether the item is on reserve, recalled, or on regular loan. Please note the due date on each item borrowed and return materials on time. Failure to return materials and pay allfinesat the end of each term will result in debt listing (transcripts are withheld and further registration is prohibited). M e d i a P r o d u c t i o n Services Monday - Friday 8:30 am - 4:30 pm Audio-Visual Services Library H o u r s - S q u a m i s h C a m p u s A variety of audio-visual software and equipment is Monday - Thursday 9:00 am - 7:00 pm available for use in the library or may be booked for Friday 9:00 am - 4:00 pm classroom presentations. Films, videos, records, Library H o u r s - Sechelt C a m p u s Monday - Thursday 9:00 am - 7:00 pm Friday 9:00 am - 4:00 pm cassette tapes, and C D ' s are listed in the library's catalogue. Projectors, video players, cassette recorders, C D players and record players are available for individual use at library study carrells or for small group use in the library's preview room. Collections Students have access to a book collection of over 100,000 volumes, periodical and newspaper collections of 750 current titles, and collections of videos, compact disks, C D - R O M and online databases, maps, government documents, annual reports and pamphlets. The INNOPAC online catalogue provides access to the library's materials and a gateway to a variety of online indexes and other library catalogues. For instructions on how to access the catalogue from outside the Library, sec the "Library Guide for Students" available in the Library. Reference computer workstations provide access to C D - R O M , Internet, and other online information resources. M e d i a Production Services Assistance in the design, preparation, and production of audio-visual materials is provided. Selected equipment is available for self-help use. Overheads, laserprints, laminating, slides, video and audio products are available at the cost of materials. Ask at Media Production Services. Computers are available for use in the Library Computer Lab. Sechelt and Squamish A small collection of reference and information materials is housed at each regional campus. Access to the entire college library collection is provided via the Research Assistance and Instruction Students receive a library orientation and basic research methods class during the first year English, Psychology, and Communications courses. Other INNOPAC catalogue. A library orientation and basicresearch methods class is provided at the beginning of each term. Inter-campus loans and telephone reference services are also provided. courses often include a class in the use of library materials specific to the subject area. Individual Adaptive Technologies research assistance and Internet research classes arc The Library has a workstation designed for use by also offered. Numerous guides to resources and visually impaired students. This includes a large screen services are available in the library. monitor and text enlarger, a digital scanner, a voice synthesizer and a Braille printer. General Information 42 Student Services ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE Faculty Janet BLACK, B.C. Teaching Cert, B.G.S., Post Bacc, Special Ed. (SFU) John BROOKS, B.A. (SFU) Ruth D'HOLLANDER, B.C. Teaching Cert., B.Ed., M.Ed. (McGill), C.A.S. (Harvard) Bev HILL, B.Ed. (UBC) Wendy LYNN, B.Sc. (Carleton), M.Sc. (WatCi Susan MURRAY, B.Ed. (T.E.S.L.) (Concordia) M.A. (Applied Linguistics) (Concordia) Jan SHIELL, M.Ed. (UBC) Support Staff Erica BRANT, Learning Assistant Lynne HAMILTON, Divisional Assistant Achievement Resource Centre — North Vancouver Students wanting to increase their learning efficiency are invited to use the services and facilities of the Achievement Resource Centre (ARC), located in the Birch Building, Third Floor, Room 337. Students who have specific learning difficulties are encouraged to discuss their concerns with ARC faculty. The Achievement Resource Centre offers the following campus wide services: 1. Credit courses which provide opportunities for students to learn and adopt methods that lead to success in college. 2. Scheduled workshops on study skills to help all students succeed at college. 3. Personal assistance for students who are doing well but want to improve further. 4. Assistance in using computer resources available in the Centre. Resources available are: 1. Hardware — Macintosh, IBM-compatible computers. 2. Software — word processing, spelling, vocabulary and keyboarding skills. 3. Self-paced learning programs on cassette, video, and computer diskette to improve study and learning skills. 4. Group and individualized instruction for study skills development. The ARC also provides a variety of handouts on study tips. For more information, call 984-4945 or drop by the Achievement Resource Centre, Birch Building. Achievement Resource Centre — Squamish and Sechelt ARC programs and services are also offered in these locations. Contact the local College receptionist for more information: in Squamish 986-3515 (toll free from North Vancouver) or 892-5322 (local). Fax 8929274; in Sechelt 987-1535 (toll free) or 885-9310 (local), Fax 885-9350. WRITING CENTRE All students registered at the College may visit the Writing Centre (FR402) for advice on written assignments or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection of reference books, information sheets and exercises, and computers with word processing and printing facilities. The Writing Centre is staffed by faculty members from the English, ESL and ABE Departments. Hours of operation arc posted. THE MATHEMATICS LEARNING CENTRE Students studying mathematics at Capilano College benefit from one of the most comprehensive learning centres in the province. The Mathematics Learning Centre (MLC) is located in the Birch Building, Room 289. During scheduled hours students may obtain individual assistance from the lab supervisor or instructor on duty. The MLC also contains an extensive collection of learning materials including software, videos, and reference texts. INTERNATIONAL STUDENT CENTRE Gary HENKELMANN, Manager, B.Ed. (U of Alberta) Jean BERRY, International Student Advisor, B.Sc. (Wisconsin) Ethelyn McINNES-RANKIN. International Student Counsellor, B.A. (U. of Winnipeg), M.A. (UBC) The Centre provides information concerning student authorizations (visas), Canada's immigration regulations and policies, medical insurance, orientation, educational/personal counselling and homestay needs. Capilano College encourages all international students to participate in the International Club to meet General Information Student Services Canadian and other international students and to participate in a variety of activities, on and off campus. Contact Ethelyn M c l n n e s - R a n k i n for details. STUDENT FINANCIAL SUPPORT Student volunteers are available as conversation buddies during the fall and spring terms. Contact the Peer Support Centre. A l l international students are expected to attend orientation days prior to the start o f term in September and January. Orientation provides information to make the life o f an international student easier. It is recommended that international students arrive in Vancouver at least three weeks before the start of classes. E M P L O Y M E N T CENTRE FOR STUDENTS Dave S H A R R O C K , A d v i s o r Lynne S O M E R V I L L E , A d v i s o r The Student Employment Centre equips students and alumni with the knowledge and skills necessary to secure employment specific to their individual needs. It is critical to understand the new world o f work and how it affects opportunities in the 21st century. T o meet this challenge, the Student E m p l o y m e n t Centre INTERNATIONA EXCHANGES provides students with a variety o f services including: • practical self-assessment before you start the "search" • what it means to market yourself The College has been active for a number o f years in • developing a "network" promoting exchanges with colleges, universities and • how to research the hidden job market other agencies outside Canada. Students from Capilano • review of all employment-related documentation College and Japanese institutions have exchanged as • tips on interviewing have faculty from Rajamangala Institute of Technol- • assessment o f job offers ogy, Thailand, and Open University of H o C h i M i n h • support and encouragement through all phases of the City in Vietnam. work search process Capilano College and A i c h i Gakusen College o f In addition to providing employment guidance, the Toyota C i t y , Japan established a special relationship in Centre also displays hundreds of employment opportu- 1983 which provides for the annual exchange o f nities that are posted daily on a central Job Posting students between the two colleges. Board. A l l types of positions are available: full-time, U p to three Capilano College female students study and work at A i c h i Gakusen from late September until mid-winter. Each student is provided with a scholarship o f Y 7 5 0 . 0 0 0 (approx. C d n . $7,500), a VancouvcrT o k y o - N a g o y a round trip ticket and free tuition in a special program of studies specifically tailored to the individual student. The total value o f the scholarship is approximately C d n . $20,000 for each student. part-time, seasonal, contract and career-oriented. Formal agreements have been signed with other postsecondary educational institutions in China, Malaysia, The Centre offers drop-in service, individual appointments and in-class group presentations. Students are encouraged to visit the Centre early in their academic term to establish an on-going connection o f support for employment concerns throughout the duration of their studies. Birch B u i l d i n g , R o o m 270 (604) 984-4965 or (604) 986-1911 E x t . 2392 Thailand, Japan and other countries of the Pacific R i m which w i l l continue to enhance opportunities for FINANCIAL AID A N D A W A R D S exchange. D o u g C A M E R O N , Financial A i d Officer A special exchange agreement with Kushiro Public University in Japan provides for faculty exchange Iris C U N N I N G H A M , Financial A i d Assistant Valerie K E N D R I C K , Clerk annually. Financial A i d Office A s a member of a number of international education General Office Hours: R o o m 284 B i r c h B u i l d i n g 8:30 am to 4:00 pm M o n d a y through Friday training associations in Canada and the United States, the College is able to provide a variety of opportunities Direct Telephone: (604)984-4966 for students and faculty to study, travel, or work Fax: (604)983-7563 overseas. Genera! Information — Student Services 44 Programs Administered by the *Note: Government Loan/Grant Programs are in- Financial A i d Office tended to assist students who do not have the resources available to pay for their education. Student and in some cases family resources may be required to form the basis for funding. The amount of money a student will receive will not necessarily cover the entire costs associated with post-secondary education. It is expected that students create a financial plan and that they budget loan funds for each educational year. A d u l t Basic Education Student Assistance Program (ABESAP)* • Deadline: End of the first month o f classes (while funds available) Special Opportunity Grants for H i g h - N e e d Part-Time Students ( P T - S O G ) * • Deadline: E n d of the first month o f classes in each term (while funds available) Training Assistance Benefits ( T A B ) * • Applications are processed on first-come, first- Publications "'Financial A i d and A w a r d s — A Student G u i d e " Government and internal pamphlets and brochures related to Student Financial A i d served basis External pamphlets and brochures related to Student Internal scholarship and awards' • Financial A i d Deadlines: Fall Term October 2 Spring Term January 30 Summer Term June 30 (subject to availability Deans' List of funds) Full-time students completing a term and meeting the Other government programs as they become available Deans' list criteria w i l l receive a congratulatory letter Scholastic A w a r d s from the C o l l e g e recognizing their achievement. Services Provided by the Financial A i d To be eligible for the Deans' list, the student must have Office a 3.67 or higher grade point average, have no Information and applications for British C o l u m b i a Student Assistance Programs • British C o l u m b i a Student Assistance Program (BCSAP)* • Processing takes approximately six weeks • Deadline for applications is eight weeks prior to the end o f study period • Loan Remission • Special Opportunity Grants for Students with Disabilities ( S O G - S W D ) * • Work-Study Program • Other government programs as they become available Applications for the Student Assistance Programs of other provinces Assistance in preparing reassessments or appeals for Incompletes, no Credit Granted or Fail grades and completed a m i n i m u m of 12 credits for that term. Merit List Part-time students with a cumulative grade point average of 3.67 or higher upon the completion o f 30 or 60 credits w i l l receive a congratulatory letter from the College recognizing their achievement. The Governor-General's Collegiate Bronze Medal This award is presented to a D i p l o m a graduate from a two-year program who has achieved the highest cumulative grade point average, and who has attained this grade point average on a m i n i m u m o f 15 credit hours per term, or full program load as outlined in the calendar, during attendance at Capilano College. B C Student Assistance Programs Emergency A i d (limited). Includes: Fee Deferrals, The Lieutenant Governor's Silver Medal Advances o f Loans, Emergency Bursaries, and Emer- Awarded for academic excellence and contribution to gency Loans the College and community to a graduate in a V o c a - Emergency individual financial counselling tional or Career program o f less than two years' Workshops and information sessions on: • Financing your education • Budgeting Application forms for external assistance and awards duration. Scholarships, Bursaries, and Awards Various awards which recognize achievement, and/or financial need arc available through general and General Information — Student Services 45 individual application forms. A detailed listing o f these government and non-profit organizations. The goal is awards is contained in the free booklet: "Financial A i d to develop high calibre graduates, better able to assume and A w a r d s — A Student G u i d e " . productive jobs. Employers may use C o - o p students to assist in building a work force that meets the short-term needs o f their ALTERNATIVE LEARNING FORMATS organization. Students can undertake special projects and provide relief for permanent staff w h o may be undertaking other tasks. In the longer term, employers have a cost effective means o f evaluating potential DISTANCE EDUCATION future employees. Capilano College offers a variety of courses by dis- The C o - o p experience provides students with a supe- tance education. Some courses are offered o n line. T o rior, well-rounded education enriched by the practical obtain a list o f courses currently offered, students can application of their skills. They obtain valuable "hands- find the information at http:llmerlin.capcollege.bc.cal o n " experience and are able to evaluate their career courselistings.html. choices. Other distance education courses are offered v i a video The College receives immediate feedback on the conferencing with our regional campuses. Such courses quality and relevance o f the program areas and on the are part of our regular course offerings. quality of the students. C o - o p education also helps us develop contacts with the business community i n Fish Culture Technician Program The Fish Culture Technician program is available i n distance learning format only. Students may register in one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. general. The following are co-operative education programs at Capilano College: A s i a Pacific Management Business Administration Accounting The distance learning program has been designed for Computing individuals who are currently working or seeking General Management employment in the fish culture field and wish to Marketing upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized Retail Marketing programs may be available. Tourism Management Details on these programs are available in the appropri- Legal Assistant Certificate Program ate program area o f this Calendar. The part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program is available in distance learning format for students living outside the L o w e r M a i n l a n d . Students must be employed as a legal secretary while completing the program and have at least two years o f such experience PERSONAL SUPPORT SERVICES before starting the program. The content o f this program is identical to the content o f the part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program. F o r more information, or to receive a brochure, call the Legal Assistant COUNSELLING Faculty Department at 983-7594, or visit the W e b site at: Daniel F R A N K E L , B . A . (Concordia), M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) www.capcollege.bc.ca/programs/legal_assistant/ or D a v i d J O N E S , B . A . , M . A . (Dalhousie), P h . D . ( S F U ) send e-mail to: lgas@capcollege.bc.ca. Y v o n n e M c C O L L , B . A . (Simmons), M . E d . (Harvard) Ethelyn M c I N N E S - R A N K I N , B . A . (University o f CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION Winnipeg), M . A . ( U B C ) Susan M I T C H E L L , B . S . E d . ( N . Illinois), M . A . ( U V i c ) Co-operative education integrates a period o f class- Sukhi SOHI, M . A . ( U B C ) room learning with periods of work experience to Suzanne W A L L S T E R , M . E d . (Montana) enable students to apply their knowledge and skills. Students alternate periods of full-time study with periods of paid employment in business, industry. Support Staff Ursel B R O W N Norma M c A L L I S T E R General Information — Student Services 46 General Information Peer Support Centre The counsellors at Capilano College are professionals Members o f the Counselling Department are responsi- trained to provide a variety of counselling services ble for the training and supervision o f Peer Support designed to promote and support students' academic Centre volunteers. These volunteers are students who success, identification and achievement o f appropriate can assist other students by providing information and career goals, and personal growth. A t present, the Counselling Department offers the f o l l o w i n g services to Capilano College students: through supportive listening. In addition, the Centre is engaged in a number o f outreach activities designed to support student success and to foster as sense o f community at Capilano College. The Centre is sup- Educational Counselling is available to help students ported by the Capilano Students' U n i o n . plan their college education according to their interests, aptitudes and career goals. CHILD CARE Students are advised to consult with a counsellor when experiencing academic difficulties. Students must see a Capilano College offers child care for infants, toddlers counsellor before registering for an overload or when and 3-5 year olds. Some part-time spaces are available. considering filing a formal grade appeal. Priority is given to Capilano College students. Career Counselling offers help to students who are Applications for child care are available at the C h i l d having trouble deciding on a career, who perhaps feel Care Centre or by calling 984-4950. unsure, confused, or lacking motivation. Counselling and testing can help students make realistic career plans based on their interests, abilities and values. Personal Counselling is available to help students who are experiencing personal difficulties which affect their ability to succeed in college. Counsellors can help students to clarify issues, overcome obstacles and find HEALTH SERVICES AND SPORTS MEDICINE CLINIC Dr. Bill M A C K I E , B . S c , M . D . ( U B C ) , C C F P , Dip. Sport M e d . , Director of M e d i c a l Services Located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 2 4 9 A . effective ways o f dealing with their problems. C o u n s e l - General medical services are available to students at no lors can also refer students to community agencies for charge on Tuesdays and Thursdays during the Spring further assistance. and Fall terms. Appointments may be made through the Workshops and Outreach Programs designed to help students succeed are offered throughout the term in receptionist. Internal calls 4964, external calls 9844964. such areas as career exploration, goal-setting, test anxiety, procrastination, stress management, c o m m u n i - Physiotherapy cation and assertion training. Paige L A R S O N , B . S c . ( P T ) , B P E , M C P A , Sports Credit Courses that are a full term in length are cotaught by the counsellors on strategies for student success. The Counselling Department is located in R o o m 267 of the B i r c h Building. Appointments to see a counsellor may be made through the receptionist, or by calling 9 8 4 - 1 7 4 4 . Appointment times are available M o n d a y through Friday, from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m. Drop-in counselling is also available to accommodate students in crisis or emergency situations, or for short consultations. A l l counselling is confidential. Those living in the Pemberton - H o w e Sound region Physiotherapist Jeff R O O N E Y , B . S c . ( P T ) , M C P A Denise M O R B E Y , B . S c . ( P T ) , M C P A Located in B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 2 4 9 A . Physiotherapy services are available to students and College employees according to the M S P , I C B C and W C B fee schedules. Appointments may be made through the receptionist. Internal calls 4964, external calls 984-4964. Monday - Thursday 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Friday 7:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m. requiring the assistance of a counsellor should contact First Aid the Squamish campus. Appointments may be arranged First A i d is administered through the Facilities Depart- by calling 892-5322. ment. Internal calls 1772, external calls 984-1772. Sunshine Coast region residents should call the Sechelt campus, 885-9310. General Information — Student Services First A i d Services are available on campus at the following times: CAREER ADVISING During Spring and Fall Terms M o n d a y - Thursday: 8:30 a.m. - 2:00 a.m. Career Resource Centre Friday - Sunday: continuous coverage from The College assists students considering career options 8:30 a.m. on Friday by providing information and reference materials o n a wide variety o f occupations. The Career Resource M a y to A u g u s t : M o n d a y - Friday Centre is located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 267. It 8:30 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Evenings and weekends as required houses a collection o f self-help books, vocational literature and information on labour market trends. The Centre also contains calendars from Canadian and foreign universities and colleges, and free informa- SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY tional brochures on campus and community resources. ADVISOR Copies o f past and current course outlines for Capilano Janet K E E , B . A . ( U o f T ) , L L . B . ( U of T ) College are available for reference in choosing courses and instructors. In addition, some career and program The primary work o f the Sexual Harassment Policy A d v i s o r is to assist campus members to informally resolve sexual harassment problems. This work can include discussing effective responses, facilitating communication between the concerned individuals, and information is on videotape, which can be viewed in the Centre. F o r assistance, contact the receptionist. The Career Resource Centre is open from 8:30 - 5:00 p.m., M o n d a y through Thursday, and from 8 : 3 0 - 4:30 p . m . on Fridays. helping complainants initiate a formal complaint under the College Sexual Harassment Policy (see Policies and Procedures in this Calendar). The advisor also offers presentations and workshops o n campus on many topics, including sexual harassment, dating violence, cross-gender communication, and CAMPUS ACTIVITIES ATHLETICS A N D RECREATION assertiveness training. The advisor and her resource Admin istra tion library are available to all student researchers with Joseph I A C O B E L L I S , B . P . E . . M . P . E . ( U B C ) , questions about sexual harassment and related topics. The advisor is located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 278. Appointments may be arranged by calling 984-1744. Manager Faculty M i l t o n W I L L I A M S , B . P . E . ( U B C ) , Programmer Support Staff SECURITY Capilano College is concerned with the safety and security o f students, faculty, staff and visitors o n campus. John B R A I T H W A I T E , Weekend Attendant John D O W L E R , Program Assistant M i c h a e l F R A N K O W S K I , Senior Attendant Wade K E E L E R , Evening Attendant T o m S M I T H , Evening Attendant Security at the North Vancouver campus is provided by uniformed officers. These officers are available to Athletics escort any member o f the College community. A d - Capilano is a full member o f the British C o l u m b i a vance notice is appreciated, but not required. Campus C o l l e g e s ' Athletic Association, which is the governing security may be reached at 984-1763. body for all intercollegiate athletics in the province. A security awareness orientation is provided to every Provincial championships are determined annually, class at the beginning o f each term. Faculty, particu- with winners advancing to national finals. T h i s affords larly those teaching evening classes, promote and our C o l l e g e ' s highly skilled student athletes an oppor- actively encourage the buddy system. Students are tunity to meet with and compete against the best advised to walk with a friend or, if possible, travel in college athletes in Canada. groups to parked cars or to other locations, or get a ride Intercollegiatcly, Capilano Blues teams compete in to their vehicle i f they are parked some distance away soccer, basketball, volleyball, and badminton both for from others. women and men. Each year, our many exceptional athletes, working with the experienced Blues coaching General Information — Student Services 48 staff and managers, have combined to produce both provincial and national championship teams. F o r example, Capilano won both the men's and women's 96/97 National Soccer titles, and the women w o n the National Silver medal in 97/98. Capilano College is proud o f the accomplishments o f its student athletes and o f its growing reputation for athletic excellence. STUDENT UNION The Capilano Students' U n i o n is an organization comprised o f all registered full- and part-time students at the C o l l e g e . Membership in the U n i o n commences at registration, upon payment o f the U n i o n membership fee*, and ceases at the end o f the last semester o f study. In 1981, a referendum was held at Capilano College in which students voted by a 90.4% majority in favour o f Campus Recreation joining the Canadian Federation o f Students, a national A n expanding intramural program, utilizing the alliance o f college and university students' unions. C o l l e g e ' s Sportsplex facility and the Weight Training Provincial and national Federation fees* are calculated Centre, together with recreation and fitness programs, per credit per semester. are available during both Fall and Spring terms. Some examples of the scheduled activities available are: coed volleyball, basketball, indoor soccer, badminton, aerobics, karate, weight training and many more. O n campus, the Students' U n i o n works to protect the rights and advocate for the interests o f its members. The U n i o n appoints student representatives on the College committees, providing student perspectives in The Sportsplex is located in the south east corner o f the the College decision-making process. The U n i o n also south campus parking lot across from B i r c h B u i l d i n g . organizes on-campus social and cultural activities, and For detailed G y m Schedule and Game Times call 9841737. F o r Intramurals, Recreational Programming call M i l t W i l l i a m s at 983-7532. F o r athletes seeking information about their sport status, call the Athletic Director, Joe Iacobellis at 983-7553. F o r general provides a variety o f services to its members. Provincially and nationally, the U n i o n works through the Federation to positively affect government and postsecondary education policies in such areas as tuition fees and student financial assistance. information please call John D o w l e r at 984-4997. O u r The activities o f the Students' U n i o n are coordinated fax number is 984-1736. on a day-to-day basis by an elected Executive C o m m i t tee. Elections o f all vacant and expiring positions o n Sportsplex and Fitness Centre the U n i o n ' s Executive Committee are held during the first five weeks o f each College semester. One member The Sportsplex, one of the finest multipurpose facilities of the Executive Committee sits o n the provincial in the province, houses the intramural programs, Executive o f the Canadian Federation of Students. athletics, gymnasium-based programs, extension courses in sports and recreation and a general activity drop-in program for those choosing a less structured schedule. Each of these programs offer a variety of activities which w i l l satisfy the recreational needs of the student body. Facilities include a 14,500 sq. ft. gymnasium with For more information about the U n i o n , or a copy of the U n i o n ' s Constitution and B y l a w s , please stop by the Union office, R o o m 116 in the M a p l e B u i l d i n g . * Fees are currently under review and subject to change. Consult the Students' U n i o n for current information about fees. seating capacity for 1,700, suitable for basketball, volleyball, badminton, indoor soccer, wrestling, martial arts and many other activities; a 2,400 sq. ft. aerobics CAMPUS PUBLICATION gym, weight and fitness centre, dressing rooms and sauna. A wide range o f services including towel service, locker rentals, first aid, laundry service and equipment loans are available. to A p r i l ) are: Friday: Saturday/Sunday: The Capilano Review is a tri-annual magazine o f the arts, publishing poetry, fiction, fine art and drama from Current hours of operation during the term (September M o n d a y to Thursday: THE CAPILANO REVIEW all over Canada and the world. Since its beginnings in 1972 in the Capilano College Humanities D i v i s i o n , the 8 30 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. 30 a.m. to 7:30 p.m. magazine has been recognized six times for excellence 00 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. ern Magazine awards, and been cited by the Canadian by the National Magazine awards, twice by the WestStudies Association. Its distribution spans nine countries. The Capilano Review is published by the Capilano Press Society; it receives support funding General Information — Student Services from the Canada C o u n c i l , the B . C . Cultural Fund, Capilano College, and the B . C . G a m i n g C o m m i s s i o n . Subscriptions are $25 for one year (three issues) or $45 STUDENT STORE — CAP CORNER The student store, located in the Library building, is operated by the Retail Marketing students. for two years. The student rate for one year is $ 15. The Capilano Press Society welcomes donations to its The store serves as a teaching aid a l l o w i n g students to Friends and Benefactors Program, which are tax put into practical use the skills they learn while in the deductible through The Capilano College Foundation. classroom. Write to: The Capilano The store sells Capilano College sweatwear, school Review c/o Capilano College. Telephone: (604) 984-1712. Fax: (604) 983-7520. W e b site: www.capcoUege.bc.caldepartmentslTCRItcr.html supplies, c o m m o n pharmaceutical items, gifts, candy, snacks and cold drinks. Special sweatwear orders for clubs, organizations, and STUDENT NEWSPAPER various athletic teams can be arranged. The student newspaper at Capilano College is the Hours o f operation are Monday to Thursday from Capilano Courier, published every other week. The 10:15 a.m. to 4:15 p.m. Courier is run by an independent staff of student volunteers, autonomous from the student society and College administration. Since the Courier is written, organized, and laid out on PARKING P A Y P A R K I N G is in effect 24 hours a day, seven days campus, there is always a need for help. Students are a week, all year. encouraged to take part in news and feature writing, P A Y P A R K I N G applies to all parking spaces at the reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, North Vancouver campus, including all those o n desktop publishing, graphic design, and advertising. College roadways, and is strictly enforced. The newspaper is not a "'class project" and therefore offers the chance for all students to participate in the democratically-run collective staff. The Courier Parking on Purcell W a y is reserved for the residents o f Purcell W a y . E X C E P T I O N S : Pay parking does not apply to non- welcomes input from the entire College community. Classified ads (which are free to students, staff, and faculty), letters to the collective, and other contributions can be submitted to their offices. owned/leased property, namely: East side o f Monashee, just north o f Northwest K e n nels is on District L a n d and not under the C o l l e g e ' s pay parking program. Gravel road north o f Parking L o t 4 (east to west GENERAL C A M P U S SERVICES between Monashee and upper L i l l o o e t Road). Small area between Lillooet Road Entrance 2 and Parking L o t 3. Some areas o f Lillooet Road allow parking. Observe BOOKSTORE signage in areas near driveways. Located in the southwest corner o f the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , The administration and operation o f pay parking the Bookstore offers required and recommended texts, including permit sales, equipment, and administration stationery, clothing and sundry items. of warning notices, fines, and towing is handled by The first six weeks of classes, the Bookstore is usually Imperial Parking. (Telephone: 681-7311) open 8:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m., M o n d a y through Thursday; and 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. on Fridays. After six Fees for Pay Parking weeks, closing time changes to 6:30 p.m. but remains 4:00 p.m. on Fridays. Summer session hours are 8:30 • $2/day: D a i l y tickets are purchased from meters a.m. to 4:00 p.m., M o n d a y through Friday. The located throughout the campus (2 x $1 coins or 1 x $2 Bookstore accepts cash, V i s a , MasterCard, Interac and coin) cheques with proper I D . • $30/month (first day - last day) For information regarding used books, please contact • $100/term (four calendar months) the Capilano Students' U n i o n . • $180/twelve months (September - August) Monthly, term and yearly permits are purchased from Imperial Parking L i m i t e d . Their representative w i l l be Genera! Information 50 Student Services at B i r c h B u i l d i n g (west end of Food Court), most months on M o n d a y t h r o u g h F r i d a y 12:15 - 12:45 for p e r m i t sales, questions, etc. Extended hours w i l l be available and advertised during rush periods at beginning o f each term. STUDENT RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES Car Pooling = Free Parking Persons wanting to take advantage of car pooling may obtain registration forms from the Purchasing Department located in Arbutus B u i l d i n g , Basement A R 0 1 8 . Telephone: 984-4904. Capilano College recognizes a set of student rights and holds students responsible for their understanding and conduct in view of College policies, rules and regulations. Registered groups o f three or more individuals a r r i v - Student R i g h t s ing a n d u n l o a d i n g at the same time, in one vehicle, in the designated parking area, w i l l be provided with free Y o u are entitled to have your rights respected by fellow students, faculty, staff, administrators and other parking. persons associated with the College. In addition to your A computer car pool ride matching system is located in rights guaranteed under the Canadian Charter o f Supply & Services, Arbutus B u i l d i n g , Basement, Rights, you have the right to: R o o m A R 0 3 0 — look for the E A S Y R I D E R sign. The 1. a healthy and safe learning environment free from computer scans the bar code on the back of your student ID/library card and w i l l print a list of persons in your area who want to form a car pool. The system is free and easy to use! harassment and discrimination. 2. the confidentiality of information regarding all student records and grades unless you consent in writing to its discf >surc. Y o u also have a right to ethical behaviour from College personnel who have LOST A N D FOUND access to your student records. 3. seek redress through appropriate College commit- Students may inquire about lost or found items in the Capilano Students' Union office, located in the Maple B u i l d i n g . There is also a Library lost and found in the Library at the Circulation counter. tees for any potential infringement of your rights, according to the procedures in effect at the College. 4. access to documents contained in your student records, and to add pertinent comments or documents as appropriate. FOOD A N D BEVERAGE SERVICE The Food Court (located main floor. Birch Building) 5. be informed in advance of the basic content and general procedures of a course and to be sure that the course w i l l not change substantially after Hours of Operation: Monday to Thursday: 8 a.m. - 8:30 p.m. Friday: 8 a.m. - 3:00 p.m. The Specialty Coffee Bar (located in the Food Court) registration. Y o u also have the right to receive at the beginning of a course a written outline and to receive written notification o f changes in the course outline. The course outline normally will include course objectives, teaching methods, evaluation Hours of Operation: system, and due dates and late penalties for major Monday to Thursday: 7:30 a.m. - 2:30 p.m. Friday: 7:30 a.m. - 2:30 p.m. A Food K i o s k (located foyer, second floor of F i i Building) Hours o f Operation: graduation requirements, academic regulations, and university admission. 7. be notified of class cancellations as soon as possible and to expect that classes w i l l start and end on time. M o n d a y - Friday 8 a.m. - 2 p.m. when classes are in session. 8. be informed of your performance on occasions spaced throughout the semester. Vending services are available throughout the campus. Catering services for meetings or other on-site occasions are also available. Contact the Director o f Food Services at 984-4970. assignments. 6. reasonable access to information on program and 9. have your instructor keep designated office hours. 10. review any of your examinations and major course assignments up to the beginning o f the following semester. 11. retain intellectual property concerning your assignments, essay, theses, and other written work. General Information — Student Services/College Policies 51 Student R e s p o n s i b i l i t i e s It is your responsibility to acquaint yourself with course outlines, content, evaluations and methodology. Y o u arc also responsible for conducting yourself in a reasonable manner and in accordance with College policies as set out in the Calendar. Y o u are responsible A p p l i c a t i o n : Educational planning, classroom accommodations and service arrangements are to be made in the Office o f Disability Services from 4 - 6 months before classes begin. Students with disabilities requesting services from the Office o f Disability Services are required to provide current documentation o f the disability for which they are requesting accommoda- for: 1. inquiring into the availability o f your instructors (time and place). 2. communicating with instructors and/or counsellors in order to solve any of the problems that you may encounter. tion. The documentation should include a recent diagnosis o f the condition as determined by qualified professionals which outlines the impact of the disability on learning and which includes some recommendations for classroom accommodation. 3. attending classes and being punctual. A d m i s s i o n : Students with disabilities must meet and 4. submitting your assignments in the required format maintain the same eligiblity criteria as all other stu- to your instructors within the deadline; or, if you dents in courses and programs in order to continue to cannot do so, for making other arrangements with receive the services offered by the Office o f Disability the agreement o f the concerned instructor. Services. 5. being familiar with the information contained in the Services: Through the Office of Disability Services, course outlines and for seeking from your instruc- the College arranges educational planning, registration tors clarification o f any areas of concern. 6. undertaking to complete course requirements as described in the course outline and to observe support, classroom accommodation and a wide variety of on-campus services which contribute to the successful learning o f students with disabilities. deadlines and schedules contained therein. 7. discussing any dissatisfactions with the instructor concerned before attempting further redress through appropriate College channels. 8. respecting the rights o f students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons associated with the College. 9. respecting other people's health and their right to security and dignity. 10. adhering to College policies regarding improper student conduct including: a) cheating and plagiarism: b) improper behaviour: c) sexual harassment. ACCESS FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES STUDENT CONDUCT POLICY T o enhance their opportunities for educational success, the College expects all students to conduct themselves so as to help, not hinder, their fellow students, staff, and instructors in achieving their c o m m o n goals. One of the most important of those goals is to develop the skill of critical thinking through the free expression and exploration of a wide range of ideas. T h i s may involve challenges to students' and faculty's strongly held beliefs and values. A s long as such challenges are clearly directed at ideas, and are not merely personal attacks on those who hold them, the College accepts and encourages them as part of the learning process. However, some kinds o f expression, conduct and behaviour are clearly not intended to further the learning process: they may become disruptive to all College R e s p o n s i b i l i t y : Capilano College supports concerned and may hinder the C o l l e g e ' s basic purpose: successful learning for all students and seeks to to foster both learning and a constructive, positive establish a supportive and inclusive educational attitude toward learning. Therefore, the C o l l e g e w i l l environment. The College is committed to providing not accept disruptive behaviour in classrooms or appropriate support services and accommodations for elsewhere on its property. qualified students with disabilities. 1. D i s r u p t i v e B e h a v i o u r Student R e s p o n s i b i l i t y : The approach used at Disruptive behaviour is defined as: Capilano College is one of self-advocacy in which students are encouraged and supported to be responsible for meeting their o w n needs. General Information — College Policies 52 • Speech or action that seriously distracts others from the pursuit of their educational goals; • Speech or action that is clearly not part o f a learning a student's continued presence in the College consti- process or that creates an atmosphere o f hostility, tutes a continuing disruption, threat, or danger to intimidation, ridicule, or anxiety among other others, the Dean shall immediately suspend the student students, staff or instructors; • A c t i o n that impedes the delivery o f College services; pending further investigation and/or disciplinary action. A student has the right to appeal the Dean's decision to • A c t i o n that abuses College property and services by using them for unauthorized purposes; • Excessive and unreasonable demand for attention or suspend or to impose other disciplinary action. Such appeal must be made in writing to the Vice-President. A c a d e m i c Affairs within two weeks of the Dean special treatment from faculty or staff, to the notifying the student of the disciplinary action. The detriment o f other students; or appeal shall be heard by the Vice-President and another senior administrator, who w i l l receive submissions by • Hindrance o f other's work by failure to complete one's own work. 2. T h r e a t e n i n g a n d D a n g e r o u s B e h a v i o u r any other person that the Vice-President and senior administrator judge to have information bearing upon the case. A l l members of the College community are expected to show respect for the College and its students and employees. Behaviour that is threatening or dangerous to others is unacceptable and w i l l be dealt with quickly and firmly. The College w i l l protect its students and SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY employees against such conduct. Threatening or dangerous behaviour is: • Subjecting or threatening to subject any student or College employee to physical or mental harm, injury, indignity, harassment, or written or spoken abuse: • Physical intimidation o f any student or College employee; The College is committed to providing a w o r k i n g and learning environment that is free from sexual harassment. T o that end, the College has adopted a formal policy and procedures to handle complaints and, i f appropriate, to impose discipline where sexual harassment occurs. The College believes that those who allege that they are victims of sexual harassment must receive the necessary support and protection to encourage c o m - • • Damage or threat to, or the unauthorized removal of. College property or the property of students or College employees: plaints to be brought forward. The College believes that anyone against whom a complaint has been made should be given full opportunity to respond to those A c t i o n that deliberately endangers students or allegations, and that the principles of natural justice College employees. should prevail. 3. P r o c e d u r e The Capilano College policy defines sexual harassment as comment or conduct of a sexual nature, including Complaints about any person's disruptive, threatening, sexual advances, requests for sexual favours, sugges- or dangerous behaviour shall go to a counsellor or to tive comments or gestures, or physical contact when the appropriate supervisor or coordinator. The person any one o f the following occurs: receiving the complaint shall investigate, consult a 1. T h e conduct or comment has the effect o f creating counsellor, supervisor or coordinator as appropriate, an intimidating, hostile or offensive environment, and, i f warranted, immediately convey the complaint to and may include the expression o f sexist attitudes, the Dean of Student Services. In cases where the behaviour is threatening or dangerous, the police language and behaviour; 2. The conduct or comment exploits the fiduciary should be called directly at 911. Appropriate College relationship between students and employees o f the personnel should then be advised of the problem. In College; cases of suspicious behaviour (for example: tampering with College equipment or cars in the parking lot, vandalizing College property, etc.) campus security should be called at 1763. If any disciplinary action is 3. The conduct or comment is accompanied by a reward, or the express or implied promise o f a reward, for compliance; 4. The conduct or comment is accompanied by taken (as outlined above) the Dean w i l l place a copy of reprisals, or an expressed or implied threat o f the disciplinary action on the student's file in the reprisal, for refusal to comply: Registrar's office. If the Dean has reason to believe that General Information — College Policies 5. The conduct or comment is accompanied by the actual denial o f opportunity, or the expressed or implied threat of the denial o f opportunity, for MISUSE OF C O M P U T E R S Y S T E M POLICY failure to comply. Copies o f the C o l l e g e ' s "Sexual Harassment P o l i c y and The misuse of a computer system (such as unauthor- Procedures" are available from the Office o f the Sexual ized access to other computer accounts or unauthorized Harassment Policy A d v i s o r or from Counselling. use o f system software) is not only unfair to other The Sexual Harassment Policy A d v i s o r is available to students but can result, at the instructor's discretion, in receive complaints o f sexual harassment, to provide suspension of the offender's computer access in a advice and information to the parties to such c o m - course, which may result in an " F " grade. Repeated plaints, and to investigate complaints as necessary. offences may result in a permanent revoking o f all computer privileges. CHEATING A N D PLAGIARISM POLICY W i t h i n an educational institution, any form o f cheati n g — including plagiarism—is an extremely serious offence. Plagiarism is the presentation of another person's or source's words or ideas as if they were one's o w n . Plagiarism and all other forms of cheating are dishonest and are incompatible with education and scholarship. A c c o r d i n g l y , cheating offences w i l l normally result in a grade o f zero on the examination, test, or assignment and, at the instructor's discretion, may result in a grade of F in the course. After consulting the instructor(s) involved, the College may impose further penalties for cheating, up to and including expulsion from the College. Cheating or plagiarism penalties affecting a final grade may be appealed through the C o l l e g e ' s Appeals Procedure. Students arc responsible for ensuring that they understand and follow the principles and practices o f proper documentation and scholarship. If in doubt about these matters, students should consult their instructor, the Achievement Resource Centre, the Writing Centre, or the Library where explanatory documents arc available. C O P Y R I G H T POLICY A copy o f the College Copyright policy is available in the Library and in all departments. This policy applies to all College departments, employees and students. Capilano College has a reprography licence agreement with C A N C O P Y , the Canadian Copyright Licensing A g e n c y . F o r further information, contact Supplies and Services at 984-4915. General Information — College Policies 54 CjoveriiciiiCG cind m, m Administration 1 8 8 < S 8 T w o - Y e a r T e r m s , Faculty Leslie Baker Dave Bates Frank Harris Paul M i e r (Chair) Susan M i t c h e l l CAPILANO COLLEGE BOARD Margot Rawsthorne The Board of the College, established in conformity D o u g Tait with the College and Institute A c t , consists o f 16 Yolande W c s t w c l l - R o p e r members, including nine appointed by the Minister of Brian White Education, Skills and Training, four elected from the College community, one ex-officio member drawn from the administrative group at the College, the president of Capilano College, and the president of the One-Year Term, Students Ben W i l l i a m s Lars Andstein C o l l e g e ' s Education C o u n c i l . These members serve as trustees of the College. T w o - Y e a r T e r m s , Support Staff The Board is responsible for governing the College, Lauren M u l h o l l a n d and in that capacity determines the policy by which the Bob Walker College operates and reviews the performance of the College and its component parts. Traditionally, the Board meets monthly to fulfil its statutory responsibilities and to conduct its general business. Education Administrators Bill Gibson Jim Cooke Itidal Sadek N a o m i Yamamoto, Chair John Waters S y l v i a Sioufi, V i c e - C h a i r Richard Band Ex-Officio Diane Blaney Members Julian Albancse Shari Graydon Richard Band Laraine Hamilton Sue Gardner Dal Hothi G r e g Lee Barbara Howard Carol McQuarrie Greg Lee Jason Lee Lana M a n y Grey Horses CAPILANO COLLEGE FOUNDATION Carol McCandless The Capilano College Foundation was formed in 1970 to build community support for Capilano College. A s a volunteer community organization established under the Societies A c t , the Foundation raises and administers funds to assist students and enhance the development of a well-balanced learning environment. Paul M i e r Severin M o r i n Ernie Tjensvold Sam W e l l e r Ben W i l l i a m s For information, or to make a tax-deductible contribu- EDUCATION COUNCIL tion, contact: Capilano College Foundation, Capilano Education C o u n c i l , established in conformity with the College, 2055 Purcell W a y , North Vancouver, B . C . College and Institute A c t , is the advisory body to the V 7 J 3 H 5 . Telephone: (604) 984-4983; Fax: (604) College Board on major institution-wide issues and 984-1714. educational policy. Voting members on Education Council include 10 faculty members (elected by faculty), four students (elected by students), two support staff (elected by support staff), and four education administrators appointed by the College president. General Information — Governance and Administration 55 ADMINISTRATION Employee Relations Valerie Cochran, L L . B . President Executive Director G r e g F . Lee, B . S c . , M . S c , P h . D . C i n d y Rogers Vice-President, Academic Affairs Manager, Personnel Services W i l l i a m Gibson, B . A . , P h . D . , D i p . E d Facilities Vice-President, Finance, and Bursar; Board Secretariat Ian Robertson Director, Buildings and Grounds Marie Jessup, C . G . A . Financial Services Dean of Arts Mark Vernon, B . A . , C A . John Waters, B . A . (Hons.), M . A . Director Dean of Business, Human Services, and International Education Alan Ng, B . S c , C.G.A. John Potts, B . A . , M . P . A . Dean of C o l l e g e / C o m m u n i t y Partnerships Comptroller Greg Gates, C . M . A . Manager, Financial Reporting/Workload Systems Stephanie Forsyth, B . A . , M . E d . International Student Centre Dean of Science and M e d i a Technology Gary Henkelmann, B . E d . Carol McCandless, B . A . , M . A . Manager Dean of Student Services and Foundation Programs Frieda W i e b c , B . A . (Hons.), M . L . S . , M . B . A . James E . C o o k e , B . A . , M . A . College Librarian Athletics and Recreation A l a n P . D . Smith, B . A . , M . A . Joseph Iacobellis, B . P . E . , M . P . E . Manager Executive Director Library Planning a n d Institutional Research Registrar's Office College Relations Itidal Sadek, B . A r c h . . B . S c . Randi Duke, B . A . , M . A . Registrar Executive Director Barb Robertson, B . E d . Associate Registrar Lana Robinson, B . A . Director, Development, Capilano College Foundation Supply and Services Computer and Communications Services D a v i d Brewer, R . C . P . P . Steve Gallagher, B . A . Director Director Continuing Education and Contract Services L y n n Jest, M . E d . Director General Information — Governance and Administration 56 • rcpar axor y Programs M a n y students who enter Capilano College require precollege level courses to meet entry level requirements for a particular college program, or to upgrade their PRE-COLLEGE LEVEL COURSES For students who do not have some o f the course prerequisites for University Transfer or Career programs, the College offers upgrading and flexible selfstudy courses. academic skills from basic literacy to the Provincial L e v e l (Grade 12 equivalent standing Diploma). Students who have been out of school for a number o f years and want to resume their education often find that Courses C H E M 030 — Introduction to Chemistry the Adult Basic Education program best meets their E N G L 010 — Language Skills needs. Most courses in the program arc self-paced and M A T H 009 — Arithmetic may be taken on a part-time basis. Full-time students M A T H 090 — Introductory Algebra with Functions M A T H 095 — Intermediate Algebra with Functions attend classes in which they work up to five hours a day in the classroom with college instructors. In addition, some courses require independent study outside of class. The level o f courses in the Adult Basic Education program ranges from Basic Literacy to Provincial (Grade 12) level. M a n y of the upper-level courses, taken alone or as part of a larger program of ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE CREDIT COURSES studies, w i l l meet entry requirements for University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs. Instructional Faculty J. B L A C K , Post B a c / S p c c i a l E d u c , B . C . Teacher's The pre-collcge level courses which are offered by a number of departments at the College arc designed to upgrade students who lack course prerequisites for Cert., B . G . S . ( S F U ) R. D ' H O L L A N D E R , B . C . Teacher's Cert., B . E d . , M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) , C . A . S . (Harvard) University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs. B. HILL, B.Ed. (UBC) M a n y of these courses arc taught in two-hour classes S. M U R R A Y , B . E d . (T.E.S.L.)(Concordia), M . A . that meet twice a week for an academic tenn (16 weeks). In addition, considerable independent study is (Applied Linguistics) (Concordia) D . F R A N K E L . B . A . (Concordia), M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) required outside of the formal instruction period. There D. J O N E S , B . A . , M . A . (Dalhousie), P h . D . ( S F U ) are also some flexible self-study courses available in Y . M c C O L L , B . A . (Simmons), M . E d . (Harvard) Math. E . M c I N N E S - R A N K l N , B . A . (Univ. of Winnipeg), Either the Adult Basic Education program or the preparatory courses offered in the University Transfer departments may satisfy your upgrading needs. Students should refer to the Adult Basic Education section of the Calendar or contact the program coordinator. For information on other preparatory courses consult the A d v i s i n g Centre or Counselling Department. M.A. (UBC) S. M I T C H E L L , B.S., E d . ( N . Illinois), M . A , ( U V i c ) S. S O H I , M . A . ( U B C ) S. W A L L S T E R , M . E d . (Montana) General Information The Achievement Resource Centre courses are intended for students who wish to increase their learning efficiency. A R C credit courses serve to improve retention and promote effective study techniques. Courses A R C . 092 — Success Strategies for the College Classroom A R C . 100 — Strategies for Student Success A R C . 105 — College Reading and Study Skills A R C . 110 — Reading Dynamics Pre pa ra tory Prog ra ms 59 A D U L T BASIC A . G . T H O M L 1 N S O N , B.A., M.Sc. (UBC). B . C . EDUCATION Teacher's Cert. R. W E D E L . B . A . ( S F U ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. Please note: Offerings and procedures at the Sechelt D . E . Y O U N G . B . A . ( S F U ) , S . R . N . (London), S . C . M . campus and Squamish campus are slightly different. Contact the local ABE coordinator. (Scotland), D i p . T . N . (London), M . F . A . ( U B C ) Instructional General Information Faculty D . J . A T H A I D E , B.Sc., (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . The Adult Basic Education ( A B E ) program enables ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. you to upgrade your knowledge o f E n g l i s h , mathemat- D. B E N T L E Y ics, biology, chemistry, earth sciences, physics, T . R . B R A N D , B . S c . ( S F U ) , B . E d . ( U B C ) , Teachers Cert geography, history, social studies and computers. Y o u M . C . C A I R N S , B . S c . (Math) (Calgary), A l t a . Teach. may select from one to five subjects, depending upon Cert. your educational and occupational goals. Y o u can D. C A P O N pursue any o f the following goals: D . D H A M M I , B . S c . (Hons.) Chemistry & Energy • Studies ( U . o f Brighton), Cert. Teacher Training, • England. preparation for employment personal desire to upgrade or refresh mastery o f a subject B . D R U R Y , B . S c . (Brock) • J. F I E L D , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h . D . (University o f Queensland) V . G I E S B R E C H T , B . A . (Western Washington U ) . M . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. H I N D , B . A . (1st Class Hons.) ( S F U ) . M . A . ( U B C ) secondary school qualifications demanded by employers • vocational training (including apprenticeships) • career training • technical training • academic studies (including college and university P. H O D G S O N , B . A . (Hons). B . E d . (Queen's) M . E d . programs) (UBC) The program operates year-round, offering instruction C. B. M A C L E A N , B.Ed. (SFU), M . E d . ( U B C ) • in two-hour classes. Both self-paced and term-paced G . N E W M A N , B . A . (Hons.), Post-graduate Certificate of Education (Leeds University), B . C . Teacher's classes are offered. Placement in courses is based on pre-registration assessment o f academic background. Cert. J. P A S S , B . A . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. R O S E , B . A . (Western), B . C . Teacher's Cert., M . E d . (UBC) G . B . R U D O L P H , B.Sc. ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert.. M.Ed. (UBC) C . S C H O E N , M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) . B . A . (Carleton) J . B . T A L L O N . B . A . . (Hons.)(Carleton). B . E d . ( U . o f T.), B . C . Teacher's Cert. Many students benefit by enrolling in A B E courses while registered in university transfer or career/ vocational programs at the College. Students who need more than four months to complete a course may re-register i f they are attending and progress is satisfactory. Students who finish a course before the end o f the term may immediately register for Courses Fundamental Intermediate Advanced Provincial Level BENG 021* 031* 040 or 041 042* BSCI 021 032* BMTH 021* 031 * 041 or 045* 046 042 BCHM 041 BESC 041 BPHY 041 042 BBIO 041 or 042 042 BGEO 042 BHST 042 BSOC BCMP 031* 031 041 041 * Required for Certificate or D i p l o m a Advanced math is a prerequisite for Provincial Level For further details please arrange an assessment/interview by phoning 9K4-4971 Preparatory Programs 60 — *Choose 3 "Choose 2 042 _ the next higher course in the given subject. High Advanced and Provincial level A B E courses may also enrolment may necessitate limiting students to a be used for transfer credit towards a B . C . Adult Senior maximum of three classes in a subject area. Secondary School Graduation Certificate. Class times arc as follows: M o r n i n g classes: 8:30 a.m. and 10:30 a.m. Afternoon classes: M o n d a y - I 2 : 3 0 p.m. and 2:30 p.m., Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday-2:30 p.m., Courses ENGLISH B E N G 021 — Friday—1:3() p.m. Evening classes: 7 p.m. Contact: North Vancouver Campus: 984-4971 Sechelt Campus: 885-9310 (Toil-Free: 987-1535) Squamish Campus: 892-5322 (Toll Free: 986-3515) Fundamental Level English: Essential Writing Skills, Spelling and W o r d Attack B E N G 031 — B E N G 040 — Intermediate Level English: Mechanics, Basic Skills and Paragraph Writing Advanced L e v e l English: ShortReport Writing Admission Requirements B E N G 041 — out o f the public school system for a minimum of one Advanced English: A d v a n c e d Report Writing Students should be at least 18 years old and preferably B E N G 042 — year. Exceptions w i l l only be made with departmental Provincial L e v e l English: Critical Reading and Essay W r i t i n g approval. Students should apply at least three months prior to anticipated date o f entry. SOCIAL STUDIES B S O C 031 — Intermediate Level Social Studies Registration B S O C 041 — Advanced Level Social Studies Students arc interviewed before registration in order to B G E O 042 — Advanced Level Geography determine the course(s) or program which best meets B H S T 042 - Provincial Level History their educational goals. R e g u l a r attendance a n d satisfactory progress are conditions for rc-rcgistration COMPUTER STUDIES in A B E courses. Students may be directed to other B C M P 031 — Intermediate Level Computer Studies programs i f their attendance and performance in A B E B C M P 041 — Advanced Level Computer Studies B C M P 042 — Provincial Level Computer Studies docs not match their stated educational goals. MATHEMATICS ABE Certificates & Diploma The A B E program offers courses at four levels as outlined in the table: T h e P r o v i n c i a l D i p l o m a , issued by the Ministry of Education, Skills and Training, provides an alternate route for adults to achieve a Grade 12 standing to postsecondary institutions in B . C . B M T H 021 — Fundamental L e v e l Mathematics B M T H 031 — Intermediate Level Mathematics B M T H 045 — Advanced Level Math - Algebra & Trigonometry B M T H 046 — Provincial Level Math - Algebra & Trigonometry Intermediate & A d v a n c e d Certificates arc issued by Capilano College and provide prerequisites for career and vocational programs throughout the province. SCIENCES B S C I 032 — Intermediate Level General Science F u n d a m e n t a l level instruction provides basic reading B B I O 041 — Advanced L e v e l Biology B B I O 042 — Provincial Level Biology B C H M 041 — Advanced Level Chemistry B C H M 042 — Provincial Level Chemistry and writing skills and number skills. A B E certificates also satisfy most employers' requirements. Certain high school courses may qualify as transfer credit toward A B E certificates and the Provincial Diploma. B S C I 021 — B E S C 041 — Fundamental Level General Science Advanced Level Earth and E n v i r o n mental Sciences The program also offers instruction for students preparing for the General Education Development B P H Y 041 — Advanced Level Physics (Grade 12 equivalency) tests. B P H Y 042 — Provincial L e v e l Physics Preparatory Programs 61 ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING Admission Requirements The A C T Foundations program is in session for eight months (two terms). Classes are offered for nine weeks, with community work/volunteer practicums offered for an additional six weeks in the fall term. Foundations Program D u r i n g the spring term, classes w i l l be held for six Instructional Faculty weeks with an additional nine weeks of work/volunteer Terry B Y R N E S , M . A . ( U V i c ) practicums. Entry is by referral and interview. Students R. D A M O N may combine their in-class work with self-selected Jann G I B B S , R . S . W . volunteer or employment training sites based upon Priscilla S T A N B U R Y , B . A . ( U B C ) , Cert, o f E d . aptitude, attitude, ability and interest. (London) Each candidate is interviewed by the program faculty, Lavcrnc T H O M P S O N . M . E d . (Lesley College) and a m a x i m u m o f 14 students w i l l be admitted. Some students may elect to take the program part-time, and General Information students may be accepted for a second year by faculty The Alternative Career Training Foundations program permission. is an employment exploration program with a unique Appointments for interviews take place between focus and approach. The program is based on a devel- January 15 and A p r i l 15, with interviews and letters to opmental perspective and is committed to working with the successful candidates sent by M a y 30. young adults with special learning needs. Students are educated to accept the responsibilities o f independent l i v i n g as young adults, as well as the demands o f competitive entry-level employment, and w i l l be able Courses A C T P 001 — Techniques to address social or emotional issues which could act as barriers to employment. The A C T program combines A C T P 002 — in-class instruction with practical work experience, emphasizing the development or maintenance o f skills that best fits their needs. Personal goals w i l l be set and monitored throughout the year. Contact: Terry Byrnes, Coordinator 984-1711 Student Profile Occupational Preparation and Safety in the Workplace A C T P 005 — which may be used in employment situations. Students meet with faculty to discuss an individual course plan Job Search and Maintenance Visual and Print Communication Skills A C T P 006 — Leisure Education A C T P 007 — Consumer Preparation A C T P 008 — Interpersonal Communications A C T P 009 — W o r k Experience Students who w i l l find the A C T program beneficial arc learning or developmentally delayed, as well as individuals who have physical disabilities that still allow them to meet employment requirements.- In ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE addition, they may present any or all of the following characteristics: a) difficulty grasping academic information (for example, mathematical problem solving, reading print, writing) b) persons with a disability. Students who w i l l obtain the most benefit from the A C T program are those who have reached a moderate level o f independence (i.e. they are responsible for self- Instructional Faculty M . A C I M O V I C . B . A . (Belgrade), T E S L Cert. (George Brown College). M . E d . (OISE/UT) J. A C O S T A , B . A . ( U C , Berkeley), E . S . L . Cert. (San Francisco State U.) D. B O U V I E R , B . A . (London School of Economics), P G C E Postgraduate Certificate in Education ( L o n don University), M . A . ( U C S D ) care; they travel independently locally: they have had E. C H A N G . B . A . (Calgary). M . E d . ( U B C ) some work or volunteer experience: they can articulate N . J . C O L L I N S , B . A . (London). M . A . , Professional several areas of interest or a willingness to try various work sites). Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) J. F A R N A N , B . A . Hons. English ( S F U ) , P . D . P . ( B . C . Professional Teaching Cert. ( S F U ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) Preparatory Programs 62 S. HALSALL, B.A. (SFU), M.B.A. (McGill) C. HOPPENRATH, B.A., M.Ed. (UBC) W. HUGHES, B.I.S. (Waterloo), M.F.A. (UBC), T.E.S.L. Cert. (VCC) D. JOHNSTONE, B.A., M.A., TESL (American University in Cairo) C. JUNG, B.A., TESL Cert., M.A. M. REAGH, B.A. (Dalhousie U. - King's College), M.A. T.E.S.O.L. (S.I.T. Vermont) L. RENES, B.A., M.A. (UT), T.E.S.L. Cert. (George Brown College) J. RITCHIE, B.A., M.A., (St.F.X.) Adult Education A. SEDKY, B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Ain Shams University) H. SLOAT, B.A. (Queen's), T.E.S.L. Cert. (UVic), M.A. - T.E.S.L. (Concordia) A. SOUZA, B.A., M.A. (UBC) E. WITKOWSKI, M.A. (Jaqiellonian), B.C. Professional Teaching Cert. L. ZHANG, B.A., M.A., (Nanjing), M.Ed. (U. of Alta.), BC/Albcrta Professional Teaching Cert. Documents and Official Transcripts Official records (grade reports, transcripts, etc.) of all secondary, post-secondary or equivalent education must be submitted with the application, whether or not the course of study has been completed. These records should indicate the individual courses studied and the marks or grades received. If your records arc in a language other than English, please provide certified English translations and the original documents. Replaceable documents submitted in support of your application become the property of the College and will not be returned. Other documents will be returned, upon request. If any document is in a name different to that under which application is made, proof of change of name (marriage certificate, court order, etc.) is required. Application Fee Canadian citizens or permanent residents: English as a Second Language (ESL) courses offer landed immigrants and international students a variety of Intermediate, Advanced and College Preparatory English courses to help them improve their competency in English for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. Courses cover reading, writing, speaking, listening and grammar skills. ESL courses are offered part-time, day and evening. Contact: 984-4971 Fax: 984-1718 Admission Procedures/Requirements Application Application for Admission forms arc available from the Registrar's Office. Applications and supporting official transcripts and documents should be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, by the following dates: Fall Term (Sept. to Dec): July 1 Spring Term (Jan. to Apr.): October 1 Summer Term (May to Aug.): February 1 Address all applications to: Registrar's Office Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B.C., Canada Telephone: (604)984-4913 Fax (604) 984-1798 A non- refundable fee of $20 and a $25 document evaluation fee must accompany your Application for Admission. International students: A non-refundable fee of $ 100 (Canadian funds) must accompany your Application for Admission. Admission Once all documents and records have been received, we will consider your application. If you arc admitted, the College will send you an official letter of admittance by mail. English Language Requirements Canadian Citizens a n d Landed Immigrants Once students arc accepted, they will be contacted by the ESL Department to come in and write the ESL placement test. Students who wish to enrol in ESL as well as other courses in University Transfer, Career, Vocational, or Adult Basic Education courses should refer to the General Information- Admission section in this Calendar. International Students For the English as a Second Language (ESL) program the College requires one of the following: • a valid English Language Assessment (ELA) test score of 55-144 OR • a valid Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) score of 400-560, plus the ESL Department Placement Test. Preparatory Programs 63 International students are strongly encouraged to Upper register in the full-time E S L program described below E S L . 061 — Advanced in order to obtain the utmost benefit from their Listening experience at Capilano College. E S L . 068 — Courses Offered - Full-Time Upper Advanced Speaking & Upper Advanced Reading & Vocabulary Program Upper Beginners ESLF020 (15) (20,0,0) L o w e r Intermediate ESLF030 (15) (20,0,0) Upper Intermediate ESLF040 (15) (20,0,0) L o w e r Advanced ESLF050 (15) (20,0,0) Upper Advanced ESLF060 (15) (20,0,0) E S L . 069 — College Prep Level I E S L . 071 — E S L . 078 — writing, reading and vocabulary building. Students College Preparatory E n g l i s h L e v e l I Listening & Speaking These are full-time intensive E S L courses which cover all skills: speaking, listening, pronunciation, grammar, Upper Advanced W r i t i n g & Grammar College Preparatory E n g l i s h L e v e l I Reading & Vocabulary E S L . 079 — College Preparatory English L e v e l I W r i t i n g & Grammar attend class 20 hours a week. College Prep Level II Courses Offered - Regular Program Speaking & Listening Lower Intermediate ESL. 031 Upper Intermediate ESL.041 Reading & Writing & Vocabulary Grammar ESL.038 ESL 039 ESL.048 ESL 049 Lower Advanced Upper Advanced E S L . 081 — ESL.051 ESL. 061 ESL. 058 ESL. 068 ESL 059 ESL 069 College Prep Level I ESL. 071 College Prep Level II ESL. 081 College Prep Level III ESL. 091 ESL. 078 ESL. 088 ESL. 098 ESL 079 ESL 089 ESL 099 College Preparatory E n g l i s h L e v e l II Listening & Speaking E S L . 088 — College Preparatory E n g l i s h L e v e l II - E S L . 089 — College Preparatory English L e v e l II - Reading & Vocabulary W r i t i n g & Grammar College Prep Level III E S L . 098 — College Preparatory English L e v e l III - Reading & Vocabulary E S L . 099 — College Preparatory E n g l i s h L e v e l III Courses Lower - W r i t i n g & Grammar Intermediate E S L . 031 — L o w e r Intermediate Speaking & TOEFL *ESL.066 — T O E F L Preparation I * E S L . 076 — T O E F L Preparation II Listening E S L . 038 — L o w e r Intermediate Reading & Vocabulary E S L . 039 — Upper L o w e r Intermediate Grammar & Writing Intermediate E S L . 041 — Upper Intermediate Speaking & Listening E S L . 048 — * These courses are funded solely by tuition fees and w i l l only be offered i f there are enough students. FIRST NATIONS COLLEGE PREPARATION PROGRAM Upper Intermediate Reading & Vocabulary Instructional Faculty D. B E N T L E Y E S L . 049 — Upper Intermediate W r i t i n g & Grammar Lower Advanced E S L . 051 — L o w e r Advanced Speaking & Listening G . N E W M A N , B . A . (Hons) Post-graduate Cert, o f Education (Leeds University), B . C . Teachers Cert. S. M U R R A Y , B . E d . ( T . E . S . L . ) (Concordia) M . A . (Applied Linguistics) (Concordia) G . B . R U D O L P H , B . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert., M.Ed. (UBC) E S L . 058 — L o w e r Advanced Reading & Vocabulary E S L . 059 — L o w e r Advanced W r i t i n g & Grammar J. R O S E , B . A . (Western), B . C . Teacher's Cert.. M . E d . ( U B C ) , Coordinator Advising P. S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) First Nations A d v i s o r D . G A D D I E , B . A . ( U . of R.) L i a i s o n Officer Preparatory Programs 64 General Information The First Nations College Preparation program has been developed at Capilano College's North Vancouver campus in cooperation with the First Nations of the C o l l e g e ' s region. The objective of the program is to improve the partici- ** Refer to the ABF brochure for details ABF courses and certificates. regarding Admission Requirements Applicants should be at least 18 years of age, be o f First Nations ancestry and have Grade 10 or equivalent. Placement in A B E courses is done through assessment pation and success rates of First Nations students who and interview with the Coordinator. A Basic Skills are making the transition to post-secondary institutions. Assessment is also required to assist education coordinators and College faculty in predicting success The design and content o f the program offers a holistic educational experience that integrates social and educational aspects of successful college preparation. The program helps students to gain confidence at college by developing college life skills while gaining academic qualifications. Admission form, available from the Registrar's Office The core courses for the two-term program are drawn at the North Vancouver campus. For application from two well established areas in the College: the information, contact: A d u l t Basic Education ( A B E ) Department and the Achievement Resource Centre ( A R C ) . Contact: Judy Rose, Coordinator 983-7578 or 983-7573; Fax: 984-1718 and providing academic supports. How to Apply A l l students must complete an Application for Judy Rose, Coordinator Foundation D i v i s i o n , Capilano College Birch B u i l d i n g , R o o m 344 2055 Purcell W a y , North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 Tel: (604) 983-7578 or 983-7573; Fax: (604) 984-1718 COURSE CONTENT - Core Program See course descriptions for further information. FALL TERM A R C . 1 0 0 - 3 credits English - 3 credits Three multi-level classes per week in the A B E ' s Applications must be submitted, together with the $20 application fee and official copies o f secondary and/or post-secondary transcripts to: Registrar's Office Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y Intermediate (031). A d v a n c e d (041) or Provincial North Vancouver, B . C . , Canada (042) English. V7J 3H5 Mathematics - 3 credits Three multi-level classes per week in the A B E ' s Fundamental (021), Intermediate (031), Advanced (045) or Provincial (046) Mathematics. Computer Studies - 1 credit One class per week to improve keyboarding skills, gain experience with D O S and learn M S W o r d for W i n d o w s for credit in A B E ' s Intermediate (031), Advanced (041), or Provincial (042) Computer Studies. Registration Students must participate in an assessment interview before registration in the program. T h i s interview offers an opportunity to plan the program which w i l l best meet the student's educational goals. F o l l o w i n g the interview, the Coordinator w i l l contact education coordinators to arrange registration. Attendance Due to the intense nature o f the program, regular SPRING TERM attendance is essential. The Coordinator distributes attendance and progress reports to education A R C . 110- 3 credits English - 3 credits Mathematics - 3 credits coordinators twice each tenn in order to provide both the students and the funding agents with ongoing feedback. Computer Studies - 1 credit Fees Note: * Coordinator core approval is required for changes in the Fees are paid at the beginning of each term at registration. program. Prepara tory Programs 65 4. independent in-residence time SPEECH ASSISTED READING A N D WRITING 5. independent lab time at the College. Students registered in the class w i l l have a complete S A R A W computer station installed in their residence. Instructional Faculty S A R A W can also be installed into a student's existing D. B E N T L E Y computer, provided it is a compatible system. This L . F O S S , B . A . (Carleton), M . A . Counselling Psych. system w i l l be on loan from C a p i l a n o College to the (Adler School of Professional Psychology) D . K I R K B Y , B . E . D . (Winnipeg) J. T H E R I A U L T , B . A . (Waterloo) R . W E D E L , B . A . ( S F U ) , B C Teacher's Certificate General Information students for the length of their registration in the class. The S A R A W program uses trained tutors to assist students with the completion o f course work as assigned by the instructor. A s the type o f tutorial assistant required by S A R A W learners is unique, the department reserves the right to appoint specifically The S A R A W program, offered by the Foundations for trained tutors to work with students registered in the Independent L i v i n g Department, offers literacy class. upgrading to students w h o have physical disabilities, limited or no speech and rely on the use o f low technological communication devices such as C a n n o n communicators, B l i s s y m b o l i c boards etc. Speech Assisted Reading and W r i t i n g ( S A R A W ) offers an Students are encouraged to act in a mature, independent manner regarding decision making, transportation and completion of assignments. Transportation arrangements are the responsibility of the student. Contact: Don Kirkby, Coordinator, 983-7582 unprecedented range of opportunities to explore and address the literacy needs of this unique group of learners. Admission Requirements S A R A W classes at Capilano College's North Vancou- Students interested in enrolling in S A R A W classes ver campus enable students to upgrade their literacy must first arrange an interview with the department. level using computers with adaptive, voice synthesized They should be able to demonstrate a firm knowledge technology. Students set goals for each semester which are evaluated on an ongoing basis. Some examples of goals set by students are: 1. to learn to read personal correspondence independently 2. to improve the reading and understanding o f employment related print material 3. to achieve high school equivalency. These goals are personal in nature and represent the individual's o w n needs for literacy achievement. The accumulation o f individual achievements may lead to formal higher education such as that offered by an A d u l t Basic Education program. The classes are held over two semesters (fall and spring), offering students self-paced instruction in various time slots. Students must attend a m i n i m u m o f 20 hours per week. Graduates have accomplished this through various combinations o f 1. in-lab instruction at the College 2. in-rcsidencc instruction 3. in-rcsidencc tutorials Preparatory Programs 66 of the alphabet and the sounds related to each letter. They should also be able to articulate a goal for literacy upgrading. Students w i l l be asked to produce a short writing sample to identify strengths and weaknesses in reading and writing. History, Political Studies, Psychology, Sociology, W o m e n ' s Studies Pure and Applied Sciences Division (984-4955): Transfer Biology, Chemistry, Computing Science, Engineering, Environmental Science (post-baccalaureate program), University transfer courses at Capilano College provide Geology, Kinesiology, Mathematics and Statistics, students with a variety o f options. Students can select a Physics full program o f study equivalent to the first two years of university (see note on Course Selection and A d v i s ing), and can enrol on a full-time or part-time basis. Visual and Performing Arts Division (984-4911): Textile Arts, Studio Art, Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer, Jazz Studies, Theatre University transfer courses are o f interest both to students who plan to transfer to a university and to students who do not intend to continue to upper-level Associate in Arts and Science Degree studies. Capilano College offers Associate Degrees in Arts and For those students who need extra help in basic skills, in Science for two years o f university-level study in accordance with the requirements outlined under the Capilano College offers preparatory courses and Graduation/Diplomas and Certificates section o f the academic support services (see Writing Centre, the Achievement Resource Centre and the Math Learning Calendar. Centre in the Services section o f this Calendar). Students interested in special fields o f study such as Diploma in Academic Studies Canadian Studies, Environmental Science, W o m e n ' s Students who have completed the requirements o f any Studies, or Labour Studies can select from innovative four-term College program may receive a Diploma in programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). Academic Studies, provided they have fulfilled the A c a d e m i c instruction at Capilano College is both conditions as outlined under the Graduation/Diplomas and Certificates section o f the Calendar. disciplinary and inter-disciplinary and is o f a high intellectual calibre. The College carefully reviews the Transfer content and the delivery methods o f its university transfer courses to ensure that those courses arc current and that they continue to meet university standards. Students in university transfer courses should expect to work at least two to three hours outside o f class for every hour o f class time. All courses English. require basic literacy in written and spoken That is, students nuist be able to understand texts and oilier written materials, and the words, and must be able to write assignments correct English. Students who are not sure their is good enough should talk to the instructor available from A d v i s i n g or Counselling, and in the pertinent instructional division. Transfer to other institutions: The Arts and Sciences Division maintains transferability o f its courses with other post-secondary institutions. The C o l l e g e ' s the representatives meet regularly with those o f other in year courses arc fully transferable as university instructor's spoken Full information on transfer o f specific courses is institutions to ensure that C a p i l a n o ' s first and second English or an advisor before taking the course. courses. Transfer from other institutions: There is agreement among all public B . C . colleges to accept each other's The College offers a library collection and full media credits upon transfer, if applicable to a program given and reference services to complement the courses of in the admitting college, and given suitable equiva- study. lency. Capilano College reserves the right to review The Arts and Science Division offers a range of individual course credit. courses in various disciplines which are grouped in Transfer credits are granted to students on admission four divisions as follows: Humanities Division (984-4957): Art History, C h i - for acceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number o f credits Philosophy, Spanish which are required at Capilano College for a certificate, diploma, or Associate Degree. Students wishing Social Science Division (984-4953): Anthropology, the Registrar's Office for adjudication by the appropri- Commerce. C r i m i n o l o g y , Economics, Geography, ate faculty. A l l approved transfer credits arc noted o n nese, English, French, German, Japanese, Linguistics, transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the student's Permanent Student Record. University Transfer 69 Transfer information accurate to the time of printing is Self-Study Courses to be found in the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano In keeping with the C o l l e g e ' s policy for the develop- College Transfer G u i d e . Students are urged to read this ment o f alternative instructional modes, it is possible guide when establishing their programs of study. The for students to pursue studies in Precalculus and B . C . Transfer Guide is available on the Internet at Calculus I on a self-study format. M A T H 110 (Calcu- www.bccat.bc.ca/menutg.html. The Capilano College lus I) is offered on a video-based format. Refresher Transfer Guide is available in paper format at the courses in math through the Grade 12 level are also Bookstore at a cost o f $2. available in a self-study format. These packaged courses, prepared for home study with University Transfer Course Descriptions the aid o f study guides, videotapes and computer- F u l l descriptions of all university transfer courses can unable to maintain regular attendance at the North assisted instruction, are designed for students who are be found in the alphabetical listings in the course Vancouver, Sechelt or Squamish campuses. They are description section of this Calendar. Students are urged also available to students who are attending any of to read the general discipline information included in these campuses, providing them with a viable alterna- each section carefully. Students arc responsible for tive to the usual classroom lecture/tutorial instructional being familiar with the special information needed to format. select university transfer courses. Registration Priority Course Selection and Advising In some courses with high demand, registration priority A d v i s i n g and Counselling assist students in selecting w i l l be given to students who have not attempted the the best program o f studies. The final responsibility for course previously at Capilano College. Students who course selection, however, rests with students. A l l have attempted the course within the last year may not university transfer students are advised to see an be allowed to register without the instructor's permis- advisor or a counsellor to plan their courses o f study. sion. Registration procedures for A r t and M u s i c programs English Entrance Requirements Students who wish to enrol in English courses may be are detailed in the Calendar section for the particular program. required to write a placement test, B E F O R E R E G I S T E R I N G IN A N Y E N G L I S H C O U R S E . See the Registration section o f this Calendar for information about the English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) . Math Entrance Requirements O n l y those students with sufficiently high grades in prerequisite courses completed within the previous year w i l l be allowed to enrol directly in Precalculus ( M A T H 105, 107) or Calculus I ( M A T H 108, 1 10, Lab/Course Relationship M a n y courses require that students complete a lab and/ or tutorial. Students should ensure that they are aware of lab/tutorial requirements and the timetable for these components. Students should note that it is necessary to pass both labs and lectures. The cost of the lab is included in the tuition fee, except for lab manuals and some field trip costs. 116) or Discrete Mathematics I ( M A T H 124) without SPECIAL PROGRAMS writing a placement test. A l l other students wishing to 1. W o m e n ' s Studies Program enrol in one of these courses must write a placement test prior to registration. Please refer to the Mathematics section o f the Calendar for the direct entry and placement test requirements for each o f these courses. A W o m e n ' s Studies program, consisting o f a variety of university transfer credit, college credit and credit-free courses, has been developed at Capilano College. In addition to the W o m e n ' s Studies program courses, See the Registration section of this Calendar for information about the Math Placement Test ( M P T ) . University 70 Transfer there are career and university transfer courses in other disciplines of special interest to women. 2. Writing Across the Curriculum Sections discipline. In the fall term, a small number of E N G L I(X) (Compo- A P P L Y T O T H E R E G I S T R A R to have the Specialty sition) sections are paired with a section of another added to your D i p l o m a at the time of graduation. Course descriptions appear under the appropriate course. Students planning to take E N G L 100 (Composition) should consider enrolling in one o f these W r i t i n g Across the Curriculum sections as identified in the course timetable. Instruction in the two courses w i l l be coordinated, with the writing assignments in the English course growing out of the content of the other course. Students w i l l receive the full three credits for both courses, and w i l l benefit from having two o f their subjects connected with each other. 4. Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Program The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program is a two-term, multidisciplinary program. It studies ethnic relations developed in the context o f the multicultural and polycthnic nature of Canadian society. It also explores the cross-cultural interaction among Native people, the founding English and French Canadian Please consult the English Department for information people, and the various immigrant groups that consti- on the paired sections for Fall 1998. tute the Canadian "mosaic." These all help to shape the 3. Canadian Studies Specialty program also examines the international aspect of national character and the culture o f this country. The Students who wish to concentrate their studies on Canadian content courses can choose courses from the list below. A l l courses (except some Labour Studies courses) hold full transfer credit and transfer into the Canadian Studies program at S F U . T o qualify for a cross-cultural communication, which is o f special meaning to Canada because immigrant communities here can maintain healthy contacts with their countries of origin. The program includes the various disciplines involved Canadian Studies Specialty, complete a College in ethnic studies: history, geography, anthropology, diploma with at least 24 credits from the following list. sociology, political studies and urban studies, religious Choose these credits from courses in at least three studies, communications, language and literature. different departments. O f the 24 credits you choose, at There arc no special criteria for student selection, least six must be numbered 200 or above. For a although students must formally register for the two- Canadian Studies Specialty to be applied to a General term Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Certificate, Studies D i p l o m a , an English or Communications which w i l l be awarded upon completion of the pro- course is required. gram. Fall To complete the program, a student needs to earn 30 credits. Specialized courses in ethnic relations and two English courses are required: the rest can be chosen from a variety of electives. A l l the program's courses (except Labour Studies) have transfer credit to the provincial universities where the student can work towards a degree in Ethnic Studies. Simon Fraser University also has recently developed a graduate program in this field. A N T H 204, 206 B I O L 204 E N G L 202 F R E N 270 G E O G 106. 108 H I S T 1 10. 205. 1 1 1 L S P . KM). 1 10. 1 11. 1 15. I 17, 1 19, 142, 170, 181, 182, 210 P O L . 104 Capilano College's Continuing Education Department S O C . 200 may offer additional courses during the evenings for Spring people already working in job-related fields. A N T H 208 B I O L 105. 205 E N G L 203 F R E N 271 GEOG FIRST TERM REQUIRED: E N G L 100 — if approved). 108 G E O L 111 H I S T 110. 111. 208 L S P . 101. 110. 111.116. 131. 140. 181 P O L . 104 S O C . 201 Composition (or other English course A N T H 204 — Ethnic Relations ELECTIVES: Language: French, German, Spanish, Japanese, Chinese. University Transfer 71 A N T H 200 — Intermediate Social Anthropology or — Social Psychology or P S Y C 200 G E O G 100 — Human Geography. N o t e : BIOL 104 and CHEM 090 or CHEM 101 fulfil biology entrance requirements for the Nursing gram at BCIT. Completion pro- of BIOL 104 and BIOL permits students (upon entering Basic Health G E O G 106 — B . C . : A Regional Analysis or at BCIT) to receive creditfor S O C . 200 — Canadian Society or ii. Science Students H I S T 111 — Canada since Confederation or P O L . 104 — Canadian Government. SECOND TERM 113 Sciences BHSC 105. Capilano College Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n offers a first and second year university transfer program in biology, chemistry, computing science, mathematics & statistics, and physics, and first year REQUIRED: university transfer programs in engineering, geology E N G L 103 — Contemporary Literature and kinesiology. In addition, the Pure and A p p l i e d A N T H 205 — Multiculturalism Sciences D i v i s i o n offers science transfer requirements in the following: prc-Medicine, pre-Veterinary, pre- ELECTIVES: Second term of the language course taken in first term. Dcntistry, Oceanography, Forestry, Agriculture, Pharmacy. Home Economics, Rehabilitation M e d i c i n e , A N T H 206 — First Nations of B . C . and Dental Hygiene. A N T H 208 — Indigenous Peoples of North A m e r i c a iii. Engineering Program G E O G 205 — A s i a Pacific Geography L S P . 119 & 131 — C i v i l Rights and Race and Ethnic Relations at the Workplace Capilano College offers a first year university transfer program in engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years o f study at G E O G 201 — Urban Studies or U B C , S F U , or U V i c For additional information, S O C . 211 — Sociology of the Third W o r l d or consult the Engineering program section o f this G E O G 108 — Canada: A Nation of Regions Calendar. H I S T 205 — B.C. iv. Kinesiology Program S O C . 201 — B . C . Society or Capilano College offers a complete first year university P O L . 202 — transfer program in kinesiology designed for students Government and Politics o f B . C . 5. PURE AND APPLIED SCIENCES General Information planning to transfer to the Kinesiology Program at S F U for their second year. F o r additional information, consult the Kinesiology program section o f this Calendar. The following options are available from a wide range of pure and applied sciences. A. UNIVERSITY TRANSFER COURSES i. Non-Science Students Students planning to continue studies at a university are advised to consider the following courses to fulfil their science requirement. It should be noted that transfer credit for a number of these courses is limited to non-science students. Students should refer to individual discipline areas in this Calendar. B I O L 104. 105. 113 C H E M 101 C O M P 101, 102 G E O L 110, 111 G E O G 112, 114 M A T H 101, 102, 105, 107, 108, 109 Please check the prerequisites given in the individual course descriptions. University Transfer 72 B. POST-BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA PROGRAM i. Asia Pacific Management Co-operative Post-Baccalaureate Diploma Program * See A s i a Pacific Management Co-operative PostBaccalaureate D i p l o m a program in this Calendar. ii. Environmental Science Program Capilano College offers a one-year Post Baccalaureate D i p l o m a program in environmental science for students who have already completed a degree in science or engineering and who are interested in further practical studies in environmental fields. For additional information, consult the Environmental Science Post Baccalaureate D i p l o m a program section o f this Calendar. ANTHROPOLOGY Instructional Faculty C . B I L L , B . A . ( U V i c ) , M . A . (Trent), P h . D . (Tulanc) G . C R O W T H E R , B . S c . (London), M . Phil., P h . D ART HISTORY Instructional Faculty J. J U N G I C B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) D. N E A V E , B . A . (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c . ) P. S I N G E R , B . A . (George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . (Cambridge) K . L I N D , B.A., M.A. (UBC) (Concordia) R. M U C K L E , B . A . . M . A . ( S F U ) C. W I L L I A M S , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . A . (Leeds) General Information General Information Anthropology is the study of humankind, offering Art History concerns itself with visual culture both past views on the human condition from evolutionary and and present. V i s u a l art is explored and analyzed in comparative perspectives. B y developing an under- order to understand how it is composed and con- standing and appreciation of cultural and biological structed and how it functions as a carrier and producer diversity, courses in anthropology should be beneficial of meaning within society. Analytical tools that to all students. Students who have career aspirations as promote the critical decoding o f images, so relevant in anthropologists may find work in teaching, research, or today's world, are emphasized in all Art History museum studies. They may also work as consultants to courses. governments, corporations, and native groups. Major branches of anthropology include Social Anthro- University Transfer Credit pology, Archaeology, and Physical Anthropology. A l l Art History courses offered at Capilano College are Students intending to major or minor in anthropology transferable to U B C , S F U , and U V i c . Please check the or archaeology should take Anthropology 121 and one or both of Anthropology 123 and 124. Students B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer •Guide for further information. interested in a Canadian Studies Specialty should consider Anthropology 204, 206, and 208. The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program requires Anthro- Courses pology 204 and 205. A H I S 100 — The History of Art A H I S 101 — The History o f Art II University Transfer Credit A H I S 104 — Introduction to Visual Culture I A l l Anthropology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , A H I S 105 — Introduction to Visual Culture II U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide A H I S 106 — Pre-Columbian, African and Northwest or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses A N T H 121 — Introduction to Social Anthhropology A N T H 123 — Introduction to Archaeology A N T H 1 2 4 — Human Origins ANTH Coast Indigenous Art A H I S 107 — The Art o f India, C h i n a and Japan AHIS 109 — Women, Art and Art History AHIS 210— History of M o d e r n Art (19th Century) A H I S 211 — History o f M o d e r n A r t (20th Century) A H I S 220 — Early Renaissance Art in Italy A H I S 221 — High Renaissance and Mannerist A r t in 2 0 0 — Intermediate Social Anthropology Italy A N T H 202 — Anthropology and the Environment A H I S 231 — History o f Textile Art ANTH A H I S 232 — Aspects o f Textile Art 204 — Ethnic Relations A N T H 205 — Multiculturalism A N T H 206 — First Nations of British C o l u m b i a A N T H 208 — Indigenous Peoples of North A m e r i c a A N T H 241 — Archaeology Field School A N T H 249 — Comparative Cultures: A Field Study in Anthropology W M S T 122 — W o m e n in Anthropology University Transfer 73 Agriculture, Dentistry, Medicine and Pharmacy should BIOLOGY consult the institutions offering the programs to determine the specific B i o l o g y and other courses they Instructional Faculty require. Not all second year courses arc offered each C . B E R E Z O W S K Y , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . (Sask.), year. P h . D . (Guelph) R . G . C A M F I E L D , B . S c . (Hons.) (Monash), P h . D . A l l biology courses except B I O L 200. B I O L 201 and B I O L 206 require weekly laboratory periods and/or (UBC) M . D E J O N G - W E S T M A N , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . (UBC) M . F I T Z - E A R L E , B . S c . (Nottingham), M . S c . P h . D . (Toronto), Coordinator of Biology N . A . R I C K E R , B . A . (Calif.). M . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) field trips. L a b manuals for those courses requiring them must be purchased. Some courses also have field trips, which have extra costs associated with them. Some courses may have materials costs associated with them. V . M . T R O U P , B . S c . (Hons.) (McMaster), M . S c . University Transfer Credit (UBC) L . K . W A D E , B . S c . M.Sc. ( U B C ) , Ph.D. (Austral.Nat. U ) Laboratory Supervisors A l l biology courses transfer to S F U . U B C , and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano and Technicians College Transfer Guide for further information. C. B E A T S O N , B . Sc. (Waterloo), M . S c (Western), Laboratory Supervisor J. C A N N I N G , B . S c , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) . Laboratory Supervisor C . H A R R I S O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U V i c ) . Laboratory Technician J. R I C H A R D S O N , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , R . P . B i o . , Laboratory Supervisor C . S A N D E R S O N , B . S c . (Hons) (Durham). Laboratory Supervisor N . S E G S W O R T H , B . S c . (Hons.) (Michigan), R . T . ( C . S . L . T . ) , Laboratory Supervisor K . W A T T S , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Technician L . W O N G , D i p l . Tech ( B C I T ) Laboratory Technician General Information Capilano College Biology Department offers courses to meet a variety of educational needs. The B I O L 104/ 105 and 104/113 sequences meet the laboratory science requirements for Arts students as well as general interest biology courses. Students planning a major in Biology or another life University Transfer Program in Biology FIRST YEAR B I O L 106/107 or 110, and B I O L 111 C H E M 110/111 or 108/109 P H Y S 110/111 or 108/111 or 114/115 M A T H 110/111 or 116/1 17 and 126/127 English (six credits) SECOND YEAR A complete selection of second year courses w h i c h are transferable to all three B . C . universities is available. Consult the B i o l o g y Department for the specific requirements to transfer into third year at the university of your choice. COURSES B I O L 104 — Human B i o l o g y I BIOL 105— Environmental B i o l o g y B I O L 106 — Basic Introductory B i o l o g y I science, such as Botany, C e l l Biology, Ecology, B I O L 107 — Basic Introductory B i o l o g y II Genetics, Marine B i o l o g y , M i c r o b i o l o g y . Physiology, B I O L 110 — Introductory B i o l o g y I Oceanography or Z o o l o g y , should enrol in B I O L 106/ B I O L 111 — Introductory B i o l o g y II B I O L 113 — Human B i o l o g y II BIOL 200— Genetics I BIOL 201— Genetics II BIOL 204— Ecology I able which meet the credit transfer requirements of BIOL 205— Ecology II S F U , U B C and U V i c . Some of these courses may be B I O L 206 — Biology o f the Western Pacific included in the requirements for pre-professional B I O L 210 — Morphology o f Vascular Plants B I O L 212 — Invertebrate Z o o l o g y 107 or 110, and B I O L 111. Students lacking a " C + " in B I O L 12 (or B B I O 042) and/or Chemistry 11 should enrol in B I O L 106/107 rather than B I O L 110. A complete selection o f second year courses is avail- programs, and for specific life science programs. Students who intend to enter professions such as University Transfer 74 BIOL 213— Vertebrate Zoology BIOL 214— Cell Biology BIOL 215— Biochemistry B I O L 220 — Microbiology I BIOL 221— Microbiology II SECOND YEAR C H E M 200/201 and 204/205/206 Transfer to U B C or S F U (consult a faculty member) P H Y S 210/218 and 222 M A T H 200 and 230 Elective CHEMISTRY Instructional Faculty Science elective from math or physics S. A L B O N , B . S c , M . S c ( U B C ) M . E . E V A N S , B . S c . (South Wales), P h . D . (London. Students planning to pursue a major or honours course in chemistry should consult a faculty member as UK) P . C . L E C O U T E U R , B . S c , M . S c . (Auckland), P h . D . (Calif.), Chair, Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n T. C U S A N E L L I , B . S c , P h . D . ( S F U ) K . G . T Y E R S , B . S c . (Hons), M . S c . (Western Ontario), Ph. D . ( S F U ) , Coordinator of Chemistry, Geology Supervisors requirements differ with individual universities. Courses C H E M 030 — A n Introduction to Chemistry C H E M 0 9 0 — A n Introduction to Chemistry C H E M 101 — Fundamentals of Chemistry and Physics Laboratory Note: CHEM 110and 111 students: students who lack mathematics prerequisite or corequisites should see a Chemistry instructor prior to registration to discuss possible prerequisite waivers. and Technicians C H E M 110 — Bonding and Structure B . A D D I S O N - J O N E S , B . S c . (Hons) (Manitoba), C H E M 111 — Chemical Dynamics and Energetics Laboratory Supervisor K . B . H A C K , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor B . J . M O I R , D i p . Tech. ( B C I T ) , Laboratory Technician D . F . S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c . P h . D . ( U B C ) Laboratory C H E M 200 — Organic Chemistry I Supervisor I. S M I T H , H . N . C . (Aberdeen), Laboratory Supervisor C H E M 205 — Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry C H E M 201 — Organic Chemistry II C H E M 2 0 4 — Introduction to Physical Chemistry C H E M 206 — Introduction to Analytical Chemistry General Information A l l chemistry courses include weekly three-hour CHINESE laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. The cost of the labs is included in the course tuition fee except for Instructional lab manuals. Students arc required to have and wear Y . Q U , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . (Beijing safety glasses in all laboratory periods. C H E M 090 and C H E M 101 fulfill the entrance chemistry requirement for the Nursing program at B C I T . University Transfer Credit A l l chemistry courses, except 090 and 030, carry transfer credit to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Faculty Foreign Studies U.), P h . D . ( U B C ) Language Associate Fu, Z h i a i , B . A . (Beijing Language Institute) General Information A l l courses in Mandarin Chinese consist of four hours of lecture, one hour of conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). Students with a competence in the language beyond the Chemistry level of the course in which they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. F o r example, native speakers o f FIRST YEAR Mandarin and/or other Chinese dialects and those who C H E M 110/111 have taken Mandarin courses in high school are not P H Y S 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 M A T H 110/111 or 116/117 and 126/127 English (six credits) Elective (six credits) allowed in the first year courses. Students with some knowledge of Chinese must consult with an instructor for placement. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters University Transfer 75 relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to • Students not ready for M A T H 108 w i l l take M A T H avoid misunderstanding, students are invited to discuss 107, followed by M A T H 108 and 109. Students not these problems with the Department prior to enrolment. ready for M A T H 107 should see an advisor at the Students who are not sure of their language level must C o l l e g e ' s A d v i s i n g Centre to plan a preparatory year. consult an instructor. University Transfer Credit • N o t e : MATH 110/111, or 116/117 and 126/127 may be substituted for MATH 108/109, but this combination is oriented more toward science than business; The following Chinese courses at Capilano College d) F o u r electives: any four university transfer courses; transfer to U B C , S F U and U V i c . Please check the B . C . • Commerce students should N O T take Math 101 or Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide 102 and should also note that credit w i l l be granted for further information. for only one computer language—i.e. C O M P 101 or C O M P 102 but not both. Courses C H I N 100- Beginning Chinese I Year II C H I N 101 - Beginning Chinese II U p o n completion o f Y e a r I, students must A P P L Y for C H I N 150- Spoken Mandarin I: For Speakers o f admission to the Commerce program by completing a Other Chinese Dialects •'Commerce Program A p p l i c a t i o n " which can be C H I N 151 - Spoken Mandarin II: For Speakers o f Other Chinese Dialects CHIN 200- Intermediate Chinese I C H I N 201 - Intermediate Chinese II obtained from the Social Sciences D i v i s i o n . There are 36 scats available in Y e a r II and preference is given to students with the best Year I records who want to T A K E T H E E N T I R E Y E A R II P R O G R A M with the intention of transferring to U B C . Applications to the Commerce program should be made immediately in COMMERCE late spring once the Y e a r I courses arc complete and grades received. Students who wait until late summer may find that all spaces have been filled. Instructional Faculty J . E . S A Y R E , B . S . , B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c , M . S c (SFU) J . W A T E R S , B . A . (Hons.) M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) C . W A T K I S S , B . S c . (Carleton), M . S c . P h . D . (Toronto) J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A General Information In the fall term students admitted to Year II take: C O M M 290, 292, 293, E C O N 21 and one university transfer elective. A fall term Grade Point Average ( G P A ) o f 2.67 with no grade below C - must be achieved to continue into the spring term, when the following courses are taken: C O M M 291, 294, 297. 392 and one university transfer elective. The College offers a two-year transfer package to U B C consisting of Year I and Year II as follows: Year I Transfer to University of British Columbia The current policy o f U B C is to automatically admit Students do not need to apply to the Commerce into Year III all students who complete Capilano Department to enter the first year. S i m p l y apply to the C o l l e g e ' s Year II program (in one year) with a G P A in University Transfer program through the Registrar's Y e a r II o f 3.0 or higher. Office and ensure that the following courses are taken: a) E C O N 111 and 112: b) E N G L 100 followed by O N E o f E N G L 103. 104, 105, 106; c) M A T H 108 and 109 • the prerequisite to M A T H 108 is the Math Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion in the past year of Math 12 with a B grade or better, or M A T H 105. M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 with at least a C - grade. University Transfer 76 Transfer to Simon Fraser University or University of Victoria Some courses in the U B C transfer package do not transfer to S F U or U V i c . Students wishing to transfer to either of these institutions are, therefore, strongly urged to consult Counselling or A d v i s i n g to determine an alternative course of action. Courses Prerequisites C O M M 290—Quantitative Methods for Business The Computing Science Department requires at least a C O M M 291 — A p p l i c a t i o n s of Statistics in Business " C - " grade in a prerequisite before allowing a student C O M M 292 — P r i n c i p l e s o f Organizational Behaviour to proceed with a subsequent course. Students should note that while a " C - " is the m i n i m u m required to C O M M 293 — F i n a n c i a l Accounting proceed, a better grade is recommended to ensure the C O M M 2 9 4 — M a n a g e r i a l Accounting best chance o f success in the subsequent course and a C O M M 297 — C a p i t a l Markets and Institutions satisfactory G P A for transfer to a university. C O M M 392 — Labour Relations Students w i l l not be allowed to retake a prerequisite once they have completed a subsequent course with a " C - " grade or better. COMPUTING SCIENCE Courses Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c (UBC), Ph.D. C O M P 101 — Computers and their Applications C O M P 102 — Introduction to Programming (Waterloo), C . N . I . (Novell) R. B R E W S T E R , B . S c , M . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h . D . ( S F U ) P. C A R T E R , B . S c (Hons) (Sheffield), M . S c , P h . D . (UBC) Y . C O A D Y , B . S c (Gonzaga), M . S c ( S F U ) , C . N . I . (Novell) T. D A K I C , B . S c . M . S c . (Zagreb) E. K U T T N E R , B . S c , M . S c ( U B C ) C O M P 1 1 0 — Fundamentals o f Programming C O M P 111 — Fundamentals o f Computing C O M P 133 — Scheme and Computer Programming C O M P 201 — Computer Systems and Networks C O M P 212 — Computer Design and Architecture C O M P 2 2 2 — Data Structures C . W A T K I S S . B . S c (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto), C . N . I . (Novell), Coordinator D. W E S T C O T T , B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) General Information COMPUTING SCIENCE: DIPLOMA PROGRAM Capilano College has identified the need to offer formal recognition for the completion o f a certain set The Computing Science Department offers computing of courses in Computing Science. The D i p l o m a science courses at the first-year and second-year program in Computing Science provides both part-time university level. Students enrolled in these courses and full-time students an opportunity to obtain an have excellent access to the College's computing understanding of the fundamentals of computers and facilities. Students planning to major in computing programming, enabling students to secure many o f science and science students fulfilling computing today's computing career opportunities. science elective requirements normally take C O M P 110/111 in their first year. Other students wishing an Requirements: introduction to computers and programming normally Completion of 60 credit hours of course work (30 take C O M P 101. credits and the final 50% taken at Capilano College) with a minimum grade point average of 2.(K). Courses Computing courses are continuously being updated. Please contact the Computing Science Department for current course offerings and transfer status, or see our Web page at www.capcollegc.bc.ca. must include the following: English: 6 credits E N G L 100 Credits Composition 3.0 E N G L 103/104/105 University Transfer Credit Most Computing Science courses transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Math: 7.5 3.0 credits M A T H 105 Precalculus Mathematics 3.0 M A T H 110 Calculus I 4.5 (or 116/117) Communications: C M N S 250 3 credits Introduction to Technical W r i t i n g 3.0 University Transfer 77 Computing: 24 credits E C O N 100 is an introductory course w h i c h raises and C O M P 101 Introduction to Computing Scicnce3.0 C O M P 110 Fundamentals o f Programming 4.0 It therefore serves both as a survey course for those C O M P 111 Fundamentals o f Computing 3.0 students planning to major in other areas o f the social C O M P 133 Scheme and Computer explores the kinds of issues that economists deal with. sciences and as an introduction to the discipline for Programming 1.0 C O M P 201 Computer Systems & Networks 4.0 C O M P 222 Data Structures and Algorithms 3.0 M A T H 124 Discrete Mathematics I 3.0 One o f : those who are undecided about their future plans. Students who plan to major in Economics must c o m plete E C O N 111 and 112 before proceeding to second year courses at the College or the universities. Students who plan to major in economics at S F U are also C O M P 212 Computer Design & Architecture 3.0 advised to complete their second year economics C O M P 213 Software Engineering requirements from E C O N 250, 252, 290 or 291. E C O N N o t e : COMP 101 andlor MATH 3.0 105 requirements may be waived for those with appropriate background. 250 and 252 are designed both for students majoring in Economics and for other second year social science students who need economic history courses to c o m - N o t e : Those with equivalent elective or experience may plement their studies, e.g. Political Studies. Students have the CMNS 250 requirement who plan to enter the Commerce program must take waived. E C O N 111 and 112 in their first year. CRIMINOLOGY Instructional Faculty C . H A T H A W A Y , B . A . ( S . U . N . Y . ) M . A . (Wash U , University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all Economics courses transfer to the universities. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano Mo.) College Transfer Guide for further information. General Information Criminology is the study of all aspects of crime from Courses an interdisciplinary and integrative approach. The goal E C O N 1 0 0 — Introduction to Economics of Criminology is to reveal the complexities o f criminal behaviour and society's reaction to crime. C r i m i - E C O N 111 — Principles of M i c r o e c o n o m i c Theory nology also offers both theoretical and practical E C O N 112 — Principles of Macroeconomic Theory knowledge of the Canadian criminal justice system. E C O N 207 — Managerial Economics C R I M 101 transfers to S F U , U B C , and U V i c . E C O N 210 — Money and Banking E C O N 211 — Intermediate M i c r o e c o n o m i c A n a l y s i s Courses C R I M 101 - E C O N 212 — Intermediate Macroeconomic A n a l y s i s Introduction to Criminology ECONOMICS Instructional Faculty N . A M O N , B . A . , (Hons.) (Kent), M . A . ( S F U ) K . W . M O A K , B . A . (UVic), M . P . A . (UVic) A . J . M O R R I S , B . A . , (Hons.) (Manchester), M . A . (SFU) A . C . I . S . ( U K ) M . N I A , B . A . (Hons) (Tehran), M . A . (York) J.E. S A Y R E , B . S . , B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) M . Y A S E R I , B . A . (Hons) (Thames), M . A . (Sask.) General Information Economics is the social science concerned with the allocation of scarce resources and the production, distribution and consumption of goods and services. University Transfer 78 E C O N 250 — Economic History of the Pre-Industrial Era E C O N 252 — E c o n o m i c History o f the Industrial Era E C O N 290 — Public Policy I E C O N 291 — Public Policy II ENGINEERING in Electrical, Mechanical and Computer Engineering. The B . E n g . degree consists o f eight academic and six work terms. Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c ( U B C ) , Ph.D. (Waterloo), Convenor of Engineering R. H A U S C H I L D T , B . S c (Hons.) (Queen's), M.Sc(UBC) Students who complete first-year engineering at Capilano College with a grade point average of at least 2.5 may be eligible for admission to second year at UVic. General Information Admission Capilano College offers a full first-year university General transfer program in Engineering. Bachelor degree In addition to satisfying the general admission require- completion generally requires three additional years o f ments for the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section in this study at U B C , S F U or U V i c Calendar), students must apply for admission to the engineering program itself by submitting an "Engineer- Transfer to University of British Columbia The Capilano College first-year Engineering program is modelled after that of U B C . Students who complete ing Program A p p l i c a t i o n " , available from the Registrar's Office or the A d v i s i n g Centre. This form, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by the Registrar's Office before the end of M a r c h . first-year Engineering are eligible to be considered for admission to second-year Engineering at U B C pro- Enrolment w i l l be limited to 36 students, and students vided they have obtained an overall grade point w i l l be selected on the basis o f their academic record. average o f at least 2.5. Students who apply to the engineering program after The Faculty of A p p l i e d Science at U B C offers programs leading to the Bachelor o f A p p l i e d Science March risk having their applications denied due to lack of available spaces. ( B . A . S c . ) degree in the following areas of engineering: Note that students may be required to achieve an Bio-Resource, C h e m i c a l , C i v i l , Electrical, Geological, acceptable grade in a diagnostic test before enrolling in Mechanical, Metals and Materials, M i n i n g and Mineral some courses in the Engineering program (e.g. E N G L Process, and Engineering Physics. Students w i l l 100, M A T H 110 or 116). Please sec the individual normally complete the B . A . S c . degree with three department sections of the Calendar for details. additional years of study at U B C , except for Engineer- Prospective students arc encouraged to take these tests ing Physics, which requires four additional years. early to avoid delays in acceptance and/or registration. Transfer to Simon Fraser University Admission from Secondary School The School of Engineering Science at S F U offers fouryear programs leading to a Bachelor of Applied Science ( B . A . S c . ) degree in Electronics Engineering, Computer Engineering, Engineering Physics, B i o m e d i cal Engineering and Systems Engineering. Students entering the engineering program directly from secondary school must satisfy the general admission requirements of the College (sec " A d m i s s i o n " section in this Calendar) and have B . C . Grade 12 graduation (or equivalent) with at least a " B " in M a t h Students who complete first-year engineering at 12 and at least a " B " average in Chemistry 12 and Capilano College with a grade point average of at least Physics 12. High school students are encouraged to 3.0 may be eligible for admission to second-year graduate with English 12 and Calculus 12 if they intend engineering. Eligible students must contact S F U ' s to study Engineering. Poor performance in E n g l i s h and School o f Engineering Science to arrange for a summer Math hinders a student's ability to complete the course in Basic Electronics Engineering to allow for program and ultimately to obtain employment as an direct entry into semester three of the Engineering engineer. Science common core. Admission from First Year Science Transfer to University of Victoria Students may apply for admission to the Engineering The Faculty of Engineering at U V i c offers programs leading to the Bachelor of Engineering (B.Eng.) degree Transfer program after completion of some or all o f first-year science. A m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A in transferable University Transfer 79 courses is required to be eligible. Exemptions w i l l be given from some first-year engineering courses i f the student achieved a grade o f at least " C " in the equivalent science course. In that case, the student would then typically take a mix o f first-year engineering and second- year science courses. Admission as Part-Time or Mature Student Students who have been out o f school for a number o f Transfer to University U p o n completion o f the first year, students require a G P A of at least 2.5 to be eligible for admission into second-year engineering at U B C and U V i c , and a G P A of at least 3.0 for S F U . Since admission to engineering programs is very competitive, students should realize that the above minim u m G P A values d o not g u a r a n t e e a d m i s s i o n , and that specific engineering options may require values well in excess of the m i n i m u m . years and those who wish to begin their studies towards an Engineering degree on a part-time basis are encour- Curriculum aged to apply. Applicants w i l l be considered on an First Year Core (for direct entry f r o m secondary school) individual basis. Prospective students who have not studied Math, Physics or Chemistry for several years, or who lack grade 12 equivalency in any of these FIRST TERM subjects, are encouraged to upgrade their background A P S C 120 Introduction to Engineering 1.0 before applying. A l l students who do not have a good A P S C 150 Engineering Graphics 3.0 current mark in grade 12 equivalent Math course must C H E M 110 write the Math Placement Test. able for the spring term. Students must have successfully completed M A T H 110 or 116/117, C H E M 110 and P H Y S 114, with a m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A in transfer- Principles & Methods o f Chemistry I 3.0 C O M P 102 Introduction to Structured Programming 3.0 E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 Admission in January A limited number o f places in the program are avail- Credits M A T H 110 Calculus I (or 116/117) P H Y S 114 4.5 Fundamental Physics I 10 20.5 able courses, to be considered for admission. W i t h completion of Engineering courses usually offered in the summer at other colleges, it is possible to complete the first-year Engineering program before the following fall term. Registration Qualified candidates are notified o f their acceptance into the program by mail. Acceptance begins in M a y , and continues through the summer until all places in the program are taken. Students have two weeks from the date o f the acceptance letter to reply, submitting a non-refundable deposit, to ensure a scat in the Engineering Transfer program. Students who complete Advanced Placement ( A P ) SECOND TERM A P S C 121 C H E M 111 Credits Society and the Engineer Principles & Methods o f Chemistry II M A T H 111 Calculus II (or 126/127) 1.0 3.0 4.5 M A T H 152 L i n e a r A l g e b r a & Differential Equations 3.0 P H Y S 115 Fundamental Physics II 3.0 P H Y S 116 Fundamental Physics III Complementary Studies Elective 3.0 3J0 20.5 Transfer to University of British Columbia courses with sufficiently high grades are eligible for advanced credit, and may choose to complete other electives instead o f the A P credit course. Please see the Admissions section of the Calendar for more details. Students should complete the above standard curriculum. Students who intend to study Electrical Engineering or Engineering Physics and have completed C S 12 with at least a " B " may enrol in C O M P 110 instead of C O M P 102 Second Term Registration in the fall term and C O M P 111 and C O M P 133 instead o f the complementary studies elective in the spring term to Students require a G P A of at least 1.8 in the transfer- receive advance credit on transfer to U B C . able courses of the first term o f the Engineering program to remain in the program for the second term. Transfer to Simon Fraser University Students should take C O M P 110 instead o f C O M P 102 in the fall term. University Transfer 80 and students entering from first-year Science. These P H Y S 116 should be replaced by C O M P 111. scholarships include tuition waivers, textbooks, E N G L 100 may be replaced by an elective. calculators, as well as scholarship grants. Please refer A P S C 150 should be replaced by a complementary to the Financial A i d Department. studies elective. Students should consult the S F U Calendar for recommended electives. ENGLISH Transfer to University of Victoria Students should take C O M P 110 instead of C O M P 102 Instructional in the fall tenn. T. A C T O N , B . A . (Victoria), M . A . , P h . D . (Calgary) P H Y S 116 should be replaced by C O M P 111. J. C L I F F O R D , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . ( Y o r k ) Faculty P.L. C O N N E L L , B.A., M . A . , Ph.D. ( U B C ) First Y e a r Core (for students transferring f r o m first-year science) R. C O U P E , B . A . (Tasmania), P h . D . ( U B C ) Students who have completed first-year science G . N . FORST, B . A . , Ph.D. ( U B C ) successfully may be exempted from certain Engineer- S.R. G I L B E R T , B . A . ( U V i c ) , M . A . ( U B C ) ing courses if they have achieved a grade of " C " or W . G O E D E , B . A . (Wisconsin), M . A . (Edinburgh), P.L. C O U P E Y , B . A . (McGill), M . A . (UBC) M . L . F A H L M A N R E I D , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Toronto) better in the equivalent Science courses. A typical Ph.D. (California) course load may be: FIRST M . H I N D M A R C H , B.A., M.A. (UBC) Credits TERM A P S C 120 Intro, to Engineering 1.0 A P S C 150 Engineering Graphics 3.0 M A T H 200 Linear Algebra 3.0 M A T H 230 Calculus 111 3.0 6fJ Electives 16.0 SECOND TERM Credits LO A P S C 121 Society and the Engineer C M N S 250 M A T H 231 Introduction to Technical Writing 3.0 3.0 Calculus IV M A T H 235 Intro, to Differential Equations 3.0 P H Y S 116 Fundamental Physics III 3.0 Elective 10 16.0 NOTES: 1. The above science transfer curriculum assumes that the student has obtained maximum exemption for equivalent science courses. Other course mixes are possible. 2. Maximum exemption consists of the following courses: CHEM 1101111; MATH 1101111; or 116/ 117 and 126/127; PHYSI 141115; COMP 102/110/ 111. C. H U R D L E , B . A . , M . A . (UVic) D.H . J A N T Z E N , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (York) D. M U N T E A N U , M . A . (Bucharest), M . A . ( U B C ) R. N I C K O L I C H U K , B . A . (Carleton), M . A . ( U B C ) J. P E N B E R T H Y , B . A . ( U n i v . o f Natal, South Africa), M.A.,Ph.D. (UBC) M . Q U A R T E R M A I N , B.A., L.L.B., M.A.(UBC) W . G . S C H E R M B R U C K E R , B . A . (Capetown), P.Grad.Ccrt. in E d . (London), M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) R.G. SHERRIN, B.F.A., M.F.A. (UBC) G . S T A N L E Y , B . A . , M . A . , (San Francisco State U.) S. T H E S E N , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) A . W E S T C O T T , B . A . (Alberta), M . A . (Queens), P h . D . (Toronto) University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all English courses transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. For first-year English transfer credit to the universities, students must take two courses of: a) E N G L 100, 103, 104, 105, or 106. For second-year English transfer credit to the universities, English majors should take English 200-201; all other second year students can take any two second- 3. The electives will usually be "complementary studies" (i.e. non-science) electives. year level English courses. English Diagnostic Test (EDT) Scholarships Those students who wish to enrol in English courses in A number of scholarships administered by the College the University Transfer D i v i s i o n must submit the are available to Engineering students. There arc results o f the Language Proficiency Index Test or the scholarships for both incoming high school students College's English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) . University Transfer 81 Students with any one o f the following are exempt E N G L 202 — Canadian Literature - Beginnings to from this requirement: 1. a final grade of " A " or higher in E n g l i s h 12 or Modernism E N G L 203 — Canadian Literature - M o d e r n i s m and English Literature 12, or 2. a final grade o f 4 or higher in an A d v a n c e d Placement course in English Composition or English Literature, or 3. a final grade of 6 or higher in the International Baccalaureate course in English A or English B , or 4. a final grade o f " A " in B E N G 042, or 5. a final grade of " B - " or higher in an English transfer course from another college or university, or Beyond E N G L 205 — M o d e r n American Literature E N G L 208 — Studies in Fiction (The N o v e l ) E N G L 209 — Studies in Poetry E N G L 2 1 0 — Studies in D r a m a E N G L 211 — Studies in Short Fiction E N G L 212 — Traditions in Western Literature 6. a degree from an English-speaking university. E N G L 213 — E D T s are scheduled monthly throughout the year. E N G L 290 — Creative W r i t i n g - Poetry During registration periods, E D T s are scheduled E N G L 291 — Creative W r i t i n g - Fiction almost daily. The times for these sittings are published Readings in W o r l d Literature W M S T 1 0 4 — Contemporary English-Canadian with the timetables. Students wishing to write the E D T W o m e n Writers must pay the exam fee in advance at the Registrar's Office and bring receipts to the appropriate test sitting. W M S T 106 — Contemporary American W o m e n Writers If you need further information, please contact the Humanities D i v i s i o n (984-4957). W M S T 108 — Contemporary European W o m e n Writers (In Translation) English as a Second Language Sec listing in the Preparatory Programs section. FRENCH Writing Centre Instructional A l l students registered at the College may come to the Writing Centre for advice on work in progress or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection o f reference books, handout sheets and exercises, and computers with word processing, outlining, and editing programs. The Writing Centre is located .in F R 4 0 2 . It is staffed by faculty members from the English, E S L , and A B E departments. Open hours arc posted. Courses E N G L 010 — Language Skills E N G L 100 — Composition E N G L 103 — Studies in Contemporary Literature E N G L 104 — Fiction E N G L 105 — Poetry E N G L 106 — Drama Faculty L . C A N T I N O R R - E W I N G , B . A . (Montreal). M . A . (SFU) L . G A R E A U , B . A . (Laval), M . A . ( S F U ) O . K E M P O , B . A . (Alta.), M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) A . S I M P S O N . B . Ed, M . A . , Ph.D. ( U B C ) Instructional Associates J. G A C I N A , B . A . ( S F U ) , P . D . P . ( S F U ) H . L A C O U R S E , D i p . Court Interpreting ( V C C ) , D i p . Conflict Resolution (Mediation), Justice Institute (B.C.) Summary of Programs LEVEL Beginning French COURSES F R E N 100/101 (0 - Grade 11) U n i v . Preparatory FREN French (Grade 12) 120/121 1 st year FREN U n i v . French 170/171 2nd year FREN U n i v . French 270/271 E N G L 190 — Creative Writing E N G L 191 — Creative Writing General Information E N G L 200 — English Literature to 1660 A l l courses in French consist of four hours of lecture, E N G L 201 — English Literature Since 1660 University Transfer 82 one hour o f conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). Students with a competence in the language beyond the level of the course in which they arc registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students with an enhanced speaking ability should register in the special section of tourism, recreation, economic consulting, mining, fisheries, geographic information systems, meteorology, and map making. The focus o f geography is on the environment in which wc live. These courses in geography w i l l give you a whole new perspective on the world. F R E N 170 or 171 or in F R E N 270 or 271. Students who are not sure of their language level should contact University Transfer Credit an instructor. A l l Geography courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide University Transfer Credit A l l French courses are transferable to S F U , U B C and or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further informa- Courses tion. G E O G 1 0 0 — Human Geography: People, Places and Cultures Courses G E O G 101 — Environmental Geography: Perception F R E N 100 — Beginning French I F R E N 101 — Beginning French II and Change G E O G 1 0 2 — Environmental Geography: G l o b a l Concerns F R E N 120 — University Preparatory French I F R E N 121 — University Preparatory French II F R E N 170 — First Y e a r University French I F R E N 171 — First Y e a r University French II F R E N 270 — Second Y e a r University French I F R E N 271 — Second Y e a r University French II G E O G 106— British C o l u m b i a : A Regional Analysis G E O G 1 0 8 — Canada: A Nation of Regions G E O G 112 — Introduction to Earth Environments G E O G 1 1 4 — Weather and Climates G E O G 200 — Technology and E c o m o m i c Environments GEOGRAPHY G E O G 201 — Urban Studies G E O G 205 — A s i a Pacific Geography Instructional Faculty K . E W I N G , B . A . , M . S c . (Michigan) G E O G 214 — Our Atmospheric Environment G E O G 221 — M a p and Airphoto Interpretation C. G R A T H A M , B . S c , M . S c ( U B C ) C . G R E E N B E R G . B . A . . M . A . . ( U . of Manitoba), Ph.D. (UBC) S. M A C L E O D , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) B. M C G I L L I V R A Y , B.A., M . A . (UBC) J. M E L I G R A N A , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . (Queens) J. M I K I T A , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) S. R O S S , B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) C . S C H R E A D E R . B . S c (Trent), M . S c . (McMaster) GEOLOGY Instructional Faculty D . J . A . A T H A I D E , B . S c . (Hons) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , Prof. Teacher's Cert. ( B . C . ) A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B . A . , M . S c , Prof. Teacher's Cert. ( U B C ) General Information General Information Geography courses are offered for students who arc Geology courses are designed for students planning a interested in pursuing a career in geography as well as university degree program in the geological sciences or for those students desiring both Arts and Science in the arts, humanities or social sciences. G E O L 110 electives, or for those who wish to have a better and 111 arc especially appropriate for students in need understanding of the cultural and physical landscapes. of a laboratory science. They provide an understanding The study o f geography opens the doors for men and of the origin, structure, composition and history o f the women in a wide variety of fields including: teaching, earth. urban planning, forestry, resource management, University Transfer Courses include weekly laboratory investigations and correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit several field trips, both local and distant (overnight). transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid any Lab tuition fees are included in the course fee, however misunderstanding, such students are invited to discuss students must purchase a lab manual and testing kit, these problems with the department prior to enrolment. and share some field trip costs. Students with a German Arbitur are not permitted to enrol in the courses. University Transfer Credit A l l G e o l o g y courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further informa- Students with a competence in the language beyond the level o f the course in which they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f their language level should contact an instructor. tion. University Transfer Credit Geological Sciences (including G E O P H Y S I C S , A l l German courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C GEOCHEMISTRY, GEOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, ENVIRONMEN- and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further informa- T A L STUDIES A N D OTHER E A R T H SCIENCES) tion. FIRST YEAR ONLY S F U : Students who wish to proceed to S F U and to GEOL pursue further courses in G e r m a n are reminded o f the 110/111 P H Y S 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 present equivalency standards. Transfer and course C H E M 108/109 or 110/111 challenge credit in German w i l l be given at S F U for M A T H 110/111 or 116/117 a n d 126/127 Capilano College German courses to a total o f 11 E N G L (six credits) semester hours. Exemption from and placement in higher courses arc determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. Courses G E O L 1 1 0 — Physical Geology U B C : In the case of U B C , present equivalent standards G E O L 111 — Historical Geology provide transfer credit on the following basis: Capilano College GERMAN Instructional G E R M 100 and 101 (3 credits each) 100 (3) G E R M 200 and 201 (3 credits each) 200 (3) Faculty B . H A N K I N , B . A . ( U B C ) . M . A . (Wash.), Teach. D i p . The student wishing to major in German fulfils department requirements with U B C G E R M 310, which may (UBC) B . P I R E S - S T A D L E R , Teach. D i p . (Zurich), M . A . be taken in the second year if the student has first class standing in G E R M 200 or third year by permission o f (SFU) the department. Instructional Associate R. F R E I B E R G , B . E d . (Gottingcn University, Germany) Courses G E R M 1 0 0 — Beginning German! General Information G E R M 101 — Beginning German II A l l courses in German consist of four hours of lecture, G E R M 2 0 0 — Intermediate German I one hour o f conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). Native speakers of German arc not allowed in first year courses. Those who wish to take a first or second-year German course must consult with a German instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has University Transfer 84 UBC G E R M 201 — Intermediate G e r m a n II HISTORY Instructional H I S T 208 — Canadian-American Relations H I S T 209 — History of the Native Peoples of Canada Faculty R. C A M P B E L L , B . A . (California), M . A . ( U B C ) W M S T 220 — W o m e n and the Past: A Historical Survey R. F U H R , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( M c G i l l ) H.JONES, B.A., M.A. (UBC) M . L E G A T E S , B . A . (Wash.), M . A . , M . P h i l . , P h . D . JAPANESE (Yale) D . S U T H E R L A N D , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Memorial) Instructional Ph.D. (SFU) Faculty K. MITO, B.A. (UBC), M . A . ( U B C ) General Information History teaches an understanding of the past that helps Instructional Associate people cope with the present and suggests possibilities T. B E R W I C K , B . A . (Kobe Gaidai) for the future. Critical thinking and analysis form the Y . S H I N B O , Associate o f Arts (Obirin) core o f this discipline and arc essential skills in a rapidly changing society. Students planning to major in History should have at least four History courses at the College. These can be A N Y four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling of courses in Social Sciences General Information A l l courses in Japanese consist o f four hours o f lecture, one hour of conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). and Humanities. Students planning to major in History In order to provide for the most appropriate student at S F U should take six History courses in the first two placement, students with Japanese 9, 10 or Beginners years. F o r U B C the requirement is four History 11 credit should register in J A P N 100; students with courses. Students planning to take honours should Japanese 11 high school credit should register in J A P N acquire a reading knowledge of an appropriate non- 101, not J A P N 100. Students with a Japanese 12 high English language. school credit.can register in either J A P N 200 or J A P N 101. University Transfer Credit A l l History courses at Capilano (including W M S T 220) transfer to S F U , U B C , U N B C and U V i c and count as Students who have studied Japanese elsewhere cannot register in J A P N 100. The instructor is available for consultation regarding Humanities credit for the Associate Degree. Please placements. Contact the department prior to registra- check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College tion i f you are not sure o f your placement. Transfer G u i d e for further information. University Transfer Credit Courses H I S T 100 — The following Japanese courses at Capilano College History o f the Ancient W o r l d transfer to U B C , S F U , and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Europe from the Reformation to the Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e French Revolution for further information. H I S T 103 - Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries Students with competence in the language beyond the H I S T 108 — Issues and Themes in U . S . History: level o f the course in which they are registered w i l l be 1607- required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f H I S T 102 — H I S T 109 — 1877 Issues and Themes in U . S . History: their language level should contact an instructor. 1865 - Present Courses H I S T 110 — Canada Before Confederation J A P N 100 — Beginning Japanese I H I S T 111 — Canada Since Confederation J A P N 101 — Beginning Japanese II H I S T 205 — British C o l u m b i a J A P N 200 — Intermediate Japanese I H I S T 207 — Europe in the M i d d l e Ages and J A P N 201 — Intermediate Japanese II Renaissance University Transfer KINESIOLOGY Instructional Faculty M . W A L S H , B.P.E., M . P . E . ( U B C ) , Ph.D. (SFU) General Information The Capilano College Department o f Kinesiology and LINGUISTICS Instructional Faculty Y . Q u , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . (Beijing Foreign Studies U . ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) Courses L I N G 100 — Human Kinetics offers first-year university courses in Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Structure kinesiology, designed for students planning on transferring to Simon Fraser University for second year for L I N G 101 — Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Use completion of a major or a degree in the subject. For more information regarding the Kinesiology program please contact the Pure and Applied Sciences D i v i s i o n , 984-4955. MATHEMATICS A N D STATISTICS Transfers to the University of British Columbia Human Kinetics program Instructional Capilano College Kinesiology courses transfer to the A . E . T . B E N T L E Y , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . A . , P h . D . U B C Department o f Human Kinetics, which offers four areas of concentration: (1) Exercise Science, (2) Health and Fitness, (3) Physical Education, and (4) Leisure and Sport Management. Faculty (Missouri), Coordinator of Mathematics R . C . B R E W S T E R , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . ( U V i c ) , Ph.D. (SFU) P. C A R T E R , B . S c . (Hons) (Sheffield) M . S c , P h . D . (UBC) L.F. H A R R I S , B.A., M.A., (UBC), Ph.D. Transfers to the University of Victoria The University of Victoria Faculty of Education, School of Physical Education, also accepts transfer o f Kinesiology courses from Capilano College. T o determine which courses are transferable, advisors at U V i c and/or Capilano College should be consulted. (Austral. Nat. U ) R. H A U S C H 1 L D T , B . S c . (Hons.) (Queen's), M . S c . (UBC) J. J O H N S T O N , B . M a t h (Waterloo). B . E d . (Toronto), M . M a t h (Waterloo) C . M O R G A N , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c , P h . D ( M e m o r i a l ) R . R . R E N N I E , B . S c . M . S c (Brigham Y o u n g ) , P h . D . Transfers to Simon Fraser University Kinesiology Program The Kinesiology program at S F U offers four different areas o f concentration: (1) Active Health, (2) Health and Physiological Sciences, (3) Human Factors/ Ergonomics, and (4) Human Movement Sciences. Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. (UBC) K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c . M.Sc. (SFU) R.H. V E R N E R , B.Sc. (UBC). M.Sc. (EWSU), B.C. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) A. W A T E R M A N , B . S c (UBC). M . S c (SFU), B.C. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) C . W A T K I S S . B . S c . (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto) Laboratory Supervisor W . L Y N N , B . S c (Carleton), M . A . S c . (Waterloo) Course Descriptions General Information KIN. 140— Contemporary Health Issues K I N . 142 — Introduction to Kinesiology and second-year university level courses in mathemat- KIN. 143— Exercise Management ics and statistics as well as preparatory courses. The Mathematics and Statistics Department offers first- Entry Courses 1. P r e p a r a t o r y M A T H 009 is an individualized study course for students needing a basic arithmetic refresher. University 86 Transfer M A T H 090 and 095 are 1.5 credit courses designed for students needing introductory through intermediate level algebra. It is possible to complete both courses in a single term. The combined M A T H 090/095 is recognized by post secondary institutions as a Math 11 equivalent. 2. P r e c a l c u l u s 1. Science, F o r e s t r y , E n g i n e e r i n g Students planning to pursue science or science related programs are required to take M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 (or 110/111). Engineering students should consult the Engineering section in the Calendar. Students planning to pursue mathematics or statistics at U B C should take in their first year: M A T H 107 is a precalculus course specifically M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 (or 110/1II) designed for students planning to pursue a business P H Y S 114/115 or commerce program, whereas M A T H 105 C H E M 110/111 (or 108/109) focusses more on scientific applications. C O M P 110/111 Although each of M A T H 105 and 107 is recognized E N G L (6 credits) by post secondary institutions as a Math 12 equiva- 2. A r t s , Social Science lent, it is common for students even with Math 12 completion to take one of these precalculus courses in preparation for calculus. Both 105 and 107 receive individual transfer credit at S F U and U V i c . At U B C transfer credit is granted for a combined precalculus ( M A T H 105 or 107) and calculus ( M A T H 108 or 110 or 116) package (except those To fulfil a one-year science elective requirement nonscience students typically take M A T H 101/102, although any of the prccalculus/calculus combinations also meet this requirement. Students planning to pursue a psychology program at S F U arc required to take M A T H 107 if they have not completed Math 12. faculties at U B C which require Math 12 for admission). Check the Mathematics Placement Test 3. C o m m e r c e , Business, E c o n o m i c s ( M P T ) section and individual course listings for the Students planning to pursue a commerce, business or prerequisite requirements for each of M A T H 105 economics program arc required to take M A T H 108 and 107. Based on their M P T results, some students (and M A T H 107 if the prerequisite requirements for w i l l be allowed to enrol in M A T H 105 or 107 only 108 arc not met; transfer credit w i l l be given for if they enrol in M A T H 095 concurrently. 3. C a l c u l u s I M A T H 108, 110 and 116 are general purpose firstyear calculus courses whereas M A T H 108 is a calculus course specifically designed for students M A T H 107). In addition M A T H 109 is required for students planning to transfer to the commerce program or economics at U B C . F o r a detailed description of commerce courses and program requirements see the Calendar section titled Commerce. planning to pursue a business or commerce program. Check the Mathematics Placement Test ( M P T ) section and individual course listings for the prerequisite requirements for each of M A T H 108, 110 and 116. 4. I n t r o d u c t o r y Statistics M A T H 101 is an introductory statistics course University Transfer Credit Except where explicitly noted, all math and statistics courses numbered 101 or higher transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. designed primarily for non-science students wanting to fulfil a science elective requirement. Math Placement Test (MPT) Students wanting to enrol in a Precalculus course Specific Program Requirements ( M A T H 105 or 107), a Calculus I course ( M A T H Students should use the following three sections as or 1 10 or 116), or a discrete mathematics course guidelines for selecting math courses at the first-year ( M A T H 124), must write a mathematics placement test 108 level. Due to the specialized needs of some programs if cither (or both) of the following two conditions at the universities, the Mathematics and Statistics apply: Department advises students to consult the university (a) Their mathematics prerequisite course was c o m - Calendar and to seek guidance from a College advisor pleted prior to 1997 for admission into Fall 1998 or math instructor for appropriate course selection. courses; prior to 1998 for admission into Spring 1999 and Summer 1999 courses. Universify Teansfer (b) Their mathematics prerequisite course was completed at a B . C . secondary school (or equivalent) with a final letter grade standing below: " C " in Math 12 for admission to M A T H 105 or M A T H M A T H 117 — Applications o f Calculus I M A T H 1 2 4 — Discrete Mathematics I M A T H 1 2 6 — Calculus II M A T H 127 — Applications o f C a l c u l u s II M A T H 152 — Linear A l g e b r a and Differential 107; Equations " B " in Math 12 for admission to M A T H 108; " A " in Math 12, or at least a " B " in both Math 12 and Calculus 12, for admission to M A T H 110 or 116 or M A T H 200 — Linear A l g e b r a M A T H 2 0 4 — Probability and Statistics for Applications 124. T o write the Precalculus placement test, students M A T H 205 — Introduction to Probability and Statistics should have at least a " C " grade in Math 11 or at least a " C - " grade in Math 12. M A T H 215 — Introduction to A n a l y s i s T o write the Calculus placement test, students should M A T H 2 2 4 — Discrete Mathematics II have at least a "C" grade in Math 12. M A T H 2 3 0 — Calculus III W i t h i n a given year students are not allowed to rewrite M A T H 231 — the Calculus or Precalculus M P T . M A T H 235 — Introduction to Differential Equations Calculus I V A study guide is available for the M P T which provides topic coverage and suggested review material as well as a list o f the scheduled test dates. BACHELOR OF MUSIC Please contact the Registrar's Office or the Pure and TRANSFER P R O G R A M A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n for more information. Instructional Graphing Calculator The Mathematics and Statistics Department believes that the graphing calculator greatly enhances math- Faculty G . A L C O C K , A . R . C . T . (Toronto) M . A R M A N I N I , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . (UBC) ematics instruction and learning. Students enrolling in D. A S T O R , B . A . ( U B C ) M A T H 090/095 or any first year course, M A T H 105 or J. B E R A R D U C C I , B . M u s . ( U B C ) . M . A . ( W . Wash.) higher, are required to have a graphing calculator. J. B E R K M A N , B . M u s . (Oberlin), M . M u s . (Jiulliard) Specific recommendations on make and model w i l l be N . B O H N A . B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) available during the registration period. S. B O S W E L L , A . R . C . M . (Royal College o f M u s i c , Courses K . C E R N A U S K A S , D i p . (Salzburg), B . M u s . (Toronto) London) M A T H 009 — Arithmetic M A T H 090 — Introductory Algebra with Functions M A T H 095 — Intermediate Algebra with Functions M A T H 101 — Introduction to Statistics M A T H 1 0 2 — Statistical Methods M A T H 105 — Precalculus Methods M A T H 107 — Precalculus for Business and Social Sciences M A T H 108 — Calculus I for Business and Social Sciences M A T H 109 — Calculus II for Business and Social Sciences M A T H 1 1 0 — Calculus I M A T H 1 11 — Calculus II M A T H 116 — Calculus I University Transfer 88 S. D E N R O C H E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) N . D I N O V O , B.Mus., M.Mus. (UT) L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . (UBC) J. G E E . B . M u s . . M . A . ( U B C ) H. H A Y P. H U T T E R L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (W.Wash.), Coordinator D. M C C O Y , M.Mus. ( U B C ) G. M C N A B , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) K. M O O R E , B.Mus. ( U B C ) T. N I C K E L S , B . A . ( U . C . L . A . ) A. N O D W E L L , B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (UVic) D. O K E , B.Mus. ( U B C ) D. O V E R G A A R D , B.Mus.. M . M u s . (UBC), D . M . A . (USC) G. R A M S B O T T O M S. R E B A N E , D . M . A . (Kentucky) Admissions Procedure P. S C H R E I B E R , B . M u s . ( U B C ) D . S P A R K E S , B . M u s . E d . (Toronto) A l l applicants must: D. V A N D E R E Y K , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) 1. C o m p l y with the general admission requirements of E. W E A N , M . M u s . (New England) Capilano College and the specific admission S. W O O D Y A R D , B . M u s . (Victoria) requirements for University Transfer. General Information Capilano College offers four music programs: a twoyear D i p l o m a of Music from the Bachelor of Music Transfer program, a two-year D i p l o m a in Jazz Studies, a four-year Degree in Jazz Studies and a four-year Degree in M u s i c Therapy. T W O YEAR DIPLOMA A N D TRANSFERABILITY T O THIRD Y E A R UNIVERSITY 2. Participate in a private interview with the music coordinator or a program instructor. 3. Write a theory placement test and take an car test. 4. Play an audition on their major instrument: this w i l l consist of two contrasting pieces, technique, and sight reading. 5. Write the Capilano College E D T (English Diagnostic Test) or the Provincial L P I . Sec the E D T information in the Registration section in this Calendar. Please try to have your E D T or L P I mark before Career Opportunities • Private M u s i c Teacher - with the completion of the two year diploma program your audition and interview. 6. Submit an Application for Admission to A d m i s s i o n s , Registrar's Office, together with official copies o f • first two years toward a M u s i c degree leading to a transcripts of all secondary and post-secondary career in Music Education or Performance education. Early application is advised. 7. A l l interviews, auditions and placement tests arc University Transfer held in M a y and August. Capilano College offers the first two years of a Bachelor o f M u s i c Degree. A l l courses in the Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer program arc transferable to School of M u s i c at the University of British C o l u m b i a and to the Auditions w i l l involve the presentation o f two contrasting prepared pieces and a demonstration o f the student's instrumental technique and sightreading ability. Faculty of Music at the University of Victoria. Students wishing to transfer to the Faculty o f Arts at U B C , S F U , or U V i c with a major in M u s i c should take M U S . 100/101, 112/113, 120/121 in their first year, and M U S . 200/201,212/213, 220/221 in their second year. Our students have also received transfer credit to the following universities: Alberta. Calgary, Dalhousie, Rcgina, Brandon, Y o r k . Guelph. Western Ontario, M c G i l l and Western Washington. Registration 1. Returning students may prc-rcgistcr during the month of A p r i l . 2. N e w students demonstrating sufficient instrumental and/or theoretical accomplishment in their placement test may preregister during M a y and early August to ensure their enrolment. 3. Students may register during in-person registration. Admission Requirements Entering students should have a basic knowledge of music rudiments (approximately at the level of Toronto Conservatory Rudiments II). Students entering on piano must be at a grade 10 level Graduation Requirements The complete program requirements must be successfully completed to receive an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma. (Toronto Conservatory). Piano students who require a qualifying term may enrol in other courses. Students entering in composition must have a working knowledge of diatonic harmony. Students entering in voice or instruments other than piano must have a performance level acceptable to the faculty. Special Fees and Expenses The fees for Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I . ) w i l l be announced at least one month prior to the beginning o f the fall tenn. University Transfer 89 M a x i m u m tuition for full-time study for the 1997/98 M U S . 221 History I V 3.0 academic year was $1,225 per semester. Included in M U S . 123' or Arts elective' 1.0-3.0 this maximum tuition are the costs of all required P M I . 4xx L e v e l 10 14.5-17.5 Private Music Instruction. 1 N o r m a l l y 58 credits are required to graduate with a D i p l o m a in M u s i c . However. V o i c e Concentrators are Program Content FIRST TERM Credits required to have 61 credits, the three additional credits E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 from the required course L y r i c D i c t i o n M U S . 122 and E N S M 100 C h o i r - Ensemble I 1.0 M U S . 123. T h i s course is offered in alternating years. or E N S M 110 Orchestra 1 2 T a k i n g Arts electives is strongly recommended. M U S . 100 Theory 1 3.0 However, a student must have a m i n i m u m G P A o f 3.5 M U S . 112 Ear Training and 1.5 in order to be allowed into these electives. • Sight Singing 1 1 • M U S . 114 Class Piano 1 1.0 M U S . 120 History I 3.0 M U S . 122' or Arts electiveP M I . 1 xx Level In order to graduate. Arts electives may be substi- tuted for E N G L 200. 201 and 212. 213. 1.0-3.0 Other courses which may be taken as electives w i t h 10 14.5-17.5 approval o f the Coordinator are Class Strings M U S . 1 1 0 . 1 1 1 : Class Brass M U S . 218; Class Percussion M U S . 219; Class W o o d w i n d s M U S . 210, 211; and K o d a l y / O r f f Methodology M U S . 360, 361. SECOND TERM E N G L 103 or 104 or 105 or 106 3.0 *If the student is a piano major, then he/she may take a E N S M 150 1.0 secondary P M I instead o f Class Piano. C h o i r - Ensemble II or E N S M 160 Orchestra II M U S . 101 Theory II M U S . 113 Ear Training and Students may graduate with 58 or more credits depend3.0 S i g h t S i n g i n g II 1.5 * M U S . 115 Class Piano II 1.0 M U S . 121 History II 3.0 M U S . 123' or Arts elective' 1.0-3.0 P M I . 2 x x Level ing on w h i c h options they choose. Guitar students must take Guitar Ensemble through Continuing 10 14.5-17.5 Education. Such students may graduate with 58 credits. BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY COURSE STREAM Students planning on going into the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy program in the third year w i l l take the follow- THIRD TERM ing program for the first two years. E N G L 200 or 212" 3.0 E N S M 200 1.0 C h o i r - Ensemble III or E N S M 210 Orchestra III M U S . 200 Theory III M U S . 212 Ear Training and D i p l o m a in M u s i c . They may then choose to transfer to university to finish a Bachelor of M u s i c or apply to 3.0 Sight Singing III Students completing this program w i l l receive a the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy program at Capilano College. 1.5 * M U S . 214 Class Piano III 1.0 FIRST TERM M U S . 220 History III 3.0 E N G L 100 M U S . 122' or Arts elective 2 P M I . 3xx Level 1.0-3.0 Credits Composition 3.0 E N S M 100 or 110 1.0 10 M U S . 100 Theory I 14.5-17.5 M U S . 112 Ear Training and * M U S . 114 Class Piano I 1.0 3.0 M U S . 120 History] 3.0 1.0 P M I . 1 xx L e v e l Sight Singing I FOURTH TERM E N G L 201 or 213 1 E N S M 250 C h o i r - Ensemble IV or 260 Orchestra I V M U S . 201 Theory I V M U S . 213 Ear Training and *MUS.215 90 10 14.5 3.0 SECOND TERM E N G L 103. 104. 105. or 106 3.0 1.0 Sight Singing I V 1.5 E N S M 150 or 160 Class Piano I V 1.0 M U S . 101 University Transfer 1.5 Theory II . 3.0 M U S . 113 Ear Training and courses. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Sight Singing II 1.5 Capilano College Transfer Guide for further informa- * M U S . 115 Class Piano II 1.0 tion. MUS.121 History II 3.0 P M I . 2xx Level 2.0 * * P S Y C 100 Intro to Psychology or P S Y C 101 Theories of Behavior THIRD TERM Courses P H I L 101 — Introductory Philosophy: Ethics 17.5 PHIL 102— Introductory Philosophy: Knowledge 10 and Reality . 3.0 P H I L 1 1 0 — Critical Thinking E N S M 200 or 210 1.0 PHIL 120— Understanding Scientific Reasoning M U S . 200 Theory 111 3.0 PHIL 140— Philosophy and L a w : Introduction to M U S . 212 Ear Training and B I O L 104 Human Biology I Canadian L a w Sight Singing 111 1.5 * M U S . 214 Class Piano III 1.0 M U S . 220 History III 3.0 FOURTH Philosophy and L a w : Introduction to the Criminal Justice System 2.0 P H I L 200 — Political Philosophy 3J) P H I L 201 — Political Philosophy 17.5 P H I L 207 — Business Ethics P M I . 3xx Level P S Y C 204 P H I L 141 — Developmental Psychology TERM E N S M 250 or 260 1.0 M U S . 201 Theory I V 3.0 M U S . 213 Ear Training and P H I L 208 — Environmental Ethics P H I L 209 — Biomedical Ethics P H I L 210 — Metaphysics and Epistemology I Sight Singing I V 1.5 P H I L 211 — Metaphysics and Epistemology II * M U S . 215 Class Piano I V 1.0 P H I L 220 — Philosophy in Literature M U S . 221 History IV 3.0 P H I L 221 — Existentialism in Literature P H I L 222 - Philosophy o f Culture (Aesthetics) P H I L 240 — Philosophy and Gender Relations P M I . 4xx Level P S Y C 205 2.0 Psychology o f A g i n g 3J) 14.5 * If the student is a Piano Major, then he/she may take a secondary P M I instead of Class Piano. ** It is recommended that students take P S Y C 101 during the summer between second and third term. For a description o f the M u s i c Therapy program, see the M u s i c Therapy program section of the Calendar. PHYSICS Instructional Faculty M . F R E E M A N . B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . S c . ( C a l . Tech.), P h . D . ( U B C ) S. G R E E N S P O O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c , PHILOSOPHY Instructional Faculty M . B A T T E R S B Y . B . A . ( N Y U ) , Ph.D. ( U B C ) Ph.D. (Waterloo), Convenor of Physics J. K O L A C , M . S c . (Charles U . , Prague) F. P A R V A Z , B . S c . (Tehran), M . S . D i p . (San D i e g o State) J. D I X O N , B . A . , Ph.D. ( U B C ) Laboratory S. G A R D N E R , B . A . ( M c G I L L ) , B.Phil. (Oxford), Ph.D. K . W A T T S , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Technician (Concordia) W . H E N R Y , B . A . ( U V i c ) , M . A . ( U B C ) , Ph.D. (Western) Supervisors and Technician V . M O E N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor B . S I M S O N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor S. P E R S K Y , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) Y . W E S T W E L L - R O P E R , M . A . , E d . D . ( U B C ) , D.Phil (Oxford) Research Associate M . C R E N S H A W , B . S c (Kansas State), B . A . (Evergreen), Physics Holography Research L a b University Transfer Credit A l l Philosophy courses offered at Capilano College have transfer credit at every university in British C o l u m b i a . Critical thinking is taught in all philosophy General Information A l l first-year physics courses except P H Y S 116 include a weekly two-hour laboratory period. The cost of the University Transfer 91 labs is included in the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. POLITICAL STUDIES Instructional University Transfer Credit A l l physics courses at Capilano carry transfer credit. Faculty EM. L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano P. M I E R , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . A . (Toronto) College Transfer G u i d e for further information. T. S C H O U L S , B . A . (Alberta), M . A . (Toronto) Students w i t h P h y s i c s 12 p l a n n i n g to transfer to C . S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (Notre Dame) U B C s h o u l d take P H Y S 114 o r P H Y S 114 a n d 115, D . W I N C H E S T E R , B . A . (Concordia), M . A . ( U B C ) d e p e n d i n g on t h e i r p l a n s . C o n s u l t the U B C C a l e n d a r for specific p r o g r a m requirements. General Introduction W o m e n and men preparing for careers in journalism, Recommended Sequence for Major in Physics law, business management, international banking, market research, arbitration, urban and regional planning, the foreign service, consulting, labour negotia- FIRST YEAR tions, international development, and education enrol in P H Y S 114/115 (preferred) or 110/111 or 108/111 C H E M 110/111 or 108/109 M A T H 110/111, or 116/117 and 126/127 E N G L (six credits) Non-science Elective or G e o l o g y , Biology or Computing Science (six credits) SECOND YEAR Political Studies courses. So too those hoping to bring about change in their own communities in such areas as health, education and the environment, choosing politics as their vocation. That's because Political Studies is concerned with power — what it is and who gets it, h o w it is used and how it is abused. A l o n g with understanding power and the role it plays locally, nationally, and P H Y S 200/201,210/211,218/222 internationally, Political Studies students graduate with M A T H 200, 230. 2 3 1 , 2 3 5 excellent research skills and effective oral and written Elective (six credits) communication skills — all very much in demand in Students interested in honours physics should consult the new global economy. Physics instructors. University Transfer Credit Courses A l l Political Studies courses at Capilano arc transferable to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. P H Y S 104— Principles of Physics P H Y S 108— Basic Physics P H Y S 110 — General Physics 1 P H Y S 111 — General Physics II P H Y S 114 — Fundamental Physics I P H Y S 115 — Fundamental Physics II P H Y S 116— Fundamental Physics III P H Y S 200 — Thermal Physics and Waves P H Y S 201 — Electricity and Magnetism P H Y S 210 — Physics Laboratory I POL. I l l — P H Y S 211 — Physics Laboratory II P O L . 201 — International Relations P H Y S 218 — Computational Physics P O L . 202 — Government and Politics of British PHYS 222— Mechanics Courses P O L . 100 — Introduction to Politics and Government POL. 102— Comparative Government POL. 104— Canadian Government P O L . 110 — A n Introduction to Western Political Thought - Plato to The Reformation Contemporary Ideologies Columbia P O L . 203 — International Organizations P O L . 204 — Canadian Public Policy P O L . 206 — Scope and Methods of Political A n a l y s i s P O L . 207 — Selected Issues in Contemporary Social and Political Theory University Transfer 92 PSYCHOLOGY SOCIOLOGY Instructional Faculty Instructional Faculty P. A V E R Y , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . E d . (Toronto) G . B A I L E Y , B . Sc. ( M c G i l l ) , P h . D . (Oregon) E . B O Y L E , B . A . ( U . Chicago), P h . D . ( U B C ) N . G A Y L E , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . A . (Western), P h . D . R. H A W R Y L K O , B . A . (Hunter), M . A . ( S F U ) M . M A C N E I L L , B . A . (Alta.), M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . (Calgary) (UBC) C . H A T H A W A Y , B . A . ( S . U . N . Y . ) , M . A . (Wash U . , Mo.) S. M O E , B . A . , M . A . ( M e x i c o ) R. I S O L A , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) R . S N O W , B . A . (Hons.) M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) A . R O J A S , M . A . , Ph.D. (York) J. W A T E R S , B . A . M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) C. Z A S K O W , B . A . (UBC), M . A . , Ph.D. (SFU) University Transfer Credit General Information A l l courses in Sociology are geared to help the student comprehend personal and global events in a relevant A l l Psychology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , and meaningful way. Sociology should thus help the U B C , and U V i c . Please refer to the B . C . Transfer student in his/her endeavour to cope with our increas- Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for ingly complex society. A major in Sociology leads to further information. work in the following areas: social work, teaching, probation work, criminology, industrial sociology, communications, media, government research and Courses related areas. P S Y C 100 — Introduction to Psychology P S Y C 101 — Theories of Behaviour P S Y C 200 — Social Psychology P S Y C 201 — Group Dynamics P S Y C 203 — History of Psychology S F U transfer student with assigned credit toward P S Y C 204 — Developmental Psychology second-year courses. The U B C transfer student w i l l be P S Y C 205 — The Psychology of A g i n g P S Y C 206 — Adolescent Psychology Courses PSYC 212— Research Methods in Psychology SOC. 100— Social Structures P S Y C 213 — Statistical Methods in Psychology S O C . 101 — Concepts of Theories of Society P S Y C 220 — Theory of Personality S O C . 200 — Canadian Society P S Y C 222 — Abnormal Psychology S O C . 201 — British C o l u m b i a Society P S Y C 225 — Biopsychology of Behaviour SOC. 210— Current Social Issues P S Y C 230 — Cognitive Psychology S O C . 211 — Sociology of the Third W o r l d S O C . 222 — Sociology of the Arts S O C . 223 — M e d i a and Society W M S T 110 — W o m e n and Psychology University Transfer Credit A l l Sociology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . A l l 200 level courses w i l l provide the provided with unassigned credit towards a major. University Transfer 93 Instructional Faculty C. F U R S T E N W A L D , B . A . ( U . N . A . M . Mexico), M . B . A . (City U n i v . , Seattle) S P A N 100 — B e g i n n i n g Spanish I S P A N 101 — Beginning Spanish II S P A N 200 — Intermediate Spanish I S P A N 201 — Intermediate Spanish II E. PEREIRA, B.A. (UBC), M . A . ( U B C ) Instructional Associates J. G A C I N A , B . A . ( S F U ) , P.D.P. ( S F U ) THAI K . M A T T S O N , B . A . ( S F U ) , Licenciatura (Barcelona) Instructional General Information (UBC), A l l courses in Spanish consist o f four hours o f lecture, one hour o f conversation, and assignments in the Faculty J. P L A C Z E K , B . A . (Windsor), M . A . Linguistics P h . D . South East A s i a n Studies ( U B C ) P. P L A C Z E K , Language Associate, B . A . (Thammasat University) B a n g k o k multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). Students with a competence in the language beyond the Native speakers o f Spanish arc not allowed in first year level o f the course in which they are registered w i l l be courses. If they wish to take second year courses in required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f Spanish, they must consult with the Spanish instructor their language level should contact an instructor. T h e first. University rules governing such students differ following Thai courses carry university transfer. Please within departments, but the Language Department has refer to the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the C a p i l a n o correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit College Transfer G u i d e for further information. transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid any misunderstandings, such students arc invited to discuss these problems with the Department prior to enrolment. Students with a competence in the language beyond the level o f the course in which they are registered w i l l be Courses T H A I 100 — Beginning Thai I T H A I 101 - Beginning Thai II required to withdraw. Students w h o are not sure o f their language level should contact an instructor. THEATRE University Transfer Credit A l l Spanish courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . S F U : Students w h o wish to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses in Spanish arc reminded of the A. D I P L O M A IN T H E A T R E B. A D V A N C E D C E R T I F I C A T E IN T H E A T R E C. A D V A N C E D OPTION COURSES D. PERFORMING ARTS M A N A G E M E N T present equivalency standards. Elective credit w i l l be given at S F U for all Capilano College Spanish courses. Instructional Faculty Exemption from and placement in higher courses are S. A T K I N S , B . A . , M . F . A . ( S F U ) determined by the results of a placement test or other F. B L A C K , B . F . A . ( S F U ) . B . A . ( U V i c ) assessment procedure. A s a result of the placement P. C O N N E L L , B . A . . M . A . . P h D ( U B C ) test, area credit may be granted which would count T. F O R R E S T , B.F.A.(B.C.O.U.) toward a major in Spanish. Courses which do not D. M O O R E , B.F.A. (UVic). M . A . ( W W U ) qualify toward a major w i l l be awarded elective credit B. M U R D O C H , B.F.A. (UVic), M . F . A . ( U B C ) only. D. PRICE, B . A . (SFU) M . F . A . ( U B C ) U B C : A t U B C , present equivalent standards equate S P A N 100 and 101 with S P A N 100: S P A N 200 and D. W I N S T A N L E Y General Information 201 with S P A N 200. The student who plans to major in Spanish may enter U B C ' s Spanish program when the student completes the Capilano courses. The Theatre Department offers a two-year D i p l o m a program and a one-year A d v a n c e d Certificate program. Theatre has openings in some o f its courses for parttime study. University Transfer 94 Mission and Goals Thorough grounding in all aspects of Theatre training for students is the goal o f the Theatre Department. The Department values academic and professional training arc also eligible to apply for a place in the Advanced Certificate in Theatre. a) P a r t - t i m e N o n - d i p l o m a with practical application in acting, technical, and Part-time students arc encouraged to register in the management laboratory situations. Competence, courses and to participate in department productions. adaptability, and leadership arc the values the depart- They w i l l be included in the same classes as full-time ment instils in its emerging Theatre artists. program students. Scats available to part-time students arc listed in the timetable. The goal is to foster literacy Facilities Performance classes arc held in the Arbutus Studio adjacent to the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre, which houses the Department's season of plays. The theatre is complete with a rehearsal hall, changing rooms, costume and technical workshops, a in the art o f theatre. b) P a r t - t i m e D i p l o m a Studies Some scats arc available for part-time study leading to the Theatre Diploma. The goal is to provide the same comprehensive training in theatre as for full-time students, but spread over a longer period o f time. fly-tower, and a 380-scat house. Students in Theatre enjoy exceptional access to these University Transfer Credit facilities, and assist in running the theatres in a hands- Diploma courses transfer to universities and university- on, educational experience. colleges. Please consult the B . C . Transfer Guide for the most recent transfer information. Students may Productions Each year, Capilano College Theatre produces a season of full length plays in the Performing Arts Theatre and have to audition for placement in other programs, and should consult with the specific institution regarding these requirements. shorter plays in the Arbutus Studio. Auditions arc open to A d v a n c e d Certificate and D i p l o m a program stu- Admission and Registration Procedures dents, the college community, alumni, and members of A l l students must meet the admission requirements for the community at large. These productions also offer post-secondary programs. F o r Theatre, a student's students practical experience in technical theatre and Grade 12 Fine Arts grades w i l l also be considered. design, as well as exposure to guest directors and Prospective full-time and part-time D i p l o m a students designers. The productions serve as an in-housc must contact the Visual and Performing Arts Office by laboratory for students in the Performing Arts Manage- the end o f A p r i l to set up an audition/interview time. ment program. Non-program students may participate Late applicants w i l l be considered if space permits. in productions by registering in a practicum course. Students w h o wish to p a r t i c i p a t e i n p r o d u c t i o n s 1. Students must submit the results o f the Language s h o u l d not register i n non-theatre courses w h i c h are Proficiency Index Test or the C o l l e g e ' s English scheduled M o n d a y - F r i d a y 4:30-10:30 p . m . o r Diagnostic Test (Sec Registration section o f this S a t u r d a y s 10:00 a.m - 6:00 p . m . Calendar) to register in an English course. D o not delay obtaining these results. A. DIPLOMA IN THEATRE 2. Students applying for first year w i l l be asked to submit a letter outlining why they want to study The Theatre D i p l o m a program provides a two-year, theatre and an interim transcript showing high comprehensive training in theatre, with experience in a school courses and marks. A letter o f recommenda- full range o f theatre specialties, in a prc-profcssional tion from a theatre professional or instructor is an program. Students may choose to focus on either optional submission. performance or technical courses. Upon graduation, 3. Students wishing to enter the second year directly, students w i l l have successfully participated in acting and those applying to study for the Diploma part- and other studio courses, technical theatre, theatre time, w i l l be assessed for admittance on an indi- history, criticism and dramaturgy, as well as perform- vidual basis, subject to the availability o f places in ance. They w i l l be able to transfer to a university or university college and pursue a further, more specialized degree in theatre, or apply their theatre skills to further study in Arts or Education faculties. Graduates the program and a successful audition/interview. 4. Diploma students w i l l be prc-rcgistcrcd on a specific date. A l l other students may register d u r i n g A c a d e m i c registration i n any T h e a t r e D e p a r t ment course with seats a v a i l a b l e . University Transfer 95 Core Special Fees courses: T H T R 220 Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I each. T H T R 221 Conceptual Approaches to Theatre II Some courses arc non-base funded. Consult the T H T R 250 Senior Production Responsibilities I timetable. These courses are not refundable after the T H T R 251 Senior Production Responsibilities II first day of classes. T H T R 252 Advanced L i g h t i n g and Sound I T H T R 253 Advanced Lighting and Sound II T H T R 254 Practicum in Technical Theatre/Design Technical Theatre classes are assessed a lab fee o f $30 Diploma Program Curriculum 60 credits, including English 100 and one other 100level English course. I T H T R 255 Practicum in Technical Theatre/Design II FIRST TERM (both Performance Technical/Design Stream and T H T R 260 Analysis for Directing and D e s i g n Stream) THIRD AND FOURTH TERMS -Performance Stream: T H T R 100 Acting I T H T R 120 Elements of Theatre I M i n i m u m 27 credits in Theatre plus three credits o f T H T R 150 Intro to Production and Design I electives. E N G L 100 Composition T H T R 200 Elective (students are advised to take electives T H T R 201 Acting IV w h i c h fulfil transfer requirements) T H T R 205 Bodywork and/or: T H T R 207 V o c a l Communication T H T R 190, 191 192 T H T R 220 Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I Practicums (may be taken as an elective T H T R 221 Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I or to replace T H T R 100 or 150. T H T R 260 Analysis for Directing and D e s i g n A p p r o v a l required.) SECOND TERM (both Technical/Design T H T R 101 Performance A c t i n g III plus two course selected from: Stream and Stream) A c t i n g II T H T R 121 Elements o f Theatre T H T R 151 Intro to Production and Design II ENGL Literature Elective (students are advised to take electives w h i c h fulfil transfer requirements) and/or: T H T R 250 Senior Production Responsibilities I T H T R 251 Senior Production Responsibilities II T H T R 252 Advanced Lighting and Sound I T H T R 253 Advanced Lighting and Sound II B. A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE IN THEATRE (ACT) This unique certificate program bridges theatre training and professional theatre practice. T H T R 193, 94, 195 A C T is open to students who have completed the Practicums (may be taken as an elective Capilano College Theatre D i p l o m a or equivalent or to replace T H T R 101 or 151. studies at another institution, or who have equivalent A p p r o v a l required.) experience. T h e purpose o f A C T is to create a s m a l l theatre c o m p a n y c o m p r i s e d entirely o f students, THIRD AND FOURTH tre/Design TERMS - Technical Thea- Stream a n d to give each o f t h e m p r a c t i c a l experience i n a specialized area o f theatre. In a mentored situation M i n i m u m 27 credits in Theatre plus three credits o f with faculty and renowned guest artists, a m i x o f electives. performance, directing, production and design specialists w i l l be chosen to produce theatre in the Studio and the 380-seat Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre. U p o n completion of the Advanced Certificate in University Transfer 96 Theatre, students w i l l have the skills necessary cither to FIRST TERM Credits create their o w n work and run their o w n theatre company, or to find employment in the performing arts. T H T R 360 Directed Studies in Theatre I 15.0 Studies are concentrated in the evenings and on weekends, permitting students the option to work part- SECOND TERM time while they study. The certificate can be com- T H T R 364 Credits Directed Studies Theatre II 15.0 pleted in two terms, or students may opt for part-time studies. Please note: rehearsals begin m i d - A u g u s t . PART-TIME OPTION (S, F) Admission to Full-Time Studies T H T R 361 Project 1 5.0 T H T R 362 Project 2 5.0 T H T R 363 Project 3 5.0 T H T R 365 Project 4 5.0 T H T R 366 Project 5 5.0 T H T R 367 Project 6 5.0 Students w i l l be selected on the basis o f resume and at least one letter o f recommendation from a theatre professional or instructor, an interview and: • Performance: audition • Directing: a written proposal outlining objectives • Technical Production: a written proposal outlining objectives • Design: a portfolio Commencing with T H T R 361, students progress through the part-time modules at their own pace. These 30 credits arc equal to T H T R 360 and 364. Contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by the end o f A p r i l (for September) or the end o f October (for Fees January) to arrange audition/interview. Admission to Part-Time Studies Fees for 1998/99 arc estimated at $1,250 per term for full-time study or $500 per part-time course. The A d v a n c e d Certificate program can be taken in modules which permit part-time study. This is particu- C. A D V A N C E D OPTION COURSES larly suitable for theatre educators who wish to upgrade their skills. This option is subject to the availability o f In addition to the unique Advanced Certificate in places in the program and successful audition/inter- Theatre, the Theatre Department w i l l make the regular v i e w . Enquiries and applications are accepted at any studies and expertise o f the Department available to the time though the year. community by offering workshops and Master Classes Advanced Certificate in Theatre Curriculum below. The community w i l l be informed o f additional in short, accessible formats. These offerings arc listed 30 Theatre credits. (Students may have to take additional courses i f there are educational deficiencies in offerings by brochures and local advertising. A l l enquiries should be directed to the Visual and Performing Arts Office at 984-4911. the area o f specialty.) Students concentrate on one o f four specialized areas: M a s t e r Classes performance, technical production, design or direction. Prestigious guest artists and directors w i l l offer Master They receive instruction through Classes each term. Some places in the classes arc 1) a series o f master classes conducted by faculty and reserved for community students. guest artists. 2) involvement in the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre season. 3) involvement in the Arbutus season, which is chosen and mounted by A C T students. O n - S t a g e : W o r k s h o p s in Design a n d T e c h n i c a l Theatre Experienced designers and technical theatre practioners w i l l offer classes in production and design. B e h i n d the Scenes: the " o b s e r v e - t o - l e a r n " series A select number o f places w i l l be reserved for those who want to observe, first-hand, professional directors and designers at work. Special privileges such as observation o f rehearsals, design and production meetings, and question-and-answer sessions with the University Transfer 97 director/designer are granted to these special interest T H T R 345 Public Relations, Marketing and T H T R 346 Organizational Structures in the Promotion students. Other Behind the Scenes opportunities, such as observation of instructional pedagogy, can be arranged on an individual basis. Performing Arts D. PERFORMING ARTS M A N A G E M E N T SECOND TERM This one-year Advanced Certificate program offers T H T R 341 students a unique blend o f course work and practicum Internal Practicum in Performing Arts Management II experience. The course work for the program is concentrated in a three-week intensive period at the T H T R 343 Practicum II beginning o f each o f the two terms. This is followed by both an internal practicum w o r k i n g in various capaci- T H T R 347 Financial Management for the Performing Arts ties in the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre and an external practicum, in which the students w i l l Management Seminar and External T H T R 348 get on-the-job experience w o r k i n g for a professional Arts A d v o c a c y , Grantsmanship and Fundraising performing arts organization. The first term begins in mid-August and runs approximately 17 weeks (this T H T R 349 Company and T o u r Management may vary depending on the nature of the external practicum). The second term starts in January and also runs about 17 weeks. Fees Fees for 1998/99 are estimated at $75 per credit. A d m i s s i o n to Full-Time Studies Students who wish to enter the program on a full-time WOMEN'S STUDIES basis should arrange for an interview by contacting the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by the end o f M a r c h (for August). Prior to the interview, they should forward to the Department their college or university Instructional Faculty M . D E N I K E , B . A . (Hons) ( S F U ) , M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (York) transcripts and/or a resume. N . G A Y L E . B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . A . (Western), P h . D . Admission to Part-Time Studies R . H A W R Y L K O , B . A . (Hunter), M . A . ( S F U ) (UBC) O . K E M P O , B . A . (Alberta), M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) Part-time students can apply to register in any o f the Performing Arts Management courses. This is particularly suitable for those working in the field who might want to upgrade their skills. This option is subject to the availability of seats in the program and a successful interview. Inquiries and applications are accepted at any time through the year. P. L E C O U T E U R , B . S c , M . S c , ( A u c k l a n d ) , P h . D . Advanced Certificate in Performing Arts Management Curriculum P. S I N G E R , B . A . (Sir George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . (Calif.) M . L E G A T E S , B . A . (Wash), M . A . , M . P h i l . , P h . D . (Yale) K. LIND, B.A., M.A. (UBC) S. M O E , B . A . , M . A . (Mexico) D . N E A V E , B . A . (Hons) (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c . ) M . N I A , B . A . (Hons) (Tehran), M . A . ( Y o r k ) (Concordia) M . Y A S E R I . B . A . (Hons) (Thames), M . A . 30 credits (Saskatchewan) FIRST TERM T H T R 340 T H T R 342 T H T R 344 Internal Practicum in Performing Arts University Transfer Credit Management I Students who wish to pursue further courses in W o m - Management Seminar and External en's Studies are advised that U B C , S F U and U V i c have Practicum I programs in W o m e n ' s Studies. Please refer to the B . C . Computer Applications in Performing Arts Administration University Transfer 98 Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses W M S T 100 — Introduction to W o m e n ' s Studies W M S T 1 0 2 — Political Economy of W o m e n W M S T 1 0 4 — Contemporary English-Canadian W o m e n Writers W M S T 106 — Contemporary American W o m e n Writers W M S T 110 — W o m e n and Psychology W M S T 113 — W o m e n in Politics W M S T 122 — W o m e n in Anthropology W M S T 130 — W o m e n and A r t W M S T 140 — W o m e n , Science and Technology W M S T 220 — W o m e n and the Past: A n Historical Survey University Transfer 99 University Transfer 100 Oareer/Vocational Programs Admission Dates Enrolment is limited due to space and equipment limitations. Consequently, those students who contemplate entrance arc encouraged to apply early. A p p l i cants may be required to have an interview with the Capilano College offers a variety o f employmentrelated programs. The programs offered are under constant review to make certain that students arc taught the latest techniques and skills. Advisory committees, Program Coordinator prior to admission. Unsuccessful applicants should contact an advisor to determine an appropriate educational alternative. composed o f employers, review and recommend content o f all programs. Practicums A d m i s s i o n is limited and applicants are considered on For some practicums, students may be required to have the criteria established for each program area. In a Criminal Records check. general, Grade 12 standing is required for students applying to two year D i p l o m a Programs, although others may be admitted on the basis of their experience and abilities. Due to the timely nature o f these programs, requirements and profiles may change. Co-operative Education Some Career programs include a co-op education option. Co-operative education integrates a period o f classroom learning with periods of work experience to Contact the individual program areas for current enable students to apply their knowledge and skills. information. Students alternate periods o f full-time study with All courses require basic literacy in written and spoken English. That is. students must be able to understand the texts and other written materials, and the instructor's spoken words, and must be able to write assignments in correct English. Students who are not sure their English is good enough should talk to the instructor or an advisor before taking the course. periods of paid employment in business, industry, government and non-profit organizations. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates, better able to assume productive jobs. Student Course and Work Load Full-time programs arc designed so that successful completion is a full-time task. Students are advised not Graduate Employment to undertake other activities that require large time Employment opportunities for graduates are excellent; commitments, including employment, while undertak- however, the College docs not guarantee jobs for its ing full-time studies. graduates. Degree Completion Options Transfer to and from Other Institutions Opportunities for degree completion through the There is agreement among all public B . C . Colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable, to a program given at the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credits. Open University of British C o l u m b i a arc available to Transfer credits are granted to students O N A D M I S S I O N for acceptable work done at other institutions. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for consideration. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from the advisors, counsellors and in the program area. students who have finished diplomas at Capilano College in the following areas: Business Administration (Bachelor o f Business Administration) Jazz Studies (Bachelor of Jazz Studies) M u s i c Therapy (Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy) Outdoor Recreation Management (Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management) Tourism Management C o - o p (Bachelor of T o u r i s m Management) For more information, please contact Open University's Education Information Services at (604) 431-3300 or 1-800-663-9711. Career/Voca tional 103 ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT PROGRAM The Program The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant program is a full-time, tenmonth program offered from September to June. This program provides students with training in manual and This program is presently under review and the computerized accounting, general office procedures, detailed listing of courses and course content may be and computer applications. A two-week work changed by the time the program practicum is included in this training program. is offered in Septem- ber 1999. E-mail: Instructional Faculty D . B L A N E Y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C . P . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. (UBC) abt@capcollege.bc.ca Admission Requirements • C o m p l e t i o n o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status C . C R A M , B . A . , M . A . , Prof. Teaching Certificate, (U. ofT.) L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U o f Conn.) M . B . A . ( N . Eastern Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) Program Content FIRST Credits TERM O T E C 111 Business English I 3.0 O T E C 115 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 O T E C 117 Accounting Procedures I 3.0 O T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I 6J) 5.0 S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L NB: Students must achieve a minimum of a B grade in OTEC 117 to continue in this Cert. K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard TERM Accounting Administrative Credits O T E C 140 Procedures Microcomputer Math and 1.5 O T E C 149 Business Applications 3.0 SECOND Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist A . W H I T E , Instructor Support Staff L i s a Larkins, Clerk Typist Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant O T E C 212 O T E C 211 O T E C 217 Business English II o r O T E C 218 O T E C 252 Accounting-Comprehensive Project 1.5 3.0 Organizational Behaviour 15.0 Career Opportunities The Accounting Assistant program provides students program. THIRD 3.0 Business Writing Accounting Procedures II 3.0 Credits TERM with an understanding o f both manual and computer O T E C 219 Microcomputer Accounting accounting systems and the ability to apply this O T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience 4.5 L5 knowledge to business situations. Students are introduced to other computer applications and general 6.0 Certificate Requirements: 36.0 office procedures. Graduates are finding employment as accounting assistants, accounts receivable and accounts payable clerks, and full-charge accountants for small and medium sized firms. In addition, graduates of this program may ladder into the Business Administration program to take more advanced financial courses, ACCOUNTING SUPPORT PROGRAM Instructional Faculty leading towards a degree and/or a professional ac- D . B L A N E Y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C . P . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) counting designation. M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. (UBC L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U o f Conn.) M . B . A . ( N . Eastern Univ.) Career/Vocational 104 M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Note: Students must achieve a minimum of a B grade in OTEC 117 to continue with this program. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . SECOND C G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) TERM Credits S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L Cert. O T E C 215 Computerized Accounting O T E C 217 Accounting Procedures II 3.0 O T E C 218 Accounting Comprehensive Project 1.5 O T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience I L5 (continued from first term) K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered 6.0 Psychologist Total Program Credits: A . W H I T E , Instructor Support 25.5 Staff L i s a Larkins, Clerk Typist ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy W e b c r g , Divisional Assistant The Program Instructional The Accounting Support program is a full-time, sixmonth program offered from January to June. This M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. program provides training in manual and computerized accounting, general office procedures and computer applications. The Accounting Support program also includes a two-week supervised practicum. E-mail: Faculty D . B L A N E Y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C . P . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) (UBC) C C R A M , B . A . , M . A . , Prof. Teaching Certificate, (U.ofT.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. abt@capcollege.bc.ca Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) Career Opportunities S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) Graduates are finding employment as accounting B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L assistants, accounts receivable and accounts payable clerks, and full-charge accountants for small and Cert. K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . medium sized firms. In addition, graduates o f this G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard program may ladder into the Business Administration program to take more advanced financial courses, Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist leading towards a degree and/or a professional account- A . W H I T E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor ing designation. Support Staff L i s a Larkins, Clerk Typist Admission Requirements • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy Webcrg, Divisional Assistant student status Career Opportunities Program Content FIRST TERM O T E C 113 Credits a high level of technological and administrative support 4.5 employment in a wide range of technological support to management. Graduates o f this program are finding Business English and Communications O T E C 115 The Administrative Assistant in today's office provides positions including administrative and executive Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 assistants, office managers, and computer applications O T E C 117 Accounting Procedures I 3.0 trainers. O T E C 123 W o r d Processing Procedures 4.5 O T E C 217 Accounting Procedures II 3.0 O T E C 245 Introductory Microcomputer Applications L5 19.5 The Program The Administrative Assistant program is a full-time, ten-month program offered from September to June. Ca re e ri Vo ca tio n a I 105 This program provides students with training in M . L ' H E U R E U X , B . A . (Concordia), English grammar and composition skills, interpersonal D i p . Infotec (Capilano) skills, computer applications and much more. A A . L O R E K , B.A., M.L.S. (McGill) valuable component o f the training that students in this D. R A N K I N , B . F . A . (SFU) program receive is a two-week practicum in a business D. T A I T organization. L . W U , D i p . C o m m e r c i a l M u s . (Capilano) E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca C o n v e n o r s : Lawrence W u (Program Convenor), D o u g Tait (Convenor) L a b S u p e r v i s o r s : Lawrence W u / D a v i d R a n k i n / Matt Admission Requirements • Anderson Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature Staff: Cathy C o l e , 984-1727 student status General Information Program Content FIRST TERM O T E C 111 During the last decade, our society and economy have Credits Business English I 3.0 O T E C 115 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 O T E C 117 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I 3.0 O T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I 6TJ 15.0 Note: Students who do not achieve a minimum of aC in OTEC 111 and OTEC 146 must receive written permission from the program convenor to be able to continue in the program. SECOND TERM Credits O T E C 147 Microcomputer Applications II 4.5 O T E C 148 Administrative Applications 3.0 O T E C 211 Business Writing Document Transcription 3.0 O T E C 235 O T E C 252 O T E C 300 Organizational Behaviour Directed W o r k Experience 1.5 3.0 L5 16.5 THIRD TERM O T E C 233 O T E C 253 Document Design H u m a n Resource Management Skills Credits 3.0 L5 rapidly become information- and communicationbased. W i t h i n business, industry, and government the capability to effectively deal with information has become an important factor in maintaining a competitive edge. A s we approach the 21st century, it becomes increasingly obvious that individuals w i l l need to control their own access to information. The use of microcomputers and network systems has become an integral part of the new wave o f western development. The Infotec program w i l l identify issues facing the new communicators and w i l l train students in the skills to acquire, select, organize and communicate that information using the latest in interactive computer technology and telecommunications. Through an intensive hands-on immersion into the world of electronic communications, students w i l l become capable handlers o f the technology, with advanced research and critical thinking skills, and increased sophistication in interactive computer communications. E-mail: infotec@capcollege.bc.ca 4.5 Certificate R e q u i r e m e n t s : 36.0 APPLIED INFORMATION Admission Requirements • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent with E n g l i s h 12 • College entrance level English • Computer literacy and a modest keyboarding rate T E C H N O L O G Y (INFOTEC) • Personal interview PROGRAM N o t e : Applications for Admission, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents must he submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Instructional Faculty M . A N D E R S O N , D i p . E m i l y Carr College o f A r t & Special Fees and Expenses Design M . B A T T E R S B Y , B.A. (NYU), PH.D. (UBC) • Personal computer system capable of performing B . C A L V E R T , B . A . (Sask) tasks required in this program. (See program S. K A R M A L I brochure for further information) C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) Career/Vocational 106 March, April G R P H 143 Advanced Graphics IV 0.75 I N F O 148 Time-Based Data Integration 1.5 I N F O 158 Interactive Communications III 1.5 I N F O 160 Self-Marketing 1.5 I N F O 171 A p p l i e d Production Management 1.5 requirements accurately as of Fall 1998, we work in a I N F O 172 Technical Support: Concentration 3.0 rapidly changing field; new releases in hardware and I N F O 177 Professional Development CIP* software may require changes in course content, credit I N F O 180 Computer Mediated I N F O 186 Intro, to Database Technology • Texts, software, disks, cartridges • B B S online fees/program fees Important Note This is a general view o f the Infotec program. While we have made every effort to describe courses and Communications and scheduling, and required equipment. DIPLOMA PROGRAM THIRD TERM — Professional The D i p l o m a program is a 10-month, full-time pro- M a y 3 - J u n e 25, 1999 gram with a class limit o f 20 students. Please contact I N F O 173 the Infotec Department for application program details and information. Diploma Program Profile FIRST TERM—Foundation Credits Communication Theory C M N S 145 Computer W r i t i n g 1.5 Graphics II 1.5 I N F O 150 Contemporary Issues I 1.5 I N F O 151 Interactive Communications I 1.5 I N F O 154 Electronic Research Methods 1.5 I N F O 166 A p p l i e d Telecommunications 1.5 I N F O 167 Systems, T o o l s , Utilities 1.5 Critical T h i n k i n g I Development Technical Support: Augmentation 1.5 I N F O 177 Professional Development 4.5 I N F O 182 Cross Platform Development 1.5 I N F O 184 Portfolio Presentation 0.75 I N F O 191 C D - R O M Mastering 0.75 (Nine credits awarded for pre/postgraduate work or *CIP Course in progress. CIP* G R P H 141 P H I L 170 0.75 experience) S e p t e m b e r 8 - D e c e m b e r 18,1998 C M N S 125 3.0 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMS A. BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (BBA) DEGREE 1.5 COMPLETION P R O G R A M November, December C M N S 145 Computer Writing B. 3.0 G R P H 140 Graphics I 1.5 G R P H 142 Graphics III 1.5 I N F O 145 Internet Tools and Techniques 1.5 I N F O 156 Technical Support: Foundation 1.5 I N F O 161 Project Management 1.5 M D I A 142 Computer Managed Learning and Training I SECOND TERM—Exploration PROGRAM C. BUSINESS A D M I N I S T R A T I O N ADVANCED DIPLOMA PROGRAM D. BUSINESS C O M P U T I N G CO-OPERATIVE D I P L O M A P R O G R A M (BCOP) 1.5 E. F. Time-Based Data Integration II CIP* Interactive Communications II 1.5 DIPLOMA PROGRAMS - TWO YEAR F U L L T I M E STUDIES Credits J a n u a r y 4 - A p r i l 23, 1999 I N F O 148 I N F O 155 BUSINESS A D M I N I S T R A T I O N CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION D I P L O M A ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS I N F O 171 A p p l i e d Production Management C I P * - Accelerated General I N F O 172 I N F O 177 Technical Support:Conccntration C I P * Professional Development CIP* - Accelerated Accounting Management I N F O 180 Computer Mediated - Accelerated Marketing Management Communications 3.0 I N F O 185 3D Production for M u l t i m e d i a 1.5 M U S . 090 Digitized Sound I 1.5 G. Management ACCELERATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS M A N A G E M E N T (ACSM) PROGRAM Career/Voca tional 107 H. PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER P A C K A G E I. CERTIFIED F I N A N C I A L PLANNER*™' L.E. MILNER, M.B.A., C G A B. M O S E L E Y , B . A . , M . B . A . (Univ. of Cal) R . C . N I C H O L S , B . C o m m . , C . M . A . ( U of A ) R. O ' C O N N O R , B . A d m i n . (Ryerson), I.S.P. PROGRAM D . O ' L E A R Y , B . A . E d . ( M e m o r i a l ) , D i p . Adult E d . J. RETAIL M A R K E T I N G C O - O P K. (Alberta), M . E d . ( U B C ) CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M J . P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c , Teacher's Cert. (N.Dakota) E V E N I N G CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M S H . P L U M E , C M A , A C S M (Capilano) J. S A R R E A L , B . S c . M . S c , P h . D . , A C S M , ( U . o f - Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n Certificate - A d v a n c e d Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n Philippines, U . of Florida, N . C a r o l i n a U . , Capilano) D. S A U E R , B.A., M . B . A . (SFU, U B C ) G. S I M O N , B . S c , M.Sc. ( U B C ) Certificate M. SPENCE, B.Sc, L.L.B - Business C o m p u t i n g L. Certificate LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M M . T A Y L O R , B.Sc. ( U o f A ) L . T E E T Z E L , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M P A (Queens) M . V A N H O R N , B . E d . ( U o f A ) , A C S M (Capilano) A . H . V I C K , B.Comm. ( U B C ) K . V I C K A R S , B . E d . , L i e Acct. ( U B C ) , C . G . A . M. INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS P R O G R A M N. N E T W O R K SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE PROGRAM A . W A T S O N , B . A . ( U of C ) , A I B C , M . B . A . (Asia Pacific International Institute) G . W A U G H . B . A . , M . A . - Reading, ( U B C ) R. W E I Z E L , B P E . , B . C o m m . ( U o f M ) , M B A Department Chair: J . D . L o b l a w Instructional Faculty (McMaster), C M A J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . , C A . ( U B C ) D. B A S H A M , D.M.A.T.P. R. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) R. B E L L , B . A . ( W L U ) , D i p . E d . (Ont. C . E . ) , C G A H . B. Y A C K N E S S , B.Comm., M . B . A . , C A . (SFU) J.S. B R O W N L E E - B A K E R , B B A ( S F U ) , M B A ( A s i a Pacific International Institute) Support Staff Carmen Orton, D i v . Assistant B . C A M P B E L L , (Seneca), C N I Nancy Findlater, Receptionist A . C A R T E R , B . S c , M . B . A . ( U of A , C i t y U ) , C N A Arlene M i l l e r , Clerical Assistant G . F A N E , D i p . Tech., B . S c , M . B . A . , C . M . A . ( B C I T , Jillian Feist, C o - o p Assistant City U . , U B C ) G. F A R R E L L , M B A , C M A , F C M A (SFU) D. G O O D W I N . M . B . A . F . G R U E N , B . M g t . Eng., M . A . S c . ( R P I , Waterloo) C . H I L L , B . A . (Santa Clara) P. H O L D E N , B . A . . L . L . B . , M . B . A . ( U B C , U . of Ottawa, U B C ) General Information The Department o f Business Administration at Capilano College stresses a balanced combination o f classroom learning and hands-on business education. A l l of our faculty have first hand business experience and remain active in their specialties. S. I B A R A K I , ISP, C N I , C N E , M S S B , B E T A T E A M , N E T e a m , DpSc ( C I P S , N O V E L L , M I C R O S O F T , W e continually review and update our programs IBM, OUC) according to market needs so that our graduates have W . I N G L I S , B . A . , D i p . M k t g . ( U B C , U . Montreal) W . I N K S T E R , C . G . A . , (Canada), A C S M (Capilano), CNI the skills employers demand. A recent review of our programs by our A d v i s o r y Board, graduates, students and faculty led us to accentuate our training in prob- C. K I L I A N , B.A., M . A . (SFU) lem-solving, written and verbal business presentations, J.D. L O B L A W , B . A . (U o f T ) and team work. This gives our graduates an edge in R. L O N G W O R T H , B . S c , M . E d . (Concordia, St. Michaels) I.S.P. J. M A G E E , B . S c , D i p . P . A . , A C S M , C N E ( U o f G , U V i c , Capilano) J. M A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) C A today's highly competitive job market, and gives them the expertise to succeed in the workplace o f the future. Our graduates proceed to occupations such as: • Accountant • Advertising Account Manager R. M C B L A N E , B.Ed., M . E d . (Uof A ) • Computer Programmer C . M C K I E , B.Comm., M . B . A . , P.T.C. ( U B C , City Univ.) • Entrepreneur L . M I C H A E L S , B . S c , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U of A ) • Event Producer Career/Vocational 108 • Financial Analyst Admission Requirements • Financial Planner • • Lending Officer • Network Administrator Math 11 or • Operations Manager • • Production Manager Mature student status with successful completion o f testing in English and Math skills. • Promotion Manager • • Research Coordinator • Sales Representative/Sales Grade 12 or equivalent with preference given to a m i n i m u m of C + in English 12 and C in A c a d e m i c Submission o f the Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n , together with official transcripts to Manager Admissions, Registrar's Office. • Store Manager/Owner • • Systems Analyst Students currently enrolled in Grade 12 w i l l be considered on the basis of interim grades. In the past, many of our graduates have developed Additional program admission requirements arc found careers with large corporations such as K e l l o g g ' s , in the specific program descriptions. Hershey's, Chevron, I . C . B . C . , B B D O Advertising, The Future Shop, Labatt Breweries, Brights Wines, B . C . T e l , and B . C . H y d r o . The entrepreneurial skills gained in the program have also led many graduates to • administrative jobs in smaller firms. These include Articulation Agreements Secondary Formalized agreements have been articulated with the M i n e r v a Technologies, Seanix Technology Inc., Burnaby, Coquitlam, North Vancouver, Sunshine Western System Controls, Sierra Consulting and many Coast, Vancouver and West Vancouver school districts other small and medium sized businesses. whereby: Contact: Telephone: 984-4960, Fax: 984-1734 Students attaining a " B " or better in Financial Account- E-mail: website: busadmin@capcollege.bc.ca ing 12 or completion o f A p p l i e d Accounting 12 with a http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/badm challenge exam w i l l receive dual credit for B F I N 141. Students attaining a " B " or better in Marketing 12 and Business Management 12 w i l l receive dual credit for B M K T 161. Articulation Agreements in the Business Administration Department Business G r a d u a t e s with BADM Department a* Secondary School DisthctsBurnabv.Coquitlam, North Van—Sunshine CoasLVincouver, Wnl Nan. I Applied Builnrsi Technology Program! (Cipilano College) Open I nivercity (BBA) Available in partnership «ith Capilano C ollege Pott-Graduate Diploma Athabasca Business Diploma (BBA) and Royal Roads (BCom) Mailers of Business Administration Programs t ofLethbridge (BMgl) I'NBC (BBA) SFU (BBA) I Esening Certificate I'. For example: SFU IBC L'Vk Athabasca U. WWU Nova Southeastern wwu (BBA) Retail Marketing Certificate Caree rl Vocational 109 Transferability U n i v e r s i t y (other t h a n the O p e n U n i v e r s i t y ) A block transfer agreement of 60 credits exists, for Students who have already completed degrees or taken students who have completed the Business Administra- other university or college courses may apply to have tion diploma program, with the following universities: those credits transferred towards the Capilano College R o y a l Roads University, University of Northern B . C . , Business Administration programs. T o ensure a smooth Athabasca University, University o f Lethbridge. F o r transition, please provide the Registrar's Office with further information contact Richard Longworth in the transcripts and course outlines when you apply. A Business Administration department. student must complete at least 50 percent of the program requirements at Capilano College to receive a C a p i l a n o College certificate or diploma. Program Flexibility Whether you choose part-time or full-time studies in Business Administration, you w i l l be able to accumu- Prior Learning Assessment (PLA) late credits toward a certificate, diploma or degree. W e The Business Administration Department is committed have designed our programs to suit your needs as well to the recognition o f prior learning. Prior learning as the needs o f employers. The flexibility o f our assessment ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated learning for programs allows you to start with Capilano, build your credits which have been acquired through life or work o w n educational package today and continue to learn experiences. Y o u can obtain P L A credits for a l l first- with us in the future. T h i s "laddering" concept proves year courses. For further information contact the P L A your education can be adapted to fit your changing Coordinator at Capilano College. There is a fee for environment and those of industry. P L A assessment equal to the regular course costs. The Business Administration Department at Capilano Professionalism at Capilano offers a variety o f programs from a Bachelor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree (in partnership with B . C . ' s Open University), to C o - o p and Advanced Diplomas, to General Business and Accelerated Diplomas, to numerous certificates. M a n y courses are transferable from one credential to another, making it easier for students to advance to higher levels. O u r graduates have achieved an excellent reputation based on professional performance and positive attitude. Our classes stress the importance o f maintaining that reputation. A s future leaders and business administrators, students must be prepared to model appropriate professional behaviour while engaged in College and College-related activities. T h i s is the type Business Aministration Department Offerings Co-op and/or Advanced Diplomas OU BBA Degree Completion General Business and Accelerated Diplomas leader. Costs Students should be prepared for extra costs other than Certificates textbooks in some courses. These may include calculators, computer software or specialized course-related Level 4 30 credits Level 3 30 credits 30 credits Level 2 Up to 60 30 credits kits. 30 credits Timetables Students should not rely on the (F.S.Su) indicators by Block Level 1 of behaviour expected from a professional manager or credits 30 credits individual course descriptions when planning their personal timetable. They should use the Registrar's Min. 120 credits I 30 credits 60 credits Accounting Computing General Mgt. Int'l Business Marketing published timetable for the term or other timetable information from the department. 30 cr. Retail Mkting. Co-op Cert. 24 cr. Advanced Eve. Cert . 18 cr. Evening Cert. 18 cr. Local Govt. CONCENTRATIONS Admin. Cert. English Requirement A l l Business Administration diploma students must complete the English 100 course, or equivalent, to graduate. T o be eligible for English 100 you must have an ' A ' in English 12 or attain a suitable mark in the Ca re e rl Vo ca t. io n a I 110 Language Proficiency Index (LPI) or the college also apply to the Open University for entry into the administered English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) . Sec the degree completion program. These students may E D T information in the Registration section in this receive a reduced block transfer. Calendar. It is preferred that you take the English 100 course in the F I R S T T E R M or prior to completing your first year as it is a general prerequisite for all second level courses. Degree completion requirements may be met by taking approved business courses at Capilano College, university transfer courses at Capilano College, and/or courses offered by the Open University. A l l transfer credit is subject to the Open University's transfer credit Accounting/Finance Designations policies. M a n y o f the courses offered in the D i p l o m a and For more information, contact the Open University's Degree programs arc transferable to the Chartered Education Information Services at (604) 431-3300 or Accountant ( C A ) , Certified General Accountant 1-800-663-9711. ( C G A ) , and Certified Management Accountant ( C M A ) accreditation programs. Sec information included with B. specific course descriptions and refer to the B . C . Transfer Guide and the Capilano College Transfer Guide form more information. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION DIPLOMA PROGRAM W h a t is Co-operative Education? A. BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (BBA) DEGREE COMPLETION PROGRAM (BUSINESS M A N A G E M E N T ) Co-operative (Co-op) Education is a program that integrates classroom study with related on-the-job work experience. On-campus study alternates with periods of paid work experience. The first work term takes place during the M a y to August term; the second Capilano College business diploma graduates have the option of pursuing the Open University's Bachelor of Business Administration ( B B A ) degree. Through a partnership arrangement, courses required to meet degree requirements arc offered at the College. Graduates may be eligible for a transfer of up to 60 credits term from January to A p r i l . Cooperative program concentrations include Accounting, Business Computing, General Management, Marketing and Retail Marketing. toward the B B A degree. In addition, most 300 level W h a t are the benefits of Co-op Education? courses transfer to the Open University for upper level Co-op education is a three-way partnership among credit. students, employers and the College, with benefits for The block transfer is available to recent graduates. Students who graduated prior to 1991 w i l l have their programs individually reviewed and may need to take additional courses to make up for any deficiencies in the block transfer. Students may also have to make up some courses if they received exemptions in the Capilano College program or do not meet grade requirements as listed below. each partner. T o be eligible for the full block transfer of 60 credits The Student • Gains up to eight months o f valuable work experience. • • Earns a salary to help with educational costs. Is exposed to different jobs integrating classroom study with on-the-job experience. • Develops a network of contacts to enhance future employment possibilities. toward the Bachelor of Business Adminstration, graduates must meet the following requirements: • an appropriate Capilano College business diploma • a minimum accumulative G P A of 2.67 (70%) The Employer • • a m i n i m u m grade of 60% for courses in introductory economics and statistics • D i p l o m a holders with an overall G P A of less than 2.67 or who have graduated seven or more years ago may Is able to evaluate a co-op student as a potential employee. • completion of specific course requirements within the diploma program Gains a highly motivated employee with good general and specialized skills. • Provides input to the College, helping it to keep current and responsive in today's constantly changing market place. Career/Vocational 111 The College • General Gains valuable input from business, industry and Accounting Marketing Management government that is used to maintain program Option Option Option excellence. B F I N 249 B M K T 161 B F I N 244 B F I N 341 B M K T 261 B F I N 342 B M K T 263 H o w are students selected f o r t h e C o - o p Diploma Program? Obtaining a C o - o p work placement is a joint effort by Selection o f students for the Co-op D i p l o m a program the students and the C o - o p Education office. A d m i s - in Accounting, Management or Marketing is based on: sion to the Co-op diploma program does not guarantee work placement. Every effort is made to secure 1. Completion o f a minimum o f first year general placements for eligible C o - o p students. business (30 credits). Courses completed at other institutions may be acceptable. 2. A minimum cumulative grade point average of 2.67 calculated on Business Administration program courses. W h a t else must b e d o n e t o b e c o m e eligible f o r t h e C o - o p d i p l o m a ? To assure timely completion o f the requirements for 3. References from two Business Administration instructors. the C o - o p diploma, students w i l l follow the course sequence outlined in the C o - o p D i p l o m a Planning 4. A n interview with the Co-op Education Placement Officer. G u i d e , available from the C o - o p Education Office. U p o n completion o f the Business Administration C o - Selection is competitive and space in the C o - o p op option, students are eligible to receive a Business Administration D i p l o m a in their option area (Account- program is limited. ing, Management, Marketing or Retail Marketing) with Co-op W h a t is t h e C o - o p t i m e p a t t e r n ? The C o - o p D i p l o m a program takes 22 months to designation. H o w to Apply complete. It commences in September and includes below shows the sequence o f study and work periods: Students apply to the C o - o p program after completion of the first 30 credits o f the Business Administration program. Academic T e r m 1 Academic T e r m 2 Work Term 1 F o r more information or to request an application kit Sept-Dec Jan-Apr May-Aug (4 mos.) (4 mos.) (4 mos.) contact: Business Administration Department Academic T e r m 3 Sep-Dec (4 mos.) W o r k T e r m 2 Academic T e r m 4 Jan-Apr May-June (4 mos.) (2 mos.) two work terms and four academic terms. The table C o - o p Education Office Cedar B u i l d i n g , Office 311 or 342 Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3H5 W h a t h a p p e n s a f t e r a s t u d e n t is a d m i t t e d Dave O ' L e a r y , C o - o p Coordinator to the Co-op Diploma Program? Tel: (604) 984-1735 Students admitted to the Co-op D i p l o m a program in September w i l l be eligible to participate in a work Fax: (604) 984-1734 E - m a i l : doleary@capcollege.bc.ca placement the following summer ( M a y to August). Jillian Feist, C o - o p Assistant Prior to registering in a work term, students must: T e l : (604) 983-7557 Fax: (604) 984-1734 1. Attend the pre-employment seminar series offered by the C o - o p Education office. 2. Maintain a m i n i m u m o f 2.67 G P A . E - m a i l : jfei.st@capcollege.bc.ca Internet: http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/co-op/ 3. Have completed 60 credits in the Business A d m i n i s tration program including the following prerequisites: C. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION — A D V A N C E D DIPLOMA P R O G R A M Students wanting more concentrated business k n o w l edge may complete the A d v a n c e d Business D i p l o m a . Career/Vocationai 112 Y o u w i l l establish your area of specialization and gain B M K T 360 Marketing Research 10 9.0 specific training pertinent to management practices in Plus any three of the following courses: General Management, Accounting, Marketing or International Business. B M K T 362 Event Marketing & Management 3.0 A n Advanced D i p l o m a requires 30 credits in addition B M K T 364 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 to a Business Administration D i p l o m a . T o obtain an B M K T 365 Marketing Strategics & Advanced D i p l o m a you must complete the courses Decision M a k i n g 3.0 identified below and an appropriate number of B M K T 367 Promotion Strategy & A n a l y s i s 3.0 electives for a total of 30 credits. IBUS International Marketing 3.0 Electives offered in this program can be any business Plus two electives course or any course required to complete the Bach- Note: At least four of the six marketing courses must be taken in year three. elor's Degree ( B B A ) . If you also plan to pursue the 357 6.0 Business Administration Degree, you should carefully Advanced choose your electives to fit the Open University requirements. Contact the appropriate degree comple- International Business Diploma Capilano College Business students who have a tion convenor in the Business Administration Depart- Capilano Business diploma (60 credits) or equivalent ment at Capilano College or the Open University can qualify for the Advanced D i p l o m a in International Business Advisor. Business by completing the following courses: Courses required for all Advanced Diplomas Credits B A D M 304 Business P o l i c y IBUS Communication, Culture and 334 3.0 International Business 3XJ 6.0 General Management Advanced Diploma Credits Required 3.0 IBUS 321 International Business IBUS 334 Communication, Culture and International Business 3.0 IBUS 340 International Trade L a w 3.0 IBUS 357 International Marketing 3.0 IBUS 399 International Trade Opportunities 3.0 Credits 3.0 Managerial Accounting 3.0 Academic elective B A D M 302 Human Resource Management 3.0 Academic elective 3.0 B A D M 301 Operations Management 3.0 Business electives 9J) BFIN 244 Plus two approved electives Plus three additional electives Advanced Accounting Required: BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I Diploma 9X) 24.0 A Second Option For Advanced Diplomas Credits Y o u may complete a second option for any A d v a n c e d Business Administration D i p l o m a in the following 3.0 Plus any six o f the following courses, at least four o f BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I BFIN BFIN BFIN 342 346 347 Cost Accounting II Financial Accounting II Financial Accounting III BFIN 249 Accounting Microcomputer 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Applications 3.0 BFIN 350 Advanced Financial Management 3.0 BFIN 351 Taxation 3.0 Plus one elective Marketing 3.0 Diploma ways: 1. Complete the Core courses required for all advanced diplomas, plus all the courses required as requisites which must be taken in Y e a r 3: Advanced 30.0 6.0 Credits for both options requested*. Indicate on your Request for Evaluation F o r m , that you wish to be evaluated for two options, and state what the options are. If you have successfully completed all courses, your diploma w i l l then read: "Business Administration Advanced D i p l o m a " . Both options you have completed w i l l be listed immediately below. In addition, your permanent student record and transcript w i l l bear this information. 2. Complete an Advanced D i p l o m a . A t a subsequent time, you decide to complete the additional courses (minimum 15 credits) in another option. Y o u Required: B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 complete these courses, then submit your Request B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 for Evaluation together with your original diploma. Ca re e rl Vo ca tio n a I 113 Y o u r diploma w i l l then be reissued to read: " B u s i - *PIus a series o f non-credit s e m i n a r s on ness Administration A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . The employment orientation. options completed w i l l be listed immediately below, for example: " A c c o u n t i n g and Marketing Options." * Y o u must complete at least 15 additional credits for TERM 3 — SUMMER B A D M 299 C o - o p Placement I Credits 10 the second option. 3.0 D. BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE DIPLOMA PROGRAM (BCOP) This three-year program combines cooperative TERM 4 — FALL BCOP BCOP 205 304 A p p l i e d Statistics for Business Business C o m p u t i n g V 3.0 BCOP 306 C + + Levell 3.0 CMPT 230 Operating Systems 3.0 CMPT 289 Systems Implementation 3.0 10 15.0 workplace practicums with an innovative curriculum that starts with the first year o f the regular Business D i p l o m a program. Job placements for qualifying TERM 5 B A D M 399 SPRING Credits C o - o p Placement II students are full-time for a four-month term and are 10 3.0 made through arrangements between the College and employers. Students, in their second and third years, TERM 6 - work closely with an advisor to gain the best possible B A D M 304 Business Policy placement. Upon completion o f their four academic BCOP 325 Network III 3.0 terms and two work terms, graduates receive a B u s i - BCOP 326 C + + L e v e l II 10 SUMMER 3.0 9.0 ness D i p l o m a with C o - o p designation. Total Program Credits 90.0 Career Opportunities W i t h the comprehensive training provided, graduates w i l l secure positions as system analysts, programmers, computer network administrators, and computer user support. In the dynamic world o f computing, nothing is static! A s a result, we are constantly improving and updating the Business Computing C o - o p program in a balanced manner. W e strive to blend the mainstream o f information processing with the leading edge o f the emerging Contact: Dave O'Leary, Co-op Coordinator technologies. Therefore, the components of the pro- Tel: (604) 984-J 735 gram and the details o f the courses are subject to adjustment. Program Content E. Prerequisite: First Y e a r Business Administration D i p l o m a Program or equivalent TERM 1 — FALL BCOP 131 Introduction to Programming & Programming L o g i c Credits DIPLOMA PROGRAMS — T W O YEAR — FULL-TIME STUDIES (60 CREDITS) Students graduating with a Capilano College D i p l o m a 3.0 The Developmental Tools o f w i l l have the skills and knowledge required to be BCOP 171 Information Systems 3.0 with practical, up-to-date business knowledge. M a n y of BCOP 204 Business Computing III 3.0 the faculty hold full or part-time positions in their area BCOP 206 Accounting for Managers 3.0 of specialty. Class sizes are approximately 36 students, BCOP 215 Network I 10 and the faculty are in direct contact with all their effective managers. Courses are taught by instructors 15.0 students. A full-time course load provides a m i n i m u m of 20 instructional hours weekly. W e suggest at least TERM 2 — SPRING Credits 40 hours weekly of outside studies and preparation BCOP 214 Business C o m p u t i n g I V 3.0 time w i l l be required. BCOP BCOP 305 231 Network II Data Management 3.0 3.0 The first year has a common curriculum. In the second CMPT 184 Visual Basic 3.0 CMPT 189 Introduction to a Third Generation Language 10 15.0 Career/Vocational 114 year, students may concentrate on a particular area of specialization that w i l l allow them to continue their studies beyond the two-year d i p l o m a . This includes the option to obtain a business degree (Bachelor o f through the Open University. Concentrate Y o u r Studies W i t h Business Electives D i p l o m a graduates may also be eligible to obtain up to The Capilano College Business D i p l o m a allows y o u to a 60 credit block transfer toward undergraduate degrees choose courses that interest you. S i x of the 10 second- at the following universities: University of Northern year courses arc electives. Y o u can use the electives to B . C . , R o y a l Roads, University of Lethbridge and more. concentrate your studies, focus on career goals or Contact the department for more detailed information. broaden your education. N o other two-year business FALL Credits designing your education. Y o u can use the Business B A D M 101 Management 3.0 electives to commence specialization in any o f these B A D M 106 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 management areas: BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 • Accounting • Computing BFIN 141 Accounting* 3.0 • General Management • Finance ENGL 100 Composition • Marketing • International Business Business Administration, [ B B A ] ) at Capilano College diploma program gives you so much flexibility in FIRST YEAR — 3.0 15.0 The following is a partial list of Business elective YEAR — SPRING B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods FIRST Credits beyond the two-year D i p l o m a should consult a coordinator to ensure they choose the appropriate electives. B A D M 107 Business L a w I* 3.0 BCPT Business Computing II 3.0 B M K T 161 Marketings- 3.0 C M N S 220 Advanced Business Writing 122 courses. Students planning to continue their studies 3.0 Credits 3.0 B A D M 301 Operations Management B A D M 302 Human Resource Management 3.0 B A D M 303 Industrial Relations 3.0 * Students planning to concentrate their studies in B A D M 304 Business Policy 3.0 accounting must take B F I N 142 Financial Accounting I B A D M 310 Quantitative Methods III 3.0 in place of B A D M 107 Business L a w I in the spring BCPT Business Computing Presentation 3.0 3.0 & Editing 15.0 221 Graphics term. Business L a w ( B A D M 107) w i l l then be taken in the second year. Students not planning to take B F I N BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 142 may take Marketing ( B M K T 161) in the first term BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I 3.0 and Accounting ( B F I N ) in the second term. BFIN 351 Taxation 3.0 BFIN 342 Cost Accounting II BFIN 350 Note: For the daytime general BADM diploma program: Students must have completed either, all Level I courses prior to taking Level 2 courses, or, complete all their Level I courses concurrently in the term that they start their Level 2 courses. In special circumstances a prerequisite waiver can be applied. Advanced Financial Management 3.0 3.0 B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 B M K T 360 B M K T 364 B M K T 365 Marketing Research 3.0 Consumer Behaviour Marketing Strategies 3.0 3.0 321 International Business 3.0 IBUS B A D M 201 Business Systems Credits 3.0 B A D M 210 Business Statistics 3.0 (non-business) be university transfer courses from BFIN 241 Finance F o r Managers 3.0 Capilano. Students should consider courses in Geogra- ECON 111 M i c r o Economics 3.0 phy, Economics, Sociology or any language course other Business Elective 3.0 than English 100; however, most non-business courses Business Elective 3.0 at or above the 100 level w i l l be acceptable. Business Elective 3.0 should check with a coordinator to be sure. Studcn s Business Elective 3.0 considering the option of obtaining the Open Universi- Academic Elective 3.0 ty's B B A degree should choose courses-that carry Academic Elective 3.0 transfer credit to the Open University. Please check the 30.0 B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer SECOND YEAR Total Diploma Credits 60.0 We strongly recommend that the two general electives Students Guide for more information. CareerlVoca tioi al 115 Calculus is a requirement in the Bachelor o f Business BCPT 122 Business Computing II (July/Aug) 3.0 Administration ( B B A ) degree; therefore it is recom- BFIN 141 A c c o u n t i n g (May/June) 3.0 mended that you take M A T H 107 Pre-Calculus for B M K T 161 M a r k e t i n g (May/June) 3.0 Business and Social Sciences as a general elective in your second year, if you have not obtained at least a FALL " C " grade in M A T H 12. B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 B A D M 210 Business Statistics 3.0 ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS BFIN Finance for Managers 3.0 These 12-month programs are designed to offer SPRING business training for mature students. Students have the B A D M 302 Human Resource Management 3.0 opportunity to gain a clear understanding o f business B A D M 304 Business Policy 3.0 principles and to refine and add to the on-the-job BFIN 244 Management Accounting 3.0 experience they have previously acquired. IBUS 334 Communication, Culture and F. Credits 241 B M K T 263 Professional Selling S k i l l s 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level A unique feature o f the Accelerated Business A d m i n i s tration D i p l o m a is the credit given for work experience through the Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) process. (For complete details refer to the P L A section under 3.0 6.0 Credits International Business 3.0 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level 6.0 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent M Total credit hours 60.0 General Information — Admissions section in this Calendar). F o r a diploma, students must attain 60 credits, o f which up to nine P L A credits are assigned for a m i n i m u m work experience o f seven years. The remaining credits are earned from satisfactory completion o f Business Administration courses. Students who do not have the m i n i m u m work experience are required to take additional courses so that they graduate with 60 credits. To allow for the particular educational needs of students who may have diverse working backgrounds, certain courses offered by the Department may be substituted for others in the second and third term. The coordinator's approval must be obtained. ACCELERATED ACCOUNTING MANAGEMENT SUMMER (Classes start early May) Quantitative Methods 3.0 B A D M 201 Business Systems 3.0 BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 * C M N S 220 A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editing • Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. FALL B A D M 107 BFIN 241 341 BFIN 346 BFIN B M K T 161 • M i n i m u m o f seven years business experience in Business Elective* Admission Requirements Credits B A D M 102 Business L a w Finance for Managers Cost A c c o u n t i n g I Financial Accounting II Marketing 3.0 Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 industry, government or private business or an SPRING B A D M 210 Business Statistics Credits 3.0 with final acceptance based on the applicant's work BFIN 342 Cost Accounting II 3.0 experience, maturity and aptitude for the program. BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III 3.0 BFIN 249 A c c o u n t i n g Microcomputer A d m i s s i o n together with official transcripts and BCPT 121 resume to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Business Elective* 3.0 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent 6JJ Total credit hours 60.0 undergraduate degree and three years o f experience. • Personal interview conducted February to m i d - A p r i l • A personal resume. • Submit the Capilano College Application for Applications 3.0 Business Computing I 3.0 ACCELERATED GENERAL M A N A G E M E N T * Please see convenor i f a signature is required. SUMMER (Classes start early May) Credits BADM 102 Quantitative Methods (July/Aug) BCPT 121 Business Computing I (May/June) 3.0 Career/Vocational 116 3.0 ACCELERATED MARKETING MANAGEMENT Program Content SUMMER BMKT 160 Marketing 3.0 CMPT 152 Structured Programming 3.0 3.0 CMPT 155 Quantitative Methods for Managcrs3.0 CMPT 180 Microcomputer Applications I (Classes start early May) TERM 1 — Jan./Feb. Credits (May/June) BCPT 121 Business Computing I BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 BMKT 161 Marketing 3.0 Credits JL0 12.0 TERM II — Mar.I April (July/August) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods 3.0 CMPT 153 Object Oriented Programming I 1.5 BCPT Business Computing II 3.0 CMPT 182 Introduction to Systems 3.0 CMPT 191 Accounting for Managers I CMPT 222 Microcomputer Applications II 122 FALL Credits BADM 107 3.0 _3i2 Business L a w I 3.0 B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 TERM III — May/June B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 BCOP 215 Network I B M K T 360 Marketing Research 3.0 BCOP 231 Data Management 3.0 B M K T 365 Marketing Strategics and Decision CMPT 184 Visual Basic 3.0 CMPT 223 Microcomputer Applications III Making 3.0 1 Business Elective at the 200 or 300 level 10.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 12.0 TERM IV — July/Aug. SPRING B A D M 304 Business Policy BFIN Credits BCOP 305 Network II 3.0 3.0 CMPT 154 Object Oriented Programming II 3.0 3.0 241 Finance for Managers 3.0 CMPT 224 M i c r o Applications I V B M K T 364 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 CMPT 230 Operating Systems B M K T 367 Promotion Strategy & Analysis 3.0 IBUS Communication, Culture and 334 International Business 3.0 12.0 TERM V — Sept./Oct. 3.0 BCOP 325 Network III 1 Business Elective* 3.0 CMPT 276 Projects in Industry-Practicum 1.5 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent 9.0 CMPT 289 Systems Implementation 3.0 Total credit hours 60.0 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent 3.0 tration course of 3 credits. Total Credit Hours G. H. ACCELERATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS M A N A G E M E N T (ACSM) PROGRAM 6j) 13.5 * Electives can be any appropriate Business A d m i n i s - 60.0 PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE you to concentrate intensely over a shorter period of This package o f courses is designed to maximize transfer credit to professional accounting associations: Certified General Accountants ( C G A ) , Certified Management Accountants Society of B . C . ( C M A ) , and Chartered Accountants ( C A ) . time. This program begins in January every year. Students wanting to maximize their transfer credit i n A l l certified courses arc taught by our N o v e l l and the shortest possible time would select courses from Microsoft certified instructors — Capilano College is those recommended below. the only college or university certified by both N o v e l l Students w i l l not receive a diploma or certificate and Microsoft in Western Canada. W e are also accred- without taking further courses. Capilano College offers a 10-month program leading to a D i p l o m a in Computer Systems Management. The program is offered in two-month segments to enable ited by C I P S , the Canadian Information Processing Society. C a l l the Business Administration Department for a brochure and details. Appointments for interviews are conducted throughout the year. Sec our W e b site for current information: http://www.capcollcgc.bc.ca/badm SUMMER (Classes start early May) Credits B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods 3.0 B A D M 201 Business Systems 3.0 BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 Career/Vocational 117 CMNS 220 A d v a n c e d Business Writing and Professional Practice Editing* FALL 3.0 Credits BADM 107 Business L a w I 3.0 BFIN 241 Finance for Managers 3.0 BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I 3.0 BFIN 346 Financial Accounting II 3.0 SPRING Credits B A D M 210 Business Statistics 3.0 BFIN Cost Accounting II 3.0 342 BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III 3.0 BFIN 350 A d v a n c e d Financial Management 3.0 These offerings are subject to change. — Comprehensive Financial Planning and Professional Ethics ™ Trademarks of the Certified Financial Planner Board of Standards, Inc., used under licence. Neither the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning nor Capilano College award the rights to use the marks CFP™, Certified Financial Planner™ and CFP. The right to use the marks is granted under licence by the FPSCC to those persons who have met its educational standards passed by the FPSCC Professional Proficiency Examination, satisfied a work experience requirement and agreed to abide by the Code of Ethics. J. RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP CERTIFICATE (RMCP) P R O G R A M * Please see convenor i f signature is required. General Information I. CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER™ PROGRAM 1. After successfully completing the course requirements o f this program a student w i l l receive a Retail Marketing C o - o p Certificate. A b o u t the Program 2. U p o n successful completion o f the eight-month C o Developed by the Canadian Institute of Financial op Certificate program, specific courses w i l l be Planning specifically for individuals who wish to transferable to the Business Administration D i p l o m a become qualified professional financial planners, the program. Students are encouraged to go on to program covers the full spectrum o f financial products, complete the D i p l o m a requirements. services and strategies. Capilano College now offers the Certified Financial Planner™ Program ( C F P ) on the 3. This exciting Retail Marketing Co-op program offers institute's behalf, with the approval o f the Financial something for everyone, including the opportunity to Planners Standards C o u n c i l of Canada. After complet- earn your tuition and more while you study the ing the program, students with two years work experi- dynamic world of retail marketing. ence can write the professional proficiency examination in order to receive the CFP™ certification mark. This non-credit program is offered in partnership with the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning and the Capilano College Business Administration Department. The C F P programs are offered at various start dates throughout the year. F o r further information, contact the Continuing Education Department at 984-4901. 4. Retail Marketing students can use this area o f study as a foundation year for the Business Administration D i p l o m a . Students get a hands-on business education with numerous opportunities to work in the dynamic world of retail marketing. M a n y other related career training courses are offered such as Retail Event Management, Retail B u y i n g and V i s u a l M a r k e t i n g . The strength o f this program is in the combination o f real world work Program Content Personal Financial Planning — An Introduction to Personal Financial Planning Wealth Accumulation — The Fundamentals of Investment Planning Controlling the Future — Creating Financial Security Strategic Investment Planning experience with the appropriate curriculum to support these areas o f interest. A Retail Marketing student who completes a Business Administration D i p l o m a with a m i n i m u m G P A o f 2.67 (70%) may be eligible for a transfer of up to 60 credits toward the Open U n i v e r s i t y ' s Bachelor of Business Administration Degree ( B B A ) . Students wishing to complete their degree requirements may do so through — Understanding Investment Products and Investment Strategies Capilano College and the Open University. F o r more Risk Management and Estate Planning please refer to the complete description in the College — The Role of Insurance and Estate Planning in Personal Financial Management Calendar. a 118 reer/Vocational information on the Open University degree program Contact: Charlene Hill, 984-1721 RMCP 173 RMCP 181 Doug Loblaw, 983-7555 Retail Finance/ Store Management II Career Opportunities Managing your own business Store Manager—independent or chain Department Manager 3.0 Strategic Retail B u y i n g 10 Instructional C r e d i t s 15.0 Total Instructional Credits 30.0 Total Co-op W o r k Credits 3.0 K. EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS Wholesale Sales Representative Manufacturer's Sales Representative The courses in these programs, beginning in September Manufacturer's Agent and January each year, w i l l teach the student basic Fashion Promotion Consultant managerial skills that arc o f practical value in a wide Marketing Research-Field Operator variety o f jobs. Classes are conducted by Department Sales Manager faculty and industry specialists and offered M o n d a y to Advertising Manager Thursday evenings. Those enrolled in the programs B u y e r and Central Buyer may take the courses at their chosen pace. A number of V i s u a l Presentation Specialist credit courses from both the full-time D i p l o m a pro- Sales Promotion Manager grams and the part-time Certificate programs arc Sales Representative Consumer Products offered in the evenings during the spring and fall terms. Marketing Assistant A limited number of senior (300 level) courses may be Retail or Design Consultant available in the May/June and July/August terms. Special Event Coordinator Admission Requirements B U S I N E S S A D M I N I S T R A T I O N CERTIFICATE • Grade 12 or equivalent with preference given to A Certificate in Business Administration w i l l be • applicants with a m i n i m u m of C+ in English 12 and awarded after successful completion of the two re- C in Math 11, or quired courses and a choice of any four additional • Mature student status three-credit courses chosen from the Business A d m i n - • A n interview may be required istration evening or daytime offerings. Submission of the Capilano College Application for Substitution may be allowed at the discretion o f the Admission together with official transcripts to evening program coordinator. Admissions, Registrar's Office. REQUIRED Program Content B A D M 101 FIRST YEAR — FALL Credits Credits Management 3.0 or BMKT 161 Marketing 3.0 B A D M 108 Introduction to Business 3.0 BCPT CMNS RMCP RMCP 121 152 164 172 Business Computing I Report W r i t i n g Creative Retail Strategics Retail Technology 3.0 3.0 3.0 BMKT Marketing 3.0 B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods I 3.0 B A D M 103 Supervisory Skills 3.0 B A D M 106 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 B A D M 201 Business Systems 3.0 W. Store Management I Instructional Credits N o t e : The students will be given 12 hours of preemployment seminars prior to their co-op work experience period. CO-OP PLACEMENT — December-January R M C P 190 Fall Co-op W o r k Placement FIRST YEAR — SPRING 161 OPTIONAL B A D M 210 Business Statistics 3.0 B A D M 307 Business L a w II 3.0 B A D M 268 Entrcprcncurship/Small Business Management 3.0 BCPT Business Computing I 3.0 3.0 3.0 121 Credits BCPT 122 Business Computing II B A D M 101 Management 3.0 BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 RMCP Retail Event Management 3.0 155 O r other courses offered by the Business Administration Department. C a ree rl Vo ca ti o rial 119 A D V A N C E D BUSINESS A D M I N I S T R A T I O N CERTIFICATE and change agents as a result o f their involvement in A second or advanced certificate w i l l be awarded The Education Committee o f the M u n i c i p a l Officers' following successful completion o f an additional four Association ( M . O . A . ) o f British C o l u m b i a and the the program. three-credit courses. These must be chosen from the Provincial Board of Examiners has sanctioned several Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. courses o f study offered through the college and university systems in British C o l u m b i a w h i c h , when Note: A student must attain a 2.0 GPA or better to qualify for cither supplemented by work experience in B . C . local certificate. BUSINESS C O M P U T I N G government, w i l l lead to Provincial Certification. The four courses described below are recognized by the CERTIFICATE M . O . A . and Board of Examiners as being transferable A Certificate in Business Computing w i l l be awarded for credit toward the Intermediate Certificate in after successful completion o f the four Municipal required courses and a choice o f any two additional three-credit Administration. (For more details about the Board of E x a m i n e r s / M . O . A . Certificate Programs, courses chosen from the Business Administration contact D a v i d M o r r i s , Executive Director, M u n i c i p a l evening or daytime offerings. Officers' Association, V i c t o r i a at 250-383-7032.) Credits REQUIRED B A D M 201 Business Systems* 3.0 BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 BCPT BCPT 122 221 Business Computing II Business Computing Presentation 3.0 Graphics 3.0 O n completion of the following four P A D M courses (Local Government Administration, L o c a l Government Services, M u n i c i p a l L a w , and M u n i c i p a l Finance in British C o l u m b i a ) , plus other courses, successful candidates w i l l be eligible to receive a College Professional Capilano Certificate in Local Government Administration. * Please contact the convenor for possible substitute for this course. Not all courses w i l l be offered each Contact: Linn Teetzel, 984-4960, ext. 2340 or 983-7570, ext. 2340. year. E-mail: OPTIONAL B A D M 101 B A D M 103 B A D M 106 B A D M 107 B M K T 161 BFIN 141 BFIN 142 Management Supervisory Skills Organizational Behaviour Business L a w I Marketing Accounting Financial Accounting I Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Other courses are offered by the Business Administra- lteetzel@capcollege.bc.ca COURSES P A D M 200 P A D M 201 P A D M 202 L o c a l Government Administration L o c a l Government Service M u n i c i p a l Finance in Credits 3.0 3.0 British C o l u m b i a 3.0 M u n i c i p a l Law in British C o l u m b i a 3.0 T w o B A D M , University Transfer or other courses approved by the Department. 6,0 P A D M 203 tion Department. L. LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE PROGRAM 18.0 M. INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS PROGRAM (IBUS) Recognizing that world trade has assumed a position of This program is designed with and for professionals major importance in the global community, the B u s i - currently employed by Municipalities. Regional ness Department has developed an International Districts, Improvement Districts, or supporting agen- Business program that w i l l provide students with a cies in British C o l u m b i a . professional level of competence in the international arena. The purpose of the program is to provide opportunities for participants to gain increased knowledge of the This program w i l l provide students with the k n o w l - political and organizational realities o f local govern- edge, cultural awareness and business skills required to ments in B . C . as well as identifying opportunities for do business in the ever-growing Pacific R i m countries. change within these systems. It is expected that T w o levels of this program are available. For Capilano participants w i l l be more effective managers, leaders College Business Administration D i p l o m a graduates, Career/Vocational 120 there is a new Advanced D i p l o m a in International Business as detailed previously under the Advanced BUSINESS D i p l o m a heading. PROGRAM FUNDAMENTALS For graduates of other colleges or universities, we offer a Certificate in International Business upon completion Instructional of the following two-term program. A number o f the N . B A W A , B . B . A . . (SFU), L L . B (McGill) I B U S courses are also transferable to the Bachelor o f D . B L A N E Y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C . P . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) Business Administration ( B B A ) degree completion M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. program. Contact the convenor for details. Faculty (UBC) The following courses are required to qualify for the C . C R A M , B . A . , M . A . , Prof. Teaching Certificate, (U. of T.) Certificate in International Business: Credits L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U o f Conn.) M . B . A . ( N . Eastern IBUS 321 International Business IBUS 334 Communication, Culture and International Business 3.0 IBUS 340 International Trade L a w 3.0 S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . IBUS 357 International Marketing 3.0 C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) International Trade Opportunities 3.0 S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) IBUS 399 B A D M 268 BFIN 241 3.0 Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. E X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Entrepreneurship/Small Business Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L Management 3.0 Finance for Managers 3.0 Cert. K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard 3 Business electives Total: &Q 30.0 Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist A . W H I T E , Instructor N. NETWORK SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE PROGRAM (NSP) Support Staff L i s a Larkins, Clerk Typist Faye U l k c r , Clerk Typist Wendy W c b c r g , Divisional Assistant A n all new-program designed for computer professionals who need essential cross-platform networking skills. The Program A l l certified courses are taught by our N o v e l l and The Business Fundamentals program is a four-month Microsoft certified instructors. Capilano College is the program that may be taken on a full-time or part-time only college or university certified by both Novell and basis during the fall or spring semester. The Business Microsoft in Western Canada. W e are also accredited Fundamentals program has been designed for students by C I P S , the Canadian Information Processing Society. who require basic business skills training or w h o need Contact: Nancy Findlater, 984-4960; Fax: 984-1734 as a stepping stone to a more advanced program of to upgrade their skills. M a n y students take this program studies. Graduates o f this program may ladder into COURSES Credits N o v e l l 4.1 x IntranetWarc System Administration 3.0 N o v e l l 4.1 x Design and Implementation 3.0 Microsoft W i n d o w s N T 4 A d m i n . 3.0 Business Administration to take more advanced courses leading towards a degree. Contact: Applied Business Technology Division. 984-4959; E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca Microsoft W i n d o w s N T 4 Server 3.0 Admission Requirements Networking T C P / I P 3.0 • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature Creating W i n d o w s N T W e b Server 3J) 18.0 A l l courses arc offered on evenings and weekends. student status • Eligible students w i l l attend an information meeting and personal interview. Caree rl Vo ca tionai 121 The Program Program Profile Credits O T E C 111 Business English I o r O T E C 113 Business English & The C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n program prepares students for employment in the animation industry, specifically in the area o f classical (character) animation. T h i s Communications 3.0 intense program focuses on drawing skills and studio O T E C 115 Business Systems & Procedures 3.0 procedures in the production of animated commercials, O T E C 117 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I 3.0 television series, computer game design and feature O T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I o r films. The program works closely with producers o f O T E C 123 W o r d Processing Procedures a n d traditional and computer animation, establishing and O T E C 245 Introductory Microcomputer evolving the curriculum to meet the industry's need for Applications 6X) skilled animators and animation designers. N e w Certificate R e q u i r e m e n t s 15.0 students are admitted each September in a class of 22. COMMERCIAL ANIMATION PROGRAM Part-Time Evening Courses Part-time, non-credit animation courses are offered through the Continuing Education Department. Courses are designed for prospective applicants who Instructional want to find out what a career in commercial animation Faculty J. D E L A N E Y , Head o f Layout & Design, Delaney & is like before they commit to a full-time animation program. Courses in Life D r a w i n g and Computer Friends Cartoon Productions H . D E N N Y , D i p . Fine Art (Southwark College of Art & Design), B . A . (Hons.), ( N o r w i c h School of Art) M . G H O R E 1 S H I , D i p . Animation/Television A n i m a t i o n are also available. Part-time courses are taught by faculty in the full-time program. Contact Continuing Education, 984-4901 for details. (Algonquin), Instructor's Cert. (Iran), Theatre Stage Design (Iran) D . M A R J A N O V I C , B . A . (Sarajevo), Theatre, F i l m and T V Direction (Middlesex Polytechnics in London) D . P E R R O , D i p . F i l m Animation ( E m i l y Carr College of A r t & Design), Cert. Teacher Development Program (Ontario) E . T E I C H R O E B , Cert. Vancouver Vocational Institute W. V A N L U V E N , B.A., M.F.A. (UBC) Support Staff D . Holmes, Program Assistant Admission Requirements and Procedures 1. A n Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted, together with official transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary courses to Admissions, Registrar's Office. 2. Requisites: • 18 years o f age • Grade 12 completion or equivalent • Strong drawing skills Applicants must include five 8-1/2" x 11" drawings General Information In the past 10 years, animation has exploded onto motion picture and television screens around the world. There has been an increasing demand for skilled animation artists caused by the continued success of both limited animation television scries and major film productions. C o m m e r c i a l animation companies in British C o l u m b i a have been approached by both American and European animation producers to with their Application for A d m i s s i o n which must be sent to the Registrar's Office by m i d - A p r i l . The drawings should demonstrate an ability to draw accurately from life. Applicants deemed acceptable w i l l be invited to present a portfolio o f drawings in person. The portfolio should show a diversity o f style and subject matter and demonstrate the applicant's aptitude for cartoon animation design. D u r i n g the portfolio reviews, applicants w i l l complete a drawing provide services and/or co-produce animation projects. exercise consisting o f a still life rendered realistically. The only limitation on the industry to respond to these The five drawings, portfolio, and drawing exercise w i l l opportunities has been the shortage of commercially- be graded, and the top 22 applicants w i l l be accepted trained animators. Contact: 983-7516: E-mail: into the program. The remaining acceptable applicants toons@capcollege.bc.ca w i l l be offered a place on a waiting list, ranked according to their respective scores. Ca reer/Voca tiona i 122 Prospective students should contact the Animation FOURTH Department directly to receive the current admissions A N I M 241 Animation Drawing I V 3.0 package which contains everything necessary to apply A N I M 242 Major Projects 3.0 3.0 for admission to the Commercial Animation program. Information Meetings Information meetings w i l l be held between September and A p r i l . Please contact the department at 983-7516 TERM Credits A N I M 243 Life D r a w i n g for Animation I V A N I M 244 Animation Practicum 3.0 A N I M 245 Colour and M e d i a 10 15.0 60.0 D i p l o m a Requirement for dates and times. COMMUNICATIONS Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $4,000 for Instructional Faculty tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the two- C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) year program. B . R E I D , B . A . (Alberta) L . S A V A G E , B . A . ( M c G i l l ) , D i p . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams, Cairo) Graduation Requirements G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard In order to graduate from the C o m m e r c i a l Animation program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist W. V A N L U V E N , B.A., M.F.A. (UBC) M . W I T T M A N , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . ( U B C ) Professional Standards A l l C o m m e r c i a l Animation students are required to adhere to high standards o f academic performance and professional behaviour. The Communications ( C M N S ) Department provides training in writing and speech for students in University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs, as well as those wishing to apply specific skills to the world of work. C M N S offers courses in business and technical Program Content FIRST TERM writing, public speaking, freelance writing, and English Credits basics. A N I M 111 Animation D r a w i n g I 6.0 Contact: Leslie Savage, Coordinator, A N I M 112 Animation Design I 2.25 E-mail: A N I M 113 Life D r a w i n g for Animation I 3.0 A N I M 114 History o f Character Animation 2.25 C M N S 115 Communications 10 16.5 SECOND TERM A N I M 121 Animation D r a w i n g II Credits 6.0 A N I M 122 Animation Design II 1.5 A N I M 1 23 Life D r a w i n g for Animation II 3.0 A N I M 126 Layout Design I 1.5 MDIA120 F i l m Studies for Animation TERM A N I M 231 Animation Drawing III A N I M 232 Storyboard Design Career Opportunities In an information-based economy, good communication skills are a vital asset in any career. M a n y career program C M N S courses offer components on effective job search techniques, including resume writing and interviewing. Courses for freelance writers equip students with the basic skills needed to market their work to magazines, newspapers and book publishers. L5 13.5 THIRD 983-7515 lsavage@capcollegc.bc.ca Credits 3.0 3.0 A N I M 233 Life D r a w i n g for Animation III 3.0 A N I M 234 Computer Animation 3.0 A N I M 236 Layout Design II 10 15.0 Admission Requirements Students wishing to enrol in a specialized career program C M N S course must meet the admission standards of that particular program. In some cases students may wish to take the C M N S component before enrolling in the rest of the program. Such students w i l l require permission of the coordinators of both C M N S and the career program in question. CareeriVoca tional 123 Students wishing to enrol in "open" sections o f C M N S , C M N S 179— Legal Communications such as those offered in the evening, must meet general C M N S 190 — Magazine Article W r i t i n g C M N S 220 — A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and C o l l e g e admission standards. Applications for Admission to individual programs w h i c h contain communications courses must be Editing C M N S 250 — Introduction to Technical W r i t i n g C M N S 280 — Marketing C o m m e r c i a l Fiction submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, with that program specified. Applicants who wish to enrol only in the "open" communications courses must also C M N S 290 — Marketing a N o n - F i c t i o n Book submit an Application for Admission. Specify the C M N S 354 — Advanced Communications Skills and program as Career — Communications courses only. A l l applicants must be admitted to the College before Resources for T o u r i s m Management C M N S 356 — A d v a n c e d M e d i a Communications registration can be completed. University Transfer Courses A number of Communications courses are eligible for full or partial university transfer credit. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for more information. Special Fees and Expenses Most C M N S classes require no special fees; for online courses, students must purchase an account with an Internet service provider. Consult the coordinator if EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE AND EDUCATION PROGRAM A. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D E D U C A T I O N CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M S B. I N F A N T A N D T O D D L E R CERTIFICATE PROGRAM C. SPECIAL N E E D S CERTIFICATE PROGRAM you have any questions about such fees in your course. Instructional N o t e : Consult the coordinator for the current CMNS courses and the details of their content and prerequisites. R. A N N E , B . S c . ( C o l u m b i a Pacific), D i p . E . C . E . (Ryerson) A . C A R R , M . A . ( S F U ) , D i p . E d . (London) J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina General Hospital), Teaching Courses C M N S 080 — Faculty Career Program Communications Preparation for E S L Students D i p . (Sask.) S. L O W , B . A . (Alta), E . C . E . Cert. J. M O S E S , B . A . , B . S . W . ( M c M a s t e r ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) , E . C . E . Cert. ' D . O ' K R A I N E T Z , B . E d . ( U B C ) E . C . E . Cert. M . R A W S T H O R N E , B.H.E., M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. L . J . R E N N I E B . S c , D i p . E . C . E . (Brigham Y o u n g ) C M N S 110 — Standard English Usage CMNS 111-- Administrative Writing C M N S 115 — Communications for A n i m a t i o n C M N S 120 — Effective Writing and Speech C M N S 125— Communication Theory Support C M N S 130— Introductory M e d i a Communications Nancy Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r — Receptionists C M N S 136 — Introduction to F i l m & T V Diane M i l l s — Program Assistant Coordinator Staff Scriptwriting in Canada Our society is recognizing the importance o f the early C M N S 145— Computer Writing C M N S 152 — Report Writing need in communities for child care services, and for C M N S 153 — Communications and the Arts trained staff who can ensure that all children's interests C M N S 154— Communications in Outdoor Recreation and Tourism C M N S 159 — years in children's development. There is an increasing and needs are met in a variety of programs. The Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education program prepares students to work in various settings, including Communications for the Legal preschools and daycare centres. Secretary C M N S 170 — Presentation Skills for Public Speaking Career/Vocational 124 Contact: 984-4960 Career Opportunities employee or volunteer in a licensed early childhood Graduates o f the programs have found rewarding setting within the last two years. A commitment to careers working in licensed preschool and daycare young children and their families and evidence o f centres, in schools as Special Education Teaching interpersonal and life skills arc also essential. A p p l i - Assistants, as Community Care Licensing Officers, in cants should be aware that a criminal record check is management positions in childcarc organizations and now required by practicum placements and employers. as consultants. The placement record for our graduates Due to the intensity o f the full-time program, it is is excellent. recommended that applicants have at least one year o f college or university experience. Credentials A w a r d e d In preparation for applying to the program, prospective students may choose to take some o f the following A . E a r l y C h i l d h o o d C a r e and Education Certificate courses: E N G L 100, A N T H 121, A H I S 100, B I O L This is awarded to students who successfully complete 104, P H I L 101, P S Y C 100, 101, S O C . 100, 101, the full-time or part-time program at the North V a n - W M S T 100. couver campus or the part-time programs at the Sechelt or Squamish campuses. Application Procedure hood Care and Education Certificate program and the 1. Complete and submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts for secondary and postsecondary education. Infant & Toddler program, the student is awarded an 2. Attend the Information Meeting on March 3, 1999, Infant & Toddler Certificate from Capilano College. 7:00 p m , R o o m C E 1 4 8 (Cedar Building). After the B . Infant & T o d d l e r C e r t i f i c a t e F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f the Early C h i l d - Information Meeting, you w i l l schedule a group C . S p e c i a l Needs C e r t i f i c a t e F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f the Early C h i l d - interview time. 3. A t the interview, you must submit a resume, three hood Care and Education Certificate program and the letters o f reference, and complete a writing assign- Special Needs program, the student is awarded a ment. Special Needs Certificate from Capilano College. 4. A Reading Assessment w i l l be required. E C C E Diploma A diploma in Early Childhood Care and Education is granted by Capilano College to students who have successfully completed the Early Childhood Care and Education Certificate and both the Infant & Toddler and Special Needs Certificates. The Early Childhood Care and Education Certificate and successful completion of the required 500 hours work experience enables students to register as an Early Childhood Educator in British C o l u m b i a by applying to the Manager o f Early Childhood Programs at the C o m m u n i t y Care Facility Branch. Certificates in Infant & Toddler Education and Special Needs Education may also be acquired through the C C F B . Upon Acceptance Submit a completed medical report on a form provided by the college, plus evidence of absence o f active tuberculosis. Continuation in the Program Continuation into each tenn of the programs is dependent upon the demonstration of satisfactory interpersonal, academic and teaching/guiding skills. " C - " is the minimum acceptable grade in all courses. Practicum grades must be " C " or higher. Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $ 1,200 Admission Requirements on books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be in- Enrolment in the Early Childhood Care and Education curred for a First A i d course and transportation to Certificate programs is limited to 25 students. practicums. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age, be a high school graduate, have college-level writing and academic skills and have 40 hours experience as an Career/Voca tional 125 A. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D SUMMER EDUCATION CERTIFICATE E D U C 270 Intro, to W o r k i n g with Families 1.5 E D U C 271 Intro, to Centre Organization 1.5 PROGRAMS The North Vancouver campus offers both a full-time TERM*** E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 E D U C 277 A p p l i e d T h e o r y - P r a c t i c u m III 40 8.5 10-month program and a part-time program which may be completed within two years. Sechelt and Squamish campuses may offer part-time programs. Program Content — North Vancouver Campus These programs are based on the "Competencies in Early C h i l d h o o d Education," and are approved by the Part-time — First Year Community Care Facilities Branch o f the Ministry o f FALL Health. The foundation o f the E C C E programs is the TERM Credits/Lab Hrs E D U C 166 H u m a n G r o w t h and study o f development from birth to school-age. The Development I - Part A history and current philosophies of early childhood education are examined. A n interrelated series o f courses focus on the care and education of young 2.25 E D U C 170 Interpersonal Skills 1.5 E D U C 171 C a r i n g & Learning 1.5 Environments children from an anti-bias perspective. Students also study program planning, curriculum content, health and nutrition, interpersonal skills and family-centre rela- SPRING TERM Credits/Lab Hrs E D U C 167 H u m a n G r o w t h and tionships. Theory and practice arc closely related throughout the program. Students have practical experience in three practicum centres under the guidance of qualified Early C h i l d h o o d Educators. In practicum centres students adhere to the Early C h i l d - Development I - Part B 2.25 E D U C 172 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n I 1.5 E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I CIP* SUMMER bood Educators o f B . C . ' s Code o f Ethics. TERM*** Credits/Lab E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I Courses are presented in a manner which promotes Hrs 1.5 E D U C 177 Observing and Recording/ active participation through demonstrations, oral A p p l i e d Theory I reports, group projects, role play and discussions. - Practicum I 4.5 * C I P : Course in Progress Program Content Campus *** A l l students must have E N G L 100 or C M N S 155 North Vancouver to graduate. C M N S 155 is offered in the spring term in the evening; one night per week. Full-time FALL Credits/Lab TERM Hrs E D U C 155 Human G r o w t h and Development I 1.5 E D U C 171 Caring and Learning 1.5 Environments E D U C 172 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n I 1.5 E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I 1.5 E D U C 175 Observing and Recording 1.5 E D U C 176 A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum I 3J) 15.0 TERM Credits/Lab TERM Credits/Lab E D U C 220 Health, Safety and Nutrition 1.5 E D U C 272 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n 1.5 E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 E D U C 276 A p p l i e d Theory — Practicum II 4.0 4.5 E D U C 170 Interpersonal S k i l l s SPRING Part-time — Second Year FALL 4 4 Hrs SPRING TERM Credits/Lab E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives 3.0 E D U C 270 Intro, to W o r k i n g with Families 1.5 E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II CIP* SUMMER TERM*** E D U C 220 Health, Safety & Nutrition 1.5 E D U C 271 Intro, to Centre Organization E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives 3.0 E D U C 275 Human G r o w t h & Dev. II E D U C 272 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n II 1.5 E D U C 277 A p p l i e d T h e o r y - P r a c t i c u m III 4.0 E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II CIP* E D U C 275 Human G r o w t h & Dev. II E D U C 276 A p p l i e d T h e o r y - P r a c t i c u m II 40 11.5 C a reerl Voca tiona I 126 4 1.5 4 Credits/Lab 1.5 1.5 Hrs 4 Hrs 4 Hrs Program Content — Squamish E D U C 351 * F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y (Fall '99) Please check Squamish calendar. Program Content — Sechelt 2.0 E D U C 358 Special Needs Practicum 1.5 E D U C 359 Special Needs Practicum L5 9.0 Please check Sechelt calendar. SPRING B. C. TERM Credits 2.0 INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE PROGRAM E D U C 352* Centre Operations (Spring '99) E D U C 354 Program Planning for Special Needs (Spring '98) 1.5 SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM E D U C 358 Special Needs Practicum 1.5 E D U C 359 Special Needs Practicum L5 6.5 These evening part-time programs are for the student who is certified as an Early C h i l d h o o d Educator or is in *Thcse courses apply to both the Infant/Toddler and Special Needs Certificates. the process o f completing the required 500 hours work experience. N o t e : EDUC 350 and 352 are core courses and are Each program consists o f seven courses including two therefore, components of both the Infant and Toddler practicums. Courses are scheduled in the late afternoon and Special Needs Certificate programs. and evening. Practicums are scheduled on an individual basis to meet students' needs. Courses in these programs are scheduled on a two-year FISHERIES SCIENCE rotation. Students may begin at any time in the sequence. There are three core courses which are part of A. FISH C U L T U R E T E C H N I C I A N CERTIFICATE - D I S T A N C E L E A R N I N G FORMAT B. P O S T - B A C C A L A U R E A T E IN FISHERIES SCIENCE C. STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING P R O G R A M both programs. Infant & Toddler Certificate Program Program Content FALL TERM E D U C 350* Credits Advanced C h i l d Development (Fall '98) 2.0 E D U C 351* F a m i l y , School & Community (Fall '99) E D U C 355 Physical Care & Safety (Fall '98) E D U C 356 E D U C 357 Infant/Toddler Practicum Infant/Toddler Practicum SPRING TERM E D U C 352* E D U C 353 E D U C 356 E D U C 357 Centre Operations (Spring '99) Program Planning (Spring '98) Infant/Toddler Practicum Infant/Toddler Practicum 2.0 Sechelt Campus Instructional Faculty D . J. B A T E S , D i p . Tech. ( B C I T ) , B . S c , M . S c . ( S F U ) , R.P.Bio. 1.5 1.5 L5 E . J. F I E L D , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h D ( U Q l d ) 8.5 Contact: Dave Bates, 987-1535 or 885-9310 Credits 2.0 1.5 1.5 L5 A. FISH CULTURE TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE — DISTANCE LEARNING FORMAT Career Opportunities 6.5 Graduates of the program may find challenging careers with cither the private or public fish culture sector. Special Needs Certificate Program This includes the commercial aquaculture industry, Program Content government contracts with fisheries agencies, and FALL consulting firms. TERM Credits E D U C 262 Special Education (Fall '99) E D U C 350* Advanced C h i l d Development (Fall '98) 2.0 A Fish Culture Technician, while working under the supervision of a manager, is responsible for the well 2.0 being of intensively reared salmonids. CareerlVoca ticsnai 127 C o m m u n i t y stewardship is essential for long-term The Program The Fish Culture Technician program is available i n protection o f our environment. distance learning format only. Students may register in W o r k s h o p s provide intensive training in methods used one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is to survey and map streams, as w e l l as to make assess- awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. ments o f stream health based on habitat complexity, water quality, insect and fish populations. Streamside The distance learning program has been designed for planting methods are also covered. individuals who are currently working or seeking employment in the fish culture field and who wish to W o r k s h o p s are scheduled throughout the province as upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized demand arises. programs may be available. F S C I 150—Streamkeepers W o r k s h o p Admission Requirements Prospective applicants should inquire by telephone or by writing to the Sechelt campus. A n information package GRAPHIC DESIGN A N D ILLUSTRATION PROGRAM and application w i l l then be forwarded. T h i s p r o g r a m is a d e p a r t m e n t w i t h i n the M e d i a T e c h n o l o g y D i v i s i o n . O t h e r A r t p r o g r a m s i n this Program Content Credits F S C I 100 F S C I 101 F S C I 102 F S C I 103 F S C I 105 C a l e n d a r include Studio A r t , Textile A r t s and 3 Commercial Animation. Fish Culture I 3 Instructional Fish Culture II 3 J . E D G E , Alberta College o f Art Water Quality Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding 3 J. E D W A R D S G R I F F I N , B . A . (University o f Alberta) Salmonid B i o l o g y & Growth Faculty F. F O R S T E R , Alberta College o f Art 3 K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg School o f A r t ) F S C I 106 F S C I 120 F i s h Health Computers in Fisheries 3 K . J A G E R , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr Institute o f A r t & Design) 3 J. L O N G , B . P . A . Art Center (Los Angeles) F S C I 140 F S C I 141 Field Practicum I 3 D. M A C L A G A N , A . O . C . A . , I.D.C., F . C . A . Field Practicum II 3 27 L. S A V A G E , B.A. (McGill), M.Ed. (U of A ) R . M A R T I N , B . A . ( U . o f Washington) P. S I N G E R , M F A (Concordia University) B. POST-BACCALAUREATE IN FISHERIES D . T A I T , E m i l y Carr, D i p . V . S . A . ( E C C A D ) SCIENCE D. Y A S I N S K I A post-degree program in the applied aspects o f fisheries management is currently under development. The Program The Graphic Design and Illustration program is an Courses available for future credit towards the postdegree program or undergraduate academic transfer to S i m o n Fraser University include: Credits intensive, three year full-time commitment. Students are expected to achieve and maintain the highest standards working independently and as a team member, developing time management and organiza- F S C I 200 B i o l o g y o f Salmonids 3 tional skills. F S C I 210 Intensive Salmonid Culture 3 The curriculum encompasses historical, social, ethical and evolutionary developments in the visual c o m m u n i - C. STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING PROGRAM cations industry. Students are engaged in acquiring skills and sensitivity in various media and becoming effective in the creative and production process. The Streamkeepers program helps citizens protect and Instruction encourages imaginative conceptual think- preserve freshwater habitats. Development pressures ing, technical and business analysis, and expertise. from our expanding populations threaten these environ- Courses are taught by practising, professional artists ments. and design consultants. Classes include projects, The Streamkeepers program encourages good watershed demonstrations, lectures and critiques, as well as practices through productive, hands-on involvement. scheduled professional and industrial presentations and tours. Career/Vocational 128 Graduates are prepared to practise independently or additions to the portfolio. Samples must be flat, not collaboratively and in a variety o f employment oppor- rolled; they should not be framed or glassed. tunities such as design studios, illustration, computer We will not accept portfolios larger than 20 " x 26 " graphics, multimedia, animation, film, advertising and (50 cm x 66 cm). public relations agencies. Capilano College produces illustrators and designers prepared to shape the future of visual communication, utilizing traditional and current electronic mediums. Photographs or slides o f larger work or 3-D projects may be sent; however, they do not replace the required minimum o f 10 samples o f original work. The applicant's name and address must be on the Contact: 990-7820 outside of the portfolio in large letters. M a r k the back of each portfolio piece with your name. Please be sure Admission Requirements to include the completed "Program Information Sheet". This program requires a high level of maturity and If a portfolio is to be returned, send cither stamps or integrity. Students with life experience following high cheque to cover the cost of return postage. D o not send school are usually more knowledgeable and mature in any portfolios by bus system as they are not delivered their choice o f direction and better prepared; however, to Capilano College. Parcel Post insured, A i r Parcel highly motivated high school graduates can succeed Post insured or prepaid courier service is usually the here, and we encourage those students to apply. best way to have portfolios sent and returned. Applicants to the program must supply the following Capilano College cannot accept responsibility for loss or damage to an applicant's work. documentation to the College by M a r c h 31, 1998. No late applications accepted. Program Content • Completed Capilano College Application for Credits Admission Major Program Requirements • Secondary and post-secondary transcripts General Education Requirements • Certificate of English Language Assessment Test 99.0 12.0 111.0 ( E L A ) or Test o f English as a Foreign Language FIRST ( T O E F L ) , if applicable Note: All applications for admission must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. Official transcripts and other documents should be attached. TERM A H I S 104 Credits V i s u a l Literacy I 3.0 C M N S 120 Effective W r i t i n g & Speech 3.0 G R P H 152 Life D r a w i n g I 3.0 G R P H 154 General D r a w i n g I 3.0 Portfolio submission dates arc A p r i l 27 - 30, 1998. N o G R P H 155 Mediums and Techniques I 3.0 portfolio w i l l be reviewed if proper documentation has G R P H 156 Visual Communications I G R P H 158 Design I 10 not been received at the College by March 31, 1998. No late portfolio submissions accepted. Portfolios are reviewed by an Admissions Committee on the basis of drawing, design, colour, creativity, media variety and presentation. Applicants whose portfolios meet the standards of the program are called for interviews and testing on M a y 11 and 12. Final decisions on the make-up o f the new class are made by M a y 22. 21.0 SECOND TERM A H I S 105 Visual Literacy II G R P H 157 V i s u a l Communications II general, you should submit your best and most recent work. There should be a m i n i m u m o f 10 and a maximum of 15 original samples produced, drawn, designed, or photographed by the applicant representing their current abilities. Imaginative and experimental design and drawings in any medium and representing your personal interests and abilities arc welcome Credits 3.0 3.0 G R P H 159 Mediums and Techniques 11 G R P H 164 General D r a w i n g II 3.0 G R P H 170 Introduction to Computers G R P H 178 Design II 3.0 3.0 G R P H 184 Life Drawing II 10 21.0 Portfolio Requirements There is no formula for an acceptable portfolio. In 3.0 3.0 Note: Students who wish to substitute Englishcourses for CMNS 120 may do so with the Communications Coordinator's approval. THIRD TERM Credits C M N S 153 Communication & the Arts 3.0 G R P H 231 Typography I 3.0 G R P H 232 Graphic Design I 3.0 Career/Voca tionai 129 G R P H 233 D r a w i n g for Illustration I 3.0 provide assistance to individuals and families in the G R P H 234 Applied Design I 3.0 community. The environment in w h i c h the Home G R P H 235 Painting for Illustration I 3.0 Support Attendant functions is usually the client's G R P H 236 Computer Applications 10 home; however, the graduate may be required to 21.0 provide assistance to clients/families in a variety o f FOURTH TERM Credits community settings. G R P H 241 Typography II 3.0 Graduates are prepared to function collaboratively as G R P H 242 Graphic Design II 3.0 members o f a multi-disciplinary community support G R P H 243 D r a w i n g for Illustration II 3.0 team. Graduates work as front-line care providers under G R P H 244 A p p l i e d Design II 3.0 the direction and supervision o f a health professional. G R P H 245 Painting for Illustration II 3.0 Upon completion o f the program, graduates are eligible G R P H 246 V i s u a l Communications III 10 for employment as a H o m e Support Attendant with a 18.0 community H o m e Support A g e n c y . W i t h additional FIFTH TERM Credits G R P H 352 Three Dimensional Design I 3.0 G R P H 353 Illustration M e d i a I 3.0 G R P H 354 A p p l i e d Design III 3.0 G R P H 355 Advertising Illustration I 3.0 G R P H 356 Production Processes 10 15.0 SIXTH TERM Credits G R P H 361 Advanced Typographical Design III 3.0 G R P H 363 Illustration M e d i a II 3.0 G R P H 364 A p p l i e d Design I V 3.0 G R P H 365 Advertising Illustration II 3.0 G R P H 366 Business o f Design 10 15.0 training and experience, the graduate may be able to assume other responsibilities appropriate to the job role. The Program A t the present time, the College does not offer an ongoing, full-time program. H o w e v e r , i f community demand is appropriate, the H o m e Support program may be offered on a full-time or part-time basis. Capilano College offers a Certificate program recognized throughout British C o l u m b i a . Contact: 984-4960. Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 or equivalent. Students may be asked to HOME SUPPORT ATTENDANT PROGRAM F O U R - M O N T H CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M See also: Personal Care Attendant, Resident Care Attendant programs. complete a reading comprehension test. Some practicum placements require a criminal record check. 2. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a genuine desire to work with elderly people and their families in the health field. T w o references are Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto). M . S . W . ( U B C ) Coordinator required. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a B. ESTEY, R.N. form provided by the C o l l e g e , plus evidence o f M . D A Y A N , B . S . R . ( U B C ) , Registered Physiotherapist absence o f active tuberculosis. B. M I L L E R , R.N. M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed.(UBC), R D N Support Staff: 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts. Nancy Findlater, A r l c n c M i l l e r , Receptionists Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant Program Content Credits Career Opportunities H S A . 110 provide students with opportunities to develop the basic knowledge, skills and attitudes necessary to Ca reerl 130 Vocational W o r k R o l e Concepts in H o m e Support The H o m e Support Attendant program is designed to H S A . 111 1.5 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b for Home Support 3.0 H S A . 112 Special Needs in Home Support H S A . 113 A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum for 1.5 Music Transfer program, and four-year degrees in Jazz Studies and Music 'Therapy. The degree programs arc Home Support Attendants 6.0 offered in co-operation with the Open Learning R C A P 100 Health & Lifestyle & Choices 1.5 Agency ( O L A ) with degrees granted by the Open R C A P 101 Health & Healing: Concepts for Practice R C A P 102 University. Human Relations 3.0 L5 Total Program Credits: 18.0 Jazz Studies Program Mission and Goals The Bachelor of M u s i c in Jazz Studies is an applied JAZZ STUDIES A. JAZZ STUDIES DIPLOMA PROGRAM B. BACHELOR OF JAZZ STUDIES DEGREE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty F. A R D 1 E L , B . A . ( S F U ) B. C O O N D . D U K E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( U . of North Carolina), P h . D . ( U V i c ) L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . (UBC) academic degree. The program's mission is to produce graduates with a broad-based academic background and comprehensive abilities in music with j a z z as the main focus. A s jazz is an eclectic art form that draws upon influences from many different musical genres, graduates w i l l have been exposed to music from diverse cultural sources, historical periods and media. Jazz is an applied art form; therefore, the achievement of specific high standards in vocal and/or instrumental performance, improvisation, composition, and arranging arc fundamental goals o f the program curriculum. Demonstration of ability in these areas is a qualifying requirement for all graduates. J. G E E , B . M u s . , M . A . ( U B C ) S. G U N N C. H A N N E Y , B.Mus. ( U B C ) A. H A W I R K O S. K A R P , B . A . (Calif. State U.) L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (VV.Wash.) Career Opportunities The two-year D i p l o m a p r o g r a m is intended to provide its students with the skills necessary to develop careers as self-employed professionals in the contemporary music industry. L. K E L L E T T N . K O L E S N I K O V , B . A . (Gncssin's Musical College) 'The four-year Degree p r o g r a m provides a curriculum 1. K U K U R U D Z A which balances and integrates the instruction o f j a z z , A. L A C H A N C E traditional music, and general academic electives to S. M A D D O C K , D i p . (Peel School of the Arts) provide an enriched education at the degree level. It is R. M A R O I S , B . M u s . (Laval) R. M C K E N Z I E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . ( U B C ) G. M C N A B , B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (UBC), Coordinator an attractive option for those who wish to pursue music as self-employed professionals, for those who wish to continue their musical development as part o f a liberal arts education before pursuing other careers, and for K. M O O R E those interested in teaching music in the public school C. N E L S O N system. Majors in V o c a l Performance, Instrumental T. N I C K E L S . B . A . ( U C L A ) P. O L F R E Y . B . M u s . ( U . Manitoba), M . M u s . (Ithaca) T. O X B O L , D i p . (Copenhagen) M . R E V E L E Y , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , D i p l o m a (Bcrklcc Performance, Arranging/Composition, and General Studies with an Education Stream arc available. 'Those interested in teaching would enrol in the Education Stream of the General Studies program. School of Music) P. S C H R E I B E R . B . M u s . ( U B C ) C. S I G E R S O N B . T U R N E R . B . M u s ( W . Wash.), M . M u s . ( N . Texas) A . W O L D , B . M u s . ( U B C ) . A . R . C . T . (Toronto) Facilities A s recording experience has become an essential part of today's musical training, the Jazz Studies program has now integrated multi-track recording into the curriculum. V o c a l , instrumental, and arranging/ General Information composition students all make use o f our multi-track Capilano College offers four music programs: a twoyear D i p l o m a in Jazz Studies, a two-year Bachelor of work with electronic instruments in our M i d i Studio. facilities. Composition and arranging students w i l l Ca re e rl Vo ca tio n a I 131 Computer labs are available to students for supplemen- one o f the degree options. Permission to enrol in any tal help in car training, sight reading, and other basic major w i l l be based on completion of prerequisite music skills, as well as the printing and recording of requirements, and the recommendation o f the faculty theory and arranging assignments. concerned. Continuation in the V o c a l Performance, Instrumental Performance and Arranging/Composition Faculty majors is subject to review at the end of the third year of studies. Students may be accepted into some upper The Jazz Studies program prides itself in the number level courses before the completion o f their D i p l o m a and quality o f specialized faculty it has on staff. Most on a part-time or probationary basis with the permis- instructors arc also top professional musicians who sion o f the instructors involved, but official acceptance bring extensive practical experience to their classes. into the Degree program is necessary before any opportunity to graduate should be anticipated. Admission Requirements for First Year (Diploma) A l l applicants must: 1. Have Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. 2. Demonstrate an adequate knowledge o f theory rudiments through a department test. 3. Display a sufficiently high level of performance and sight-reading ability on their concentration instru- Transfer students should not anticipate immediate acceptance into the degree program, as there arc normally some lower level music courses and/or general electives that must be completed before this can take place. Official acceptance into a major o f the degree program can be applied for once the requirements for the two-year Jazz Studies D i p l o m a have been met. (See Graduation Requirements, T w o - Y e a r Diploma.) ment (see Auditions). 4. Pass a simple aural aptitude test involving pitch and rhythm matching. 5. Submit two letters of recommendation from music professionals or instructors. Admission Procedures: 1. Submit the Application for A d m i s s i o n to A d m i s sions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary education. Admission Requirements for Transfer/ Returning Students (Diploma) A l l applicants must: 1. Meet the general admission requirements o f Capilano College. 2. Display a sufficiently high level of performance and sight-reading ability on their concentration instrument (see Auditions). 3. Take an aural test to determine their basic acceptability and placement within the ear training sequence (see Transfer of Credit). 4. Take a keyboard proficiency test to determine their placement within the class keyboard sequence (see Transfer of Credit). 5. Submit two letters o f recommendation from music professionals or instructors. The auditioning instructor w i l l make recommendations regarding acceptance, eligibility and placement in some performance classes, placement in Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I ) , and required remedial work. 2. Information meetings, auditions and placement tests arc held in M a y . Please call (604) 984-4951 for meeting times and audition appointments. Auditions Auditions are required for all entrants. Live audition and testing is preferred, but if you cannot attend in person, it is possible to audition by audio or video cassette and write your theory test under local supervision. Contact the Jazz Studies program for more details and specific audition requirements. Entrance into the Jazz Studies program is competitive as seats are restricted. Applicants are ranked in c o m parison with others who audition on the same concentration instrument with the entrance year applied for taken into consideration. Providing that all other entrance requirements have been passed, students w i l l be admitted in the order of their ranking until the scats available for that instrument have been filled. Separate auditions arc held for the College Singers, Admission Prerequisites for Fourth Year Degree Program Jazz Choirs, Stage Bands, and Studio V o c a l Performance Class. Acceptance into the program does not guarantee acceptance into these ensembles. It is the U p o n completion o f the two-year D i p l o m a in Jazz student's responsibility to sign up for and attend these Studies, students may register as a third-year student in auditions. Career/Vocational 132 Transfer of Credit Arranging/Composition The Jazz Studies program accepts credits from other post-secondary institutions if they arc applicable and have suitable equivalency. Because of the wide variations that exist in approach and emphasis in various music programs, the Jazz Studies program reserves the right to examine for competency according to our course requirements before transfer credit is approved. Concentration P M I (Composition) A l l required Theory courses Arranging I, II, III, IV Rhythm Section Writing Instrumental Performance Concentration P P M I Transfer of concentration performance instrument Improvisation I, II, III, I V A l l Small Ensembles course, keyboard and car training credit w i l l only be A l l Large Instrumental Ensembles possible up to the placement level determined by the auditioncr anc! keyboard and car training test results. Vocal Performance Concentration P P M I Since the Capilano program emphasizes jazz studies and most other Canadian music degree programs provide a study of traditional music, block transfer o f courses to other institutions is not available. Several individual courses have, however, been accepted by institutions with similar offerings. Special Fees and Expenses The fees for private music instruction ( P M I ) w i l l be announced at least one month prior to the beginning of the fall terra. In 1997-98 the fees for P M I were $430 ($215 per credit) for the Jazz Studies program and arc subject to change without notice. P M I lab fees are $30. Satisfactory Standing Students considered to be in "Satisfactory Standing" arc entitled to pre-register in the next term o f the program. A student who has not maintained a satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied permission to register in that program in a subsequent term, or be required to re-audition. T o maintain satisfactory standing, all Jazz Studies students must be enrolled in a full-time course o f Study (at least nine credit hours) that includes a reasonable number o f courses specific to their major (normally three) and must achieve a grade point average above 1.8. The grade of D in a course, although a minimal pass, is not sufficient to fulfil prerequisite requirements. Students should refer to the section on academic Improvisation 1,11 V o c a l M a s t e r c l a s s I, II Studio V o c a l Performance I, II, III, IV Vocal Jazz Master Class I, II, III, I V A l l V o c a l Ensembles " C " grades ( C - , C , C+) in these courses can only be applied for credit toward the Bachelor of M u s i c in Jazz Studies with the permission o f the Jazz Studies Grade Appeals Committee. W h e n unusual circumstances have resulted in lower than expected grades in a student's first semester of a continuing course, instructors may recommend to the Committee that the student be given probationary acceptance into the next semester of the course. If the student fails to achieve a m i n i m u m of B in the next level of the course, no credit for either course can be applied toward the specialized degree. A. JAZZ STUDIES DIPLOMA PROGRAM TWO-YEAR DIPLOMA Students will be awarded a two-year diploma in Jazz Studies upon completion o f the first two years o f requirements for cither the vocal or instrumental concentrations as outlined below. The General Elective credits arc only required o f those planning on continuing toward a four-year degree. For the purposes of the diploma, M U S . 222 and 223 may be replaced by six credits of Jazz, M u s i c or if approved by the coordinator. General Electives. Upon demonstration o f sufficient piano skills a student may be given advanced placement in Class Piano. These required credits may be replaced with credits from any Jazz, M u s i c or General Electives. performance in the College Calendar for further information on " A c a d e m i c Probation". In addition, to qualify and continue in the specialized majors, Jazz Studies Degree students arc expected to achieve a minimum grade of B - in all courses directly related to that major. These courses arc: Career/Vocational 133 Program Content INSTRUMENTAL CONCENTRATION VOCAL CONCENTRATION FIRST YEAR FALL FIRST YEAR FALL Credits 3.0 * E N G L 100 or 102 Credits J A Z Z 103 The Language o f M u s i c * E N G L 100 or 102 3.0 J A Z Z 114 Class Piano I 1.0 J A Z Z 103 The Language of M u s i c 3.0 J A Z Z 170 History o f Jazz 3.0 J A Z Z 114 Class Piano I LO J A Z Z 184 Sightsinging/EarTraining I 1.5 J A Z Z 136 V o c a l Master Class I 1.5 J A Z Z 194 Small Ensemble I 1.5 J A Z Z 184 Sightsinging/EarTraining 1 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 Large Ensemble 1.0 PMI. lxx J A Z Z 170 History o f Jazz 3.0 1Q 16.0 P M I . 145 Jazz V o i c e SPRING Credits 10 16.0 Credits SPRING 3.0 3.0 * E N G L 103, 104. 105 or 106 Rhythm Section W r i t i n g J A Z Z 105 1.5 * E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106 3.0 J A Z Z 106 Traditional Harmony and C o m p . 1.5 J A Z Z 105 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g 1.5 J A Z Z 107 Jazz Theory and C o m p o s i t i o n I J A Z Z 106 Trad. Harmony and C o m p . 1.5 J A Z Z 115 Class Piano II 1.5 1.0 J A Z Z 107 Jazz Theory and Composition I 1.5 J A Z Z 185 Sightsinging/Ear Training II 1.5 J A Z Z 115 Class Piano II 1.0 J A Z Z 195 Small Ensemble II J A Z Z 137 J A Z Z 185 V o c a l Master Class II Sightsinging/Ear Training II 1.5 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.5 1.0 Large Ensemble LO P M I . 245 10 14.5 Jazz V o i c e SECOND YEAR FALL * G e n . Elective J A Z Z 203 Jazz Theory and Composition II J A Z Z 214 Class Piano III J A Z Z 236 Studio V o c a l Performance I J A Z Z 238 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I J A Z Z 284 Sightsinging/Ear Training III Large Ensemble * * M U S . 222 M u s i c History P M I . 345 Jazz V o i c e Credits 3.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 3.0 10 16.0 Credits SPRING * G e n . Elective J A Z Z 204 Jazz Theory and Composition III 3.0 J A Z Z 215 1.0 J A Z Z 237 J A Z Z 239 J A Z Z 285 Class Piano I V Studio V o c a l Performance II V o c a l Jazz Master Class II Sightsinging/Ear Training I V 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1Q 14.5 P M I . 2xx SECOND YEAR FALL Credits 3.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 3.0 2.0 16.0 * G c n . Elective Jazz Theory and Composition II J A Z Z 203 J A Z Z 214 Class Piano III J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I J A Z Z 284 Sightsinging/EarTraining III J A Z Z 294 Small Ensemble III Large Ensemble * * M U S . 222 P M I . 3xx Music History SPRING Credits * G e n . Elective Jazz Theory and J A Z Z 204 3.0 Composition III 215 Class Piano I V 1.5 1.0 JAZZ 283 Improvisation II 1.5 JAZZ 285 Sightsinging/EarTraining I V 1.5 JAZZ 295 Small Ensemble I V 1.5 JAZZ Large Ensemble Large Ensemble 1.0 M U S . 223 * * M U S . 223 M u s i c History 3.0 P M I . 4xx P M I . 445 Jazz V o i c e M u s i c History 10 16.0 1.0 3.0 10 16.0 *See Academic Course Requirements. **Degree students must complete M U S . 222, 223 to fulfil their traditional M u s i c History requirement. Career/Vocational 134 B. BACHELOR OF JAZZ STUDIES FOURTH DEGREE PROGRAM FALL YEAR Credits * G c n . Elective 3.0 FOUR-YEAR DEGREE J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 1.5 Students must complete all courses outlined in one of J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy 1.5 the following major areas of study to be eligible for the J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 Bachelor of M u s i c in Jazz Studies degree from the J A Z Z 460 Commercial Relations 1.5 Open University. J A Z Z 494 Small Ensemble V I I Large Ensemble These major areas of study may include Jazz or M u s i c electives which should be chosen in consultation with the Coordinator of the program. P P M I 745 degree program are offered on a rotational basis every two years. Be sure to consider the year that these courses are due to be offered when planning your course load for the year. The placement of these rotating courses in your schedule w i l l not necessarily conform to the semester plans presented below. Please take every precaution to ensure that you have all the 1.5 2.0 1Q Performance 15.5 SPRING Certain courses in the third and fourth years of the ' Credits *Gen. Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 272 Arranging II 1.5 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 J A Z Z 495 S m a l l Ensemble VIII Large Ensemble P P M I 845 1.5 2.0 10 Performance 15.5 necessary prerequisites in place when you plan to take Total Credits them. The courses offered on a rotational basis arc 124.5 subject to change, but presently are J A Z Z 410/411, J A Z Z 460, J A Z Z 370, J A Z Z 470, J A Z Z 336/337, * See Academic Course Requirements J A Z Z 310, J A Z Z 300, M U S . 210/211 and M U S . 218/ 219. MAJOR IN INSTRUMENTAL PERFORMANCE MAJOR IN V O C A L PERFORMANCE FALL THIRD * G c n . Elective THIRD YEAR FALL YEAR Credits 3.0 Credits J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 1.5 J A Z Z 240 Form and A n a l y s i s 1.5 *Gen. Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 240 Form and A n a l y s i s 1.5 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I 1.5 J A Z Z 382 Improvisation III 1.5 J A Z Z 336 Studio V o c a l Performance III 1.5 J A Z Z 394 S m a l l Ensemble V J A Z Z 338 V o c a l Jazz Master Class III 1.5 Large Ensemble J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 P P M I 5xx Large Ensemble PPMI 545 Performance 2.0 10 15.5 SPRING *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint Credits 3.0 1.5 2.0 10 15.5 SPRING Credits * G c n . Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint 1.5 J A Z Z 272 Arranging II 1.5 1.5 J A Z Z 383 Improvisation I V 1.5 S m a l l Ensemble V I 1.5 World Music J A Z Z 283 Improvisation II 1.5 J A Z Z 395 J A Z Z 337 J A Z Z 339 Studio V o c a l Performance I V V o c a l Jazz Master Class I V 1.5 J A Z Z 470 1.5 Large Ensemble J A Z Z 470 World Music 1.5 P P M I 6xx 1.5 2.0 10 15.5 Large Ensemble P P M I 629 or 645 Performance 2.0 FOURTH YEAR 10 FALL 15.5 *Gen. Elective Credits 3.0 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy 1.5 J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 J A Z Z 460 Commercial Relations 1.5 Care&r/Voca tional 135 JAZZ 494 Small Ensemble VII JAZZ/MUS. Electives Large Ensemble PPMI 7xx 1.5 1.5 2.0 10 15.5 SPRING Credits *Gen. Elective JAZZ 300 20th Century Theory JAZZ 411 Conducting II JAZZ 495 Small Ensemble VIII JAZZ/MUS. Electives Large Ensemble PPMI 8xx 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 3J) 15.5 124.5 Total Credits * See Academic Course Requirements M A J O R IN A R R A N G I N G / C O M P O S I T I O N THIRD YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective JAZZ 370 Jazz Styles JAZZ Electives Large Ensemble JAZZ 271 Music History I PMI. 544 Composition I **PMI. 5xx Secondary Requirement SPRING *Gen. Elective JAZZ 300 20th Century Theory JAZZ 372 Arranging III Large Ensemble JAZZ 273 Music History II JAZZ 470 World Music PMI. 644 Composition II **PMI. 6xx Secondary Requirement FOURTH YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective JAZZ 310 Jazz Pedagogy JAZZ 410 Conducting I JAZZ 460 Commercial Relations in Music Arranging IV JAZZ 472 JAZZ/MUS. Electives Large Ensemble PMI. 744 Composition ***PMI. 7xx Secondary Requirement Credits 3.0 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 2.0 LQ 14.5 Credits 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 3.0 1.5 2.0 1.0 16.0 Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.0 2.0 LQ 16.0 Credits SPRING *Gen. Elective Conducting II JAZZ 411 JAZZ/MUS. Electives Large Ensemble PPMI 844 Performance ***PMI. 8xx Secondary Requirement 3.0 1.5 4.5 1.0 3.0 LQ 14.0 Total Credits 123.0 * See Academic Course Requirements. **Arr/Comp students are expected to complete the equivalent of sixth term PMI. on their principal instrument through completion of four terms of secondary PMI. and a jury at a 600-level concentration or through completion of concentration PMI. at the 500 and 600 level OR complete four semesters of PMI. secondary piano. ***Students wishing to pursue the Arranging/Composition option will replace JAZZ 271/273 in the second year of the Diploma program with JAZZ 240, 172 and JAZZ 241,272. MAJOR IN GENERAL STUDIES THIRD YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective JAZZ 172 Arranging I JAZZ 240 Form and Analysis JAZZ 370 Jazz Styles **JAZZ/MUS. Electives Large Ensemble PMI. 5xx SPRING *Gen. Elective JAZZ 241 Counterpoint JAZZ 272 Arranging II **JAZZ/MUS. Electives JAZZ 470 World Music Large Ensemble PMI.6xx Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 4.5 1.0 24) 15.0 Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 6.0 1.5 1.0 10 16.5 FOURTH YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective JAZZ 310 Jazz Pedagogy JAZZ 410 Conducting I **JAZZ/MUS. Electives ***JAZZ/MUS. or Non-Music Electives Large Ensemble PMI. 7xx Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.0 10 15.0 Career/Vocational 136 Credits SPRING * G e n . Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 P M I . 8xx 10 16.5 Total Credits 130.0 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives 1.5 * * * J A Z Z / M U S . or N o n - M u s i c Electives * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives: In the General Studies Large Ensemble 3.0 1.0 P M I . 8xx 10 or above to fulfil graduation requirements; in the 15.0 Total Credits 124.0 Major, at least six credits must be numbered 300 level Education Stream at least two credits must be numbered 300 level or above. Note that it may be possible to substitute an upper level M U E D course for M U E D M A J O R IN G E N E R A L S T U D I E S - E D U C A T I O N STREAM THIRD YEAR * * * M u s i c or N o n - M u s i c Electives: General Studies program students may fulfil these requirements through Credits FALL * G e n . Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 1.5 J A Z Z 240 F o r m and Analysis 1.5 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 * * * J A Z Z / M U S . or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives M U S . 210 Class W o o d w i n d s 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 P M I . 5xx SPRING * G e n . Elective Education. Secondary Music Teaching Credits one year of a vocal ensemble and one year o f second- 6.0 ary Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I . ) in voice in their 1.5 * * * J A Z Z / M U S . or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 M U S . 211 Class W o o d w i n d s 1.5 Jazz 470 W o r l d Music- 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 P M I . 6xx 10 18.0 Techniques Substitution may occur on advisement by U B C Music- Instrumentalists in the Education Stream who wish to . Arranging II * * * * M U E D 302/303 Instrumental/Choral Capilano College, and would have to be taken at U B C . enter secondary music teaching should include at least J A Z Z 272 Large Ensemble M U S . 218 Class Brass ****These courses are currently not available at 10 1.5 Conducting I acceptable to the program. 16.5 Counterpoint FOURTH YEAR FALL * G e n . Elective J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy any general, Jazz, M u s i c O R M u s i c Education elective 1.5 J A Z Z 241 J A Z Z 410 106. Credits programs. Suitable V o c a l Ensembles would include the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y Choir, Capilano Singers, Jazz Choir, and Jazz V o c a l Ensemble. Students whose major is a woodwind instrument may substitute secondary vocal P M I instruction for Class W o o d w i n d s ; brass majors may similarly substitute secondary vocal P M I for Class Brass, and percussion majors for Class Percussion. Pianists may substitute secondary voice P M I for the four credits of Class Piano normally required for the degree. 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.5 4.0 4.0 Elementary Teaching Students interested in elementary teaching should be sure to include three credits o f laboratory science, three credits of mathematics and three credits of history or geography. O f all general electives completed, six credits should be in Canadian Studies. 10 P M I . 7xx 18.5 Credits SPRING * G c n . Elective 6.0 J A Z Z 219 Class Percussion 1.5 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 1.5 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives Career/Vocational 137 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Academic Course Requirements •General Education Requirements E N G L 100 or 102 and ensemble, and eight semesters o f percussion ensemble. Three o f these percussion ensembles can replace the normal improvisation requirement ( J A Z Z 282/283). Percussion students wishing to take J A Z Z 282/283 must gain permission o f both instructors to audition. 103, 104, 105 or 106 6.0 Humanities 6.0 S o c i a l Sciences 6.0 Science/Math 3.0 Elective 3J) 24.0 It is expected that all English requirements w i l l be Arranging/Composition Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters of traditional ensembles, four semesters of jazz ensembles, and two additional semesters of cither jazz or traditional ensembles. Sec M a j o r in General Studies Ensemble Requirements. completed before entrance into the third year o f the program. Note that the education stream requires 30 credits of general electives. Vocal Performance Ensemble Requirements Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters o f concert choir: Capilano C o l l e g e C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or the Capilano Singers. ( E N S M A l l large ensembles, regardless of the actual number o f 100) weekly hours o f attendance required, have an assigned unit value o f one credit. Four semesters of jazz choir: Nite Cap or Capital Jazz. ( E N S J 105) A semester profile requiring two credit hours o f ensemble is met by enrolment in two separate ensembles. Students terminating in the two-year diploma program may meet their ensemble requirements through the completion o f any four ensemble courses. Students enrolled in the four year Jazz Studies Degree Four semesters of Jazz V o c a l Ensemble: ( E N S J 306) T w o additional semesters o f cither Jazz or Traditional ensembles. Major in General Studies Ensemble Requirements Program are required to complete a combination o f traditional and jazz ensembles to complete their requirements. Instrumental Performance Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters o f traditional ensembles: These can be met by enrolment in the Capilano College Community C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or by participation in another approved community ensemble. Eight semesters of jazz ensemble: Including: Jazz Ensemble I ( E N S J 135), Jazz C h o i r ( E N S J 105), T w o semesters of traditional ensembles: These can be met by enrolment in the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or by participation in another approved ensemble. Four semesters of jazz ensemble, including Jazz Ensemble I ( E N S J 135). Jazz C h o i r ( E N S J 105) and Guitar/Bass Ensemble ( E N S J 220) at the 200 level or above. T w o additional semesters of ensembles: for instrumentalists these may be Jazz or Traditional ensembles, for vocalists these w i l l be E N S J 305 and 306. Instrumental Ensemble ( E N S J 136) and Guitar/Bass Percussionists must also participate in four semesters Ensemble ( E N S J 220) at the 200 level and above. (Note of percussion ensemble: three of these courses can the Guitar/Bass Ensemble I/Il. while a prerequisite, is replace J A Z Z 282, 283, Improvisation. not acceptable for large ensemble credit in the degree program). T w o additional semesters o f cither jazz or traditional ensembles. Piano, guitar and bass performance majors can sometimes substitute other courses to complete their ensemble requirements. T h i s is done through special arrangement with the coordinator o f the program. Percussion students are expected to complete two semesters of traditional ensemble, four semesters o f jazz Ca reer/Voca tiona I 138 Major in General Studies (Education) Ensemble Requirements Instrumentalists: Four semesters each of traditional and jazz ensembles. Vocalists: T w o semesters of traditional ensembles, two semesters of E N S J 305/306, four semesters o f jazz ensembles. (See M a j o r in General Studies for lists o f appropriate traditional and jazz ensembles.) LABOUR STUDIES Close relations with the labour movement are maintained through the Users' A d v i s o r y Committee w h i c h is open to representatives o f unions who use the Instructional Faculty C . A S K E W , B . A . ( W . Ontario), L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r of the B . C . Bar E . B E A D L E , Cert. (Ins. C c l of B . C . , Ins. C c l of Wash) K . B R A I D , B . A . (Mount A l l i s o n U n i v . ) . M . A . ( S F U ) T. B Y R N E , M . A . ( U B C ) G . C O U S T A L I N , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) , Member of the B . C . Bar S. D A V I S , B . A . , L L . B . (Queen's), Member of the B . C . Bar program. This hard-working group of representatives actively engages in promoting and developing the program. Courses in Labour Studies are offered on both a credit and credit-free basis. The fall program is offered in October and November and the spring program in March through M a y . Each fall and spring special brochures describing the courses to be offered are issued. The brochures arc available by contacting the Labour Studies program at 984-4954. G . F I O R I L L O , L L . B . ( U V i c ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar D . G I B S O N , B . A . ( M c G i l l University), M . A . (Institute of Social Studies, The Hague) Courses are scheduled in the evening and on selected Fridays, Saturdays and Sundays. S. J A M E S , B . A . (Carleton University), L L . B . (Osgoode H a l l , U . o f Toronto) Contact: 984-4954. F. K E N N E D Y L . K U E H N , B . A . , M . A . (Reed College) E . L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) L . M C G R A D Y , B . A . (Toronto), L L . B . (Man.), Member o f the B . C . Bar S. O ' D O N N E L L , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) J. P R I C E , P h . D . ( U B C ) D. R O G E R S , Diploma (BCIT) S. R U S H , Q . C . , B . A . ( W . Ontario), L L . B . ( U B C ) , Member of the B . C . Bar L. S A V A G E J. S A Y R E , B . A . ( U . of Chicago), L L . B . (Toronto), Member of the B . C . Bar T. S I L L A N T A U S , D i p l , O H & S ( B C I T ) , B . S c . ( U . o f Bursary The George North Chair was established by friends in memory of this outstanding member of the trade union movement. The award is available to assist with registration costs for union members who wish to attend courses in the Labour Studies program. U n i o n members are first expected to seek sponsorship from their union if they are eligible, before applying for a bursary. Courses L S P . 1 0 0 — Introduction to Economics for Trade Unionists Guelph L . S P E R L I N G , B . A . ( U . of Wisconsin) L S P . 101 — Labour Economics: Alternatives & Options J. S T E E V E S , B . A . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar, Member of the Y u k o n Bar (Faculty on leave) E . D E C K E R . B . A . (McMaster) L S P . 105 — Corporate Financial Statement A n a l y s i s L S P . 109 — Legal Research Skills L S P . 1 1 0 — B . C . Labour L a w S. D I A M O N D , B . A . (Hons.) ( S F U ) G . J A M I E S O N , B . A . ( U . Winnipeg), L L . B . ( U . Manitoba), L L . M . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r of the B . C . Bar L S P . 111 — L S P . 113 — B . M E R R A L L , (Diploma) Labour College o f Canada J. P A T T E R S O N , B . A . , M . A . , (York) L L . B . ( U B C ) , The Canada Labour Code Public Service Staff Relations A c t (PSSRA) L S P . 115 — Issues in Occupational Health and Safety L S P . 116 — Workers' Compensation A c t and the Member of the B . C . Bar B . S T R I N G E R , B . A . ( S F U ) , R . N . (Rcgina), M . S c . WCB (McMaster) Research Project L S P . 117 — i Introduction to EI Procedures trouble C. L I V I N G S T O N E , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . A . (York Univ.) L S P . 118 — Human Rights L a w R. F O X L S P . 119 — C i v i l Rights and the W o r k Place General Information LSP. 120— Politics: Understanding Government Bureaucracy The Labour Studies program is committed to meeting the special education needs o f B . C . workers, their organizations and the labour movement in general. LSP. 122— Politics: Labour Policy in Canada Ca reer/Voca tio nal 139 L S P . 130 — Sociology o f W o r k Career Opportunities L S P . 131 — Race and Ethnic Relations Graduates o f the A p p l i e d Landscape Horticulture L S P . 140 — History o f the Labour Movement in program find employment in many areas of horticulture Canada L S P . 141 — Telling Y o u r U n i o n ' s Story: A Course in Practical History L S P . 142 — History o f the Labour Movement in B . C . L S P . 150 — W o m e n in the W o r k Force L S P . 1 5 1 — Leadership S k i l l s , Assertiveness and L S P . 155 — L S P . 160 — including: municipal parks, golf courses, residential and commercial landscape installation and/or maintenance; garden centre sales, nursery and greenhouse operations. The Program The objective o f the Landscape Horticulture program is Advocacy to provide individuals with the basic skills and k n o w l - Indian L a n d C l a i m s and the Trade U n i o n Movement edge prerequisite to beginning a career in landscape gardening and landscape-related industries. M e d i a for Trade Union Education and This full-time, eight-month certificate program inte- Organization grates horticultural theory with practice: the first term emphasizing theory and the second term practical L S P . 161 — W o r k i n g with Mass M e d i a L S P . 162 — W o r k i n g Culture and History o f Labour Arts Due to the popular nature o f the program, and its LSP. 163— M e d i a Workshops contact the Horticulture department by early A p r i l to LSP. 170— Communications: Public Speaking and arrange to attend an early M a y I N F O R M A T I O N Parliamentary Procedures M E E T I N G . Student/instructor interviews can be applications. limited enrolment, prospective students are advised to LSP. 180— Stewards'Training L S P . 181 — Collective Bargaining LSP. 182— U n i o n L o c a l Administration LSP. 190— Contract Costing L S P . 191 — Introduction to Pension Plans L S P . 192 — Introduction to Health & Welfare Benefits L S P . 2 1 0 — Arbitration L S P . 216 — W o r k e r s ' Compensation Appeals - Intermediate Level L S P . 226 — Advanced W o r k e r s ' Compensation Appeal Preparation & Presentation arranged at the conclusion o f this meeting. Contact: 984-4947. Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 completion with Grade 12 preferred. Students without proficiency in basic mathematics and English may be required to take an upgrading course. 2. Attendance at an interview. Interviews are held in m i d - M a y . Further interviews may be held in m i d August, i f spaces in the program are available. Applicants unable to attend an interview may contact the program coordinator to make alternative arrangements. 3. 19 years o f age. 4. A genuine interest in and desire for commencing or (APPLIED) LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURE PROGRAM continuing a career in horticulture. 5. Reasonable health and physical condition. 6. Successful applicants w i l l demonstrate evidence o f development o f interpersonal skills and emotional O N E Y E A R CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M Instructional Faculty L . K O S K I T A L O , B . S c . ( U . of M . ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) R. W E L S H , D i p . Landscape Tech. (B.C.I.T.) L . S C O T T , Cert. Landscape Horticulture Support Staff Sharon Miletec, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant L a b Supervisor: L . Scott Career/Vocational 140 health. Special Fees and Expenses In addition to the program tuition, students w i l l incur further expenses o f approximately $ 1,600 for books, personal work gear and equipment, certification fees, field trip, conference and membership fees. W. E N W R I G H T , B.F.A. M . F . A . (UBC), LL.B.(McGill) Graduation Requirements J. F A I R L I E , B . M u s . L L . B . ( U B C ) Due to the intense nature of the program, regular full- S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . time attendance is crucial. Students are expected to C . M A T T H E W S , B . A . ( U B C ) , L G A S Diploma attend and participate in all classes and program D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Certificate, M . A . Liberal Studies activities. Students with poor attendance may be (SFU), Co-ordinator required to withdraw. Participation in all field trips, including the three-day orientation field trip, is compulsory. M . S P E N C E , B.Sc. L L . B . ( U B C ) G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Students must attain a m i n i m u m cumulative G P A of Psychologist 2.0, pass all courses, must possess a valid B . C . pesti- Support Staff cide dispenser or applicator certificate, and attain a L . Larkins, Clerk Typist m i n i m u m 60% standing in plant materials, to success- F. Ulkcr, Clerk Typist fully complete the program. W . Webcrg, Divisional Assistant Program Content FIRST TERM Career Opportunities Credits/Lab Hrs 5.0 6 H O R T 102 Plant Materials I H O R T 103 G r o w i n g M e d i a & Fertilizers 5.0 0 2.0 1 H O R T 105 Plant Production 2.0 1 H O R T 107 P & T Gardens Practicum H O R T 115 Basic Landscape Drafting 0.0 L5 0 15.5 11 H O R T 101 Introductory Horticulture 3 A legal assistant, while working under the supervision of a lawyer, is capable of originating work and making decisions. This person has knowledge of both procedural and substantive law. Some examples o f work functions arc: interviewing clients; drafting pleadings, wills, probate, conveyancing and corporate documents; legal research; file management; assisting in trial preparation. Graduates o f the program w i l l find challenging careers SECOND TERM Credits/Lab Hrs H O R T 106 Landscape Irrigation working as legal assistants in law offices, government agencies, and corporate legal departments. & Drainage 2.0 1 The program has been in operation since 1976 and has H O R T 109 Plant Materials II H O R T 110 Turfgrass Management 4.0 0 a 9 0 % placement rate. (This figure may fluctuate for 3.0 1 any one graduating class depending on the economy.) H O R T 108 Landscape Design H O R T 111 Business Practices 1.5 3 1.0 1 Contact: 983-7594; E-mail: lgas@capcollege.bc.ca & Maintenance 5.0 6 Programs H O R T 114 P & T Gardens Practicum OO 0 16.5 12 H O R T 112 Landscape Installation There are two legal assistant programs offered at Capilano College. I. The Legal Assistant D i p l o m a program. T h i s is a LEGAL ASSISTANT PROGRAM A. T W O YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA B. L E G A L A S S I S T A N T CERTIFICATE PROGRAM two-year, full-time program designed for people without current legal experience. *2. The Legal Assistant Certificate program. T h i s evening program is designed for people who are presently working in a law office with at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience. * The Legal Assistant Certificate program is available Instructional Faculty as a distance education program. L . B A K E R , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) Teaching Cert. (SFU) E-mail: lgas@capcollege.bc.ca N . B A W A , B . B . A . (SFU), L L . B . ( M c G i l l ) ) D . C O C H R A N , B . A . L L . B . ( U B C ) , Cert. E d . , M . A . E d . (SFU) M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) Career/Vocational 141 A. T W O YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA U p o n completion o f the two-year program, students must complete a six-month practicum under the practicums, students must maintain a cumulative 3.0 GPA. Special Fees and Expenses supervision of a lawyer. Students are paid during this The student can expect to spend approximately $1000 practicum by their employer. per year on books and photocopying expenses. Since At the end of a successful practicum, the student is eligible for graduation. Faculty work closely with students and with the legal community to assist in regular use o f a law library is necessary for research purposes, students should include necessary transportation expenses. obtaining successful practicum placements. Faculty maintain close contacts with the legal community, and several faculty members arc practising T w o Year Legal Assistant Diploma Program Content lawyers. A s well, support is provided by an external FIRST TERM Advisory Committee, which provides information on L G A S 150 Intro, to Study o f L a w Credits recent developments in the legal community, and offers L G A S 152 L i t i g a t i o n Procedures I 3.0 advice on topics ranging from curriculum changes to L G A S 170 Legal Research 3.0 graduate placements. L G A S 176 Legal Office Procedures 3.0 Members of the A d v i s o r y Committee include repre- L G A S 252 Torts I 3.0 10 15.0 sentatives from the L a w Society o f British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian B a r Association, private law firms, a government agency, and crown corporations. Admissions Requirements The successful applicant to the Legal Assistant program should have: SECOND TERM Credits L G A S 151 Intro, to Evidence 3.0 L G A S 164 Litigation Procedures I V 1.5 L G A S 180 Contracts I 3.0 L G A S 254 Torts II 3.0 L G A S 256 Family Law 3.0 C M N S 179 Legal Communications Ml 1. two years post-secondary university transfer elective or equivalent prior learning experience 2. work experience in an office setting (highly recommended) I 3. good working knowledge of computers. Applications, together with official post-secondary transcripts must be submitted to A d m i s s i o n s . Registrar's Office. Incomplete applications w i l l not be processed. 16.5 THIRD TERM Credits L G A S 155 Conveyancing Procedures 1.5 L G A S 157 W i l l s & Probate Procedures 3.0 L G A S 179 L G A S 181 L G A S 255 L G A S 264 Legal Interviewing Contracts II Real Property Insurance L a w I 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 16.5 Prospective applicants may apply by telephoning 983- FOURTH TERM 7594. Names w i l l be recorded and applicants w i l l L G A S 153 Credits Basic Coiporate Procedures 1.5 receive the formal admission procedure outline. L G A S 172 Legal Drafting I 3.0 Information meetings may also be held. The coordina- L G A S 182 Creditors'Remedies 3.0 tors w i l l then review all applications for the 36 seats L G A S 253 Company L a w 3.0 available in the program. Applicants who meet the L G A S 262 Litigation Procedures III 3.0 program requirements w i l l be invited to have a per- L G A S 265 Insurance L a w II 10 Practicum 16.5 3.0 sonal interview. L G A S 199 Academic Standards The Legal Assistant program requires students to maintain a cumulative 3.0 grade point average over the four terms. In addition, any student whose grade point average falls below 2.0 w i l l not be permitted to continue in the program. T o be eligible to go out on Career/Vocational 142 D i p l o m a Requirement: B. 67.5 LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This is a part-time evening program designed for students with at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience who are presently working in a law office. Those without a legal background or the two years experience may be admitted to a particular course only after consultation with the coordinator. It is the student's responsibility to initiate the contact with the coordinator prior to registration. Acceptance into a particular course docs not mean a student has been accepted into the program as a whole. The Legal Assistant Certificate program courses usually start in September, although occasionally they may also start in January. Contact the Legal Assistant program area at 983-7594 for registration deadline information. The requirements for the certificate must be completed within five years of commencing the courses. The fiveyear period may be extended for one year in exceptional circumstances. The Legal Assistant Department is committed to the recognition of prior learning. Prior learning assessment (PLA) recognizes demonstrated learning for credits which have been acquired through life or work experiences. For further information contact the PLA coordinator at Capilano College. In order to attain the Legal Assistant Certificate students must successfully complete 30 credits. These credits must be chosen from substantive Legal Assistant courses. Legal Assistant Certificate Program Content Credits Intro, to Study of Law Evidence Legal Research Legal Drafting I & II Legal Interviewing Contracts I & II Creditors' Remedies Torts I & II Company Law Real Property Family Law Insurance I & 11 Criminal Law Administrative Law Transfer Credits Transfer credits will not automatically be given for courses taken at other institutions. Students will be required to demonstrate current knowledge before course exemption will be granted. Requests for transfer credit must be submitted on the "Request for Transfer Credit" form and submitted to the Registrar's Office. LEGAL SECRETARIAL PROGRAM Faculty N. BAWA, B.B.A.. (SFU), LL.B (McGill) D. BLANEY, I.D. (UBC), C.P.S., M.Ed. (SFU) M. CRAGG, B.A. Law (Durham), Teaching Cert. (UBC) D. PHILLIPS, LGAS Cert., M.A. (SFU) Support Staff Lisa Larkins, Clerk Typist Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy Webcrg, Divisional Assistant Certificate Requirements *+LGAS 150 •+LGAS 151 *+LGAS 170 LGAS 172/1 74 LGAS 179 * LGAS 180/1181 LGAS 182 LGAS 252/254 LGAS 253 LGAS 255 LGAS 256 LGAS 264/265 LGAS 268 LGAS 271 + Students wishing to enter the program must first take LGAS 150 and then LGAS 170 before they will be admitted to any course except LGAS 151. Instructional (PLA) Prior Learning Assessment COURSES * Courses marked with an asterisk are required courses and must be taken before a student is eligible to receive a certificate. 3.0 3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 3.0 Career Opportunities The exacting field of law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal secretaries. This very specialized program provides intense training in traditional secretarial skills as well as legal procedural courses including: Civil litigation, wills and probate, corporate law, conveyancing and mortgaging, family and legal office procedures. Upon completion of the program, students find employment in specialized, as well as general, law offices. Many graduates of the Legal Secretarial program proceed to the Part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program. The Legal Assistant program requires Option students to have two years work experience as a legal secretary prior to enrolling in the first course. Legal Secretarial program graduates who have achieved a cumulative "B" average and who have obtained employment in a law firm, government law department or corporate law Career/Vocational 143 department are now eligible to enter the Legal Assistant Part-time program. This allows them to further their education in the evening while earning a salary and gaining valuable experience in the legal support field. (b) Transcripts from all educational institutions y o u have attended The Program (c) A letter of recommendation from a former employer or teacher. This nine-month vocational program covers five main areas o f law providing a fundamental understanding o f the legal system in B . C . Students are trained in legal terminology and procedural rules. They w i l l review relevant legislation, and acquire necessary skills in the formatting and handling o f legal documents. T y p i n g , legal office procedures, hands-on computer technology and a two-week legal office work practicum are included in the curriculum. A Capilano College certificate is granted upon successful completion o f the program. (a) A resume describing your education, skills, and work experience. Prior Learning Assessment (PLA) The A p p l i e d Business Technology Department is committed to the recognition o f prior learning. Prior learning assessment ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated learning for credits which have been acquired through life or work experiences. F o r further information contact the P L A coordinator at Capilano College. Special Fees and Expenses Contact: Applied Business Technology Division, 984-4959: E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca In addition to registration and tuition fees, students can expect to spend approximately $1,100 on textbooks and supplies. Admission Procedures Program Content Students are admitted to the program twice a year, in September and January. Applications for A d m i s s i o n may be submitted at any time to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts and any other pertinent documents. To ensure your name is on the list for the Information Meetings held throughout the year, call the Department of A p p l i e d Business Technology at 984-4959. Interested applicants arc invited to attend an information meeting. A n evaluation of keyboarding speed and English language proficiency w i l l be conducted at this time. During the meeting, an appointment for a personal interview may be arranged. During your interview, you w i l l have an opportunity to ask further questions, and discuss your qualifications and career goals. Y o u r test results will be reviewed with y o u at this time. The objective o f the personal interview is to assist in selecting applicants who w i l l be most suited to the career o f legal secretary. FIRST TERM L G S T 108 L G S T 109 L G S T 116 L G S T 123 L G S T 124 C M N S 159 Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. • English language proficiency as demonstrated by the Business English Competency test results. Keyboarding at 45 w p m . • Please submit the following material prior to or during the pre-admission interview: Career/Voca tiona I 144 Introduction to the Legal System. Legal Document Processing on the Microcomputer Organizational Behaviour Communications for Legal Secretaries 1.5 3.0 1.5 3.75 3.0 10 15.75 SECOND TERM Credits L G S T 105 Typing Speed & S k i l l Development 1.5 L G S T 107 L G S T 110 L G S T 112 3.75 3.0 L G S T 114 Legal Machine Transcription Corporate Procedures Basic Conveyance & Mortgage Procedures W i l l s & Probate Procedures L G S T 117 Legal Office Procedures 1.5 L G S T 119 Practicum CIP* L G S T 122 Computer Applications Admission Requirements • Credits Family L a w Procedures Basic Litigation in the Legal Office 3.0 1.5 10 17.25 THIRD TERM L G S T 119 Credits Practicum 1.5 Total Program Credits: 34.5 * C I P Course in Progress. increasing readiness to use new techniques to foster MEDIA RESOURCES PROGRAM MEDIA RESOURCES DIPLOMA PROGRAM B. M E D I A R E S O U R C E S CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty J . V . B I Z Z O C C H I , B . A . (Michigan), Teaching Cert. (Sec.) (Michigan), V i d e o Production (Banff Centre) B . D O D D , A . A . S . D i p . (Capilano) M . D O W D I N G , D i p . M e d i a Resources (Capilano) P. K E L L I N G T O N , F i l m Studies ( U B C ) , A . A . S . M e d i a Spec. Cert. (Capilano) learning, growth, and social interaction. Capilano College's M e d i a Resources program prepares students for work and leadership in this growing media resources field. The core of the program is production training. Students arc taught standards of excellence and effectiveness in all forms of educational production work. Basictechnical skills are taught in all media areas, and a large number of projects are completed by students during their training. In this way students arc prepared for a wide range o f practical work possibilities, rather than simply a proficiency in theory. The program teaches students more than the necessary technical skills. Students learn the critical process o f how to work a production through from concept to A . K L A V E R , A . A . S . D i p . (Capilano) completion. T h i s involves understanding learning B . R E I D , B . A . (Alta.), A d v a n c e d Theatre (Banff theory and instructional design as well as understanding the particular advantages o f each medium. Centre) S. R O G E R S , B . A . A . (Ryerson) M . T A Y L O R , D i p . M e d i a Resources (Capilano) K . W A T T , B . A . (Trent) J. W E S T E N D O R P , B . F . A . ( U B C ) Support Staff A major skill that the M e d i a Resources program emphasizes is that of working effectively in groups. Students in this program w i l l have worked in a large number of production groups in a variety of production formats by the time they graduate. Anne Gilbert, B . A . ( S F U ) Program Assistant The program's instructional design reflects its practical A l a n Hovden, Program Assistant goals. Workshop methods, hands-on training and field Laurie M c L e a n , B . S c . ( S F U ) Program Assistant trips are used throughout the program. Technical Staff The College's training facilities are well equipped. Bryan Christie They include a photography studio and lab, an audio Cam Willams recording studio, a television studio, computer workstations and audiovisual production equipment Career Opportunities that students can access through the Department's In 28 years of operation, the M e d i a Resources program has graduated over 450 students. The majority of these graduates arc employed as producers, directors, editors, writers, camera and audio operators, production assistants and equipment managers in video, film, audio, photography, multi-image and multi-media production formats. They work for educational institutions and private companies as well as non-profit organizations. In addition, a number of graduates have set up their o w n independent production companies. equipment check-out facility. The Media Resources program consists o f four terms of study. N e w students are admitted each September in a class o f 28. Contact: 984-4940 Admission Requirements 1. 18 years of age. 2. Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. A. DIPLOMA PROGRAM F I L M , P H O T O G R A P H Y , V I D E O , A U D I O and C O M P U T E R S are vital components of the media mix used in all levels o f educational and instructional communication. 3. Applicants may wish to take some or all o f the Media Resources Certificate courses. These courses arc designed to give the student an introduction to media and to the M e d i a Resources program. M D I A 065 (Media Studies) is part of the certificate program and is also required for the M e d i a R e - The M e d i a Resources program is a two-year program sources two-year diploma program. training students for current and developing applications of media technologies. In areas of education, commercial and entertainment media, there is an 4. Attendance at an information meeting held from November through A p r i l . Career/Voca tional 145 THIRD TERM 5. A p p l i c a t i o n s for Admission must be submitted to A d m i s s i o n s , Registrar's Office, together with M D I A 231 D i g i t a l V i d e o Post - Production 3.0 official transcripts o f all secondary and post- M D I A 271 Educational T . V . Systems 3.0 6 secondary education. M D I A 300 A d v a n c e d V i d e o Production 6.0 3 M D I A 304 M e d i a Applications: Computers 6. Applicants w i l l be contacted for an interview in the January through M a y period, and i f places arc available, in August. 10 3 15.0 12 FOURTH TERM C M N S 156 A d v a n c e d M e d i a 7. Interviews are conducted until the class is filled. Communications 3.0 M D I A 263 Production Resources 1.5 6 M D I A 303 M e d i a Specialist i n Education and T r a i n i n g 3.0 6 M D I A 299 M a j o r Projects L5 0 9.0 12 61.5 60 8. A d m i s s i o n is based on general ability, noteworthy experience, previous work, education, interest in and commitment to the M e d i a Resources program. Applicants selected for interviews w i l l be notified of their admission status in writing. Total Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $6,000 for B. tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the twoyear program. CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This is a 15-credit certificate that consists o f the following courses: Graduation Requirements M D I A 101 — N e w M e d i a Literacy In order to graduate from the M e d i a Resources program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. M D I A 102 — Introduction to Photography M D I A 156 — Computers in M e d i a M D I A 065 — M e d i a Studies, and one academic elective. Students may take one or more o f these courses. Professional Standards A l l M e d i a Resources students are required to adhere to high standards o f academic performance and profesMedia sional behaviour (as described in the booklet Resources Department MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Guidelines). Program Content FIRST TERM Credits/Lab Hours C M N S 130 Introduction to M e d i a Instructional Faculty J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina G e n . Hosp.), Teaching D i p . ( U n i v . o f Sask.) S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) S. L I V I N G S T O N E , R . N . , M . A . M . S . ( L o n d o n , Eng.) Communications M D I A 100 Intro, to V i d e o Production M D I A 105 Project Design M D I A 181 Basic A u d i o Production 3.0 3.0 3.0 6 A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams, Cairo) M D I A 183 Photographic Production 3.0 6 M D I A 186 Computers in M e d i a Production 3.0 M D I A 195 Photography 1.5 M D I A 250 Documentary Scriptwriting L5 3 B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L Cert. 0 Support 0 L i s a Larkins, Clerk Typist 19.5 18 3 1.5 SECOND TERM Staff Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy W e b c r g , Divisional Assistant M D I A 150 Intro, to A n i m a t i o n M D I A 172 V i d e o Technology I 3.0 M D I A 173 E d . M e d i a Applications: A u d i o M D I A 182 A d v a n c e d A u d i o Production M D I A 185 Advanced Photography 1.5 3.0 3.0 6 in Canada, and the M e d i c a l Office Assistant is a M D I A 200 Intermediate V i d e o I M D I A 202 Intermediate V i d e o II 3.0 6 recognized member of the modern medical team. Career/Vocationai 146 1.5 Career Opportunities The health care industry is one of the largest industries 10 3 18.0 15 M O A . 105 M e d i c a l Administrative receptionist or medical assistant in an office or clinic, M O A . 107 C l i n i c a l Procedures I or in a hospital as an admitting clerk or department M O A . 109 Anatomy & Related Physiology M O A . 111 M O A . 121 Medical Terminology I Graduates of this program have the specialized training 3.0 Procedures I required to work in a number of medical settings: 1.5 3.0 and Pathology I stenographer. The Program 3.0 L5 M e d i c a l Document Processing II 18.0 This M e d i c a l Office Assistant program offers pre- Credits servicc, specialized education for prospective students SECOND TERM which includes: M O A . 102 Keyboarding S k i l l & 1.5 Speed Development • M e d i c a l terminology and anatomy and physiology M O A . 103 Medical Machine Transcription • Pharmacology M O A . 106 Medical Administrative • M e d i c a l ethics • M e d i c a l transcription • M e d i c a l office procedures • Aseptic techniques • • • 0.75 Procedures II M O A . 108 C l i n i c a l Procedures II and M O A . 110 Pharmacology Anatomy & Related Physiology medical examinations M O A . 112 Medical Terminology II 3.0 Specimen collection and basic office diagnostic M O A . 115 Directed W o r k Experience 1.5 procedures M O A . 122 Computers in Health Care Preparation, assisting and follow up o f patient for 1.5 3.0 and Pathology II Financial record keeping and computerized medical billing • 3.0 L5 15.75 33.75 Total Program Credits: A two-week work practicum in the medical field Contact: Applied 984-4959; Business E-mail: Technology Division, MUSIC THERAPY P R O G R A M abt@capcollege.bc.ca Instructional Admission Requirements Faculty P. A V E R Y , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . E d . (Toronto), Registered Applicants must meet the following admission require- Psychologist ments: J. B E C K O W , B . M u s . ( U C L A ) , D i p . M . T . , M T A • J. B R O D E U R , B . M u s . (Vincent d'Indy) M . A . , P h . D . Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status (P.U.) M T A • 35 w p m keyboarding speed • Personal interview • Aptitude for working in a medical setting • Appropriate English conversation and writing skills M . H O W A R D , B.M.T. (OUBC), M T A • St. John's Standard First A i d Certificate N . M C M A S T E R , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . M . T . (Nordoff & K . B U R K E , B . A . (Antioch), D i p . M . T . (Capilano), MTA R. G U R R A l l Applications for Admission must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official Robbins), M T A E. M O F F I T T , B . M u s . ( M c G i l l ) M . A . ( C P U ) , D i p . Music Therapy (Capilano), M T A transcripts and other pertinent documents. K. N I C H O L S O N , B.M.T. (OUBC), M T A M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. Special Fees and Expenses J. W A T E R S , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) , P h . D . ( S F U ) In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can W. W A T T S , B.M.T. (OUBC), M T A expect to spend approximately $1.000 on textbooks S. W I L L I A M S , B . M u s . (Toronto), M . C . A . T . (Hahnemann) M T A , C M T , Program Coordinator and supplies. Support Program Content FIRST TERM Staff T i m Coffey, Stores Clerk Credits C M N S 110 Standard English Usage 3.0 M O A . 100 M e d i c a l Document Processing 1 3.0 Dorothy Holmes, Receptionist John M c M u r r a y , Stores Clerk Carol McQuarric, Secretary Ca re e r/Vo ca tionai BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY — OPEN UNIVERSITY Graduates o f the Capilano College M u s i c Therapy program receive a Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy from the Open University. academic and clinical skills as jointly evaluated each semester by the M u s i c Therapy faculty. M u s i c therapy is a helping profession in which music therapists work with clients who arc in a state o f disability. In the therapist/client relationship, there is an assumption that the therapist is in a well enough state o f health and M u s i c therapists use the creative process inherent in well-being to mediate client difficulties with an musical participation to assist individuals and groups to appropriate clinical approach. In other words, the improve their mental, physical and emotional function- therapist must function in clinically suitable ways, be ing. Music therapists work with deep emotions in emotionally stable and able to respond generally vis-a- special therapeutic programs, run exercise and dance vis the client's needs. The therapist is the helper. The programs, lead choirs, instrumental ensembles and role o f the M u s i c Therapy program, in addition to music appreciation groups as they contribute to student education, is to safeguard the standards o f therapeutic goals. M u s i c therapy is increasingly practice of the professional music therapy community identified by health care professionals as an effective through monitoring student readiness to work with catalyst for client motivation, stimulation and commu- members of the community-at-large who are at risk nication. because of disability, disease, cultural and social deprivation, and otherwise disadvantaged. Safety o f Career Opportunities clients is essential. Graduates o f the program work with all age groups, Contact.- 984-4951 E-mail: intherapy@capcollege.bc.ca with a wide range of physiological, cognitive and emotional disorders, in a variety of clinical settings or in private practice. They are trained to work as part of a health care team. Admission Requirements to the Third Year The Program consult the entrance requirements to the M u s i c Depart- The Music Therapy program at Capilano offers the ment. A n interview w i l l also be required with the N . B . F o r admission requirements to the first year, third and fourth years leading to the Bachelor of Music M u s i c Therapy faculty, however acceptance to the first Therapy granted by the Open University. This degree year docs not guarantee acceptance to the third year. program is designed so that students may enter third A l l students entering the t h i r d year o f the M u s i c year with a variety o f backgrounds: music, general arts, Therapy program must: education, or nursing etc. A l l four years may be 1. C o m p l y with the general College entrance require- completed at Capilano College. ments (see A d m i s s i o n and Readmission section o f This program provides students with the opportunity to gain knowledge and develop competencies in such areas as music therapy and practice; clinical disorders; assessment, planning and intervention: improvisation and music of many eras and cultures; interpersonal skills and group dynamics; basic research, and documentation. this calendar) and submit an Application for The program blends academic and experiential course work. Students deepen their experience of music, creative expression and the role of the arts. They are encouraged to explore their values, beliefs, feelings and communication patterns, to increase their effectiveness in the field. They have field work in a different setting for each of the four terms, in which they are given increasing responsibility to design, implement and evaluate their o w n treatment programs, under clinical supervision. A d m i s s i o n to A d m i s s i o n s , Registrar's Office, together with official copies o f all secondary and post-secondary education (if not already on file with the College). 2. Participate in an interview with members o f the M u s i c Therapy faculty. Interviews are held in M a y . 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instrument, demonstrating technique, repertoire, and musical sensitivity in two contrasting pieces at an advanced level o f proficiency. 4. Have completed one full year at the university level of M u s i c Theory, Ear Training and Sight Singing. 5. Have successfully completed at least two years at the university level, including at least six credits of English, six credits o f Music History, 12 credits of Psychology *. (including Introductory Psychology, Developmental Psychology and Psychology Continuance in the M u s i c Therapy program w i l l be Elective), three credits o f Human B i o l o g y , three contingent upon an adequate level of personal, credits of Orff and K o d a l y Methodology. Career/Vocational 148 6. Have completed nine elective credits. M . T . 460 M u s i c Therapy III 3.0 7. Have some experience with people with special M . T . 490 Practicum II 6.0 P M I . 300 Concentration Instrument 2.0 PMI. Secondary Instrument 1.0 P S Y C 201 G r o u p Dynamics 10 needs. 8. Be able to demonstrate a high level of maturity, integrity, a clinical suitability and readiness to train as a therapist. 18.0 9. Have basic guitar and keyboard skills at the level o f University Class Piano. 10. Have word processing skills. * A b n o r m a l Psychology is offered within the M u s i c Therapy program. Graduation Requirements FOURTH TERM Credits M . T . 451 Music & the Creative Arts 1.5 M . T . 461 Music Therapy I V 3.0 3.0 M . T . 462 Principles o f Research M . T . 480 Improvisation III 1.5 M . T . 491 Practicum III 6.0 P M I . 400 Concentration Instrument 2.0 PMI. Secondary Instrument LO T o obtain the Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy degree 18.0 candidates must fulfill the admission requirements to Total 73.0 third year, complete the 73 credits in the courses outlined below as well as the post basic requirements of Post Basic Program Requirements the nine- credit internship. M . T . 510 Internship (compulsory upon completion of all above courses) 9.0 Accreditation This course work fulfills the educational requirements for professional accreditation by the Canadian Associa- Some Music Therapy Practicum Placements tion for M u s i c Therapy. CHILDREN A supervised internship is also required before gradua- North Vancouver School Board tion, to fulfil the accreditation requirement for clinical Children's Hospital work. U B C B o b Berwick Preschool Program Content FIRST TERM Credits PSYCHIATRY Riverview Hospital Improvisation I 1.5 Wcstside Community Care Team M . T . 330 Basic C l i n i c a l Skills 3.0 GERIATRICS M . T . 350 The Influence of Music 3.0 U B C Extended Care M . T . 360 Music Therapy I 3.0 Yalctown House M . T . 364 Disabling Conditions o f Adulthood 3.0 M . T . 380 P M I . 100 Interpersonal Skills for M . T . 1.5 PALLIATIVE CARE Concentration Instrument Secondary Instrument 2.0 L0 18.0 St. Paul's Hospital M . T . 320 PMI. SECOND TERM Credits M.T.361 Music Therapy II M . T . 370 Disabling Conditions of Childhood 3.0 3.0 M . T . 391 Practicum I M . T . 420 Improvisation II - Guitar 1.0 P M I . 200 Concentration Instrument 2.0 PMI. Secondary Instrument 1.0 P S Y C 222 Abnormal Psychology 10 L i o n ' s Gate Hospital C O M M U N I T Y SETTING C l u b Metro Burnaby Parks and Recreation 6.0 19.0 THIRD TERM Credits M . T . 340 M i d i Synthesizer Technology 1.5 M . T . 450 The Influence o f M u s i c II 1.5 Career/Vocational 149 OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM* *This is an ESL Program. This program is presently under review; the detailed listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1998. Instructional • M i n i m u m o f advanced English language skills as demonstrated by S L E P Test results. • Competent conversational English. FIRST TERM ESL.062 Credits A d v a n c e d Listening and Speaking for Business ESL.067 Vocabulary for Business O T E C 113 Business English and O T E C 143 Introduction to Microcomputer Faculty J. G I L L E S P I E . B . S c . ( S F U ) 3.0 Advanced Reading and 3.0 Communications M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. E X . ) . B . E d . (Mt. St. 4.5 Applications 61) Vincent), T E S L Cert.. M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) 16.5 C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . . Sec. ( U B C ) S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) SECOND TERM A . S E D K Y . B . A . . M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams. Cairo) ESL.072 B . S M I T H . B . A . . Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) . T E S L Cert. K. V I C K A R S . B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC). C.G.A. Speaking for Business 3.0 O T E C 144 Microcomputer Applications 4.5 O T E C 150 Administrative and Business Procedures 3.0 O T E C 211 Business Writing or G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Credits College Prep Listening and O T E C 212 Business English 11 Staff O T E C 251 Interpersonal Skills L i s a Larkins, Clerk Typist O T E C 300 Directed Work Experience Support 3.0 1.5 L5 16.5 Faye Ulker. Clerk Typist Wendy W e b e r g , Divisional Assistant THIRD TERM Credits Practicum- continuation o f O T E C 300 Career Opportunities Graduates arc finding employment in entry-level - Directed Work Experience Certificate Requirements CIP* 33.0 positions which include general office assistants, receptionists, accounts payable and receivable clerks. The Program The Office Assistant E S L program is a full-time, ninemonth program offered from September to M a y . This program provides students with training in general office skills, computer applications and English speaking, listening, grammar and composition skills. Students are required to complete a work practicum as part o f their training program. Contact: Applied Business Technology Division, 984-4959; E-mail: abt@capcollege.be.ca O U T D O O R RECREATION M A N A G E M E N T PROGRAM Instructional Faculty * D . B A S H A M , D M A T P Coordinator * C . B O N I F A C E , Convenor Outdoor Recreation, B . S c , P G C E (Birmingham), M . S c . ( S F U ) C . F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor R e c M g m t . (Capilano), C P R Instructor, CTSSR Wilderness Emergency Response Instructor S. F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor R e c M g m t . (Capilano), C P R Instructor, C I S S R Wilderness Emergency Response Admission Requirements Instructor G . G J E R D A L E N , B . A . M R M (SFU). A P M C P E S L students who wish to take this program must have a personal interview with the program convenor and must meet these admission criteria: • (Capilano) C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) D. L O B L A W , B . A . ( U of T) Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature R. M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U . of Alberta) student status. H . P L U M E , C M A , D i p . Accelerated Computer Systems Management (Capilano) Ca re e rl Vo ca t to n a / 150 J. R O U S E , D M A T P , Convenor, Tourism M g m t . , B . S c . (Mt. A l l i s o n U . ) , Cert. Tourism M g m t . (Capilano) increasing variety of career opportunities ensure that graduates readily find employment in the field. B . W H I T E , D M A T P , Convenor, T o u r i s m Degree, B.A., M . A . (SFU) Bachelor of Tourism Management Degree The Program The curriculum includes several trips into B . C . ' s wilderness areas, including backpacking experiences in the Coast Mountains, and West Coast environmental A Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management degree is offered and cultural studies. through the Open University in collaboration with Capilano College. The intent o f the degree is to provide the most up-to-date knowledge, innovations, technologies, and management techniques for administrators and entrepreneurs in the tourism industry. The degree requirements include core business and tourism foundation courses, general education requirements, Our program has earned an excellent reputation for its top-quality management and technical skills and employment contacts. Over the past two decades, we have expanded our network of practicum placements, keeping us in touch with the latest developments and providing access to career prospects. specified and elective courses at the upper level, and a Contact: 984-4960; Fax: number of defined elective credits. The academic E-mail: 984-1761 outaoor@capcollege.bc.ca credentials earned in the Outdoor Recreation Management diploma satisfy most core business and tourism foundation courses, and elective requirements. Subject to approval from the Open University, Capilano College w i l l be offering all the necessary courses to earn an Open University Bachelor of Tourism Management Degree. For a detailed brochure about the degree, please contact Capilano College at (604) 984-4960 or Admission Requirements • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status • Personal interview • Attendance at Orientation Meeting • Orientation meetings and interviews are scheduled in the spring. Phone the department for dates and fax (604) 984-1761. times. • TWO-YEAR OUTDOOR RECREATION M A N A G E M E N T DIPLOMA Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age at the date of entry into the program, should have good reading and writing skills, have previous relevant outdoor experience, and must be physically and B . C . ' s "super natural" environment is ideal for outdoor psychologically prepared for the challenges o f the recreation, and with the growing tourism business and program and the demands of the industry. Students increase in leisure time for most people, the demand applying for admission should be aware that atti- for qualified, well-trained managers in the field of tude, field performance and participation are taken outdoor recreation is expanding rapidly. into account in the departmental evaluation process. Nestled on the forested slope o f the North Shore mountains, close to Whitewater rivers, wilderness lakes, ocean shoreline, and mountain back country, the College is ideally suited for the challenging two-year program. The Outdoor Recreation Department is relaxed and • Prior to admission, a doctor's certificate o f health w i l l be required. A l l students need to be well equipped with outdoor gear and must be prepared to pay additional costs for field trips. Admission Procedure informal; however, we set and maintain high academic The Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to and outdoor leadership performance standards. Stu- Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official dents w i l l appreciate the individual attention College transcripts and other pertinent documents. faculty arc able to provide. Please bring the following documentation to your Career Opportunities • A t least two letters of reference interview: The well-established Outdoor Recreation Management • A resume of past experiences program provides excellent training for a wide range of careers in federal and provincial parks, resorts, social service agencies, adventure tourism, and environmental education. Careful practicum placements and an Ca re e rIVo ca tio n a I 151 Program Content FIRST TERM C M N S 154 Communications in Recreation 3.0 REC. 143 Outdoor Rec. Delivery Systems 3.0 REC. 152 Environmental Stewardship 3.0 3.0 REC. 156 Intro, to Environmental Studies 3.0 3.0 3.0 REC. 157 A p p l i e d Field Skills REC. 163 Wilderness First A i d I REC. 169 Landscape Interpretation T O U R 139 PERSONAL CARE ATTENDANT WORKING FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES P R O G R A M Credits/Lab Hrs 3.0 EIGHT-MONTH CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M 3.0 Computer Applications See also: Resident C a r e A t t e n d a n t , H o m e S u p p o r t in Recreation 10 24.0 Attendant programs. 6.0 Instructional Faculty SECOND TERM Credits/Lab Hrs T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) L . C U T H B E R T S O N , B.H.Sc.(O.T.) (McMaster), REC. 144 Outdoor Rec. Program Planning 3.0 3.0 REC. 151 3.0 REC. 153 Leisure Issues The Outdoor Environment BMKT164 Small Bus. Mgmt. I T O U R 111 T o u r i s m : A n Industry 3.0 J. G I B B S , R . S . W . , Coordinator 3.0 M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. 3.0 THIRD TERM 178 6.0 Credits/Lab Hrs H u m a n Relations in Recreation 3.0 T O U R 233 Cross Cultural Issues 3.0 REC. 252 N a n c y Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r , Receptionists no credit 15.0 REC. Environmental Stewardship II 3.0 3.0 Adventure & E c o - T o u r i s m 3.0 3.0 BMKT163 SmallBus.Mgmt.il 3.0 Career Opportunities live in the community rather than in an institution, the Personal Care Attendant program prepares students to work with clients o f all ages in a variety o f community settings. Students are trained to give client-directed no credit 15.0 Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant In response to the trend for people with disabilities to T O U R 120 Selective S k i l l s * M.Ed.(Brock), Reg. O.T. (BC) M . D A Y A N , B . S . R . ( U B C ) , Registered Physiotherapist Support Staff: Perspective Selective S k i l l s * 3.0 6.0 personal assistance in order that the individual may achieve the fullest possible participation in society. FOURTH TERM REC. 255 Credits/Lab Hrs Outdoor Recreation Practicum 9,0 9.0 Total 63.0 18.0 Services offered by the graduate Personal Care Attendant differ from the traditional medically-modeled services in many ways: • service goals are defined by the service user, not the service provider or medical personnel. *Selective skills During their time in the Outdoor Recreation Manage- • services are oriented towards promoting m a x i m u m independence for the client in all aspects o f life. • services are directed towards enhancing an individu- ment program students have the opportunity to pursue al's present strengths and enabling the development two skills activities in their particular areas of interest. of further strengths. These selective skills help provide our graduates with • work in the outdoor recreation, adventure travel and services may be provided in a variety o f settings. Because graduates must be prepared to work effec- eco-tourism industries. tively within the full continuum o f available settings, the Personal Care Attendant program prepares students to assist persons with disabilities in a broad range o f activities o f daily living. The program ensures that students acquire knowledge and master skills necessary to deal with the functional, emotional, social and medical implications o f physical disabilities. Graduates of the program find employment in many areas of the health field including: group homes, Career/Voca tional 152 private homes, recreation programs, health care centres, and schools. Program with official transcripts for all secondary and postsecondary education. Graduation Requirements The objective o f the program is to provide the student Attendance: The Personal Care Attendant program with the basic skills and knowledge required for a career courses are intensive; regular attendance is mandatory. in the Health and Human Services field. This full-time, T o receive a P C A D certificate students must pass all eight-month certificate program integrates health care courses and achieve a m i n i m u m of 6 0 % in each graded theory with practice. Practicum experiences take place course in the program and achieve a 7 5 % (B-) average in a variety of community health care settings. in all theory courses. A student who fails any course Contact: may not be allowed to continue in the program. 984-4960 G r a d u a t e s receive the f o l l o w i n g certificates: 1. Personal Care Attendant 2. Home Support Attendant 3. Food Safe 4. W H M I S Fees and Expenses The fees are in accordance with the College Calendar for a 30 credit program. The student can expect to spend approximately $200 on books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be incurred for a First A i d course, Students may take additional courses for a Special transportation for practicums, and for a C r i m i n a l Education Teacher Assistant ( S E T A ) Certificate. Record Check. P C A D program includes the core courses o f the Resident Care Attendant and Home Support Attendant Program Content programs. Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 or equivalent, with Grade 12 preferred. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. 2. Applicants arc required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. Interviews are held in A p r i l . Further interviews may be held if spaces in the program are available. 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age and have a genuine desire to work with disabled people in the Health and Human Services field. T w o references are required. FIRST TERM RCAP 100 Health: Lifestyles and Choices R C A P 102 Human Relations: Interpersonal R C A P 101 Health and Healing: Concepts for P C A D 013 Intro to Physical Disabilities 3.0 P C A D 014 Ethics and Values in Health Care 1.5 P C A D 019 P C A D 022 A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum I 1.5 Human Relations II 1.5 P C A D 049 Applied Theory: Lab for Personal Assistants Communications Practice ing it to the coordinator before the first day o f classes. The St. John's Emergency L e v e l Safety Oriented First A i d Certificate or any higher level is acceptable. 6. Applications for Admission must be submitted directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together Home Support Special Needs in Home Support Growth and Development 1.5 1.5 1.5 Advanced Physical Disability Concepts 3.0 P C A D 029 Applied Theory: Practicum II 6.0 P C A D 059 Applied Theory: Lab for Personal absence of active tuberculosis. Some practicum student is responsible for obtaining this and present- 10 Credits P C A D 023 P C A D 024 w h i c h includes C . P . R . throughout the course. The 3.0 SECOND TERM H S A . 110 Work Role Concepts in and are required to complete a medical report on a 5. Students need a valid standard First A i d Certificate 1.5 15.5 H S A . 112 placements require a Criminal Record Check. 1.5 Total 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, form provided by the College, plus evidence of the Credits Assistants II L0 Term Total 14.5 Program Total 30.0 Part-time Courses Part-time courses are available. Prior Learning Credit may be granted for prior learning. Career/Voca tiona! 153 RESIDENT CARE ATTENDANT PROGRAM F I V E - M O N T H CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M See also: P e r s o n a l C a r e A t t e n d a n t , H o m e S u p p o r t Attendant programs. Graduates o f the program may transfer some R C A courses to the Licensed Practical Nurse program. R C A graduates can enter the L . C . A . program using the Access program, which is available at some colleges. Contact: 984-4960 Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 or equivalent, with grade 12 preferred. Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. Coordinator S. E N G E L B E R T , B . A . , R . N . B. ESTEY, R.N. B. MILLER, R.N. M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. 2. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have K. T A Y L O R , R.N. a genuine desire to work with elderly people and Support their families in the health field. T w o written Staff Nancy Findlater, A r l e n e M i l l e r , Receptionists Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant references are required. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a Career Opportunities form provided by the College, plus evidence o f The number o f elderly people in our community is absence o f active tuberculosis. increasing, and there is an ever-growing demand for 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted qualified men and women to work full-time or part- directly to A d m i s s i o n s , Registrar's Office, together time in this field o f health care. with official transcripts o f secondary and post- Graduates o f this full-time program are qualified to secondary education. work with residents i n various continuing care settings, 6. C r i m i n a l Record C h e c k * including extended care facilities, intermediate care facilities and H o m e Support Agencies. The potential for employment is excellent. Graduation Requirements Attendance: The Resident Care Attendant courses are Employers may require a Criminal Record check. intensive; regular attendance is mandatory. Graduation requires a valid standard First A i d Certifi- T h e Program cate which includes C . P . R . The student is responsible The College offers a full-time certificate program for obtaining this and presenting it to the coordinator recognized throughout B . C . , designed to provide before the first day o f classes. The St. John's Emer- students with the opportunity to qualify to work with gency Level Safety Oriented First A i d Certificate or continuing care clients in many different settings. any higher level is acceptable. The program integrates health care theory with prac- Students must obtain a B - (2.67 G P A ) , with completion tice. Students learn the basics in physical care with a of all courses in the program. focus on the spiritual and emotional well-being o f the resident. Practicum experiences take place in a variety of intermediate care and extended care facilities. A l l Fees and Expenses students who are interested in the R C A program must The fees are in accordance with the College Calendar. attend an information meeting and have an interview The student can expect to spend approximately $200 with an R C A instructor. on books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be i n - T w o programs are offered each year from September to curred for a First A i d course, transportation for January, and January to June. In the 98/99 academic practicums, and for a C r i m i n a l Record C h e c k . year, the August '98 and January '99 programs w i l l be offered in North Vancouver. Applications are consid- * C l i n i c a l placements require a criminal record check. ered in October for the January program, and in M a r c h The student must present this to the coordinator before or A p r i l for the September program. the first day o f classes. Career/Vocational 154 Program Content FIRST TERM acceptance to the advanced art and design programs of Credits R C A P 100 Health: Lifestyle and Choices R C A P 101 Health and Healing: Concepts for R C A P 102 Human Relations: Interpersonal 1.5 Practice 3.0 1.5 W o r k Role Concepts in 1.0 A p p l i e d Theory: Lab and C l i n i c a l R C A P 113 materials, techniques, and processes, students are assisted in developing personal interests, directions, and creative maturity. The emphasis of the program is 17.0 context of current thought and practice within the fine Credits arts, while preparing them for further studies in art and Special Needs in Resident Care SECOND TERM Visual Literacy, Art History, and English. 7.0 Practicum in Resident Care R C A P 112 The Studio Art program provides studio experiences in Through exposure to a broad range of concepts, Resident Care R C A P 111 school or in a college design program. 2-D Studies, 3-D Studies and D r a w i n g and courses in Communications R C A P 110 their choice. Graduates of the Studio Art program usually complete their education at university, art on preparing students to function effectively within the A p p l i e d Theory: C l i n i c a l Practice Total Program Credits 40 21.0 design-related fields. Because the program also exposes students to creative thinking and problem-solving, it may also serve as a foundation for further general education. STUDIO ART P R O G R A M S t u d i o A r t is a department w i t h i n the V i s u a l a n d P e r f o r m i n g A r t s D i v i s i o n . O t h e r art p r o g r a m s in this C a l e n d a r i n c l u d e T e x t i l e A r t s , G r a p h i c Design and Illustration, and C o m m e r c i a l Animation. Instructional Faculty M . B O W C O T T , A . O . C . A . (Ontario), M . A . ( R . C . A . London) Contact: Art Department, 984-4911 Part-time Courses There arc a limited number o f positions open in many of the credit courses offered in Studio Art. These courses may be credited toward cither a D i p l o m a in Studio A r t , a D i p l o m a in Academic Studies or a Diploma in General Studies, depending on the student's educational objectives. For Diplomas other than N . B O Y D , B . A . (Waterloo) Studio Art, sec Graduation section in this Calendar. B . C O G S W E L L , N . D . D . (Hammersmith) ( R . C . A . ) Students taking Studio Art courses must be available W . E A S T C O T T . Sr. Cert. ( V . S . A . ) ( R . C . A . ) for the labs attached to Ceramics, Sculpture and J.JUNGIC, B.A..M.A. (UBC) Printmaking which take place on the afternoon o f S. K W A N ( E . C . C . A . D . ) scheduled classes. Students must ensure that courses D . N E A V E , B . A . Hons. (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c ) taken outside of Studio Art w i l l not conflict with these G . R A M M E L L , (E.C.C.A.D.) labs. C . W I L L I A M S , B . A . ( S F U ) . M . A . (Leeds) General Information Studio Art offers a program of studies leading to a twoyear diploma. Studio Art has a limited number of openings in many of its courses for part-time study. It also offers individual credit courses in Art Institute advanced studies. See Art Institute in the Post-graduate programs section of this Calendar. The Department encourages students to take both terms of any given discipline (i.e. both Drawing 1 and II) in the interests of effective university transfer status. The program will pre-register returning part-time students into spring term courses. Career and Educational Opportunities The fields of further study listed below lead to specific career or job opportunities. It is recommended that an education in these specific careers should follow a high quality broad art foundation such as that offered by The Program The Studio Art program at Capilano College provides a Studio Art. Students may find they need to study out o f the province to pursue these educational goals. thorough, high quality foundation in the fundamentals F I N E A R T S : sculptor, printmakcr, painter of art. It enables students to make informed decisions G A L L E R I E S A N D M U S E U M S : curator, restorer, illustrator regarding future career choices and enables them to prepare high quality portfolios to aid them in gaining Ca reeriVoca tiona I 155 I N D U S T R Y : industrial, interior, furniture designer • Admission C R A F T S : ceramic, textile, jewellery artist • I L L U S T R A T O R : fashion, medical, advertising, publishing A R C H I T E C T U R E : model maker. Tenderer, restorer E D U C A T I O N : instructor, art therapist, consultant Students who study full-time or part-time and acquire either a D i p l o m a in Studio Art or a D i p l o m a in A c a demic Studies (including art courses) should find that educational opportunities exist in these and other fields. Admission Requirements Students interested i n study w i t h the S t u d i o A r t p r o g r a m should contact the A r t D e p a r t m e n t at 984- Completed Capilano College Application for Secondary and post-secondary transcripts (indicating 6 credits E n g . 100 if applicable). • Certificate o f English Language Assessment test ( E L A ) or Test of English as a Foreign Language ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable. APPLICANTS MUST PHONE T H E ART D E P A R T M E N T A T 984-4911 B E F O R E T H E E N D OF APRIL T O A R R A N G E A PORTFOLIO INTERVIEW FOR EARLY M A Y . Please return your Studio Art questionnaire to the Art Department interview. Office (AR 202) prior to your Special Fees and Expenses 4911 o r w r i t e to: T h e A r t D e p a r t m e n t , C a p i l a n o Although the Studio A r t Department can supply some C o l l e g e , 2055 P u r c e l l W a y , N o r t h V a n c o u v e r , B . C . of the materials required for the courses, the student V7J 3H5 can expect a financial outlay for some basic supplies, as indicated in the course outlines. FULL-TIME STUDENTS Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status required. Applicants are admitted on the basis of an interview and portfolio presentation. The candidate decides on the nature and scope o f work presented, but should University Transfer A l l Studio A r t courses are university transferable to many other institutions. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for more information. provide a representative picture of past and current artistic activities. In addition to completed work and sketchbooks, research material and preliminary studies should be included wherever possible. Slides, photographs or any other supporting evidence may also form part of the portfolio. It is not necessary for prospective students to mount work for the portfolio, since the quality of work is more important than the presentation. A l l Studio A r t courses include the following: slide/ lectures, demonstrations, individual and group c r i tiques, field trips and guest artist speakers. Program Content Credits FIRST PART-TIME STUDENTS Applicants may be eligible to take courses where space is available. A few places arc available for part-time students in all courses. Before the end o f A p r i l , interested applicants should contact the A r t office at 9844911 regarding portfolio interviews. Students wishing to register into the open Drawing classes may do so during the normal registration period, space permitting. Application Proceedure Prior to the portfolio interview, all applicants must supply the following documentation to the R e g i s t r a r ' s Office by the end o f A p r i l : Career/Vocational 156 60 Major Program Requirements TERM Credits /Lab Hrs 3 A H I S 104 Intro, to V i s u a l Literacy I S A R T 150 Drawing I 3 and 3 of the following: 9 3-D Studies C e r a m i c A r t I (3) 3 3-D Studies Sculpture I (3) 3 S A R T 171 2 - D Studies Painting I (3) S A R T 182 2-D Studies Printmaking I (3) _ S A R T 163 S A R T 167 1.5 SECOND TERM Credits /Lab Hrs A H I S 105 Intro, to V i s u a l Literacy II 3 S A R T 151 D r a w i n g II 3 and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* TEXTILE ARTS P R O G R A M T h e T e x t i l e A r t s P r o g r a m is a d e p a r t m e n t w i t h i n 9 S A R T 165 3-D Studies - Ceramic Art II (3) 3 the V i s u a l a n d P e r f o r m i n g A r t s D i v i s i o n . O t h e r art P r o g r a m s i n this C a l e n d a r i n c l u d e S t u d i o A r t , S A R T 172 2 - D Studies - Painting II (3) S A R T 174 3-D Studies - Sculpture II (3) 3 S A R T 183 2-D Studies - Printmaking 11(3) _ 1.5 G r a p h i c Design a n d I l l u s t r a t i o n , a n d C o m m e r c i a l Animation. Instructional 15 Faculty N . B O Y D , B . A . (Waterloo) THIRD TERM A H I S 210 Credits /Lab Hrs K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg School o f Art) 3 E . J U S T M A N N , B . A . (Dcbuquc, Iowa), M . E d . (Arts) 3 A . M A L L I N S O N , (Wcstdcan College, Sussex, History o f Modern A r t (19th Century) S A R T 262 (McGill) Drawing III and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* 9 England) S A R T 250 2-D Studies - Painting III (3) S A R T 257 3-D Studies - Sculpture III (3) 3 S A R T 273 3-D Studies - Ceramic A r t III (3) 3 S A R T 282 2-D Studies - Printmaking III ( 3 ) _ 1.5 L . R I C H M O N D , Teach. Cert. (Trent Park, L o n d o n , 15 Eng.) M . A r t E d . ( W . Wash. U.) R. S C H E U I N G , B . F . A . ( N o v a Scotia College o f A r t & Design) P. S I N G E R , B . A . (Sir George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . (Concordia) FOURTH A H I S 211 TERM Credits /Lab Hrs History o f M o d e r n A r t 3 General Information 3 The Textile Arts program offers a full-time, two-year program leading to a D i p l o m a . (20th Century) S A R T 263 Drawing I V and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* 9 3 It also offers a one-year Advanced Textile Arts Certificate program. 3-D S t u d i e s - C e r a m i c Art I V (3) 3 The Textile Arts program also offers the following 2-D Studies - Printmaking I V ( 3 ) _ 1.5 part-time professional courses: Professional and S A R T 255 2-D Studies - Painting I V (3) S A R T 265 3-D Studies - Sculpture I V (3) S A R T 274 S A R T 283 15 Business Skills in Arts and Crafts and Instructional Skills in Arts and Crafts. It also offers occasional * Where scheduling permits, second-year students may elect to drop one o f their three selected disciplines, then pick up both terms o f the first year discipline not previously studied. A l l studio courses include slide/lectures, demonstrations, individual and group critiques, field trips and guest artist speakers. evening part-time courses. Contact: Ruth Scheuing, Coordinator, 986-1911, ext. 2008 The Program Students learn about textile arts by exploring many different processes and by studying historical and contemporary works. English Requirement Six credits o f English arc required as prerequisite to The core content of W e a v i n g and Textile Surface Design is complemented by courses in D r a w i n g . Studio A r t , and therefore to receiving a Studio Art Design, Visual Literacy, Communications and Textile D i p l o m a . A student accepted into the program without History. A new course in "Professional and Business the English requirements must complete the two Skills in Arts and Crafts" provides students with English courses prior to applying for a Studio Art information and hands-on experience that w i l l facilitate Diploma. entering a professional career. A critical and analytical Students who complete all o f the major program requirements but fail to take English w i l l be granted a D i p l o m a in General Studies. approach to their o w n work w i l l enable graduates to be proficient in a range o f professional activities. Gallery and studio visits, as well as guest lectures by visiting artists and other professionals working in textiles or related areas augment regular teaching Career/Vocational 157 sessions. They show distinct approaches to an artist's work and also provide practical information on how careers arc built. A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certificate P r o g r a m A two year D i p l o m a in Visual Arts or equivalent studies with courses in the following areas for a Optional two-week practicums with artists, crafts combined total o f 24 credits: Painting, Photography, people, related businesses or organizations take place Printmaking, Sculpture, Ceramics, W e a v i n g , Surface in M a y , after the end o f the school term. They provide Design and Fashion Design. a useful work experience for students in the Textile Arts program. In addition, six credits in each of the following areas are also required: Design, Drawing, A r t History or V i s u a l Literacy, English or Communications. Career Opportunities Students also need to show a portfolio and come for an Past graduates arc working professionally as artists, interview to be admitted. N o previous experience i n crafts people or designers in fashion or interior design. textile arts is required. Some graduates have found employment in film or theatre productions or work for arts organizations or related businesses. The Textile Arts program can also be a stepping stone toward further studies in degree granting programs and previous students have transferred to institutions across Canada and the U S A to pursue studies in V i s u a l Arts, Design, Fashion, Textile Conservation and Aboriginal Arts. Options also exist to combine Textile Arts with studies in academic areas such as Anthropology and Art History. Students who miss some prerequisites may be admitted into the advanced program on condition that they take the missing courses before graduating. A l t h o u g h this is primarily a full-time program, some part-time options may be possible with the coordinator's approval. Application Procedures Contact the A r t Department prior in M a r c h / A p r i l to arrange an interview. Some additional interviews may be scheduled in August, space permitting. E v e n i n g Textile Arts form an important aspect of the cultural interviews are available. Send the following documen- life in any community and many ways exist to apply tation to the Registrar's Office, prior to M a y 1. the skills learned and build a professional career. • Completed Capilano College Application for • Admission Secondary and post-secondary transcripts Instructional Skills in Arts and Crafts teaches students who arc already experienced in their chosen crafts or arts discipline. The focus is on instructional skills, • Official copies o f English Language Assessment ( E L A ) Test or Test of English as a Foreign L a n guage ( T O E F L ) , if applicable • Questionnaires human relations, and adaptation techniques for people with special needs. A two-week practicum offers practical experience. (This program is currently undergoing some changes and will not be offered in 1998.) Transfer Credits Admission Requirements Courses marked with an asterisk (e.g. A H I S 105*) carry transferability to U B C , S F U , U V i c and other Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature academic degree-granting institutions. Other courses can be transferred to programs which include textile arts in their curriculum. student status. Students should understand that advanced standing in Prospective students are admitted on the basis of an any institution is usually based on an interview and a interview. N o previous experience in textile arts is portfolio submission, as well as credits. Please check Textile Arts Diploma Program required. Students should bring up to 20 pieces of the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College work to the interview. A n y combination of media are Transfer G u i d e or contact the Art Department for more accepted, such as textiles, painting, photographs, specific information. ceramics, drawing etc. Slides or photographs can be shown instead of actual works. Students without previous art background, but with suitable academic experience w i l l also be considered. Special Fees and Expenses Some materials needed for the courses are supplied and are covered by a supply fee. In addition, students should expect an outlay for midterm, final projects, basic supplies, and textbooks. Career/ Voca tiona i 158 Program Content Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements FIRST TERM SECOND Intro, to V i s u a l Culture I C M N S 120 Effective W r i t i n g & Speech Surface Design V I 4.5 42.0 T X T L 368 Weaving V I 4.5 18.0 A H I S 232 Textile History or Art History 3.0 60.0 T X T L 230 Professional and Business or a 100-level English course 3.0 Design I 3.0 T X T L 160 Textile Surface Design I Weaving I 10 3.0 15.0 SECOND Skills in Arts and Crafts TERM Credits TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T CO-OP P R O G R A M A. TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T CO-OP DIPLOMA PROGRAM B. BACHELOR OF TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T DEGREE A H I S 105* Intro, to V i s u a l Culture II 3.0 3.0 3.0 Instructional 3.0 D . B A S H A M , Coordinator, D M A T P 10 15.0 G. FANE, B.Sc, M.B.A., C.M.A. T X T L 178 Design II T X T L 154 Introductory Drawing I T X T L 161 Textile Surface Design II Weaving II T X T L 169 3.0 15.0 3.0 T X T L 158 T X T L 168 Credits T X T L 384 Credits A H I S 104* TERM Credits Faculty B. C A M P B E L L , G N I G . G J E R D A L E N , B . A . ( S F U ) , A C M C P (Capilano), THIRD TERM A H I S 231* Credits History o f Textile Art 3.0 M R M (SFU) W . I N G L I S , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . Marketing ( U . o f M . ) C M N S 153 Communications & the Arts 3.0 R. M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) T X T L 267 or a 100-level English Course Weaving III 3.0 J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c , Teacher's Cert. (Manitoba), Textile Surface Design III Precision D y e i n g 3.0 Tour. M g m t . Cert. (Capilano), D M A T P 3.0 H . P L U M E , C M A , D i p . Accelerated Computer T X T L 284 T X T L 290 C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Col.), M . A . ( S F U ) 15.0 Systems Management (Capilano) J. R O U S E , B . S c . ( M t . A . ) , Tour. M g m t . Cert., FOURTH TERM A H I S 232* Aspects o f Textile Art T X T L 153 T X T L 268 Introductory Drawing II Weaving I V T X T L 285 Textile Surface Design I V T X T L 230 Professional and Business Skills in Arts and Crafts Credits 3.0 (Capilano College), D M A T P , Coordinator S. S T A N G E R , B P E ( U B C ) , D i p . H u m a n Resources 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 (BCIT) B. W H I T E , B.A., M . A . (SFU), D M A T P Contact: 984-4960; Fax: 984-1761 E-mail: tourism@capcollege.bc.ca 15.0 A. A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certificate Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements FIRST TERM TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T C O - O P DIPLOMA PROGRAM Credits 24.0 6J) 30.0 Credits T X T L 384 Surface Design V 4.5 T X T L 367 Weaving V 4.5 A H I S 231 Textile History or Art History 3.0 T X T L 290 Precision D y e i n g 3.0 15.0 Capilano College's accelerated Tourism Management Co-op program is on the leading edge o f tourism education. O u r mission is to train students in the management skills necessary for the successful operation o f travel generators, including resorts, adventure tourism, attractions, conferences, and special events. Marketing, research and entrepreneurial skills in tourism business are also emphasized. Recognition o f our curriculum by the Pacific R i m Institute o f T o u r i s m provides access to industry certification. Career/Vocational 159 Intensive technical skills courses, contact with the industry, and a four and a half month supervised co-op work term encourages a professional attitude to the industry. The program's pragmatic business approach combined with creative teaching promises a rewarding Program Content TERM Credits 1 (January to April) Communications in Recreation 3.0 and T o u r i s m C M N S 154 1.5 T O U R 100 Tourism C o - o p Preparation T O U R 111 Tourism: A n Industry Perspective 3.0 Capilano College T o u r i s m Management offers top T O U R 112 Tourism Marketing 3.0 quality faculty, a beautiful campus, and an exciting T O U R 113 H u m a n Resource Management If you are actively considering a career in tourism and T O U R 131 Tourism Product Development think you have what it takes to be successful as a T O U R 139 Computer Applications in educational investment for students. learning environment. 3.0 in Tourism Ml Tourism I professional in the field, give us a call! 19.5 Total B. BACHELOR OF TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T DEGREE 3.0 TERM 2 (May to T O U R 130 September) Credits C o - o p W o r k Term 10.5 Total A Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management degree is offered through the Open University in collaboration with TERM 3 (September Capilano C o l l e g e . The intent of the degree is to provide T O U R 116 Financial Planning in T o u r i s m I T O U R 118 Special Events as T o u r i s m the most up-to-date knowledge, innovations, technologies, and management techniques for administrators to December) Credits 3.0 3.0 Generators and entrepreneurs in the tourism industry. The degree T O U R 120 Adventure and E c o - T o u r i s m 3.0 requirements include core business and tourism T O U R 123 Tourism Advertising 3.0 foundation courses, general education requirements, T O U R 127 Tourism Resource and C o m m u n i t y T O U R 239 3.0 Planning Advanced Computer Applications in 3^0 Tourism specified and elective courses at the upper level, and a number of defined elective credits. The academic credentials earned in the Tourism Management C o - o p Diploma satisfy most core business and tourism 18.0 Total foundation courses, and elective requirements. Subject to approval from the Open University, Capilano College w i l l be offering all the necessary courses to Term 4 (January to March) Organizational Behaviour in Credits T O U R 114 earn an Open University Bachelor of Tourism Manageplease contact Capilano College at (604) 984-4960 or T O U R 125 T O U R 231 3.0 Tourism Financial Planning in T o u r i s m II 3.0 Tourism Research and Consultancy 3.0 fax (604) 984-1761. T O U R 232 International Tourism T O U R 233 Policy and Planning Cross Cultural Tourism ment Degree. F o r a detailed brochure about the degree, Admission Requirements for the Diploma 3.0 M Total 15.0 Program Total 63.0 In order to be considered, applicants should have sound reading and writing skills, and ideally some tourism industry work experience. Pievious post-secondary education is a definite asset. Call the Tourism Department in August or September for dates of the information meetings and follow-up interviews. Interview Procedure Please bring the following documentation to your interview. • A t least two letters o f reference • H i g h school or post-secondary education transcripts • A resume of past experiences Career/Vocational 160 ART INSTITUTE 3. Proposal — an outline of the anticipated directions of work. This should be as specific as possible. The A r t Institute, specializing in Sculpture and Submissions should be addressed to: Printmaking, is a one-year, post-graduate certificate The A r t Department program unique in the college system. Comparable to Capilano College artist-in-residence programs, the Institute offers 2055 Purcell W a y advanced studies to artists with several years experi- North Vancouver, B . C . ence in sculpture or printmaking, or to recent college, V7J 3H5 university or art school graduates. T e l . 984-4911 Members o f the Institute have access to well-equipped studios and specialized equipment, plus auxiliary Fees facilities such as a darkroom, computer lab and media The 1997/98 tuition fees for the A r t Institute were $678 centre. Supplies and materials are available at cost. per term. There are two terms per year. Lectures, seminars and tutorials feature guest artists Although the normal shop supplies are provided, and faculty who are professionals in their fields. With students can anticipate charges for materials directly the permission of the instructor, and at no additional cost, members may also pursue individual research beyond the one-year certificate. A major component of the Institute experience is the involved with the production of work. Advanced Options Courses A R T . 300 — interchange among the participants, which may include critiques, encouragement of work in progress, or A r t Institute I - Sculpture and Printmaking A R T . 301 — A r t Institute II - Sculpture and Printmaking exposure to new materials. A l o n g with providing the artist with studio space, the Institute offers the expertise o f special speakers and workshop experiences. The atmosphere is stimulating and supportive of the individual's aesthetic development. Contact: Art Department, 984-1911 ASIA PACIFIC M A N A G E M E N T COOPERATIVE P R O G R A M Instructional Admission Requirements Completion of art school diploma or B F A studies are required to enter this program. Exceptional students with equivalent work experience may be accepted at the discretion o f the instructors. Note that it is not Faculty N i g e l A M O N , B . A . (Kent), M . A . ( S F U ) Robert B A G S H A W , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Colorado), Program Development A n d r e w B U T T , B . A . , L L . B . (South Africa), International Business absolutely necessary to be specifically proficient in the B a w n C A M P B E L L , C N I (Seneca), Computer Systems chosen area of study. Parallel experience would be James C A S W E L L , B . A . , M . A . P h . D . ( U . o f M i c h i g a n ) , considered, i.e. painting to printmaking. Enquiries and applications arc accepted at any time throughout the year, although the normal registration periods are M a y and December for the first and second terms, respectively. Phone 984-4911 by the end o f A p r i l for an interview in early M a y . Art History Tuyet C O L L A C O T T , B . A . ( U . o f Ottawa), Vietnamese Zhiai F U , B . A . (Beijing Language Institute), Chinese Charles G R E E N B E R G , B . A . , M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . (UBC) Barbara H A N K I N , B . A . ( U . B . C ) . M . A . ( W A S H . ) , Directed Studies, Language Convenor Submissions 1. Resume — to include pertinent travel and other life experiences. 2. Portfolio — original works where possible; however, slides, photographs or other printed material w i l l be acceptable. Where appropriate, and with the coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirement may be waived. Tincke H E L L W I G , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . Indonesian Literature (Leiden U . ) , Indonesian B i l l I N G L I S , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . Marketing (Montreal), Marketing Francis K I E M , B . B . A . , P h . D . E d . (Jakarta), Indonesian Language Scott M a c L E O D , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) , E c o n o m i c Geography, Program Coordinator Louise M A Y , B . A . (Brock), M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) , A s i a Pacific Perspectives Post-graduate Programs 163 L l o y d M I C H A E L S , B . S c , B.Ed., M . E d . (U of A ) , 12 months in duration. Students w i l l be evaluated by the College and the employer, and this w i l l become Personal Presentations Terry M I L L S , C I T T , B . G . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) , Trade Logistics part o f the student's permanent record. During their 12-month internship in A s i a , associates N o r i k o O M A E , B . A . , M . A . , Teaching Cert., (Osaka U . of Foreign Studies), Japanese Language T o m P E T E R S E N , B . A . ( A U , Washington, D C ) , M B A (Monterey Inst, o f Int'l Studies), Business Convenor Jim P L A C Z E K , B.A.(Windsor), M . A . ( U B C ) , Ph.D ( U B C ) Thai Language Pontip P L A C Z E K , B . A . (Thammasat), Thai Language Charles P R I E S T E R , F C B A B . C o m m . , M . A . ( U B C ) , International Finance Yanfeng Q U , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . are expected to carry out credit course work while in the field. This work w i l l equate to 12 credits (approx. four courses) per year. It w i l l involve submitting required reports, electronic work with faculty, and meetings such as the mid-term conference. Every effort w i l l be made to secure co-op internships for students. Jobs w i l l be sought in A s i a n countries and in international Canadian organizations. The work term w i l l finish with debriefing and re-entry sessions. (Beijing Foreign Studies U . ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) , Chinese Career targets of the current class include areas such as Language Finance, Marketing, Trade, T o u r i s m , Communications, Y a y o i S H I N B O , Associate Arts (Obirin T a n k i Human Resources, Development, Journalism, Urban L a n d Development, Government and Non-Government Daigaku), Japanese Language Cameron S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (NotreDame), Political Economy organizations. Inquiries for application/information packages should Anne W A T S O N , B . A . ( U . of Calgary), M . B . A . ( A P I U , New Zealand), Marketing be directed to the A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative Program office, telephone 984-4981, fax 984- R o r y W E L L I N G S , B . A . S c , M B A , P.Eng., 4992. Management Karen Y I P , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) , Legal Systems Admission Requirements Applications for the program are invited from: General Information a) Those who have completed a degree/degrees in This D i p l o m a program has been developed to offer Arts, Sciences or a professional area such as B u s i - training to Canadians who are considering careers i n ness Administration, L a w , Engineering, B i o t e c h n o l - A s i a . It is a joint-venture in educational programming, ogy, Forestry, or Computer Applications. bringing employers together with students and the College to form a unique blend of experiential and academic training. The emphasis is on Canada's relationships with A s i a n countries and the potential to extend our linkages through trade, business, applied technology and development projects. Contact: Scott MacLeod, E-mail: 984-4981; Fax: 984-4992 smacleod@capcollege.be.ca OR b) Those who are currently employed and who are eligible for company sponsorship into the program. Sponsorship may come from a wide range o f business and development organizations which have the common factor of wanting their employees trained for international work. • A d m i s s i o n maximum is 32 students per year. • Students are selected on the basis o f their academic record, relevant work and A s i a n experience, a The Program Students who are interested in a career in the A s i a written submission and an interview. • Pacific region w i l l follow an integrated program of study. skills. • Each student w i l l take the core courses in A s i a n Applicants who demonstrate proficiency in language acquisition and who have solid business experience Studies and International Business, Trade and Finance. In addition, students w i l l choose an A s i a n language Successful applicants w i l l have strong written, mathematical and interpersonal communication w i l l have preference. • Applications for A d m i s s i o n , together with offical such as Japanese, Chinese (Mandarin), Indonesian, transcripts for all post-secondary education, must be Vietnamese or Thai. submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. After nine months o f study, eligible students w i l l complete a work internship. This co-op work term is Post-graduate Programs 164 Courses A P M C 503 — International Career Management A P M C 505 — Co-op W o r k Term A P M C 515 — Directed Studies A P M C 518 — International Finance I ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE PROGRAM E N V I R O N M E N T A L SCIENCE POSTBACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA A P M C 519 — Introduction to Business and Trade Inquiries for admission and further information should A P M C 520 — Economic Geography I be directed to the Environmental Science program, A P M C 524 — Business Development Projects A P M C 525 — International Management I A P M C 531 — International Finance II A P M C 532 — Economic Geography II Pure and Applied Sciences D i v i s i o n , 983-7562. Instructional Faculty D . P . B E R N A R D , B . S c . ( U . Alberta), M . S c . ( U B C ) J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo) A P M C 533 — International Business and Trade A . D U F F Y , B . A . (Hons.) (Guelph), M . C . S . (Calgary) A P M C 534 — International Management II S. G R O V E S , A . B . (Radcliffc), P h . D . ( U B C ) , A P M C 540 — A s i a Pacific Perspectives I Coordinator of Environmental Science L. H . N I K L , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) A P M C 541 — A s i a Pacific Perspectives 11 J. H . N O R I E , B . A . S c . ( U B C ) , M . E n v . D c s . (Calgary) A P M C 550 — Cross Cultural Communication R. K . P A I S L E Y , B . S c . ( U B C ) , M . S c . (Washington), A P M C 560 — Workshops C H I N 102 — Introduction to Chinese I C H I N 103 — Introduction to Chinese II C H I N 202 — Introduction to Chinese III C H I N 203 — Introduction to Chinese I V I N D O 102 — Introduction to Indonesian I I N D O 103 — Introduction to Indonesian II J A P N 102 — Introduction to Japanese I J A P N 103 — Introduction to Japanese 11 J A P N 202 — Introduction to Japanese III J A P N 203 — Introduction to Japanese I V T H A I 102 — Introduction to Thai I T H A I 103 — Introduction to Thai II V I E T 102 — Introduction to Vietnamese I V I E T 103 — Introduction to Vietnamese 11 J.D. (California), L L . M . (London School o f Economics) C. T. R E A R D O N , B . A . , L . L . D . (Dalhousie), M . A . (Queen's), M . A . (M.I.T.) A . R O J A S , M . A . , Ph.D. (York) G . S E A G E L , B . S c . ( U . London), M . S c . ( U . Alberta) D. F. S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c , Ph.D. ( U B C ) V . M . T R O U P , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c M a s t e r ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , Coordinator o f Environmental Science A . W H I T E H E A D , B.Sc. ( U V i c ) , M.Sc. ( U B C ) S. W 1 L K I N S , B . A . , M . S c . ( M c M a s t e r ) Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians J. R I C H A R D S O N , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , M . S c . (UBC), R . P . B i o . , Laboratory Supervisor J. T H O M P S O N , Laboratory Technician S. Y E E , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor General Information The Diploma program in Environmental Science is intended for students who have already completed a degree in science and who wish to acquire the k n o w l edge and practical skills necessary for dealing with environmental issues and projects in the workplace. This is a full-year program designed to prepare students to accept leadership roles in environmental problem solving through a combination o f academic studies and field assignments. Areas of emphasis include applied ecology, toxicology, project management, environmental assessment, law, and ethics. Completion o f an in-depth assignment involving work placement or directed studies is also required. Post-graduate Programs 165 Admission Requirements The normal requirement for admission is a degree in a science or engineering discipline. Successful applicants w i l l have strong written and interpersonal communication skills and w i l l be selected on the basis o f academic record, relevant experience and a personal interview. The m a x i m u m enrolment is 26 students per year. T o apply for the program, students must submit two application forms: (1) a general College admission form (see " ' A d m i s s i o n " section in this calendar), and (2) Environmental Science program application form. Forms are available through the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n or the Registrar's Office. These applications, together with the official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by the Registrar's Office by M a r c h 31. Program Content Credits FALL TERM Applied Ecology Environmental Ethics 4.5 3 E N S C 507 Environmental L a w Computer Applications in E N S C E N S C 508 Seminar: Selected Topics in E N S C 500 E N S C 502 E N S C 503 ENSC I SPRING T E R M Environmental Toxicology & E N S C 501 3 3 3 16.5 Credits E N S C 504 4.5 Waste Management Environmental Planning & Project 3 Management E N S C 505 Environmental Impact E N S C 506 3 Assessment Land Use Impact & Sustainability 3 E N S C 509 Seminar: Selected Topics in E N S C II 3 16.5 SUMMER TERM Field School ( M a y ) E N S C 510 E N S C 511 Practicum / C o - o p Credits 4.5 4J> 9 Post-graduate Programs 166 modern languages. Educational study/travel tours are CONTINUING EDUCATION A N D CONTRACT SERVICES also available through Continuing Education. Continuing Education courses are not listed in the College Calendar — they are advertised in seasonal C o n t a c t : 984-4901, fax: 983:7545 (Lower Mainland) 892-5322, fax: 892-9274 (Howe Sound) calendars distributed throughout the community, and by direct mail. 885-9310, fax: 885-9350 (Sunshine Coast) Program Consultants L . Baker, B . A . ( U B C ) : L L . B . ( U B C ) ; Prof. Teaching Cert. ( S F U ) ; Coordinator, general programs J. Bennett, B . A . ( S F U ) ; general programs and Contract Services, Sechelt campus J. B c r e z o w s k y , B . A . ( U A ) ; general programs and Contract Services, Squamish campus Community Music School The Capilano College C o m m u n i t y M u s i c School offers group instruction for students o f voice, theory, and a wide variety o f instruments. Group music instruction for children includes: Robert Pace G r o u p Piano; Strings for Children; and K o d a l y - O r f f classes. The Community M u s i c School also offers a C o m m u n i t y C. Dorin, B . A . (UVic); B S W (UBC); M S W (UBC); Choir, a W o m e n ' s C h o i r — " C e c i l i a Ensemble," and Special Education Teacher Assistant Program vocal instruction classes. Adult instruction on instruments includes piano, v i o l i n , guitar and others. Classes (SETA) G . Hofmann, B . E d . ( U B C ) , Cert. T E S L / T F S L (Laval are held o n campus and in other community locations. U n i v . ) , M . A . ( S O A S , U n i v . London), Prof. Programs are advertised in the local media each M a y Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) ; International Programs and listed in the Continuing Education calendar L . Jest, M . E d . ( S F U ) ; Director o f Continuing published three times yearly. Education and Contract Services K . L i n d . B . A . (Mus) ( U B C ) ; Community M u s i c School R. M o r r i s , M . A . ( U B C ) F i l m and Television Studies N . N o w l a n , B . A . (Queen's U n i v . ) ; M . A . ( U B C ) ; M . E d . Continuing Education Fee Policies Fees ( U B C ) ; Coordinator Contract Services, L o w e r Continuing Education course fees vary from the Mainland standard tuition fee and are outlined in Continuing C. R u d y , B . A . ( U B C ) ; instructor, Career Development Education calendars and brochures. Programs R. Stec, B . A . ( U V i c ) ; M . A . ( U V i c ) ; Eldercollege, Refunds International Programs, general programs Refunds w i l l be given in full for courses/programs/ Support Staff J. C o x , P. Esplen, Reception W . Dansie, G . M i t c h e l l , D . Rentz, B . Soeder, C . Tang, workshops cancelled by the College. • Application for withdrawal/refund w i l l not be accepted after the second session o f a course. F o r workshops o f short duration (up to three consecutive Program Assistants L . M u l h o l l a n d , Publicist days) withdrawal applications must be received at least one working day before the workshop c o m - Continuing Education mences. The College offers a variety o f continuing education • courses and programs. There are no prerequisites for • admission. Refunds will not be given, under any circumstances, after the end o f a course, program, or workshop. admission to non-credit courses but occasionally a certain level o f proficiency is recommended for Refunds arc subject to a $20 administration charge. • A n y change from the foregoing policy w i l l be clearly stated in the course or workshop description. For further information, telephone 984-4901. The majority o f continuing education offerings are an outgrowth o f the C o l l e g e ' s academic and career/ vocational programs whose faculties contribute to the Natural History Educational Travel high level o f instructional competence o f the programs. This program offers a wide variety o f travel and study Courses and programs are drawn from the areas of arts, opportunities ranging from island-hopping in the music, film and television studies, social sciences, Galapagos to bird-watching in the alpine meadows o f natural sciences, career development, business, compu- Blackcomb Mountain. Tours vary from year to year, ter science, personal development, fashion, media, and but may include a week-long trip to Canada's oldest Continuing Education and Contract Services 169 bird sanctuary, Last Mountain Lake B i r d Sanctuary in members to maintain a high quality offering at a Saskatchewan; a natural history tour o f Zimbabwe and m i n i m u m cost. Madagascar: or the rainforests and coral reefs o f Belize. W e also offer Summer Workshops in France in Film and Television Studies painting and drawing, and French language study. Closer to home, participants may choose from a G u l f Continuing Education offers a variety o f evening and Islands birding cruise, a bald eagle float trip on the weekend courses in F i l m and Television Studies, some Cheakamus R i v e r or a wetlands ecology canoe excur- of which may be applied to a Certificate in F i l m and sion, to name a few. F i n a l l y , courses such as nature Television. Developed specifically to meet the indus- photography w i l l help to improve your photo-taking try's training needs, the program focuses o n three areas techniques before you see that rare flower, bird or identified through consultation with unions, profes- animal. sional organizations and College faculty: • introductory seminars that offer a source o f accessible and reliable information for those considering a Certified Financial Planner™ Program future in the film and television industry; T o d a y ' s financial services workers are finding that • professional qualifications are essential, and Capilnao a certificate program that provides the necessary skills and knowledge for entry-level employment in College in North Vancouver has responded by offering film and television, combining a broad-based quality training with their new Certified Financial overview o f the industry with studies in production, Planner Program ( C F P ) . directing, acting, cinematography, screenwriting and other areas o f interest; Developed by the Canadian Institute o f Financial • Planning ( C I F P ) specifically for individuals who wish a series o f upgrading workshops for industry professionals. to become qualified professional financial planners, the C F P program covers the full spectrum o f financial Courses at Capilano College emphasize a "hands-on" products, services and strategies. It is offered at approach to the skills needed to succeed in the techni- Capilano College o n the institute's behalf, with the cal and creative areas o f f i l m , television, video and approval o f The Financial Planners Standards C o u n c i l commercial production. W o r k i n g professionals from of Canada. After completing the program, students the industry teach all courses and workshops. with two years' work experience can write the professional proficiency examination in order to receive the Special Education Teacher Assistant (SETA) C F P ™ certification mark. Capilano College is the latest addition to a network o f colleges across Canada offering C I F P ' s full program o f courses. W h i l e it's also available via distance education. Capilano College is the first L o w e r M a i n l a n d institution to offer the recently revised courses in a college setting. Eldercollege The S E T A program prepares students for a variety of para-professional duties in schools by providing courses in theoretical studies and practical applications for working with children and young adults who need extra support. The Continuing Education department offers individual courses for professional development, as well as a certificate program. The program is designed for individuals who are Eldercollege is a year-round educational community, currently working in special education, as a personal open to men and women, 55 and older. care attendant, or in family day care who w i s h profes- Eldercollege provides learning opportunities for older sional upgrading, and for those who are preparing adults who wish to enrich their lifestyle through self- themselves to work as a S E T A . A n admission inter- directed education and contribute to the social and view with program faculty is required. cultural development o f the community. Eldercollege Courses in the S E T A program are offered through part- participants design and offer quality educational time study in the evening and on weekends. activities to stimulate interest in learning and to provide a forum for sharing ideas and knowledge with others. Members can lead study groups, serve on the A d v i s o r y Board and its committees, and be study group participants. Activities are both planned and operated by Contract Services Contract Services provides career development and training opportunities for organizations, businesses and individuals using the wide range and high level o f educational resources available through Capilano Continuing Education and Contract Services 170 College. T h i s is flexible and cost-effective training provided by knowledgeable instructors in a classroom, conference room or computer lab on campus, or in the workplace. A training consultant w i l l assist with program development including: needs assessment, training design, materials, costing, and evaluation. C A N A S E A N M a n a g e r Program CANASEAN is another unique program at the C o l l e g e , specifically designed to meet the needs o f business men and women in Canada and countries forming part of the Association o f South East A s i a n Nations ( A S E A N ) plus China, Cambodia, and South A m e r i c a Training is available in a wide variety o f subject areas (Columbia), and M e x i c o . Begun in the mid-1980s as a such as: computers; business management and commu- short seminar/workshop scries, it now has become a nication; retail, tourism and customer service; media 14-week program with 10 weeks in Canada. In the technology; E S L ; plus WorkSafe, FoodSafe and W C B F a l l , CANASEAN Occupational First A i d ; and as requested. training on campus and with local enterprises o n Career Development programs offer services in areas such as vocational assessment and career transition. managers take part in intensive business and culture, plus a period o f learning how Canadian businesses work and how business can be developed between Canada, A s i a , South A m e r i c a and International Programs provides training for Canadians Central A m e r i c a . and international students. Programs are available for Canadians to learn cross-cultural communication skills This project is wholly funded by ministries o f the and prepare for overseas placement. International federal and provincial governments. Interested appli- students may enrol in programs that offer short-term cants should contact the CANASEAN program Director. E S L and Canadian culture homestay, or E S L combined with career skills training in professional areas such as Contact: Edwin Wong, program business administration, computers, tourism, and E-Mail: director ewong@capcollege.bc.ca others. Various employment training and other programs funded through the provincial and federal government may also be developed and administered through this office. Contract Services works in partnership with other faculties, colleges and community organizations to jointly develop and deliver high-quality training and career development opportunities for the community. Custom-Designed Programs F r o m time to time, the College offers specific programs designed to meet the needs o f particular groups, industries, governments or agencies. In recent years, these included programs in international tourism management, English language culture, the Chinese Summer School and small business entrepreneurship. Educational Partnerships Other International Courses Organizations and societies are encouraged to co- A number o f individual programs offered in the sponsor their educational activities with Capilano University Transfer and Career/Vocational divisions College. have specific courses providing international content. The College can provide facilities, program design and administrative services and welcomes the Some o f them are optional, while others arc an integral opportunity to foster public understanding on social, part o f the curriculum leading to a college degree, business, artistic and technological issues. diploma or certificate. Examples o f these w i l l be found International Projects and Initiatives Management, B i o l o g y , Geography, History, Political in the relevant sections o f this Calendar in Business W i t h a particular focus on Pacific R i m endeavours, Studies and Sociology. Capilano College has been and continues to be in- The Languages Department currently schedules first- volved in development and training activities in year university level courses in French, German, and M a l a y s i a , the Philippines, Thailand, Japan, Indonesia, Spanish as well as first year level in Japanese, Manda- Vietnam and the People's Republic o f China. Current rin, Chinese and Thai. English as a Second Language examples include curriculum development at a univer- courses provide foreign and new immigrant students a sity in V i e t n a m , small business management training variety o f intermediate and advanced courses to help for Indonesian managers, and a business linkage improve competency in English for work, daily life, project in Thailand. and post-secondary study. English language training is also offered in the summer; these home-stay programs are designed for groups only. Continuing Education and Contract Services 171 Course Descriptions ACTP 002 (3) (F) Occupational Preparation a n d Safety in the Workplace C o u r s e D e s c r i p t i o n C o d e : O n the right hand side The focus o f this course is to provide students with of each course description there is a series o f code practical experience in a work situation including letters and numbers, for example: preparation prior to placement and follow-up concluding the practicum. Emphasis w i l l be placed on making BIOL 105 Environmental Biology (3) (4,3.0) (S) students aware o f and knowledgeable about W H M I S , W C B rules and occupational health and safety. E a c h course is designated by the department name and course number (e.g. B I O L 105). The number in parentheses following the course designation— ACTP 005 (3) Visual a n d Print C o m m u n i c a t i o n Skills (F) i.e. (3) in the above example—indicates the The focus of this course is to extend students' aware- number o f credits for the course. ness, knowledge and understanding of communication The second set in parentheses includes the lecture, lab and other hours for the course. F o r B I O L 105, for example, there w i l l be 4 lecture hours, 3 lab skills required for obtaining employment and to improve their ability to communicate effectively using a variety of media (eg. computer, printed words, signs). Class time is comprised o f discussions, talks, hours, and no other hours per week. worksheets, field trips, role-plays and hands-on In some courses the department may convert the experience. Students w i l l be given instruction in fourth lecture hour to another scheduled instructional activity. Where this occurs, students w i l l be advised by the course instructor and in the course outline given out at the beginning o f the term. The third set of parentheses indicates the term in computer skills. Students w i l l be given opportunities to prepare resumes, cover letters and thank-you letters using the Microsoft W o r d software program. ACTP 006 Leisure Education which the class is usually offered. Example: F — F a l l , S — S p r i n g , Su—Summer. B I O L 105 is (3) (F) To assist students to clarify their leisure interests and offered in the Spring term. Please check the Timetable to confirm the term offered as this may values and use their leisure time more constructively. change after the Calendar is printed. The course Students w i l l be encouraged to become more aware of title (Environmental B i o l o g y ) is indicated on the their o w n feelings and beliefs about leisure so that line below the department name and course future leisure decisions w i l l be by their o w n choice and number. from their o w n value system. Emphasis w i l l be placed The nominal length of a term is 16 weeks. Please see the A c a d e m i c Schedule for the first and last days o f classes and for the dates o f the examination on project work within the community. ACTP 007 Consumer Preparation (F) (3) period. This course provides students with strategies and opportunities to practice and improve a range of consumer related skills. F i e l d trips are incorporated in ACTP 001 (3) Job Search a n d M a i n t e n a n c e Techniques (F) The focus o f this course is to encourage students' needs the program. ACTP 008 (3) Interpersonal C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F) to develop and use job search techniques and appropriate employment behaviours. Students w i l l also be encouraged to practice self-advocacy in terms o f their employment needs. A n emphasis w i l l be placed on developing interview skills with confidence. This course provides students with an opportunity to discuss and develop the skills involved with effectively communicating in a diverse range of interpersonal roles and relationships (friend, neighbour, consumer, citizen). Course Descriptions 175 ACTP 009 W o r k Experience (6) (F) art, the artist as observer, the landscape in art and aspects o f photography. The material w i l l include the To give the student a practical experience in a work art o f the past as well as the current art scene. Consid- situation including preparation prior to placement and eration w i l l also be given to the achievements o f Canadian artists. This course is designed to help follow-up concluding the practicum. students decode their visual world and become visually AHIS 100 The History of A r t I (3) (4.0,0,) (F) This course studies the history o f art beginning with the pyramids of Egypt and concluding with the Gothic literate. AHIS 106 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Pre-Columbian, African a n d N o r t h w e s t Coast Indigenous A r t Cathedrals and Italian fresco paintings o f the High M i d d l e Ages in Europe. A n understanding and This course introduces the student to aspects o f Pre- appreciation of art are the aims o f the course, and C o l u m b i a n art, Northwest Coast Indian art and African through lectures and class discussions, students w i l l art. The art, architecture and performing arts o f indig- develop an "eye" for seeing and appropriate terms to enous peoples w i l l be examined in the context o f describe the works shown. Our involvement with the cultural, religious and social issues. Students w i l l learn art of the past clearly reveals how changing styles in about civilizations that flourished in M e x i c o prior to architecture, painting, and sculpture are influenced by the Spanish Conquest. A section on the art o f the the historical context and the political, social, and Northwest Coast Indian w i l l illuminate the achieve- religious thought of each period. ments of local indigenous cultures and their inherent relationship with the environment. In the component on AHIS 101 The History of A r t II (3) (4,0,0) (S) African art, students w i l l study the early history o f African art and later artistic developments in a variety of regions ranging from Senegal to Zaire. Beginning with the art of the Italian Renaissance, this course studies the history of painting, sculpture, and architecture to the present day. Individual artists AHIS 107 (3) The A r t of India, China and Japan (4,0,0) (S) including Leonardo, Michelangelo, Rembrandt, G o y a , V a n G o g h and Picasso are studied in addition to the larger period styles. Because works o f art so perfectly reflect their age, the economic, social, and religious ideas of each period w i l l be closely considered. AHIS 104 (3) Introduction t o Visual Culture I (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed to encourage students to become visually literate and confident in the analysis/ interpretation o f all aspects o f the visual atts. Confrontation with a wide range of ideas, images and media Explore exotic Indian temples, ancient Chinese burials and Japanese shrines in this introductory course to A s i a n art. Indian, Chinese and Japanese works of art w i l l be examined in the light of cultural, religious, social and political issues to emphasize the close connections between art and society. In particular, the impact of H i n d u i s m , Buddhism and Confucianism on the arts w i l l be examined. Students w i l l gain insights into the evolution o f important periods, styles and artistic traditions in A s i a n art. Consideration w i l l be given to a wide range of art forms, including the performing arts and the Japanese tea ceremony. w i l l stimulate discussion and provide a deeper understanding o f the creative process. The purposes of art will be discussed and the relationships between art and AHIS 109 (3) W o m e n , A r t and A r t History (4,0,0) society explored. The interdisciplinary nature of art will be examined as well as the achievements of This course w i l l present a broad historical survey o f women's involvement in Western art. It w i l l focus on Canadian artists. the woman artist in society and consider the social, AHIS 105 (3) Introduction t o Visual Culture II (4,0,0) (S) What is the impact o f advertising on the viewer? What are the achievements of women artists? What are the current issues concerning art and censorship? These and other topical subjects relating to the arts w i l l be addressed in this course. Attention w i l l also be given to such themes as magic and ritual in art, the nude in Course Descriptions 176 cultural and economic background o f each period in order to understand the conditions under w h i c h women artists have worked from Antiquity to the 20th century. The course w i l l also investigate the "image o f w o m a n " in the tradition o f art history. Students taking this course cannot receive duplicate credit for W M S T 130. AHIS 210 (3) (4,0,0) (F) History of M o d e r n A r t (19th Century) T h i s course studies the mainstreams of modern art beginning with the paintings of Jacques L o u i s D a v i d produced during the French Revolution and concluding with the art of Cezanne. Emphasis is given to individual artists, and works by G o y a , Delacroix, Monet, V a n G o g h , Gauguin and others are studied in depth. Aesthetic revolutions and counter-revolutions arc explored in conjunction with the social and political linen manufactories, and the silk guilds of the B y z a n tine Empire, as well as tracing the influence o f Sassanian designs. Cotton and the central role it played in the struggle for Indian independence is highlighted as we move further east to consider the evolution o f the Dragon Robes o f C h i n a and the kimonos o f Japan. This study concludes with textile designs and tapestries produced in Medieval and Renaissance Europe where the important contributions o f such leading artists as Raphael and Rubens are fully considered. upheavals of the 19th century. AHIS 211 (3) (4,0,0) (S) History of M o d e r n A r t (20th Century) This history o f 20th century art begins with the work o f Picasso and Matisse and studies the impact of revolu- AHIS 232 Aspects of Textile A r t (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course first explores the textile traditions o f Africa and the Americas. The textiles of the K u b a o f Zaire, Ancient Andean cloth and Contemporary M a y a n textile designs are examined as important artistic tionary movements of art such as Futurism, Constructivism, Dada, and Surrealism. A m e r i c a ' s post war contribution— Abstract Expressionism, Pop, M i n i m a l i s m , Conceptual and Earth A r t — i s studied, leading to a full discussion o f Post M o d e r n i s m and the art o f the 90's. The aim o f this course is to demystify modern art by studying the underlying concepts and theories, which w i l l reveal how closely art expresses expressions of these cultures. Navaho weaving and the great tradition of the Chilkat Dancing Blanket o f the Pacific Northwest are studied as examples of cross cultural expressions. Our attention then focuses on the effects of the Industrial Revolution on textile practices and the contributions of W i l l i a m Morris and the Arts and Crafts Movement. The course concludes with a discussion of 20th century textiles and explores the the ethos of contemporary life. work of some of the leading contemporary textile AHIS 220 (3) Early Renaissance A r t in Italy (4,0,0) (F) This course traces the origins of the Early Renaissance artists. A N I M 111 Animation Drawing I (6) (8,0,0) (F) in Italy, beginning with the art o f Giotto and focusing attention on the creators of the new style, the architects, sculptors and painters of Florence, A r e z z o , Mantua and V e n i c e . The intellectual, religious and political climate of the fifteenth century, linked to the expression in this new art, w i l l also be considered, as w i l l be the emerging importance of private patronage. AHIS 221 (3) (4,0,0) (S) High Renaissance and Mannerist A r t in Italy This course studies the art o f the H i g h Renaissance and the emerging view of the artist as sovereign genius. The work of Leonardo, Michelangelo and Raphael is examined in depth. Focus is then given to the artists of the Mannerist School, whose highly subjective and A n introduction to creating animated movement. Basic animation timing skills, animation principles and procedures used to produce character animation w i l l be introduced. A N I M 112 A n i m a t i o n Design I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) Students w i l l learn design skills as they relate to commercial animation. Strong posing, drawing "on model", and character design w i l l be introduced. Perspective drawing w i l l be reviewed. A N I M 113 (3) Life D r a w i n g For A n i m a t i o n I (4,0,0) (F) artificial style dominates the latter part of the 16th This course w i l l demonstrate the importance o f life century. The contributions o f the Venetians as well as drawing in the creation of animated movement. the architecture of Palladio w i l l also be considered. Students w i l l learn to accurately draw what they see. H u m a n proportions and the human form in action w i l l AHIS 231 History of Textile A r t (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course first studies the textile traditions o f the Near East by considering Ancient Egypt and its great be studied. Quick gesture drawing w i l l be practised intensively to build on the student's ability to create simple line drawings that communicate weight, structure and feeling. Course Descriptions 177 A N I M 114 (2.25) History of Character A n i m a t i o n (3,0,0) (F) A N I M 232 S t o r y b o a r d Design (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l cover the development of character Students w i l l be taught to create storyboards that animation from Winsor M c C a y to the present. Empha- communicate film narratives effectively. In this class, sis w i l l be on the Disney, Fleischer, Warner Brothers, students w i l l be expected to design animation se- M G M and U . P . A . studios o f the I93()'s and 40's and quences to be produced in the fourth term, eventually w i l l include major developments and the work o f becoming a major part of their demo tape. important directors. Current trends in animation w i l l be A N I M 233 (3) Life D r a w i n g For A n i m a t i o n III discussed. A N I M 121 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g II (6) (8,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F) Students w i l l continue to improve their life drawing skills while working primarily with sequential studies. Students w i l l learn how to animate more complex The ability to accurately depict emotion and mood, movement o f more diverse characters. Animation particularly o f the face, eyes and hands w i l l be the timing is emphasized. Special effects animation w i l l be main objective o f this course. Practise in the use of taught. A c t i n g in animation and animating to prere- foreshortening and tone w i l l be included. corded dialogue w i l l be introduced. A N I M 122 A n i m a t i o n Design II (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A N I M 234 Computer Animation (3) (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l be introduced to computer generated Students w i l l gain more practical experience in the animation. The students w i l l use traditional animation posing of animation and w i l l work with a wider range and design skills acquired in the first two terms o f the of characters. Bringing out the character's emotions program to create quality computer animation using 3- w i l l be practised. In this course, the student w i l l learn D software. This course w i l l provide students with a to create a full design package for an animated produc- strong foundation o f computer animation skills ena- tion. bling them, if they wish, to begin to focus on a career in computer animation. A N I M 123 (3) Life D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n II (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l build on the skills learned in A N I M 113 and they w i l l increase their ability to accurately render the human form in movement. Structure and anatomy of humans w i l l be emphasized. A n i m a l anatomy and movement w i l l be studied. A N I M 126 Layout Design I (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A N I M 236 Layout Design II (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l further develop the student's layout design skills, enabling them to produce finished animation layouts o f high quality. Technical skills concerning camera moves w i l l be included and students w i l l work to industry standards. Actual layout tests from major animation studios w i l l be part o f the curriculum. Students w i l l be introduced to the skills of animation its functions w i l l be demonstrated. Design and compo- A N I M 241 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g IV sition skills w i l l be introduced and perspective drawing This course w i l l focus on the production o f students' w i l l be developed further in order to produce complex demo tapes meant to showcase their animation skills. and detailed layouts. Students w i l l be focused on "feature-quality" key background design. The animation camera stand and (3) (4,0,0) (S) animation i n v o l v i n g a variety of characters and A N I M 231 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g III (3) (4,0,0) (F) actions. Character and personality in animation w i l l be emphasized. Animating characters that act is the focus of this course. Dialogue breakdown and animating to dialogue w i l l continue to be emphasized. Animation involving A N I M 242 M a j o r Projects (3) (4,0,0) (S) several characters in the same scene w i l l be covered In this course, students w i l l be allowed to concentrate and students w i l l work with more complex and realis- their efforts on a specific career such as layout artist, tic character designs. computer animator, character designer or key animator. Course Descriptions 178 W o r k i n g one-on-onc with an instructor, students w i l l cultural evolution o f humankind as indicated through a design and produce their own projects in order to study o f evolutionary theory, primate behaviour, achieve success in their specific fields in the industry. skeletal remains, and archaeological discoveries. A N I M 243 (3) Life D r a w i n g For A n i m a t i o n IV A N T H 200 (3) Intermediate Social A n t h r o p o l o g y (4,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F) Movement and sequential drawing studies w i l l be A study o f the social structure and organization o f emphasized. The main objective o f this course w i l l be various cultures o f the world. Emphasis on the dynam- to make use o f the skills and techniques learned in ics o f culture, the cross-cultural approach, the theoreti- previous life drawing classes to create a diverse range cal issues in Anthropology. of excellent portfolio pieces tailored to the expecta- A N T H 202 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) A n t h r o p o l o g y a n d the Environment tions o f the animation industry. A N I M 244 A n i m a t i o n Practicum (3) (4,0,0) (S) The study o f the interaction o f people, culture and environments, emphasizing human adaptive strategies. Students achieving a specific grade point average or Focus o f the course w i l l vary each semester, exploring higher w i l l be allowed to participate in a two-week such topics as subsistence patterns, systems o f knowl- practicum experience. The practicum may be at a local edge in traditional cultures, modernization and globali- animation studio or computer animation house. zation, and current issues. A N I M 245 Colour A n d M e d i a A N T H 204 Ethnic Relations (3) (4,0,0) (S) (3) (4,0,0) (F) Basic colour theory w i l l be taught using a variety of A study of the relations between ethnic groups. The painting materials and techniques used in the anima- construction, maintenance and expression o f ethnic- tion industry. Students w i l l learn the specific skills boundaries and identities w i l l be examined within a required of animation background painters and w i l l variety o f cultural contexts, including Canada. The create finished backgrounds from original layout course w i l l address the social construction of differ- designs. ence and w i l l offer perspectives on racial stereotyping, the politics of representation, the expression of ethnic A N T H 121 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to Social A n t h r o p o l o g y popular culture and its wider consumption. Processes, A survey of social anthropology to include the study of communication, economic systems, kinship and family patterns, social control, political organization, religion, and the arts. A l s o includes understanding the methods and effects o f culture change. Examples of different cultural practices w i l l be drawn from societies throughout the world. been involved in the rise of ethnic consciousness w i l l such as de-colonization and globalization which have be analysed, together with theoretical concepts through which ethnicity may be comprehended. A N T H 205 Multiculturalism (3) (4,0,0) (S) The course w i l l examine multiculturalism within Canada and utilize comparative material from A u s - A N T H 123 (3) Introduction t o A r c h a e o l o g y (4,0,0) (F or S) tralia and N e w Zealand. The creation and impact of multiculturalism w i l l be addressed from historical and A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and cultural perspectives. The scope w i l l move from methods of Archaeology, including the techniques broader Canadian issues to looking specifically at used to discover, reconstruct, and interpret the past. British Columbian ethnic relations and the changing Examples w i l l be drawn from archaeological research cultural landscape. around the world. A N T H 124 H u m a n Origins (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) A N T H 206 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) First Nations of British Columbia A study of the cultural history, diversity, and complex- A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and ity of the Native Peoples of British C o l u m b i a . The evidence for human origins as presented by Archaeol- archaeological past, traditional lifeways, and current ogy and Physical Anthropology. The biological and issues arc examined. Course Descriptions 179 A N T H 208 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Indigenous Peoples of North A m e r i c a A survey of the cultural history and social organization of native peoples of the North American continent including Canada, the United States and Mexico. An examination of traditional lifestyles including family, political, religious and ecological patterns; and current issues. A N T H 241 (6) A r c h a e o l o g y Field School Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (Su) A Field Study in permission of the instructor. An interdisciplinary course to consider in depth a particular geographic area and its people. Comparative institutions, cultural ecology, contemporary issues, methods of observation and study. Students and instructor study in the field. A P M C 503 (3.0) (2,0,0) (F)(S) International Career M a n a g e m e n t This course will help students develop skills and an understanding for networking and working in an Asian environment. A P M C 505 Co-op W o r k Term (9) (F,S,Su) This course covers the work expected during the Work Term. It has four major modules: a) Mid-term Confer ence; 2) International Career Development; 3) focus Groups; 4) News Analysis. Associates will be expected to maintain a high level of communication with the program through electronic means. Failure to pass each individual clement of the course will result in failure of the co-op term and thus the program. A P M C 515 Directed Studies (.25) (0,0,2.5) (S) This two-fold course allows students, through directed research and a written paper, to explore an area of Course Descriptions 180 (2.25) (3.0,0) (F) This course will aim at providing students with an understanding of financial concepts and strategies that influence business in the conduct of international commerce. A P M C 519 (1.5) Introduction t o Business a n d Trade A course in archaeological methods, techniques and theories dealing with excavation, recovery, analysis and interpretation of archaeological material. This is a practical field course, participants acquiring such skills as mapping, surveying, photography, computer applications, preparation of reports and interpretation. This course usually will be in cooperation with other colleges as a joint endeavour. Prerequisite: A P M C 518 International Finance I (6,0,0) (Su) permission of the instructor. A N T H 249 Comparative Cultures: Anthropology special interest or need. It also includes preparation for the final comprehensive exam. (2,0,0) (F) This course provides students with an understanding of the basic concepts involved in marketing products and services, as well as with a familiarity with marketing terminology and the application of the "marketing concept". A P M C 520 Economic G e o g r a p h y I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) This course will introduce students to current concepts in socio-economic analysis and will emphasize the spatial aspects of economic processes. Emphasis is on the dynamism of economic change and how this change interacts with local social, political and environmental matrices. The course will be issue oriented. There will be a mix of theoretical background, actual case studies, and training in analytical skills. A P M C 524 (1.5) Business D e v e l o p m e n t Projects (2,0,2) (S) These arc supervised team projects working with Vancouver-based companies. Business plans and projects are prepared for Asian opportunities chosen in conjunction with the companies. A P M C 525 (2.25) International M a n a g e m e n t I (3,0,0) (F) This course provides students with a broad understanding of the management process and functions as well as with the interrelatedness of these topics with human hchaviour in organizations. Students also study the application of this learning in an international context - particularly with respect to the Asia Pacific region. A P M C 531 International Finance II (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation of APMC 518. A P M C 532 Economic G e o g r a p h y II (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation of APMC 520. A P M C 533 (1.5) International Business and Trade (2,0.0) (S) This course w i l l focus on case studies. A P S C 121 (1) Society and the Engineer (1.0,0) (S) This course deals with the social context within which engineering is practised. Topics w i l l include the history A P M C 534 (1.5) International M a n a g e m e n t II (2,0,0) (S) of engineering, engineering ethics, professionalism, gender issues, employment equity, environmental This course is a continuation of A P M C 525, but places issues, multiculturalism. a greater emphasis on guest presentations by senior executives whose companies actually arc operating in the A s i a Pacific region. A P S C 150 Engineering Graphics (3) (1.4,0) (F) A n introduction to engineering graphics emphasizing A P M C 540 (5.25) Asia Pacific Perspectives I (7,0,0) (F) the development of spatial visualization and graphical communication skills; technical sketching and engi- This series o f courses is designed to introduce students neering drawing using projection and sectioning to the historical and current social, political and techniques; principles, practices and conventions o f cultural patterns o f the A s i a Pacific region. Students engineering graphics; descriptive geometry and w i l l review and develop skills in cross-cultural c o m - graphical solution methods to engineering problems; munication. They w i l l also develop skills in regional use o f microcomputer based graphics tools. analysis that w i l l help them understand relationships A R C . 092 Success Strategies for t h e College Classroom within A s i a and with the West. A P M C 541 (3.75) Asia Pacific Perspectives II (4,0,0) (S) Students registered in this course w i l l be new students to Capilano College who are newcomers to Canada. This course is a continuation of A P M C 540. This includes; support for students who have E n g l i s h A P M C 550 (1.5) Cross Cultural C o m m u n i c a t i o n through both personal development and study skills, language skill at the College preparatory level and, (2,0,0) (S) build toward success in their studies at Capilano This course w i l l develop an understanding o f the process of communication, including appreciation of the fact that communication is significantly affected by the culture, personality and experience of the communicator. T h i s course w i l l also develop an understanding of the students' o w n culture and its effects on behavior. A P M C 560 Workshops (0) (4,0,0) (F) (S) This series allows students to "'customize" the program by selecting from a range o f courses which offer an opportunity to develop special skills or to study special issues concerning A s i a . APSC 120 (1) Introduction t o Engineering (1,0,0) (F) This course uses guest speakers, videotaped material and field trips to provide students with an orientation to a career as a professional engineer. Attendance at scheduled activities is the only course requirement. Final "grades" arc reported as C R (Credit Granted) or N C (No Credit Granted). College. A R C . 100 (3) Strategies for Student Success (3,0,0) (F.S) Students learn and adopt attitudes and methods that promote success in college. This course includes: memory techniques, time management, reading a textbook with improved retention, test taking tips, note taking strategics, using college resources, communication skills, stress management, goal setting, and career exploration. Students may not enrol in ARC. 100 and ARC. 105 concurrently. A R C . 105 (3) College Reading a n d Study Skills (3,0,1) (F.S) Students learn and adopt methods and attitudes that promote success in college. This course includes: memory techniques, time management, test taking and note taking. The reading component addresses problems college students have with textbook comprehension, vocabulary, critical reading and retaining information from texts. Students may not enrol in ARC. 100 and ARC. 105 concurrently. Course Descriptions 181 A R C . 110 Reading Dynamics (3) (3,0,0) (F.S) Applications o f human relations management, i.e. leadership, power, authority, group dynamics, formal Participants learn and practice flexible reading skills. Strategies for developing reading comprehension are also included. ART. 300 (12) (4,0,0) (F) Art Institute I — Sculpture and Printmaking The Institute is designed to meet the needs o f students with several years o f experience in sculpture or printmaking or who have left college, art school or university and may no longer have access to specialized equipment and facilities. The A r t Institute w i l l emphasize access to well equipped studios as well as lectures, seminars and tutorials with instructors and and informal organization, communications, conflict and the introduction of change. B A D M 106 (3) O r g a n i z a t i o n a l Behaviour (3,0,1) (F.S) The objective o f this course is to allow the student to develop the necessary skills and conceptual tools to both understand and deal effectively with human behaviour in organizations. These skills are o f at least two kinds: 1. interpersonal, that is, relating more effectively with other individuals and groups, and 2. analytical, to be able to perceive and understand invited professional artists. The format w i l l be one day situations accurately, and make effective decisions of class time and four or more days o f studio time. The based on this understanding. studios are available during the evenings and week- B A D M 107 Business L a w I ends. ART. 301 Art Institute II (12) (4,0,0) (S) Sculpture and Printmaking (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Students w i l l be introduced to the components o f the Canadian legal system, and w i l l examine the effect o f both c o m m o n and statute law on business relation- A continuation o f A R T . 300. ships. A study o f the basic principles o f commercial B A D M 101 Management (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Students study modern management practices, current events, ethics and problem solving. In addition, students w i l l study and practice effective business presentations and public speaking. The course instructors w i l l facilitate discussion and integrate topics through the use o f contemporary business issues. B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods law w i l l provide the foundation for a detailed examination of Contract L a w , including the sale of goods, (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) consumer protection legislation, and employment and labour law, as well as an examination o f tort law, intellectual property, insurance, company and partnership law, and creditor remedies. B A D M 108 (3) Introduction t o Business This course w i l l explain the five key tasks in managing an enterprise: This course provides a strong foundation in the mathematics of finance and business. The student w i l l utilize standard financial models in analysis, problem solving, and decision-making. Computer spreadsheet applications are utilized. (3,0,1) Planning, A c q u i s i t i o n o f Resources, Organization, Activation and Control. In addition, the key organizational functions o f Marketing, Production, Finance and Personnel are covered. The course is essentially an overview o f the theoretical framework o f the task o f management. This course is currently offered at the Squamish and Sechelt campuses only. Requirements: 1. Acceptance into a Business Administration fulltime program or a m i n i m u m C+ in Math 11 or equivalent. 2. A working knowledge of computer spreadsheets. B A D M 103 Supervisory Skills (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Study of human elements in organizations, with emphasis on group behaviour. Concepts in persuasion, guidance and understanding o f the individual within the group. Course 182 B A D M 201 Business Systems Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F,S) B C P T I 2 l or C O M P 101 with m i n i m u m C grade. Students w i l l be required to apply the concepts and theories learned in their first year courses to solve integrated business problems in a logical and literate manner. The importance of accurate, dependable, management information for problem solving w i l l be illustrated through case study analysis and a major group project. Descriptions (3) B A D M 210 Business Statistics (3) (3.0,1) (F.S) w i l l be placed on the concept of human resource management being the responsibility o f A L L management, not just the personnel department. This course provides a strong foundation in basicbusiness statistics emphasizing analysis and decisionSpreadsheet applications o f descriptive, inferential, and B A D M 303 Industrial Relations bivariate models are utilized. Prerequisite: making in the face o f certainty and uncertainty. B A D M 268 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Entrepreneurship/Small Business M a n a g e m e n t S k i l l s needed in problem solving and researching the (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) 45 credits This course introduces the student to labour unions and their relationship with management. Topics covered include the Labour Code, collective bargaining and dispute resolution. small business environment w i l l be learned and applied. Business owners, managers and would be decision makers are encouraged to take this course. The instructor and guest lecturers from the business B A D M 304 Business Policy Prequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F.S.Su) 75 credits community w i l l lead students through detailed aspects of business from finance to human relations. The The student gains a basic understanding of the con- production of the business plan w i l l be discussed and cepts, purposes, and procedures o f business policy, and part o f a plan w i l l be written. an integrated view of the strategic management o f business enterprise. B A D M 299* (3) C o - o p W o r k Experience I (Su) Participating in a practical business simulation game is a major component of the course. The first co-op work experience is designed to provide For accelerated, Advanced D i p l o m a and Open Univer- students with a four-month, full-time work term in sity (pending) students only. business, industry or government. The main thrust o f this course is the opportunity to put into practise the major aspects of the students' business education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic of the "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to network in the industry B A D M 307 Business L a w II Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Business L a w I, or an introductory college or university course in commercial or contract law, or by permission of the instructor. and to participate in professional organizations. * B A D M 299 can be accepted as a lower level general business elective in D i p l o m a programs only. B A D M 301 (3) Operations M a n a g e m e n t Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F,S) B A D M 210 with m i n i m u m C grade. O f special interest to generalist managers and operators of small businesses, this one term course familiarizes the student with the principles, practices and functions of production-operations management, using modern decision-making aids. Foundation skills in production and control (inventory, quality and cost control) arc examined using computing devices and procedures. A second law course w i l l examine the effect of both common and statute law on business relationships. A review o f the basic principles o f commercial law w i l l lead to the examination o f more complex contractual relationships such as discharge o f contract, agency, bailment, real property, commercial tenancy, legal devices for securing credit including mortgages, and bankruptcy. Other topics include competition law, management and operation o f a corporation and intellectual property. B A D M 310 (3) Q u a n t i t a t i v e M e t h o d s III Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (S) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods I (Business M a t h ) , B A D M 210 Quantitative Methods II B A D M 302 (3) H u m a n Resource M a n a g e m e n t Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F,S) 45 credits This course provides the student with a basic, func- (Business Stats. C + or better recommended), B C P T 122 Computers II This course provides the student with a practical understanding of the application and theoretical tional understanding of current personnel/human foundation o f commonly used techniques in statistical resource-management concepts and applications in modeling. It includes basic descriptive statistics, developing small and larger business. Special emphasis Course Descriptions 183 inferential statistics, regression and time-series analy- gases, solutions. Optional topics include organic sis, and other quantitative models such as decision- chemistry, nuclear chemistry, industrial chemistry. trees, multiple regression, and the fundamentals o f Includes laboratory exercises. Prepares students for linear programming. The student w i l l analyse business college science courses and many career/vocational situations in order to develop the appropriate statistical programs. models, and w i l l apply spreadsheet software to develop solutions used in recommending appropriate management action. B A D M 399 (3) Co-op W o r k Experience II (S) B C H M 042 Provincial Level Chemistry Prerequisite: B C H M 041 or Chemistry l l Corequisite: B M T H 045 or M a t h 11 (F,S,Su) Topics include shapes of molecules, thermochemistry, Prerequisite: B A D M 299 rates o f reactions, chemical equilibrium, solubility, The second co-op work experience is designed to acids and bases, oxidation-reduction, electrochemistry. provide students with a four-month, full-time work Optional topics include nuclear chemistry, organic tenn in business, industry or government. The main chemistry. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares thrust o f this course is the opportunity to put into students for college chemistry and technology programs practise the major aspects of the students' business for which Chemistry 12 is a prerequisite. education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic o f the "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to network in the industry and to participate in professional organizations. (F,S,Su) B S C I 032 or Science 10 and English 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as co-requisite. Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, evolution, microbe and plant structure and diversity, behavioural ecology, biosphere, ecosystems, human population concerns. Laboratory exercises are included. Prepares students for many career/vocational programs. BBIO 042 Provincial Level Biology Prerequisites: (F.S) A paced, credit course offering an introduction to commonly used business software such as word BBIO 041 A d v a n c e d Level Biology Prerequisite: B C M P 031 Intermediate Level C o m p u t e r Studies (F,S,Su) S C I 032 or Science 10 and English 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as a co-requisite Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, cell metabolism, photosynthesis, human biology, including reproduction genetics, digestion, circulation, processing, spreadsheets and the Internet. A l s o included is an introduction to Windows disk and file management. B C M P 041 A d v a n c e d Level C o m p u t e r Studies (F.S) A paced, graded course offering both an introduction to commonly used business software and essential computer concepts and terminology. Software used includes: word processing, spreadsheets, databases, graphics, W i n d o w s and the Internet. Computer concepts include examination of: processors, storage devices, input/ output devices, computer communications, security, ethics, ergonomics, and purchasing considerations. B C M P 042 Provincial Level C o m p u t e r Studies Prerequisite: (S) B C M P 041 and M a t h 10 or B M T H 031 with a m i n i m u m " B - " standing, or permission of the instructor. immunity, respiration, excretion, nervous system, A paced, graded course offering an introduction to hormones. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares computer programming. Students w i l l analyse prob- students for college level post-secondary programs for lems, design solutions, develop Q B A S I C programs, test, which B i o l o g y 12 is a prerequisite. debug and document the software they write. B C H M 041 A d v a n c e d Level Chemistry Prerequisites: (F,S,Su) B M T H 031 or Math 10. and B S C I 032 or Science 10 Introduction to atomic theory, periodicity, bonding, naming compounds, mole concept, chemical reactions. Course Descriptions 184 BCOP 131 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Introduction to P r o g r a m m i n g a n d P r o g r a m m i n g Logic This is the foundation course for all programming skills developed by the program. Design techniques using hierarchy charts, flowchart, and pseudo code w i l l be studied. The course w i l l use a computer language to Windows-based D B M S software. The following topics demonstrate the structured programming skills neces- are included in the course: sary for good programming. maintenance of databases, the development of informa- BCOP 171 (3) (3,0,1) (S) The D e v e l o p m e n t a l Tools of Information Systems of forms, the creation and use o f macros and modules the planning, creation and tion retrieval techniques, the design and customization in an automated system. (3) M o d e l i n g and charting w i l l be included. The tools and BCOP 215 Network I methodology applied by the systems analyst w i l l be Prerequisite: B C O P 131 and B C O P 204 with a studied. The course covers an overview o f the system minimum ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A traditional look at the systems life cycle process. life cycle, system flow charting, Data F l o w Diagrams, Normalization, Bubble Diagrams, P E R T / C P M Networks. (3) (3,0,1) (F) B C P T 122 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. and networking, covering networking hardware/ standards and protocols, with server installation. BCOP 231 Data M a n a g e m e n t Prerequisite: This course extends the students knowledge of O/S batch files to configure the modern P C for best performance. The course also provides more in depth instruction on graphic presentations and desktop publishing in the W i n d o w s environment. BCOP 205 (3) A p p l i e d Statistics for Business Prerequisite: A n introduction to the field of data communications operating system concepts, modem, W A N , and L A N BCOP 204 Business C o m p u t i n g III Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (S) (3,0,1) (F) Acceptance into the full time Business Computing C o - o p Program or a m i n i m u m C+ in Math 11 or equivalent. A working knowledge of W i n d o w s . This course provides a strong foundation in business statistical models and techniques emphasizing analysis and decision making in the face of certainty and uncertainty. Data Analysis software ( S P S S ) is utilized for applications of descriptive, inferential, bivariatc and multiple regression models. (3) (3,0,1) (S) C M P T 182 or B C O P I 2 l with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. The structure, design and control of hierarchical, network and relational databases. Emphasis is on modeling tools as applied to business case studies. BCOP 303 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Information Systems & Client Server Architecture Prerequisite: B C O P I 7 l with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to client-server architecture and software using a systems approach. BCOP 304 Business C o m p u t i n g V Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F) B C O P 214 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. BCOP 206 (3) A c c o u n t i n g f o r Managers (3,0,1) (F) Development of solutions to mission critical business problems using advanced development tools. Prerequisite: B F I N I 4 l with m i n i m u m C grade or permission of the instructor. BCOP 305 N e t w o r k II (3) (3,0,1) (F) Study of managerial and financial information requirements and controls necessary to support specificdecisions with an emphasis on budgeting, forecasting, controlling and decision making. Prerequisite: B C O P 215 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A computer industry certified course providing a foundation for the daily tasks of network administra- BCOP 214 Business C o m p u t i n g IV Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (S) B C O P 204 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. tion. T o p i c s include: client setup and maintenance, user maintenance, server maintenance, the file system, establishing systems security, printing set-up. E-mail and backup. The successful student may apply their knowledge towards the optional certification exam. Students w i l l explore advanced database concepts, including automation techniques, using popular Course Descriptions 185 BCOP 306 (3) (3.0,1) (F) Prerequisite: BCPT 221 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Business C o m p u t i n g Presentation Graphics C ++ Level I B C O P 131, C M P T 184, B C O P 214 with Prerequisite: B C P T 122 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. better This course is an introduction to programming using This course is an introduction to sophisticated presenta- the C++ Language. Topics include functions, struc- tion, graphics and desktop publishing software, and tures, classes and arrays. This course gives a founda- related hardware, for the purpose of producing high tion for B C O P 326. quality business presentations and advertising materials on a personal computer. BCOP 325 Network Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (Su) B E N G 011 III B C O P 215 or B C O P 305 with m i n i m u m (3) Basic Literacy Level English A course in basic reading and writing. Students focus ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A N o v e l l Certified course providing a foundation for the daily tasks o f network administration using Netware 4.x. T o p i c s include: client setup and maintenance, global directory services setup and maintenance, user maintenance, server maintenance, the file on the composition o f words and basic sentences. BENG 021 (F.S) F u n d a m e n t a l Level English: Essential W r i t i n g Skills, Spelling a n d W o r d A t t a c k . system, establishing systems security, and print setup. A n introductory Fundamental course in reading and in After the course, the student may write the optional writing of sentences and short paragraphs. 4.x C N A exam for their Certified N o v e l l AdministraBENG 031 tor designation. (F,S,Su) Intermediate Level English: M e c h a n i c s , Basic BCOP 326 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Skills a n d Paragraph W r i t i n g . C + + Level II A n Intermediate course in writing. M o s t A B E students Prerequisite: enter the English program at this level. Students write a B C O P 306 with m i n i m u m C grade or permission o f the instructor. Continuing introduction in the design and use of series of paragraphs and two longer compositions. object-oriented programming principles using C + +. BENG 040 (F.S.Su) A d v a n c e d Level English: Short Report W r i t i n g BCPT 121 (formerly B S M G 180) (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Prerequisite: Business C o m p u t i n g I A short-report writing course with a vocational/ technical emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing. Students develop the summarizing, notetaking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety o f sources into well-written reports. Prerequisite: None A n introduction to the use of microcomputers in business. This course provides hands-on experience with word processing, data management and graphicuser interface software. It also looks at the operating system and its functions. Students w i l l examine the uses o f computers today and the selection process for acquiring hardware and software. B E N G 031 BENG 041 (F.S.Su) A d v a n c e d English: A d v a n c e d Report W r i t i n g Prerequisite: B E N G 031 BCPT 122 (formerly B S M G 222) (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) A n advanced course in short-report writing. Students Business C o m p u t i n g II develop the summarizing, note-taking, and outlining Prerequisite: skills necessary to organize information from a variety B C P T I 2 l with a m i n i m u m ' C grade, or by permission of the instructor. This course is a continuation of B C P T 121. providing further uses o f microcomputers in business. Students w i l l receive hands-on experience with spreadsheets and presentation graphics and graphical user interface software. Course 186 Descriptions of sources into well-written reports. B E N G 041 has a technical/academic emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing and includes introductory work in literary analysis and evaluation for students proceeding to B E N G 042. BENG 042 (F.S.Su) Provincial Level English: Critical Reading a n d Essay W r i t i n g Prerequisite: 70% in B E N G 041 BFIN 241 Finance for M a n a g e r s Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) B F I N I 4 l , B A D M 102 & E N G L 100 with a m i n i m u m C - grade in all courses. A Provincial level course in essay writing. Students In this practical financial management course students study and write a variety of essays to prepare for study financial management techniques. They apply written work at the university-transfer level or equiva- this knowledge to business decisions. Topics in this lent in diploma programs. B E N G 042 has an academic/ course include: evaluating business performance, literary emphasis in its subject matter and approaches financial institutions and markets, valuation of finan- to writing. cial assets, obtaining financing, managing assets and BESC 041 (F.S) A d v a n c e d Level Earth and Environmental Sciences arc discussed throughout this course. international finance. Contemporary financial issues Prerequisites: B S C I 032 or Science 10 BFIN 244 (3) Management Accounting (3,0,1) (F) A n introduction to the earth sciences, with environmen- Prerequisite: tal applications and a British C o l u m b i a emphasis. This course introduces students to the specialized area Areas of study include earth materials, notably miner- of Management Accounting. It provides an overview o f als, rocks and mining; water, including sources, controls affected internally by management using the B F I N I 4 l with a m i n i m u m C - g r a d e . processes and contamination, and natural earth hazards, tools o f budgets, costing and analysis. Planning for an such as earthquakes and volcanoes, landslides and organization w i l l be examined from both the capital flooding. Laboratory investigations and field trips are and operations perspectives. involved. Prepares students for further courses in BFIN 249 (3) (3,0,1) (S) A c c o u n t i n g M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications physical and social sciences. BFIN 141 Accounting (3) (3.0,1) (F.S) Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. Students w i l l complete microcomputer accounting This course is an introduction to financial concepts and business principles. Students w i l l record business transactions and create financial statements. A l s o they w i l l be exposed to a broad range of topics including legal compliance, asset management and financial statement analysis. implementation projects using A C C P A C accounting software. They w i l l be expected to demonstrate their understanding o f the practical constraints o f internal control in the A C C P A C environment. Systems covered w i l l include general ledger, A / R and A / P (inventory optional). There w i l l be additional costs for printing This course is designed to prepare the student for courses in Managerial Accounting and Financial Management. W e recommend that students with weak math skills take B A D M 102 (Quantitative Methods) before, or at the same time as, B F I N 141. Students in this course should expect to spend approximately $75.00 for materials and group activities. BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B S M G 178 with at least a C - grade, B F I N I 4 l with at least a C - grade or O T E C 217 with at least a C+ grade. and disks. BFIN 341 Cost A c c o u n t i n g I (3) (3,0,2) (F) B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A study o f organizational decision making and planning using accounting tools. Topics include the nature of accounting controls, c o m m o n control methods, measures of management performance, and the role o f Students w i l l apply generally accepted accounting principles to the establishment and maintenance of the management cost accountant. ( C . G . A . . C . M . A . , and C A . Transferable with B F I N 342) accounting systems, including the preparation, analysis and interpretation o f financial statements. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . , and C A . transferable). Course Descriptions 187 BFIN 342 Cost A c c o u n t i n g II Prerequisite: (3) (3.0,1) (S) B F I N 341 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A more in-depth study o f subjects covered in Cost BFIN 351 Taxation (3) Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. (3,0,1) (S) This course familiarizes the student with the Canadian A c c o u n t i n g I. Cost determination for manufacturing income tax system as it applies to corporations, share- operations, planning and cost control systems, perform- holders, and unincorporated businesses, so that the ance evaluation methods, and strategic decision- student can identify potential tax problem areas, making methods. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transfer- complete the basic compliance forms, and appreciate able with B F I N 341) its impact on some business decisions. (Transferable to C . M . A . and C A . ) BFIN 344 (3) Personal Investment M a n a g e m e n t Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (S) BGEO 042 A d v a n c e d Level G e o g r a p h y B F I N 241. A central theme of this course is investors using securities to increase personal wealth. This is accomplished by studying such topics as: types of securities, security (S) A study o f the peoples of British C o l u m b i a , their physical environments and the basis of their economies. markets, modem portfolio theory, active asset manage- Students w i l l learn to assess the adaptation o f people to ment, balancing risk and return, and security valuation their physical environment and to the natural resources techniques. it provides. A prime objective w i l l be to judge the sustainability o f British C o l u m b i a communities, their BFIN 346 Financial A c c o u n t i n g II Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F) B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. landscapes and resources. BHST 042 Provincial Level History (S) This course studies the theories underlying financial statement presentations, and is a logical continuation and reinforcement o f the material covered in B F I N 142. The course encompasses the study o f Financial A c c o u n t i n g at the intermediate level. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 347) Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (S) B F I N 346 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A sequel to B F I N 346 which examines current developments in financial accounting and their effects on financial statement presentation. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 346) Transferable to S F U . BFIN 350 (3) A d v a n c e d Financial M a n a g e m e n t Prerequisite: issues in present day Geopolitics. BIOL 104 H u m a n Biology I Prerequisite: Transferable to S F U . BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III A survey of 20th Century History including major (3,0,1) (S) B F I N 142 and B F I N 241 with a m i n i - (3) (4,3,0) (F) None This is the first term of a course designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for non-science students not planning to take further courses in biology. The basic concepts o f human biology and the position of man as an organism are examined. Major topics include: the evolution o f man, the structure and function o f human cells and tissues, cell division, human genetics, human reproduction, development, digestion, and nutrition. B I O L 104 fulfils the entrance biology requirement for the Nursing program at B C I T . BIOL 105 Environmental Biology Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) None m u m C - grade. This course, designed primarily as a laboratory science The content o f this course concentrates on the develop- elective for non-science students, examines a wide ment o f analytical and conceptual skills for financial range of environmental issues from a biological decision-making. The course places emphasis on perspective. Basic principles o f ecology are developed capital asset pricing models, capital budgeting and and the impact of modern society on the environment is capital structures. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transfer- assessed. The overall focus is global; however, the able with B F I N 241) basic ecological principles are developed using primarily British C o l u m b i a n and other Canadian examples. Course 188 Descriptions M a j o r environmental issues relevant to Canada are also stressed. Major topics include: ecological concepts, conservation and endangered species, air pollution and global warming, water resources and water pollution. T h i s course serves as a Canadian Studies credit and, together with B I O L 104, as a prerequisite for B I O L BIOL 113 H u m a n Biology II Prerequisite: tor. (3) (4,3,0) (S) B I O L 104 or permission o f the instruc- A continuation o f the study of human biology commenced in B I O L 104. The course focuses on the 204 and 206. anatomy and physiology o f the following organ BIOL 106 (1.5) Basic Introductory Biology I (2,0,0) (F) systems: cardiovascular, respiratory, musculoskeletal, nervous, and urinary. Special emphasis w i l l be given to health and fitness as well as discussion o f disease and Corequisite: B I O L 107 treatment. The laboratory sessions w i l l provide com- T h i s course is designed for the student who has not plementary practical study of the systems, and received a m i n i m u m o f " C + " standing in Biology 12 introduce techniques used to make physiological (or B B I O 042) or who has not taken Chemistry 11 (or evaluations (e.g. heart rate, E K G , blood pressure, urine B C H M 041). U p o n successful completion o f B I O L 106 analysis). Completion o f B I O L 104 and B I O L 113 and B I O L 107, students are qualified to take B I O L permits students (upon entering Basic Health Sciences 111. The course topics for B I O L 106 and B I O L 107 at B C I T ) to receive credit for B H S C 105. together are the same as for B I O L 110. BIOL 107 (3) Basic Introductory Biology II (4,3,0) (F) BIOL 200 Genetics I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Corequisite: B I O L 106 Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 109 or 111; and C H E M 108/109 or 110/111. This course is designed for the student who has not received a m i n i m u m of ' C + ' standing In B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) or who has not taken Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041). Upon successful completion of B I O L 106 and B I O L 107, students are qualified to take B I O L 111. The course topics for B I O L 106 and B I O L 107 are the same as for B I O L 110. A n introduction to the principles and mechanisms o f heredity. Emphasis w i l l be placed on an analytical approach to transmission genetics, genetics of humans, introductory molecular genetics, quantitative genetics and population genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. BIOL 110 Introductory Biology I Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) Biology 12 (or B B I O 042) with a m i n i m u m o f " C + " standing and Chemistry 11 (or BIOL 201 Genetics II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B I O L 200. B I O L 214 and concurrent registration (if not already completed) in B I O L 215 are recommended. B C H M 041) or with permission o f the instructor. The standard introductory biology course for students who plan to take further courses in science. Major topics w i l l include biochemistry, the origin o f life, cell structure and function, cell division and introductory genetics. BIOL 111 Introductory Biology II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) B I O L 106/107 or I OH or 110. A continuation of the principles and mechanisms o f heredity, with emphasis on the genetics o f microorganisms, molecular genetics, genetic engineering and developmental genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. BIOL 204 Ecology I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 109 or 111; or B I O L 104/105. A continuation of B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110 which A n introduction to the principles o f ecology with further develops the discussion of biological concepts emphasis on ecosystem and community dynamics and including development, biological systems, evolution structure; ecosystem concepts, components, interrela- and ecology. tionships, energy flow and nutrient c y c l i n g . Introduction to vegetation analysis in the B . C . context. Both plants and animals w i l l be considered but plants w i l l be emphasized. W e e k l y field trips examine local Course Descriptions 189 biogeoclimatic zone structure and composition, while a biology and ecology o f each group. The course is southern B . C . field trip introduces several inland designed around the major unifying concept o f evolu- biogeoclimatic zones. tion. Problems o f contemporary interest in the field of This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. BIOL 205 Ecology II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) invertebrate zoology. The laboratory complements the lecture components and the course includes a three-day field trip to the Bamfield Marine Station. BIOL 213 Vertebrate Z o o l o g y B I O L 204. A continuation o f ecological principles, with the Prerequisite: introduction and application o f quantitative concepts. 111. The emphasis w i l l be o n animal ecology including population dynamics, animal behaviour, competition, predator-prey relationships, and other aspects o f interactions of plant and animal populations. Weekly field trips and a three-day field trip to the Pacific R i m National Park area w i l l be included in the course. (3) (4,3,0) (S) B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 109 or A comparative survey o f the major classes o f vertebrates, emphasizing evolutionary trends especially in development and morphology of organ systems. Adaptive features in vertebrates are considered. The laboratory complements the lecture component with representative vertebrates being examined. The lab This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. component includes several half day field trips. BIOL 206 (3) Ecology of t h e Western Pacific BIOL 214 Cell Biology Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 1 10, and 109 or 11 L o r B I O L 104/105; or G E O G 112/114; or by permission o f the Biology coordinator. This course examines the complex ecology and biogeography o f the lands bordering the western Pacific Ocean. Basic principles o f biogeography and ecology w i l l be presented with reference to the regions concerned. Selected environmental issues and biogeographic characteristics w i l l be discussed for the following regions: the Asian M a i n l a n d , with emphasis on Japan and C h i n a ; the M a l a y Peninsula and Indonesia; and Australasia, focusing on Australia, Papua N e w Guinea and New Zealand. There is no lab for this course. (4,3,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 109 or 111. Corequisite: C H E M 200 Transfer to U B C requires C H E M 200/201. A n integrated study o f the structure and function of cells and their components. Ultrastructure o f cell organelles as determined by electron microscopy w i l l be related to the molecular functions o f cells. Emphasis w i l l also be placed on the techniques used to study cells, the evolutionary origin o f cells and their components, and on comparisons between specialized cell structure and function. The laboratory exercises w i l l use modern methods o f microscopy and separation techniques in a detailed study o f cell structures and BIOL 210 (3) M o r p h o l o g y of Vascular Plants Prerequisite: Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 108 or I 10, and 109 or their functions. BIOL 215 Biochemistry 111. Prerequisite: B I O L 214. A comparative study of the vascular plant groups, the Corequisite: C H E M 201. (3) (4,3,0) (S) pteridophytes, gymnosperms and angiosperms with A n examination of the fundamental principles and emphasis on the evolution, morphology, ecology and basic facts o f biochemistry starting with protein function of each o f the groups. Discussions of prob- structure and enzyme functions. C e l l energetics, lems in plant morphology. biosyntheses and mechanisms which control cell metabolism w i l l also be considered. The laboratory BIOL 212 Invertebrate Z o o l o g y Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 109 or 111. A comparative survey o f the major phyla and classes o f invertebrates with emphasis upon phylogeny, adaptive Course 190 Descriptions w i l l involve detailed experimental analyses, using the current techniques of biochemistry, o f the molecular functions of cells and tissues. BIOL 220 Microbiology I Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 109 or provide a base upon which students w i l l develop knowledge and skills related to operating a business o f their o w n . 111; C H E M 108/109 o r 110/111. B M K T 261 Advertising Transfer to U B C requires C H E M 200/201. (3) (3,0.1) (F.S) A comprehensive treatment o f introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, growth and metabo- Prerequisite: B M K T 161. lism o f micro-organisms w i l l be discussed. The lab T h i s course w i l l examine the Canadian and A m e r i c a n provides practical experience in standard microbial advertising industry from both micro and macro techniques. perspectives. It w i l l enable the student to grasp the basic theoretical and practical approaches to advertis- BIOL 221 M i c r o b i o l o g y II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) ing and provide an insight into the various aspects o f advertising history, creativity, communication systems, media choice, and other functions. T h i s is not a course B I O L 220. on designing, creating, and preparing specific types o f A continuation o f B I O L 220, emphasizing genetics, advertising, but is meant to serve as an overview o f immunological aspects, and ecology of micro-organ- what advertising is and how it relates to other market- isms. The role o f micro-organisms in agriculture, ing concepts and operations. Students w i l l participate various industries, health and sanitation is considered. in an advertising campaign simulation project. B M K T 160 Marketing (3) (3.0,1) (S) A n overview o f marketing as applied to computer and related markets and products. Students w i l l participate in class discussions related to product planning, research, promotion and distribution systems. Each student w i l l make a sales presentation to the class. B M K T 161 Marketing (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) This course covers the full spectrum o f Canadian marketing o f consumer products and services including: Market segmentation, consumer behaviour, products, packaging, distribution and promotion. B M K T 263 (3) Professional Selling Skills (3,0,1) (F.S) A n introduction to professional selling. C o m m u n i c a tion basics, including effective listening, probing, problem finding and solving, and creativity w i l l be covered. Specific techniques o f professional selling including prospecting, qualifying and contracting prospects. The course w i l l also explore, in depth, the organization and management o f sales activities. B M K T 360 M a r k e t i n g Research Prerequisites: (3) (3.0,1) (F) B M K T I 6 l and B A D M 210. marketing topics w i l l assist in the learning experience. A n introductory course indicating h o w to make the most out o f marketing research. Through practical applications of a research project, students w i l l learn the elements of research design, basic methods of collecting data, analysis and reporting. Applications o f Canadian and A m e r i c a n research w i l l be studied. B M K T 163 (3) Small Business M a n a g e m e n t II B M K T 362 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Event M a r k e t i n g a n d M a n a g e m e n t Students w i l l analyze case problems and prepare a report about a "real-life" product or service from a consumer point o f v i e w . Videos, guest speakers and in-class discussion about (3,0) (F) This course w i l l allow the student to develop a business plan utilizing workshops in specific areas o f sound business planning. U p o n completion of this course the student w i l l have a plan ready for submission to financial advisors. B M K T 164 (3) Small Business M a n a g e m e n t I Prerequisite: B M K T I6l. The trend in business today is to extend marketing dollars into the area o f event marketing. T h i s course w i l l introduce students to the skills and concepts necessary to create, finance, and manage a special (3,0,0) (S) A n introduction to marketing, market research and event. Students w i l l be expected to demonstrate an understanding of how to choose and develop a specific event, demonstrate a knowledge o f specific budget elements and their relationship to revenue generating, financial record keeping. These foundation topics w i l l Course Descriptions 191 develop an understanding of event marketing and ing, sales and finance departments as well as the use o f understand the administrative structure and skills outside agencies. Some time w i l l be spent with adver- necessary to manage a special event. tising research as a pre and post control factor. B M K T 364 C o n s u m e r Behaviour Prerequisite: (3) (3.0,1)(S) B M T H 021 Fundamental Level M a t h e m a t i c s (F,S,Su) W h o l e numbers, fractions, decimals, ratio and propor- B M K T I 6 l , B M K T 360. Today, as never before, studying the behaviour of consumers is paramount for anyone pursuing a business career, especially in the marketing area. A blend of both concepts and applications from the field of consumer behaviour w i l l form the basis of this course. Students should find this subject very interesting and tion, percent, powers and roots, averages and graphs. This course is designed to prepare students for an Intermediate course in mathematics. B M T H 031 Intermediate Level M a t h e m a t i c s (F,S,Su) motivational when applied to several aspects o f Introductory algebra and elementary plane and solid business management including marketing research, geometry. This course is designed to prepare students creative advertising, team building and environmental for an Advanced course in mathematics. marketing. Research projects, case discussions and problem solving w i l l be stressed in both individual and team activities. B M T H 045 A d v a n c e d Level M a t h - A l g e b r a & Trigonometry (F,S,Su) B M K T 365 (3) (3,0,1) (F) M a r k e t i n g Strategies and Decision M a k i n g Prerequisite: Prerequisite: R e v i e w of real numbers, powers, laws of exponents; B M K T I6l. B M T H 031 or equivalent with at least a •B-" This course w i l l explore in greater depth the concepts polynomials and rational expressions, factoring, of values and lifestyles, product development, service quadratic equations, m a x i m a and minima; functions marketing, positioning, strategic planning, tactical and relations; quadratic functions; transformations o f promotion, international marketing and marketing not- relations; circle geometry, theorems and proofs; for-profit organizations. The focus w i l l be on analyzing trigonometry, right and oblique triangles, functions o f marketing problems, developing strategic decision- angles in standard position. A n A B E A d v a n c e d m a k i n g skills and applying "hands-on" tactical solu- Certificate course, B M T H 045 is designed to prepare tions for results. Guest lecturers, projects and special students for a precalculus course. It is the equivalent o f field trips w i l l be used to enhance the classroom M a t h 11 or M a t h 090/095. components. B M K T 366 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Professional Sales a n d M a n a g e m e n t B M T H 046 Provincial Level M a t h - A l g e b r a and Trigonometry Prerequisite: Prerequisite: B M T H 045 or equivalent with at least a B M K T 263. This course w i l l cover two main topics, advanced professional selling techniques and sales force manage- (F,S,Su) ••B-" S o l v i n g linear, absolute value, quadratic, and rational ment. Students w i l l develop a n practise their selling inequalities; analyzing, manipulating and graphing skills in class and on a real-life sales project. The tools functions, approximating the roots of polynomial; and systems o f sales management w i l l also be explored graphing rational functions; exponential and logarith- to prepare the individual for the human resource factor mic functions; trigonometric functions, analytic H trigonometry; series and sequences; complex numbers; related to that type o f position. conic sections. A n A B E Provincial Certificate course, B M K T 367 (3) P r o m o t i o n Strategy a n d Analysis Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (S) B M K T 261. This is a course dealing with the development o f an advertising campaign ( C A P - A D S ) . Students w i l l study campaign strategy including how it is planned and organized in cooperation with the production, market- Course 192 Descriptions B M T H 046 is a precalculus course for students intending to enrol in a first year program in sciences or mathematics. It is the equivalent of Math 12 or M a t h 105. BPHY 041 (F.S.Su) A d v a n c e d Level Physics C H E M 030 (3) A n Introduction to Chemistry Prerequisites: B M T H 031 or Mathematics 10, and Prerequisite: B S C I 032 or Science 10 (4.0,0) (F) None This course is designed for those students who have Corequisite: B M T H 045 had no previous chemistry, and who wish to go on in Introduces motion, forces, vectors, gravitation, momen- sciences. A t o m s , molecules, the mole, chemical tum, work, power, energy, electricity, scries and formulas, ionic and covalent bonding. Balancing parallel circuits, electric fields, rotational motion, light, equations, simple stoichiometry problems, solutions, magnetism, waves, heat. Includes laboratory investiga- acids, bases and salts, equilibrium, gas laws. tions. Prepares students for college courses and many career/vocational programs. BPHY 042 C H E M 090 (1.5) A n Introduction to Chemistry I (F.S.Su) Provincial Level Physics Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (F,S) None This course is designed for those students who have Prerequisites: B P H Y 041 or Physics 11 had no previous chemistry, and who wish to go on in Corequisite: B M T H 045 or Math 11 sciences. A t o m s , molecules, the mole, chemical Topics include kinematics, dynamics, vectors, work formulas, ionic and covalent bonding; balancing and energy, circular motion, momentum, rotational equations, simple stoichiometry problems and solu- motion, equilibrium, electrostatics, circuits and instru- tions. ments, electromagnetic induction, waves, sound, electromagnetic waves, optics. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college physics and technology programs for w h i c h Physics 12 is a prerequisite. BSCI 021 Fundamental Level General Science (F.S.Su) (4,3,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: C h e m 11 or C h e m 12 ( C or less) or C H E M 090 or B C H M 041; M a t h 11 required, M a t h 12 preferred. A study o f chemical principles, nomenclature, stoichiometry and solutions, gases, chemical bonding, thermochemistry; an introduction to acids and bases and nuclear chemistry. A n introduction to the basic scientific concepts and language o f general science. BSCI 032 C H E M 101 (3) Fundamentals of Chemistry (F.S.Su) intermediate Level General Science Be. ic scientific principles in biology, chemistry and phyj ics needed to progress to higher level science cour.es. B S O C 031 C H E M 110 B o n d i n g a n d Structure (3) (4,3,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: C h e m 12 (C+ or greater) and M a t h 12; C h e m 11 ( A ) and Math 12 ( A or B ) ; B C H M 042 (C+ or greater) and Math 12; or C h e m 101 ( C - or greater) and Math 12. Corequisite: M A T H 105 or 110 or 116/117. Intermediate L e v e l Social Studies A course for students who plan careers in science. A A n intnduction to the fundamental principles o f Economics, Canadian history, government legal system and the development o f analytical and interpretive skills. BSOC 0' 1 (F) A d v a n c d Level Social Studies brief review of stoichiometry, nomenclature and the gaseous state; atomic structure; periodic trends; chemical bonding and molecular structure; an introduction to organic chemistry: solutions and colligative properties. CHEM 1101111 may be completed by guided self-study format; however, this option is not available in 1998/99. A study ( economic, political, and social issues in Canada a^ I in some neighbouring countries. Students w i l l learn basic skills o f social analysis that C H E M 111 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Chemical Dynamics a n d Energetics w i l l enhanc ? their ability to participate in decisions and Prerequisite: C H E M 108 or 110. policies that affect their economic, political and social Corequisite: M A T H 110 or 116/117. interests. Kinetics; equilibrium; acids, bases, salts and buffers: Course Descriptions 193 thermodynamics; solubility; redox equations and raphy w i l l be introduced along with an introduction to electrochemistry; recovery of metals from ores. CHEM visible and ultraviolet spectroscopy., atomic absorption 1101 111 may be completed by guided self-study format; spectroscopy and electrochemical methods o f analysis. however, this option is not available in 1998199. This course is not offered in 1998199. C H E M 200 (3) (4,3.0) (F) (3) (4,1.75,0) (F, Su) Beginning Chinese I O r g a n i c Chemistry I Prerequisite: CHIN 100 C H E M 105, 109 o r 111. A n y student Introduction to Mandarin Chinese using the P i n y i n who has attempted the course previously w i l l not be system o f pronunciation in M a i n l a n d C h i n a . F o r allowed to register without the instructor's permission. complete beginners (spoken and written) in Chinese. A study of nomenclature, structure, and spectroscopy of organic molecules; alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organomctallic compounds, alcohols, ethers, alkyl halides: mechanisms and stereochemistry. (3) C H E M 201 (4,3,0) (S) O r g a n i c Chemistry II Prerequisite: Aromatic chemistry, aldehydes, ketones, acids and their derivatives, carbanions; amines; nitro, azo, diazo and related compounds; heterocyclics; carbohydrates, protein chemistry; polymers; natural products. (3) (4,3,0) (F) I n t r o d u c t i o n t o Physical C h e m i s t r y Prerequisite: prepare students to speak the language. It also teaches basic grammar and the writing o f about 150 Chinese characters. CHIN 101 C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 with a (3) (4,1.75,0) (S, Su) B e g i n n i n g C h i n e s e II Prerequisite: C H E M 200 C H E M 204 This course starts with basic tones and pronunciation to C H I N 100 or permission o f instructor. C H I N I 0 l takes students w h o have learned basic Mandarin phonetics and about 150 Chinese characters. This course stresses conversational skills and listening comprehension using situational dialogues. Students w i l l learn more grammatical structures and Chinese characters. They w i l l also learn h o w to use a Chinese dictionary as a tool for further study. CHIN 102 (1.5) (3,1,0) (F) " B " standing, M A T H 111 or 126/127. Introduction t o Chinese I This course is an introduction to chemical thermody- For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program namics and its application to gas behaviour, chemical students only. and phase equilibria, colligative properties, ionic solutions, electrochemistry and chemical kinetics. C H E M 205 (3) (4,3,0) (S) of Mandarin and develop basic communication skills through the study of vocabulary, grammar, sentence structure and culture. I n t r o d u c t i o n t o Inorganic C h e m i s t r y Prerequisite: This course introduces A P M C P students to the basics C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 with a CHIN 103 (3) (3,1,0) (S) " B " standing. Introduction t o Chinese II A n introduction to the properties, bonding, structure For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program and reactivity o f coordination complexes of the first students only. row elements. Modern spectroscopic methods and chemical kinetics w i l l also be covered. The laboratory component emphasizes the synthesis of inorganic compounds and the use o f modern analytical instru- Prerequisite: C H I N 102 or permission o f the instruc- tor. This course is a continuation of C H I N 102 . ments. CHIN 150 C H E M 206 (3) (4,3,0) (S) (3) (4,1.75,n(F, Su) S p o k e n M a n d a r i n I: For Speakers o f O t h e r Introduction t o A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry Chinese Dialects Prerequisite: This is a Mandarin conversational course fo< .speakers C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 with a " B " standing. The basic principles and techniques of analytical chemistry, including neutralization, complex-formation and gravimetric reactions. Various types o f chromatog- Course Descriptions 194 of other Chinese dialects. Students should have a good command o f Chinese characters and gramn ar. This course is designed for students to gain fluency in spoken M a n d a r i n Chinese, particularly in the areas o f aural comprehension and oral fluency. CHIN 151 (3) (4,1.75,0,) (S,Su) S p o k e n M a n d a r i n II: For Speakers of O t h e r C h i n e s e Dialects programs. The course assignments include letters, Prerequisite: C H I N 150 or the equivalent or permission o f instructor. appropriate to business writing, with little focus on This conversational course continues with the development o f aural comprehension and oral fluency in Mandarin for speakers of other Chinese dialects. memos, proposals and a resume. Emphasis throughout the course is on audience, style, tone and formats English mechanics. C M N S 110 S t a n d a r d English Usage (3) (3.0,1) (F,S) Contrasts between Mandarin and other dialects w i l l be A course in grammar, spelling, punctuation, and made. Perfection o f Mandarin pronunciation " P i n y i n " diction. Students also gain experience in proofreading, w i l l be stressed. correcting and revising short written assignments. CHIN 200 (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Intermediate Chinese I Prerequisite: C H I N 101 or permission of instructor. This course is for students who know the basics o f Mandarin phonetics and grammar and approximately 600 Chinese characters, or for those who have completed C H I N 100 and 101. It teaches more Chinese C M N S 111 Administrative Writing (3) (3,0,1) (S) Intended for writers who work in corporate communications or administration, this course covers the basics of memorandums, internal reports, evaluations, briefs, and proposals. Some attention to online communications, and strong emphasis on developing a clear writing style. characters, focusing on reading and writing of simple Chinese texts. Chinese literature is also introduced. CHIN 201 Intermediate Chinese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) C H I N 200 or permission o f instructor. Continues the work of C H I N 200. CHIN 202 (1.5) Introduction to Chinese III Asia Pacific students For only. Management (3,1,0) (F) Cooperative program Prerequisite: Completion o f one year o f Chinese or instructor's permission. This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with functional Chinese communication skills for daily and job-related circumstances in C h i n a and other Mandarin-speaking countries and regions. CHIN 203 (3) Introduction t o Chinese IV Asia Pacific students For only. Prerequisite: Management (3,1,0) (S) Cooperative C H I N 202 or instructor's permission. (3) (3,0,1) (F) Students w i l l be taught various communications skills necessary for success in the animation industry. Content w i l l include presentation, writing and research skills, and script writing for animation. C M N S 120 (3) Effective W r i t i n g a n d Speech (3,0,1) (F) A course emphasizing structure and style in spoken and written communication, with some review o f English basics as w e l l . B y writing and editing short essays, students develop a writing style both concise and precise. C M N S 125 C o m m u n i c a t i o n Theory (1.5) (3,0.1) (F) A survey of principles influencing interpersonal communication as well as mass media: print, film, video, and audio. Exploration of communication theory as it applies to digital media. program This course is a continuation o f C H I N 202. C M N S 080 C M N S 115 (3) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s for A n i m a t i o n C M N S 130 (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) Introductory M e d i a C o m m u n i c a t i o n s A n introduction to writing and speaking for M e d i a Resources students. (4,0,0) (Su) Career P r o g r a m C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Preparation f o r ESL Students A i m s at bridging the gap between E S L courses and communications courses required by Career/Vocational C M N S 136 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction t o Film & T V S c r i p t w r i t i n g in Canada A n application o f proven trends and strategies in commercial scriptwriting with focus on the transfer o f Course Descriptions 195 to apply techniques observed in screenings to the C M N S 170 (3) (0,0,4) (F) Presentation Skills for Public Speaking development o f a Masterscene script intended for The dynamics o f organizing material, o v e r c o m i n g the writer's concept into cinematic script. The goal is portfolio development. Marketing strategics in the shyness and developing poise as a speaker in a variety Canadian f i l m , television and new media industries of contexts. Attention to research, voice training, w i l l also be discussed. nonverbal communication, and strategies for timing presentations. T h i s course uses the television labora- C M N S 145 Computer Writing (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) tory whenever possible, enabling students to see themselves on camera, as well as to benefit from W r i t i n g , editing and revising technical and non- feedback from others, as they refine their ability to technical information for the computer medium, project, to organize their thoughts, and to address especially hypertext for W e b sites. Attention to concise audience needs. style, logical organization and the limitations o f the C M N S 179 Legal C o m m u n i c a t i o n s computer screen. C M N S 152 Report W r i t i n g (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) (3) (4,0,0) (S) For students in the Legal Assistant program, C M N S 179 emphasizes clear legal usage and style, as well as Writing for the workplace: letters, memorandums, and business writing formats in law. Some attention as well reports. R e v i e w o f English basics in the context of to the fine points o f English basics. business writing. C M N S 153 (3) (3,0,1) (S) (3,0,1) (F.S) Researching and writing articles for publication in C o m m u n i c a t i o n s and the Arts Prerequisite: C M N S 190 (3) M a g a z i n e Article W r i t i n g C M N S 120 or proven English skills. news media and magazines. A n a l y s i s o f magazine readership, techniques o f researching and interviewing, The use o f language in combination with graphic and the current market for articles and development o f an other arts. Attention to job-search strategics suitable for effective prose style. Students w i l l write three articles artists and craftspersons. Writing assignments include in suitable format and submit them for publication in an article on some aspect o f art which the student w i l l established periodicals. submit for publication. A spoken presentation may be C M N S 220 (3) (3.0.1) (F.S) A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g a n d Editing required. C M N S 154 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in O u t d o o r Recreation a n d Tourism Writing and speech related to Outdoor Recreation and Tourism Management: reports, memorandums, press releases, article briefs and proposals. A spoken presentation may be required. C M N S 156 (3) A d v a n c e d M e d i a Communications (3,1,0) (S) A continuation o f C M N S 130 with emphasis on interviewing techniques in applied situations. The course also deals with public speaking and group leadership techniques. C M N S 159 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s for the Legal Secretary Strong emphasis on English basics (grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct usage), proofreading skills, and business writing. Course 196 Descriptions Prerequisite: Successful completion o f E N G 100. Researching, organizing, writing and editing extensive business documents: reports, proposals, memorandums, press releases. Particular attention to clear style and logical organization. C M N S 250 (3) Introduction t o Technical W r i t i n g (4,0,0) (S) Technical writing for science, engineering and the professions. Emphasis on definitions, process analysis, writing instructions, resume preparation, and an extended formal report. The course includes examination o f technical reports and study o f the role o f technical writing in corporate and scientific settings. C M N S 280 (3) M a r k e t i n g Commercial Fiction (3,0,1) (F,S) Preparing short stories and novels in commercial genres such as mysteries, romances, thrillers and science fiction. Discussion of the market for such fiction in Canada and the U . S . Students w i l l submit three assignments (such as three short stories or a novel synopsis and two chapters) in marketable form. Students should discuss their plans with the instructor before registering. CMNS 290 (3) Marketing a Non-Fiction Book (3,0,1) (F,S) Planning, organizing, researching and writing a publishable non-fiction book. Survey of potential markets, development o f a detailed outline, and production o f a proposal including a query letter, CMPT 154 (3) Object Oriented Programming II Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (Su) C M P T 153 with a m i n i m u m C grade or permission o f the instructor. Continuation o f object-oriented programming and design using C + +. CMPT 155 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Quantitative Methods for Managers Prerequisite: Acceptance into the full-time program or permission o f the instructor. outline, and sample chapters for submission to an A survey o f the basic quantitative tools used to aid appropriate publisher. Students should discuss their decision making. Financial and statistical concepts, plans with the instructor before registering. methods and applications w i l l be examined. CMNS 354 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Advanced Communications Skills and Resources for Tourism Management CMPT 180 (3) Microcomputer Applications I Prerequisites: C M N S 154 or its equivalent, plus computer literacy and Internet access. (3,0,1) (S) Provides an orientation to microcomputers in business; including word processing, communicating with operating systems and spreadsheets. Intended for students registered in the Open University Tourism Management degree program, C M N S 354 is delivered in a modular format, and is aimed at developing advanced skills in written and verbal communications, including technical writing, presentation skills, and information technology applications. CMNS 356 (3) Advanced Media Communications (3.0,1) (S) Provides a basic understanding of systems concepts and development o f specific skills: form design, coding, flow charting, life-cycle phases and related written communication. (3,0,1) (S) A continuation of C M N S 130 with emphasis on interviewing techniques in applied situations. The course also deals with public speaking and group leadership techniques. CMPT 152 (3) Structured Programming CMPT 182 (3) Introduction to Systems (3,0,1) (S) Introduction to programming logic and program design. This course concentrates on planning, designing and charting programs for business related problems. The main part o f the course is theory based with some hands-on practical work in the latter weeks using a modern programming language. CMPT 184 Visual Basic (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Prerequisite: C M P T 152 and C M P T 180 with a m i n i m u m C grade or permission o f the instructor. Application of object oriented visual development techniques to produce W i n d o w s applications. A l s o a foundation o f the W i n d o w s programming tools. CMPT 189 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Intro to a Third Generation Language Prerequisite: C grade. B C O P I 3 l or C M P T 152 with m i n i m u m Organization and writing o f programs, program structure and language, text editing and compilation. CMPT 153 (1.5) Object Oriented Programming I Prerequisite: mum (3,0,1) (S) C M P T 152 or B C O P 131 with a mini- C grade or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to object oriented programming using Visual Basic in the W i n d o w s environment. Further, students w i l l learn how to handle I/O for disk and reports. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing typical business programs. CMPT 191 (3) Accounting for Managers I (3,0,1) (S) Develops an understanding of the elements o f the accounting cycle. Introduces basic accounting concepts and procedures as a basis for financial decisions. Course Descriptions 197 Emphasis will be placed on accounting information, systems and control. CMPT 276 (1.5) Projects in Industry - Practicum CMPT 222 (3) Microcomputer Applications II Work experience with host companies for the purpose of applying knowledge to complete an industryoriented project. (3,0,1) (S) C M P T 180 with a minimum 'C grade or permission of the instructor. (1.5,0,.5)(F) Prerequisite: Provides a basic understanding of microcomputer concepts, hardware and software selection criteria, and system and application software. Provides hands-on experience with Windows, spreadsheets, presentation graphics and data base management. CMPT 223 (3) Microcomputer Applications III (3,0,1) (F) C M P T 293 with a minimum C grade or permission of the instructor. Prerequisite: A project based course where students implement an on-line computer system applying analysis and design concepts from the System Development Life Cycle. (3,0,1) (Su) C M P T 222 with a minimum C grade or permission of the instructor. Prerequisite: Students will explore advanced database concepts, including automation techniques, using popular Windows-based D B M S software. The following topics arc included in the course: the planning, creation and maintenance of databases, the development of information retrieval techniques, the design and customization of forms, the creation and use of macros and modules in an automated system. CMPT 224 (3) Microcomputer Applications IV CMPT 289 (3) Systems Implementation (3,0,1) (F,Su) C O M M 290 (3) Quantitative Methods for Business (4,0,0)(F) A study of standard quantitative methods used in business and industry, including decision theory and basic probability. The study of computer software packages is included. C O M M 291 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Applications of Statistics in Business Prerequisite: C- or better in C O M M 290 The methods and applications of statistics in business; continuous random variables; sampling; estimation of parameters; hypotheses testing and regression analysis. Prerequisite: C M P T 223 with a minimum ' C grade or permission of the instructor. C O M M 292 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Principles of Organizational Behaviour This course covers the application of graphics and desktop publishing development techniques in the production of presentations in a Windows and web pages environment. A solid foundation in computer hardware and trouble shooting techniques is also included. Behaviour in organizations as it affects people or individuals, their relationships with others, their performance in groups and their effectiveness at work. CMPT 230 Operating Systems (3) (3,0,1) (F) C M P T 184, C M P T 223 with a minimum C grade or permission of the instructor. Prerequisite: Comprehensive knowledge of the widely used operating systems: U N I X , MS-DOS and Windows-NT. Some emphasis on file structures and recovery from hardware/software errors as well as the operating system's Job Control Language and web server installation. Course 198 Descriptions C O M M 293 Financial Accounting (3) (4,0,0) (F) An introduction to the construction and interpretation of financial statements and reports including the balance sheet, income statement, statement of retained earnings and the statement of change in financial position. C O M M 294 Managerial Accounting Prerequisite: (4) (6,0,0) (S) C- or better in C O M M 293 Introduction to the development and use of accounting, information for management planning and control and the development of cost information for financial reports. C O M M 297 (3) Capital Markets and Institutions (4,0,0) (S) C O M P 110 (4) (4,0,1.3) (F,S,Su) Fundamentals o f P r o g r a m m i n g Introduction to the economic environment in which Prerequisite: Math 12 with at least a " B " grade, or at businesses operate including the role o f the Bank o f least a " C - " grade in M A T H 105. A t least a " B " grade Canada. Analysis of domestic and international money i n C S 12 or C O M P l ( ) l . markets and institutions and the basic capital asset valuation models. C O M M 392 Labour Relations A disciplined approach to modular program design. The course emphasizes the design o f data structures (3) (4,0,0) (S) and the development of algorithms, with applications to areas o f theoretical computing science. Compilation and execution processes and associated data structures A n introduction to union-management relations which are studied. Topics include data abstraction and includes the study of trade union history and structure, abstract data types, dynamic data structures, strings, the collective bargaining process and labour legislation. stacks and lists, recursion, searching and sorting methods. C O M P 101 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) C o m p u t e r s and their Applications This course is designed for science students with a solid foundation in modular algorithm design using a Prerequisite: Math 11 with at least " B " grade, or at high-level language such as Pascal, w h o wish to least " C - " grade in M A T H 095, or permission o f the continue with computing science as a core or elective instructor. in the first year. Together with C O M P 111, it forms the A n introduction to the basic concepts o f computer hardware and software, operating systems, applications software and programming, and a study o f some of the social and ethical implications o f the increasing use o f computers. prerequisite for the second year computing science Students w i l l gain experience with a microcomputer Prerequisite: A least a " C - " grade in C O M P 110. operating system, various software packages including Corequisite: M A T H 110 or 1 16/117. word processor, spreadsheet and database, and an A theoretical and practical introduction to concepts of computing and machine organization. O n the theoretical side, the course deals with the issues o f computability and solvability o f problems, and introduces the Turing machine as a model o f an abstract computer. Practical experience with programming in a low-level language exposes the student to the fundamentals o f number representation, organization of memory, implementation of high level language instructions, operations of assemblers, linkers and loaders, execution o f programs, and processing o f interrupts and system calls. interpreted programming language environment. The course also includes an introduction to problem solving, algorithm design and computer programming. This course serves as an introduction to C o m p u t i n g Science for students who do not have previous computing experience. It also serves as a good science option for students in Arts or Commerce. C O M P 102 (3) Introduction t o P r o g r a m m i n g (3,0,1) (F) Corequisite: M A T H 110 or 116/117 or permission o f the instructor. program. C O M P 111 (3) Fundamentals o f C o m p u t i n g (4,2,0) (F,S) C O M P 133 (1) (1,1,0) (S) N o t e : This course is intended for students registered in Scheme a n d C o m p u t e r P r o g r a m m i n g the Engineering program, and other students may Prerequisite: A "C-" grade or better in C O M P 110 or enrol only with the permission of the instructor. permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to computer programming emphasizing principles of functional decomposition and procedural abstraction; principles of problem solving and algorithm design, basic techniques for representing and manipulating problem data. The student w i l l learn how to design, develop and document well-structured programs. N o programming experience is necessary, but previous exposure to microcomputers is helpful. A n introduction to the programming language Scheme. Scheme is an ideal language for illustrating and clarifying fundamental computer programming concepts. It is a small language and easy to learn quickly, yet supports powerful facilities or abstraction and generalization. This course uses Scheme to investigate concepts such as data abstraction, procedural abstraction, recursion, functional programming and objectoriented programming. Course Descriptions 199 C O M P 201 (4) (4,0,1.3) (F.S) C o m p u t e r Systems and N e t w o r k s ECON 100 (3) Introduction t o Economics Prerequisite: This course traces the development of, and conflicting A " B " grade in C O M P 101. A n introduction to the concepts o f operating systems in the context o f practical applications. This course is intended to give students a well-rounded background in working with a variety of computer systems including stand-alone D O S / W i n d o w s computers, multi-user U n i x environments, and networks. Applications include: customising a microcomputer system using initialization and batch files; using U n i x commands and writing shell scripts; managing network files; printing; users and security in a client/server system. C O M P 212 (3) C o m p u t e r Design a n d Architecture Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F.S) views on, the nature of the capitalist economic system. It focuses on the historical development o f capitalist society and the divergent interpretations o f the operation o f capitalism as found in the writings of such economists as A d a m Smith, D a v i d Ricardo, K a r l M a r x , J . M . Keynes and M i l t o n Friedman. It deals with contemporary issues and such basic concepts as supply and demand. ECON 111 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Principles of M i c r o e c o n o m i c T h e o r y This course presents a study o f the theoretical constructs o f consumer behaviour and the operation of A " C - " grade or better in C O M P 111. business firms in the market economy under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, monopoly and A n introduction to the design and analysis of digital monopolistic competition. Included is the analysis of computer circuitry. Hardware storage o f numeric and the firm's equilibrium condition and the determinants logic values. Introduction to arithmetic/logic digital of income distribution. circuitry and integrated circuits. Design and analysis o f combinational and sequential logic circuits including adders, comparators, decoders, multiplexors and counters. Finite state machines and state equations. M S I and L S I components: registers, counters, R A M . ECON 112 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) Principles of M a c r o e c o n o m i c Theory Prerequisite: E C O N 111. This course presents the formal Keynesian theory o f C O M P 222 Data Structures Prerequisite: (4) (5.3,0,0) (F) income determination and its contemporary critiques. Included is the study of the possible causes and A " C - " grade or better in C O M P 111 or solutions to unemployment and inflation and the importance of the international economy. Government permission o f the instructor. fiscal and monetary policies arc examined in detail. A study o f frequently used data structures and algorithms for manipulating them. T h i s course emphasizes abstract data types and object-oriented programming. Topics studied include lists, stacks, queues, trees, sets, tables and graphs, static and dynamic implementations of these data types, recursion, analysis of the algorithms, searching and sorting. CRIM 101 (3) Introduction t o C r i m i n o l o g y (4,0,0) (F,S) This course is intended to introduce students to the analysis of the relationship between crime and society. The core concept is that " c r i m e " is embedded in social structure and process and therefore must be understood in relation to rather than apart from " n o r m a l " social activity. A variety o f classical and contemporary perspectives on the definition, causes and consequences o f crime w i l l be explored and student analysis of contemporary issues involving crime in Canadian ECON 207 M a n a g e r i a l Economics Prerequisite: (3) E C O N 1 1 1 and I 12. This course is an application o f microeconomics theory to a variety o f management and planning decisions such as output maximization and cost m i n i m i z a t i o n given the constraints faced by firms. ECON 210 M o n e y a n d Banking Prerequisite: (3) This course is designed to facilitate an understanding of financial markets and financial institutions both in Canada and in other major industrial countries. The course w i l l examine current issues in the regulation o f financial institutions and analyze the factors behind the determination of exchange and interest rates. t Course Descriptions (4,0,0) E C O N 111 and 112. society w i l l be encouraged. 200 (4,0,0) ECON 211 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, M A T H 108 or 110 or 116/117. This course presents an in-depth look at such topics as consumer behaviour, production, exchange, equilibrium o f the firm under different market structures, management, utility regulation and pricing, international trade, income distribution, taxation, education and health care. ECON 291 Public Policy II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) E C O N 111 and 112. factor markets, and economic welfare. N o t transferable The course involves an examination o f current govern- to S F U . ment macroeconomic policies, including fiscal and (Students registered in the Commerce program w i l l be given priority.) tional finance and exchange rate management, federal provincial relations, etc. ECON 212 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis Prerequisite: monetary policies, debt management policies, interna- E C O N 111 and 112, M a t h 108 or 110 or 116/117. EDUC 155 (4.5) (6,0,0) (F) Human Growth and Development I Course material spans the period from conception through the preschool years and examines physical, The course presents an in-depth look at such topics as cognitive, language, and social-emotional growth and income and employment theory, monetary theory, the development. A n introductory study of theories, open economy, economic fluctuations and growth. N o t principles o f development, and child study techniques transferable to S F U . is included. ECON 250 (3) (4.0,0) (F) Economic History of the Pre-lndustrial Era EDUC 166 (2.25) (3,0) (F) Human Growth and Development 1 - Part A Prerequisite: A n introductory study of theories and principles of E C O N 111 and 112, or permission o f the instructor. development focusing on conception through 24 This course provides a broad sweep o f economic months. history from the O l d Stone A g e to the Industrial R i v e r Civilizations, Classical Antiquity and Europe in EDUC 167 (2.25) (3,0) (S) Human Growth and Development 1 - Part B the M i d d l e Ages are studied, while emphasis is placed Theories, principles o f development and child study on the transition from feudalism in Europe to early techniques focusing on physical, cognitive, language forms o f capitalism. (Students cannot receive credit for and social-emotional growth and development from 24 both E C O N 250 and the former 120.) through 60 months. ECON 252 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Economic History of the Industrial Era EDUC 170 Interpersonal Skills Revolution. The economics o f the prehistoric era, the Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, or permission o f the instructor. (1.5) (2.0,0) (F) A n introductory course in w h i c h students focus on the development o f self awareness and increased under- This course provides a study o f the Industrial Revolu- standing o f others. Students w i l l learn basic c o m m u n i - tion and subsequent economic growth in the context of cation concepts and practice skills which contribute to several countries, including Canada. effective interpersonal relationships. Contrast is made between the paths of development of EDUC 171 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Caring and Learning Environments today's industrial economies and those nations now attempting to industrialize. (Students cannot receive credit for both E C O N 252 and the former 121.) This course introduces the student to various programs for young children. The role o f the Early C h i l d h o o d ECON 290 Public Policy I Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) Educator, learning environments and the value of play are examined. E C O N 111 and 112. The course involves an examination of current government microeconomic policies, including resource Course Descriptions 201 EDUC 172 (1.5) G u i d i n g Y o u n g Children I (2,0,0) (F) This course develops a theoretical framework o f EDUC 254 Theoretical Perspectives (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course provides an introduction to the history and guidance principles and techniques which support philosophy o f E C C E . Major contemporary issues are children's optimal development. examined. International childcare is discussed. EDUC 173 (1.5) Curriculum D e v e l o p m e n t I (2,4.0) (F) EDUC 270 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introduction t o W o r k i n g w i t h Families Based on the philosophy that play provides the T h i s course is designed to develop a beginning under- foundation for children's growth and development, this standing of an effective relationship between the Early experiential workshop course focuses on learning C h i l d h o o d Educator and the c h i l d ' s family. C o m m u - environments, curriculum planning and teaching nity resources w i l l be researched. strategics. EDUC 175 (1.5) Observing a n d Recording (2,0,0) (F) EDUC 271 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introduction t o Centre O r g a n i z a t i o n A n introductory look at some o f the administrative A course which develops skill in objectively observing and recording the behaviour of young children. Weekly supervised observations form the major part o f the course. Different kinds o f observational techniques are explored. The uses o f teacher observations arc examined. aspects o f operating a centre for young children. T h i s course assumes a knowledge of curriculum and daily program planning, and identifies necessary functions relating indirectly to children; e.g., handling finances, hiring staff, leadership and management, cleaning and maintenance, policies and procedures, etc. Provincial legislation regulating child care is examined. Steps to EDUC 176 (3) A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum I (2,0,6) (F) This introductory practicum is arranged by the College. It provides the student with opportunities to observe young children and, at a beginning level, to plan, implement and evaluate activities under the supervision of a qualified sponsor teacher. W e e k l y seminar discussions help students integrate theory and practice. EDUC 177 (4.5) (S) Observing and R e c o r d i n g / A p p l i e d T h e o r y — Practicum I (Part-time programs only) The student w i l l develop skill in observing, recording and documenting the behaviour o f young children. opening a centre w i l l also be discussed. EDUC 272 (1.5) G u i d i n g Y o u n g Children II (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l extend the student's repertoire o f guidance/teaching techniques. The focus is on responding to the needs o f the individual child, on promoting a positive self concept and on fostering prosocial behaviour. EDUC 273 (1.5) Curriculum D e v e l o p m e n t II (2,4,0) (S) The student w i l l acquire further knowledge, experience and skill in planning, implementing and evaluating learning environments for groups of children. Based on observations, the student w i l l begin to interpret behaviours and develop program strategies while participating in this introductory practicum. EDUC 275 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) H u m a n G r o w t h a n d D e v e l o p m e n t II This course reviews the major theories o f human EDUC 220 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Health, Safety a n d N u t r i t i o n of Y o u n g Children childhood in the areas o f physical, social-emotional Through the use o f lecture, videos and assignments, the and cognitive development. development and changes that occur during middle student w i l l be able to recognize the c o m m o n signs and appropriate to a centre setting, recognizing situations EDUC 276 (4) A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum II requiring emergency care; understand the role o f T h i s is a five-week, full-time practicum. If taken, healthy eating as it relates to normal child development however, on a part-time basis, the same number o f symptoms of childhood illness and plan health care within the context o f the preschooler's daily life and hours are required. W o r k i n g with a qualified Early environment; and follow valid nutrition guidelines for C h i l d h o o d Educator students extend their competencies their own optimum health. Course 202 Descriptions in program planning and evaluation. W e e k l y seminar discussions focus on integrating theory and practice. EDUC 356 (1.5) Infant a n d Toddler Practicum (F) Through work experience in an infant/toddler centre EDUC 277 (4) A p p l i e d Theory - Practicum III the student learns and practises how to protect, support and enrich the lives o f young children. This is, generally, a five-week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number of hours are required. In this practicum, students integrate and consolidate knowledge and skills gained throughout the program. The student w i l l be involved in all aspects o f providing quality care and education for young children. EDUC 357 (1.5) Infant a n d Toddler Practicum (F) This practicum focuses on working with parents and the evaluation of a quality program. These broader aspects o f group care arc central to the provision o f quality care for infants and toddlers. EDUC 290 (4.5) EDUC 291 (4) EDUC 292 (4) Directed Independent Studies (F,S,Su) (F,S,Su) (F.S.Su) EDUC 358 Special Needs Practicum (1.5) (F) Under the guidance of a qualified Special Needs Early Childhood Educator the student practises how to Directed individual practicums. See coordinator. EDUC 350 (2) A d v a n c e d Child D e v e l o p m e n t (2.5,0,0) (F) The course w i l l focus on the similarities and differences of typical and atypical development o f young children. EDUC 352 Centre Operations EDUC 359 Special Needs Practicum (1.5) (F) This practicum focuses on working with parents and the evaluation of a quality program. Students refine (2) (2.5,0,0) (S) The student w i l l gain knowledge of the broad concepts and principles involved in the effective administration and management o f a child care centre and the skill required to fulfil the role of a manager/director/ administrator. The focus w i l l be on planning schedules, routines, space and program activities for infants and toddlers. Individual and small group activities which promote self-esteem, language, social behaviours and self-help skills w i l l be planned. G o a l setting and effective guidance w i l l be discussed. EDUC 355 (1.5) Physical Care and Safety their skills of inclusive programming for groups o f children. ENGL 010 Language Skills (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A n intensive course in basic language skills to enable the student to meet the demands o f an academic college program. C u r r i c u l u m w i l l evolve from the EDUC 353 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Program Planning for Infants a n d Toddlers (2,0,0) (F) The student w i l l develop an awareness o f the Early Childhood Educator's role and responsibility in preparing a safe, healthy environment, and in planning routine procedures for infants and toddlers to ensure their needs w i l l be met. program activities which include children who need extra support. assessed needs o f the students. This course is not transferable to the universities. A student w i l l receive credit or no credit (not a letter grade) for the course. Certain sections of E N G L 010 are designed for the needs o f students of English as a second language. ENGL 100 Composition Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) See information on English Diagnostic Test. A course in the fundamentals of good writing, giving students intensive practice in writing for a variety o f purposes, with emphasis on the essay form. Progressively increasing emphasis is given to effective organization and development of material. Research techniques and documentation arc taught. Problems in mechanics of writing arc dealt with individually, in group discussion and by revision of essays. Certain sections of E N G L 100 arc designed for the needs o f students of English as a second language. Course Descriptions 203 ENGL 103 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Studies in C o n t e m p o r a r y Literature ENGL 190 Creative W r i t i n g A study of selected and representative 20th century A n intensive workshop course designed to help literature, including poetry, fiction, and drama. W o r k s students develop expressive skill and craftsmanship in (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) studied w i l l be chosen for their intrinsic literary merit poetry, fiction, and drama. Students must have good and may, in certain sections, also reflect a particular compositional skills and are required to write exten- theme of significance in the contemporary world. sively in their chosen genre (approximately 10 hours (When material is selected for theme, the issue under per week). They w i l l also develop an awareness, consideration w i l l be announced during the registration through written practice, o f at least one o f the other period.) The chief aim o f the course, beyond broaden- genres. Students are required to submit their writing ing the student's understanding and appreciation o f regularly for group discussion. Students w i l l be literature, is to encourage original responses in w e l l - encouraged to develop their work to the point where it developed oral and written criticism. would become acceptable for publication. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 104 Fiction (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A study o f selected 20th century short stories and novels o f intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim of the ENGL 191 Creative W r i t i n g (3) (4,0.0) (S) ENGL 200 (3) English Literature t o 1660 (4,0.0) (F) A continuation of E N G L 190. course, beyond broadening the student's understanding Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original English courses or instructor's written permission. responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. A study o f texts in all major genres by representative authors, from the medieval period to the middle 17th W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in century. This course w i l l provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame o f reference, and the essay writing and research is expected. opportunity to study selected major works in detail. ENGL 105 Poetry (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A study o f selected major and significant minor 20th century poets whose poetry is o f intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L i 00 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 201 (3) English Literature Since 1660 Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course similar to E N G L 200. but covering the later period since 1660. ENGL 202 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) C a n a d i a n Literature - B e g i n n i n g s t o M o d e r n i s m Prerequisite: ENGL 106 Drama (4.0.0) (S) A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f texts in all major genres from the origins o f A study o f selected and representative plays primarily of the 20th century. The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original Canadian literature into the modernist era. This course w i l l investigate various motifs and forms o f writing which have evolved through early Canadian literature and w h i c h continue in contemporary work. responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in ENGL 203 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Canadian Literature - M o d e r n i s m a n d B e y o n d essay writing and research is expected. Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. The continuation o f E N G L 202. becoming more intensive in the investigation o f individual, major. Course 204 Descriptions contemporary authors of poetry, novels and plays in considered. The aim o f the course is to increase the Canada . This course w i l l study the emergence o f student's knowledge of drama as an art form which has significant contemporary motifs and approaches to evolved out o f literary and cultural history and out o f performance. ENGL 205 (3) M o d e r n American Literature Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F.S) A n y combination o f two first-year ENGL 211 Studies in Short Fiction Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. English courses or instructor's written permission. A course which explores the works o f major repre- A study o f the development o f the short story and sentative authors from the late 19th century to the novella form, through an exploration o f the cultural and present day. Students w i l l closely examine selected literary history in which the genre developed and texts as literary achievements and set them within the through a detailed analysis o f representative texts. history o f American literature and the framework of Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to A m e r i c a n culture. section, although examples from both the 19th and 20th centuries w i l l be studied. The aim o f the course is to ENGL 208 (3) Studies in Fiction (The Novel) Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F,S) give the student an understanding of the development of the genre in context and of writers of major signifi- A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f the novel from various perspectives which cance to the genre. ENGL 212 (3) Traditions in Western Literature (4,0,0) (F.S) consider the evolution and diversity of the novel as a literary form. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section. The aims o f the course are to give the student an awareness o f the cultural context in Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f the literary traditions in which Western which the novel came into being and became popular, literature has developed. The course studies influential and to study selected texts closely. works o f literature (often in translation) from various periods and countries with reference to mythology, ENGL 209 Studies in Poetry Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) religion, and history. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the way in which these works have helped to form Western A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. literary convention and a Western construction o f history. The aim of the course is to familiarize the student with these traditions so the student may A study o f individual poets or schools o f poetry selected by the instructor and drawn from any era between Chaucer's time and the present. Prosody, poetic forms, and critical approaches w i l l be studied, as well as the historical and cultural contexts of the poems and of poetic movements. The aims o f the course are to increase the student's knowledge o f the craft o f poetry and to study selected texts closely. understand how Western literature has evolved, and to present to the student an objective history o f literary convention against which to read literature. ENGL 213 (3) Readings in W o r l d Literature Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F.S) A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. ENGL 210 Studies in Drama Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study of dramatic literature from various perspec- A course in world literature beyond the Western tradition. The specific focus w i l l be announced at the time o f registration. ENGL 290 (3) Creative W r i t i n g - Poetry (4,0,0) (F,S) tives: the examination o f dramatic types from various periods with reference to the history and development of dramatic forms, o f sub-genres o f drama, o f tech- Prerequisites: E N G L I 9 0 a n d I 9 l or instructor's written permission. niques in dramatic literature and performance, and o f A n intensive workshop in the writing o f poetry, the relationship of literary text to performance. Major concentrating on furthering the student's knowledge o f plays from various periods and national theatres w i l l be current poetic forms while at the same time increasing Course Descriptions 205 awareness Of her or his own voice, her or his individual ground for writing, and the development o f her or his own poetic. ENSC 503 Environmental L a w (3) (4,0,0) (F) The current status o f environmental law in Canada, Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f contem- particularly within the province o f British C o l u m b i a , porary work, both poems and statements that poets w i l l be examined. The course w i l l include a critical have made about their own poetics. Students w i l l have analysis o f important case studies and current environ- the opportunity to try a variety of forms, for instance, mental assessment guidelines. the short lyric, the serial poem, narrative verse, prose poetry. ENGL 291 (3) Creative W r i t i n g - Fiction (4,0,0) (F.S) ENSC 504 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Planning a n d Project Management A n introduction to basic management skills which have Prerequisites: E N G L 190 and I 9 l or instructor's written permission. A n intensive workshop in the writing o f fiction. The course w i l l concentrate on furthering the student's knowledge o f the state o f current fiction and give students the opportunity to develop an awareness o f voice, rhythm, dialogue, diction, character, and pointof-view. practical value in environmental planning and decision making. Critical thinking, risk management, project planning, budget management, and community involvement in environmental planning w i l l be discussed. ENSC 505 (3) Environmental Impact Assessment (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f works o f A n examination o f the environmental impact assess- contemporary fiction and to discuss various techniques. ment process ( E I A ) as a tool in environmental decision They w i l l have the opportunity o f trying out these making. This course w i l l review current federal and techniques in both short and extended forms of fiction. provincial procedural requirements and the relationship ENSC 500 A p p l i e d Ecology tion o f E I A and social issues and the role o f public between E I A and other regulatory processes. Integra- (4.5) (4,4,0) (F) hearings w i l l also be discussed. Case studies w i l l be A n examination of the impact of human activities on ecosystem structure and dynamics. H u m a n interactions with ecosystems arc emphasized as well as the princi- used as focal points for discussion. ENSC 506 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Land Use Impact and Sustainability ples o f sustainable development and pollution ecology. ENSC 501 (4.5) (4,4,0) (S) Environmental Toxicology a n d Waste Management A n investigation of the toxicology of exposure to environmental contaminants, in humans and other organisms, in a range of environments. Measurement, monitoring and remediation techniques are examined. ENSC 502 Environmental Ethics (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n application of ethical concepts to environmental issues. Topics w i l l include environmental decision making, the relationship between market economics and the ethics of environmental preservation, and the implications o f environmental ethics for various sectors of society. This course w i l l investigate environmental issues arising from c o m m o n land use practices and critically evaluate approaches to sustainable land use and land use conflict. Topics include linear developments such as highways and transmission lines, site contamination, land fills, erosion, and acid rock drainage. Remediation, evaluation of land use competition, and native land claims w i l l be discussed. Case studies w i l l be used for illustration. ENSC 507 (3) (4,0,0) (F) C o m p u t e r A p p l i c a t i o n s in E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science A n introduction to the use of computers for simulation, modelling and geographically-based information storage in environmental science. ENSC 508 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Seminar: Selected Topics in E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science I This seminar series is designed to provide a forum for discussion between faculty, students, and invited Course 206 Descriptions guests. T o p i c s w i l l be chosen on the basis o f student ENSJ 135, 185, 235, 285, (1) (3,0,*) (F,S) interest, current environmental issues, and the avail- 335, 385, 435, 485 ability o f guest speakers. Jazz E n s e m b l e I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII (by a u d i t i o n only) ENSC 509 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Seminar: Selected Topics in E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science II Ensemble for development of phrasing and sight reading skills. A continuation o f E N S C 508. ENSC 510 Participation in the Capilano College large Jazz •Performances arc a mandatory part o f the course. (4.5) (2,4,0) (Su) Field School ENSJ 136, 186, 236, 286, (1) (2,0,*) (F,S) Prerequisites: Successful completion o f E N S C 5 0 0 - 336, 386, 436, 486 Instrumental Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V . VI, VII, VIII 509. (by a u d i t i o n only) Practical experience in data collection, field techniques, Students rehearse in small "like instrument" ensembles and project development. Most o f this course w i l l be under an instructor's supervision in preparation for a conducted off the main campus at strategic environ- number o f performances. mental locations. Students w i l l be given assignments which emphasize instrumentation, environmental monitoring, data collection, and teamwork. •Performances arc a mandatory part o f the course. ENSJ 140, 190, 240, 290, (1) (4,0,*) (F.S) 340, 390, 440, 490 ENSC 511 (4.5) (4,0,0) (Su) Percussion Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science Practicum A n ensemble comprised exclusively o f percussion Prerequisites: Successful completion o f E N S C 5 0 0 - instruments o f both definite and indefinite pitch. 509. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpre- A n opportunity to apply classroom theory through tive skills. work experience. This is an in-depth assignment •Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. involving work placement or directed studies in resource-based, industrial, or public sectors. Students ENSJ 220, 270, 320, 370 sponsored by a specific sector or employer may be able Guitar/Bass Ensemble III, IV, V , VI (1) (3,0,0) (F.S) to fulfil this requirement under supervision in their Prerequisite: E N S J 170 or audition normal work place. A performance ensemble comprised primarily o f ENSJ 105, 155, 205, 255, (1) (3,0,*) (F.S) 305, 355, 405, 455 bassists and guitarists. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. Jazz Choir (by a u d i t i o n only) Rehearsal and performance in one o f Capilano C o l lege's Jazz Choirs. The intent o f the class is to build group singing abilities in such areas as phrasing, blending and intonation. *Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. ENSJ 306, 356, 406, 456 (1) (2,0,0) (F,S) Jazz V o c a l Ensemble (by a u d i t i o n only) This course includes performance o f various styles o f a cappclla and accompanied vocal ensemble repertoire with an emphasis on jazz literature and small group performance, i.e. one singer per part. ENSJ 120, 170 (1) (3,0,0) (F,S) Guitar/Bass Ensemble I, II Performance in guitar/bass ensemble for the develop- E N S M 100 (1-0) (4,0,0) (F) Choir I ment o f sight reading and phrasing skills. Emphasis A n exploration o f choral music from the Renaissance w i l l be on single-note reading in all areas o f the neck. to the present. Emphasis w i l l be placed on ensemble, Credit from this course is not applicable to the Degree tuning, tone quality, musical phrasing, balance, diction progam. and professional presentation. A varied concert program w i l l be learned and several performances w i l l be given each semester. A n audition is required. Course Descriptions 207 E N S M 110 (1.0) (4,0.0) (F) Orchestra I Rehearsal and performance of concert repertoire. Prospective students must contact the M u s i c Department at least one week before classes commence to arrange for an audition. Persons winning a position through audition w i l l be allowed to register. E N S M 150 Choir II (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation o f E N S M 100. E N S M 160 Orchestra II (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) A continuation o f E N S M 150. E N S M 210 Orchestra III (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation o f E N S M 200. E N S M 260 Orchestra IV ESL. 041 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) U p p e r Intermediate S p e a k i n g a n d Listening This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Course topics include idioms, impromptu speeches, oral reports, relaxed conversational forms, pronunciation, and listening practice. This course is designed to improve students' reading comprehension and vocabulary in preparation for the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Course topics include identifying main ideas and details, vocabulary development, word families and context clues. ESL. 049 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) U p p e r Intermediate W r i t i n g a n d G r a m m a r A continuation o f E N S M 160. E N S M 250 Choir IV This course prepares students with the grammar and writing skills required for higher level courses such as E S L . 049. ESL. 048 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) U p p e r Intermediate Reading a n d V o c a b u l a r y A continuation o f E N S M 110. E N S M 200 Choir III ESL. 039 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) L o w e r Intermediate G r a m m a r a n d W r i t i n g T h i s course helps students develop the grammar and writing skills required for the Advanced L e v e l . Stress is on sentence structure, grammar, and short writing assignments. ESL. 051 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) L o w e r A d v a n c e d Listening a n d S p e a k i n g A continuation o f E N S M 210. ESL. 031 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) L o w e r Intermediate Speaking and Listening This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the Upper Intermediate L e v e l . Course topics include idioms, formal/informal E n g l i s h , oral reports, listening practice, vocabulary and pronunciation. This course assists students in developing the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the Upper A d v a n c e d L e v e l . The focus w i l l be on idioms, relaxed speech structures, listening to lectures and note taking, oral presentations, rhythm, stress and intonation. ESL. 058 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) L o w e r A d v a n c e d Reading a n d V o c a b u l a r y This course introduces students to reading skills and ESL. 038 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) L o w e r Intermediate Reading and V o c a b u l a r y vocabulary development at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Stress w i l l be placed on improving comprehension, increasing reading speed, using context clues and inferencing. The focus o f this course is on the development o f basic reading, comprehension and vocabulary skills while learning s k i m m i n g and scanning, identifying main ESL. 059 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) L o w e r A d v a n c e d W r i t i n g and G r a m m a r ideas, using the dictionary, using context clues, and understanding and stating pronoun referents. Course 208 Descriptions T h i s course introduces more complex grammatical structures used in controlled and free paragraph writing. It prepares students for the sentence and writing skills required for E S L . 069. ESL. 061 (3) (4,0.0) (F,S) U p p e r A d v a n c e d Listening a n d S p e a k i n g This course assists students in developing the listening ESL. 071 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Listening and S p e a k i n g and speaking skills required for entry into College This course helps students improve their oral and Preparatory English courses. The focus w i l l be on the listening skills to prepare them for college studies. comprehension and discussion o f academic lecture material, idioms and relaxed speech structures, oral reports, debates, listening improvement, rhythm and intonation. ESL. 062 Students w i l l practise speaking through speeches, dialogues, oral reports and summarizing. Through group work and role-playing, both formal and informal speech patterns w i l l be explored. Vocabulary develop- (3) (4,0,0) (F) A d v a n c e d C o n v e r s a t i o n f o r Business ment w i l l also be stressed as students incorporate new words and expressions in their speech. This course is only open to students in the Office ESL. 072 Assistant!ESL program. College Preparatory Listening a n d S p e a k i n g for This course assists students in improving their c o m m u - (3) (4,0,0) (F) Business nications skills up to the level required for working in a This course is only open to students in the Office business/office environment. Assistant/ESL program. * E S L . 066 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) TOEFL Preparation I A continuation of work started in E S L . 062. T o assist students in improving their communication skills up to the level required for working in a business/office This course helps students improve their T O E F L environment. scores. Students w i l l learn how to enhance their (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) grammar, as well as the listening and reading skills * E S L . 076 needed for the T O E F L test and other English profi- TOEFL P r e p a r a t i o n II ciency tests. A continuation o f E S L . 066 * These courses are fully funded by tuition fees paid, * These courses are fully funded by tuition fees paid, and w i l l be offered only if there are enough students. and w i l l be offered only if there are enough students. ESL. 067 (3) (4,0,0) (F) ESL. 078 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) A d v a n c e d Reading and V o c a b u l a r y f o r College Preparatory English Level I — Business and Vocabulary This course is only open to students in the Office This course introduces the E S L student to the basic reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the University Transfer and Career/Vocational d i v i sions. Focus w i l l be on reading comprehension at the literary, inferential and critical levels. Course material w i l l include sample texts from various content areas. Assistant/ESL program. This course assists students in developing their vocabulary and reading skills up to the level required for advanced E S L courses. ESL. 068 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) U p p e r A d v a n c e d Reading a n d V o c a b u l a r y This course is designed to raise students' reading and vocabulary skills to the level where they can enter ESL. 079 (3) Reading (4,0,0) (F,S) College Preparatory English Level I — W r i t i n g and Grammar College Preparatory English courses. Focus w i l l be on This course w i l l focus on the paragraph as the standard recognizing different types o f writing, organizational medium for written communications. It w i l l also patterns, identifying point-of-view and inferencing. introduce students to the essay as the standard medium for academic writing. The course w i l l continue to ESL. 069 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) refine the usage of all grammatical structures. Upper Advanced Writing and Grammar The emphasis in this course is on composing at the paragraph level. The aim o f this course is to bring E S L students' writing skills up to the level required for College Preparatory English courses. ESL. 081 (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Listening a n d S p e a k i n g Students w i l l learn to gain confidence in public speaking and listening to academic lectures. Various rhetori- Course Descriptions 209 cal techniques, such as debating, w i l l be introduced. FREN 1 0 1 Through group work and formal presentations, students Beginning French II w i l l have many opportunities to become more effective speakers and listeners. Prerequisite: (3) ( 4 , 1 . 7 5 , 0 ) (S) F R E N 100. This course, together with F R E N 100, covers high ESL. 0 8 8 (3) ( 4 , 0 , 0 ) (F) College Preparatory English Level II — Reading and Vocabulary This course continues the development o f reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the Univer- school French Grades 8 , 9 , 10 and 11 and prepares the student for F R E N 120. FREN 1 2 0 (3) ( 4 , 1 . 7 5 , 0 ) (F) University Preparatory French I stress w i l l be on inferencing skills, context clues and Prerequisite: F R E N 100/101 or French U or permission o f the instructor. critical reading. Students w i l l work with sample This course, together with F R E N 121, constitutes sity Transfer and Career/Vocational divisions. The reading texts from various content areas. Grade 12 French. The comprehensive approach to this course consists o f instruction in basic grammar, and the ESL. 0 8 9 (3) ( 4 , 0 , 0 ) (F.S) College Preparatory English Level II — W r i t i n g & Grammar development o f students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. Computer material is included. This course assists students in achieving proficiency in FREN 1 2 1 writing essays at pre-college and pre-univcrsity level University Preparatory French II with a m i n i m u m of E S L errors. Students w i l l develop Prerequisite: F R E N 120 ( m i n i m u m Grade C - ) or permission o f the instructor. strategies for a variety o f essay requirements for college and university courses. (3) ( 4 , 1 . 7 5 , 0 ) (S) T h i s course, together with F R E N 120, constitutes ESL. 0 9 8 (3) ( 4 , 0 , 0 ) (F,Su) College Preparatory English Level III — Reading & Vocabulary Grade 12 French. A continuation o f F R E N 120, this The primary aim o f this course is to provide E S L students with the necessary reading skills for entry into the University Transfer and Career/Vocational d i v i sions. The focus o f this course w i l l be on academic reading strategies, determining an author's tone/point of view and critical reading. Sample readings from various content areas w i l l be used. FREN 1 7 0 ESL. 0 9 9 (3) ( 4 , 0 , 0 ) (F,Su) College Preparatory English Level III — W r i t i n g 8c G r a m m a r This course refines students' awareness o f the strategies for a variety of essay structures required for college and university courses. The course w i l l also course is designed to give a limited fluency in speaking and reading as well as writing skills. (3) ( 4 , 1 . 7 5 , 0 ) (F) First Year University French I Prerequisite: Grade 12 French, F R E N 120/121 or permission o f the instructor. F R E N 170 should be taken by all students intending to proceed to a major or honours program at another institution. It continues the linguistic development o f the student by means of grammar revision, weekly written and oral exercises, compositions and appreciation o f francophone literature. FREN 1 7 1 (3) ( 4 , 1 . 7 5 , 0 ) (S) First Year University French II focus on sequencing o f ideas, essay organization skills, Prerequisite: summarizing, paraphrasing, critical reading, evaluating permission o f the instructor. sources and preparing a 1,000-word processed research A continuation o f the work done in F R E N 170. F R E N 170 ( m i n i m u m Grade C - ) or paper. FREN 2 7 0 FREN 1 0 0 (3) ( 4 , 1 . 7 5 , 0 ) (F) B e g i n n i n g French I F R E N 100 is for absolute beginners and those who do not have Grade 11 French or the equivalent. It provides an intensive introduction to the French language through written and spoken exercises, enhanced by computer practice. Course 210 Descriptions (3) ( 4 , 1 . 7 5 , 0 ) (F) Second Year University French I Prerequisite: F R E N 170/171 with a grade o f " C " or better, or permission of the instructor. This advanced course offers a review o f French grammar aimed at developing students' writing skills, and introduction to a variety o f literary texts by francophone authors and an awareness o f francophone culture through the medium of videos and music. Activities w i l l include an interactive approach to the review o f grammar, written assignments (including structural exercises), compositions and translation, and the reading o f short stories and poems. FREN 271 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Second Year University French II Prerequisite: F R E N 270 with a grade o f " C " or better, or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the work o f F R E N 270. FSCI106 Fish Health (3) A n introduction to the science o f fish health. This course examines the pathogens that frequently infect cultured salmonids. Course content examines the various groups o f pathogens and methods used to prevent, minimize the impact or treat these pathogens. FSCI 120 Computers in Fisheries (3) A n introduction to the personal computer and associated software. Course content introduces the student to word processing, spreadsheets and databases using the FSCI 100 S a l m o n i d Biology (3) A n introductory course in the basic biology of the salmonid. Course content examines the life histories, habitat and biology of these animals. integrated software program Microsoft Office. FSCI140 Field Practicum I (3) Practicums involve the student working for two 10-day periods at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be FSCI 101 Fish Culture I (3) involved in the daily activities o f these facilities working with fish culture staff. A n introduction to the theory and techniques used in content covers collection, incubation and rearing o f FSCI141 Field Practicum II salmonids. The major emphasis is on hatchery produc- Practicums involve the student w o r k i n g for two 10-day tion o f salmonids for commercial aquaculture and periods at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be the fresh water culture of salmon and trout. Course enhancement purposes. (3) involved in the daily activities of these facilities working with fish culture staff. FSCI 102 Fish Culture II (3) A continuation of F S C I 101. This course examines the FSCI 150 (3) Streamkeeper W o r k s h o p intensive culture of salmonids reared in the marine Methods used to survey, map and assess streams, based environment. Content includes an introduction to the on Modules l , 2, 3, 4, 7 and 11 o f The Streamkeepers marine environment, smolt transport, salt water Handbook" (Dept. of Fisheries and Oceans). C o m p l e - adaptation, cage culture and harvesting and processing. tion o f a comprehensive take-home assignment is FSCI 103 Water Quality offered. required for credit. A certificate of completion is (3) A n introduction to water quality with respect to intensive salmonid culture. Course content examines G E O G 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) H u m a n G e o g r a p h y : People, Places a n d Cultures water quality parameters that impact on fish production Different cultures in different landscapes are compared and methods for measuring these parameters. and contrasted to our own. T h i s course examines the FSCI 105 (3) Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding a n d G r o w t h environment, diffusion o f ideas, and cultural aspects of many issues o f human population, perception o f the resource use and urban growth, to give students a view A n introductory course in the applied aspects of into the many concerns on the human side of geogra- salmonid nutrition. Course content includes nutritional phy. requirements o f cultured salmonids, feed formulation and manufacture, feeding methods and strategics, biology of growth and growth estimation. G E O G 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Environmental G e o g r a p h y : Perception and Change There arc numerous environmental issues that reach a crisis from time to time. This course examines how wc Course Descriptions 211 perceive the environment, our lifestyles, and how our attitudes affect the environment. Such issues include our use o f water, the food we cat. herbicides and pesticides, and our overall use o f energy. This is an excellent course for those concerned about the world we live in. Lectures, seminars, informal discussions, and audiovisual materials are used to make students aware of, examine and analyze some o f the most serious concerns in the world today. The environment is i n jeopardy from our actions — what can we do about it? G E O G 112 (3) (4.2,0) (F,S) Introduction t o Earth Environments A n introductory, physical geography course about the earth's various land forms. Plate tectonics, v o l c a n i s m . weathering and erosion w i l l be explained in order to understand how a landscape develops. Studies o f glacial, coastal and fluvial features w i l l be placed in a Canadian context. Environmental changes due to human activities w i l l also be emphasized. Note: Both GEOG 112 and 114 are lab science G E O G 102 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental G e o g r a p h y : G l o b a l Concerns The focus o f this environmental course is the recognition that environmental issues are not restricted to isolated rc-gions: rather, they have become global crises. A c i d rain, the greenhouse effect, depiction o f the world's resources arc but a few o f the examples illus- courses and fulfil university science requirements. GEOG 112 can be taken either prior to, or after, GEOG 114. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. G E O G 114 W e a t h e r a n d Climate (3) (4,2,0) (F,S) trating the global scale of our environmental problems. A n introductory, physical geography course about our Identifying and understanding the processes responsible atmosphere. Principles o f meteorology and climatology for the problems arc most important: however, finding w i l l be explained in order to understand the weather we solutions is also critical to this course. experience daily and seasonally. Further studies w i l l examine how the atmosphere is connected with the GEOG 106 (3) (4,0,0) (F) British C o l u m b i a : A Regional Analysis A body o f information that is frequently missing from our education is that of the province in which we live. This course informs you about B . C . — its physical environment, the risks of living in this province, the variety o f peoples, and the economics involved in its resources. From an economic, political, historical, and cultural perspective one learns that contemporary problems arc frequently a function o f the past. For those interested in business, teaching, or wanting a basicknowledge of B . C . , this is an excellent course. N o t e : This course also serves as Canadian credit to SFU and is a component of the Development Program for Studies Professional teachers. G E O G 108 (3) Canada: A Nation of Regions (4,0,0) (F,S) The understanding o f Canada and Canadians is becoming more and more important to our economic and social well being. This course examines Canadian world's oceans and plant communities, and how humans arc modifying these natural environments. Emphasis w i l l be placed on Canadian examples. Note: Both GEOG 114 and 112 are lab science courses and fulfil university science requirements. GEOG 114 can be taken prior to, or after, GFIOG 112. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. G E O G 200 (3) (4,0,0) (S) T e c h n o l o g y a n d Economic Environments A n examination o f the concepts and themes o f economic geography in terms of production and consumption. The traditional primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary divisions in economic geography are reviewed in terms o f contemporary issues. T h e purpose of this course is to illustrate the importance o f economic processes and tools to understand our environment. G E O G 201 Urban Studies (3) (4,0,0) (S) problems and issues in terms o f the different regions in M o r e and more o f us are living in an urban w o r l d . T h i s Canada. Topics include the changing economy, cultural course is designed to examine problems and issues that diversity, urban growth, and resource management, as arise with urban living; including psychological we focus on the Maritimcs, Quebec, Ontario, the problems, the cost o f housing, transportation issues, Western provinces, and the Northern frontier. slums, suburban living, and the future direction o f cities. W h i l e this course uses local examples, it also Note: This course carries Canadian SFU and is a component of the Professional ment Program for Course 212 Studies credit to teachers. Descriptions Develop- draws on examples from other cities in the w o r l d . This course approaches these topics through field trips into the city, slides, films, and field research. Urban studies leads to careers in urban planning, real estate, land management, architecture, and urban politics as well as giving general community awareness. G E O G 205 Asia Pacific G e o g r a p h y (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course examines the Asia Pacific in terms of its social, economic, physical, historical and political geography. The emphasis is placed on the historical development and present day relationships in both East and Southeast Asia. This course introduces the concept of the Pacific Century and recognizes British Columbia's position on the Pacific. This is an excellent course for those interested in the past, present and future of the Asia Pacific region and especially for those considering a business career in this region. G E O G 214 (3) Our A t m o s p h e r i c Environment (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: GEOG 114 or permission of the instructor. This course will provide an intermediate understanding of the processes at work in our atmospheric environment. Broad topics to be covered arc atmospheric energy, moisture, and winds. These concepts will be applied to phenomena such as urban climates and air pollution at the small scale, weather and forecasting at the intermediate scale, and climate change, ozone depletion, and El Nino/Southern Oscillation on a global scale. This course will involve lectures, labs, and field work. GEOG 221 (3) M a p and A i r p h o t o Interpretation (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: At least one other Geography course. This is a second year course that is essential for those intending to make Geography their academic major. It is also appropriate for those considering careers in environmental studies, forestry, geology, archaeology, history and other disciplines that rely extensively on maps and air photos. This course uses lectures, labs and field work to cover the basic principles of map and photo interpretation, surveying and satellite imaging. Both human and physical landscapes will be analysed. Students will undertake a research project on a Lower Mainland neighbourhood. The project will involve archival research, census data analysis and field studies. It will examine how this information can be displayed through the use of various mapping techniques. GEOL 110 Physical G e o l o g y (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: None. However, experience in secondary level chemistry and physics will contribute greatly to mastering physical geology. This course views the Earth as a heat engine which continuously recycles air, water and solid earth materials. It examines how nature's recycling of these materials results in both the origin and the eventual transformation of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks. Next, it investigates how lithospheric plates interact with each other and with external recycling (atmospheric and hydrospheric cycles). Finally it considers ways people may best adapt to these everchanging Earth environments and act as stewards of Earth's environments and resources. G E O L 111 Historical G e o l o g y (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: GEOL 110 or equivalent; or GEOG 112 with instructor recommendation. This course examines the methods geologists use to deduce the origin, age and evolution of Earth and its life. These methods are then used to investigate how Earth's lithosphcre, hydrosphere and atmosphere evolved before giving rise to life, and how ever since, life has interacted with land, water and air. Next, the origin and growth of our "home" continent and adjacent ocean basins are studied. Finally, the processes and events that shaped (and are still shaping) our immediate environment are looked at in more detail. Uses and abuses of Earth resources and environments since the arrival of human beings also form part of the course. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. G E R M 100 Beginning German I (3) (4.1.75,0) (F) A comprehensive introduction to the German language: comprehension and speaking are reinforced through reading, writing and computer programs. Films, tapes, activities, etc. help develop an awareness of the cultures of the German-speaking countries. G E R M 101 B e g i n n i n g G e r m a n II (3) (4,1.75.0) (S) Prerequisite: GERM 100 (minimum Grade C), German 9 or 10, Beginner's German 11, or the equivalent with written permission of the instructor. This course is a continuation of GERM 100 and must be taken in order to realize first year level college/ university German. GERM 101 should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following GERM 100. Course Descriptions 7\3 G E R M 200 Intermediate German I Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) G E R M 101 (minimum Grade C+), GRPH 143 A d v a n c e d Graphics IV (.75) (3,0,0) (S) Graphics production requires a combination o f techno- Grade II or 12 German or the equivalent with written logical and aesthetic skills. Augmenting the graphics permission o f the instructor. Placement tests are design skills developed so far, the student is introduced available. to advanced graphics production techniques and tools G E R M 200 reviews basic German grammar and in this workshop-based course. usage, and introduces students to modern German literature. It aims through the discussion o f the cultures and concerns o f the German-speaking peoples to GRPH 152 Life D r a w i n g I (3) (4,0,0) (F) increase the ability to communicate in the fullest sense Drawing from observation o f the human figure; of the term. exercises in developing visual perception, memory and basic drawing skills. Study o f the proportions o f the G E R M 201 Intermediate G e r m a n II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) human body. L i n e characteristics in pencil, pen, contc and charcoal techniques. Contour, cross-contour, G E R M 200 (minimum Grade C ) , German 12 (or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor.) Placement tests are available. Continues the review and development o f German language skills at the Intermediate level. Together with G E R M 200 it completes the requirements for second year college/university German. gesture and volume drawings from draped and undraped models. GRPH 154 General D r a w i n g I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to representational drawing, mediums and techniques. D r a w i n g as an expression o f observation and perception of visual aspects of environment (1.5) GRPH 140 Graphics I (3,0,0) (S) and visual thinking. Study o f graphic means o f representing objects, structure, planes, volumes, space and Enhancement of visual literacy through the development o f generic graphics skills and abilities. Students develop a critical awareness of different presentation formats, learn to make an effective visual analysis, and develop facility in solving graphic problems within the computer environment. The focus is on the graphical aspects in the design of the user interface and the production o f effective b/w graphics for the design o f an interactive multimedia project. GRPH 141 Graphics II (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) Further investigation of basic graphic skills introduced surface characteristics. Learning to perceive, isolate and select visual elements for descriptive rendering in pencil and charcoal. GRPH 155 (3) M e d i u m s a n d Techniques I (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to basic painting and illustration techniques. Field location drawing and wash studies using watercolour, pencil, coloured pencil, ink and combinations o f the above. D e v e l o p i n g location studies into more controlled, finished classroom works. GRPH 156 (3) Visual Communications I (4,3,0) (F) in G R P H 140, Graphics I. In addition, students learn to produce graphics for interactive multimedia using Introduction o f various graphic design styles, their colour, objects and paths. Introduction to layout for historic significance, the social environments in w h i c h print publication. these styles were conceived and technical innovations GRPH 142 Graphics III design. Application of selected styles to practical, which designers used to advance modern graphic (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) contemporary assignments with techniques o f conceptualizing and layout composition demonstrated in a In addition to layout for print publication, students lecture form. Introduction of basic photography extend graphic exploration to focus on "time" as a darkroom techniques (b/w print processing and the design element in interactive multimedia. Sequential photogram). Students are introduced to various c o m - presentations arc coupled with the basic rules learned munication problems and solve these problems with from G R P H 140 and 141. Students learn to produce specified b/w mediums. graphics for use with M a c r o m i n d Director. Course 214 Descriptions GRPH 157 (3) Visual C o m m u n i c a t i o n s II (4,3,0) (S) with little or no computer experience and serves as the basis for future courses in electronic composition, Prerequisite: G R P H 156 with at least a " C " grade. The further study o f graphic design styles and designers such as A r t D e c o , Post M o d e r n , Swiss and N e w computer illustration, typography and pre-press. GRPH 178 Design II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Y o r k design movements are examined. Introduction to basic 35mm camera operations, basic b/w film process- Prerequisite: G R P H 158 with at least a " C " grade. ing, print enlarging and photo applications. Students A continuation with more sophisticated design, compo- are given specific problems to solve utilizing photogra- sition and colour applications. Assignments are phy and various mediums. produced using conventional drawing/inking/painting tools. Advanced design concepts arc explained using GRPH 158 Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) various visual methods (videos - blackboard - paper Macintosh computer using A d o b e Illustrator/Photoshop Introduction to design elements and application to design projects which solve communication problems. A l l the beginning design exercises use black and white only. Assignments are produced using conventional drawing/inking tools. C o l o u r studies involving the production of colour charts w i l l be given with appropriate design projects, in colour. The ability to verbally explain concepts w i l l be stressed throughout the semester. A n emphasis towards actual work situations w i l l be stressed. Graphic design business procedures w i l l be explained throughout the semester. software - film, etc.). The class w i l l move toward actual design/communication problems and business procedures and verbal skills in presentation w i l l be stressed. GRPH 184 Life D r a w i n g II (3) (4.0,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 152 with at least a " C " grade. Further study of drawing from direct observation o f the human figure. Exercises in perceiving and interpreting plane, mass, rhythm and form as they relate to perceptual elements of drawing media. Investigation o f more GRPH 159 (3) M e d i u m s and Techniques II (4,0,0) (S) complex drawing techniques and materials; drawing from memory and imaginative reflection o f visual Prerequisite: G R P H 155 with at least a " C " grade. A continuation with further drawing analysis techniques. Consideration and use o f various mediums as they relate to specific subjects from location studies experience. GRPH 231 Typography I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Historical origins of the alphabet, numerals and letter and classroom development o f same. forms. Proportion and spacing. Lettering indication in GRPH 164 General D r a w i n g II (3) (4,0,0) (S) lettering indication and reproduction art to improve Prerequisite: G R P H 154 with at least a " C " grade. Exploration o f drawing with emphasis on expressive and interpretive approaches. Developing themes and drawings aimed at illustration, for both reproduction and individual expression. Stylization, distortion and caricaturization arc explored in relation to the study o f line, mass, value and contrast. Various pen and ink drawing techniques are explored. Emphasis on initiative in researching, investigating and exploring drawing theories, schools and techniques. GRPH 170 (3) Introduction to C o m p u t e r s pencil, brush, chalks and felt markers. Comprehensive craftsmanship and drawing skills. GRPH 232 Graphic Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to the pragmatic, formal, and contextual issues involved in the creation of visual messages. A n emphasis is placed on the development o f a philosophical and practical foundation for critical, creative thinking as applied to visual problem solving. The grammar and the elements o f visual language are explored in relation to perception, semiotics, and (4,3,0) (S) A n introduction to the basic concepts of computer hardware and software. Students w i l l gain experience with the operating system and programs for desktop publishing. This is an ideal first course for students psycholinguistics. Students gain experience using both traditional and desktop publishing methods. GRPH 233 (3) D r a w i n g for Illustration I (4,0,0) (F) The purpose is to develop the students' awareness and capacity to perceive objects correctly and the skills Course Descriptions 215 necessary to draw with quality and creativity. Intro- components o f visual messages. Further exploration o f duces the students to skills that must be developed i f the applications o f computer technology in contempo- they are to visually communicate consciously and rary graphic design. effectively. Basic drawing and wash media w i l l be GRPH 243 (3) D r a w i n g f o r Illustration II used. GRPH 234 A p p l i e d Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) G R P H 233 with at least a " C " grade. The students play an advanced role in the choices o f Prerequisite: G R P H 178 with at least a " C " grade. A n introduction to visual communication and the role reference materials, mediums and techniques used. The skilful and imaginative use o f illustrative methods of professional advertising, art directors and graphic is stressed using lighting, negative shapes, depth, designers. Design principles and layout techniques, abstractions for emphasis, perspective and correct with emphasis on concept and comprehensive finish perception. Uses o f drawing and wash mediums w i l l be expanded. A s w e l l , the student w i l l be expected to using basic marker rendering skills. become familiar with current uses o f illustration. GRPH 235 (3) Painting f o r Illustration I Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) G R P H 159 with at least a " C " grade. This course offers expanded skills in perception, GRPH 244 A p p l i e d Design II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) G R P H 234 with at least a " C " grade. visualization and continued practice in control o f A continuation relating to presentation o f ideas at a various painting media. It gives the student the oppor- professional level representing real advertising agency tunity to develop similar styles to the old masters as and client situations. M a k i n g rough layouts and well as experiment with his/her o w n drawing and finished comprehensives o f ideas that are evaluated painting. against established client criteria. GRPH 236 C o m p u t e r Applications Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) G R P H 170 with at least a " C " grade. Introduction o f computer software programs for the application of electronic composition and imaging. Students w i l l use an advanced page layout program and drawing program. GRPH 241 T y p o g r a p h y II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) G R P H 231 with at least a " C " grade. GRPH 245 (3) Painting for Illustration II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) G R P H 235 with at least a " C " grade. The student's personal style o f drawing and painting is pursued to a much finer degree. Structured tutorials in the use o f various mediums and student/instructor criticisms o f work-in-progress are emphasized. Experimentation in both style and m e d i u m is encouraged. GRPH 246 (3) Visual Communications III (4,3,0) (S) This course expands upon the major role typography has on advertising layouts and graphic design. C o n - Prerequisite: G R P H 236 with at least a " C " grade. struction o f various styles o f letter forms in pencil, felt In this course students are introduced to colour marker and brush w i l l be studied. Basic application o f photography applications and basic artificial lighting typography in advertising and graphic design using techniques. Students must solve communication computers w i l l be investigated. problems using the 35mm camera and colour transparencies. A r t direction and conceptualization for assign- GRPH 242 Graphic Design II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) ments is stressed. Students are introduced to digital photography and computer photo imaging. G R P H 232 with at least a " C " grade. Further development of understanding and application GRPH 352 (3) Three Dimensional Design I (4,0,0) (F) of visual problem solving methods as related to graphic design; students explore ideas and concepts which Prerequisite: precede the making of design. A n emphasis is placed a " C " grade. on application of typography and photography as major A n introduction into the procedures involved in the Course 216 Descriptions G R P H 242 and G R P H 244 with at least design o f small retail environments such as boutiques and service shops in shopping centres and malls. Point of purchase design is introduced and model-building techniques are studied as well as the use o f colour in GRPH 361 (3) A d v a n c e d Typographical Design III Prerequisite: (4,1,0) (S) G R P H 241 with at least a " C " grade. Assignments demonstrate visual concept and economy merchandising and display. of thought in advanced graphic forms, with emphasis GRPH 353 Illustration M e d i a I Prerequisite: a " C " grade. (3) (4,2,0) (F) on typography as a medium and message o f design. Advanced application of the grid to facilitate the G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least A continuation of drawing skills needed to explore the mediums necessary for illustration. The course develops through stages from pencil, pen and ink, ink and wash, watercolours and eel v i n y l . The use of the illustrator's tools and processes such as repellents, air integration o f both typography and visuals, underscored by sound use of conceptual thinking. GRPH 363 Illustration M e d i a II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) G R P H 353 with at least a " C " grade. Further developing finished illustrations for advertising, books, magazines, etc. A n expansion o f the uses o f brush, mixed media, etc., are reviewed. mediums to include mixed media while concept is GRPH 354 A p p l i e d Design III Prerequisite: a " C " grade. (3) (4.3,0) (F) stressed as an emphasis on self-expression and relevant professional solutions. G R P H 242 and G R P H 244 with at least The application o f design and rendering skills to the development o f solutions to print advertising. Explores GRPH 364 A p p l i e d Design IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) G R P H 354 with at least a " C " grade. companies, products, services, corporate identification The interrelationship o f illustration, photography and and their relationship to print advertising layouts and graphic design into advertising, packaging and point o f tight comps prepared for class critiques. Comprehen- purchase with extensive consultation on student sives are developed with the computer as well as portfolios and the needs of advertising agencies and traditional approaches. graphic design studios. GRPH 355 (3) A d v e r t i s i n g Illustration I Prerequisite: a " C " grade. (4,2,0) (F) G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least GRPH 365 (3) A d v e r t i s i n g Illustration II Prerequisite: (4,1,0) (S) G R P H 355 with at least a " C " grade. Further exploration o f advertising illustration tech- A comprehensive study o f contemporary advertising illustration styles, techniques and materials with projects developed from original concept to final presentation. Emphasis on w o r k i n g with an art director with attention to specifications, deadlines and professionalism. niques with the emphasis on actual studio and advertising agency working methods. A bridge between the educational experience and working in the field. GRPH 366 Business of Design (3) (4,3,0) (S) H o w to establish and operate a free-lance design/ GRPH 356 Production Processes Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) G R P H 236 with at least a " C " grade. Familiarization with various print processes and prepress operations including preparation o f art, photos, typography, halftone screening, colour separations, image stripping, assembly and proofing; paper and its effect upon printing. Includes the use o f Macintosh illustration business. Emphasis is upon client relations, suppliers contact, estimating, project management, taxation and accounting practices and industry ethics. The designer's role in an advertising agency, design studio and production or printing facility w i l l be investigated. HIST 100 (3) History o f t h e A n c i e n t W o r l d (4,0,0) (F) computers for digital prc-prcss production. This course examines a range o f topics including the origins o f civilization in Egypt and Mesopotamia, the civilizations of Ancient Greece and Rome, the origins Course Descriptions 217 and development of Judaism and the early Christian Church. HIST 102 (3) (4.0,0) (F) Europe f r o m the Reformation to t h e French Revolution A survey o f European history beginning with the 16th HIST 205 British C o l u m b i a (3) (4,0,0) (F) From the first contact between First Nations and Europeans in the 18th century to the present, this course analyses the main issues that have affected British Columbians. It also examines some aspects of the development o f the North Shore. century Protestant Reformation and including absolutism, the scientific revolution, the Enlightenment, the old regime and the French Revolution. HIST 103 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Europe in t h e 19th a n d 20th Centuries HIST 207 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Europe in t h e M i d d l e A g e s a n d Renaissance This course covers a colourful and creative period in European history from the 3rd to the 15th century. Topics include the late R o m a n E m p i r e and rise of Topics include the Industrial Revolution, the rise o f Christianity, monasticism and the church, feudal political ideologies, nationalism and imperialism, the society and politics, the rise o f towns, the crusades, the Russian Revolution, the two world wars, and the inter- Black Death, and the art, culture and society o f Renais- war period. sance Italy. HIST 108 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Issues a n d Themes in U.S. History: 1607-1877 HIST 208 (3) Canadian-American Relations A m e r i c a n history from 1607 to 1877 including analysis This course examines the major events and themes that of social and political developments from early have shaped the Canadian-American relationship. F r o m (4,0,0) (S) settlement through the C i v i l W a r era. Emphasis is the A m e r i c a n Revolution, the war that ultimately placed on the development o f an " A m e r i c a n " culture, created both countries, to recent years, we analyze the with appropriate comparisons to the development o f influence that the United States has had on Canada. Canada. HIST 109 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Issues a n d Themes in U.S. History : 1865present U . S . history from 1865 to the present. A study o f the development of A m e r i c a as a world power after the C i v i l War. Special emphasis is given to " A m e r i c a n " culture, and appropriate comparisons are made with Canada. HIST 110 (3) Canada Before C o n f e d e r a t i o n (4,0,0) (F,S) HIST 209 (3) (4,0,0) (S) History of t h e Native Peoples of Canada U s i n g cthnohistorical approaches, this course examines the history o f Canadian Indian, Inuit and Metis peoples. It gives particular emphasis to the attitudes, practices, policies and experiences that have shaped native-white relations and affected native peoples from 1450 to the present. HORT 101 (5) Introductory Horticulture (6,6,0) (F) This course details commercial horticulture in B . C . , A study o f Aboriginal-European relations, N e w France covers basic plant science theory, deals with work site and British North A m e r i c a . Special emphasis is placed safety and develops basic horticultural skills including on issues and ideas which have been significant in the the use and proper care of hand tools, power equip- creation o f Canada and, in particular, the making o f ment, day to day greenhouse operations, planting and Canadian society before 1867. watering techniques. Students participate in a three-day orientation field trip near the beginning o f this course. HIST 111 (3) Canada Since C o n f e d e r a t i o n (4,0,0) (F,S) Students also participate in a W C B certified survival first aid practicum. The development of Canada since 1867. In particular relations with the United States, prosperity and pov- HORT 102 Plant Materials I erty, class and gender relations, and the making o f a A n introduction to woody and herbaceous ornamentals we discuss the issues that affect most Canadians: (5) (6,0,0) (F) Canadian "culture". B y the end of the course students including deciduous trees and shrubs, conifers, should have not only a better understanding of this broadleaf evergreens, bulbs, and ground covers. This country's past, but also what makes Canada unique. Course 218 Descriptions course emphasizes identification, landscape values and HORT 111 requirements o f the plant materials studied. Business Practices HORT 103 (2) (3,1,0) (F) G r o w i n g M e d i a a n d Fertilizers (1) (1.0,1,0) (S) Deals with business establishment, business organizations, business operations, landscape estimating, quotations and contracts. Job search, job applications, This course is designed to provide students with the resumes and interviews are also discussed. media science knowledge necessary for the production and maintenance o f plants in the greenhouse, nursery HORT 112 and landscape. Landscape Installation a n d M a i n t e n a n c e HORT 105 (3,1,0) (F) (2) Plant Production (5.0) (5,6,0) (S) A largely applied course covering plant installation and common landscape maintenance practices. Landscape installation topics include: site preparation, use of T o acquaint students with greenhouse and nursery aggregates, and construction o f walks, steps, retaining production systems and methods. Topics w i l l include: walls, fences, trellises, and use o f paving materials. plant propagation, greenhouse production and nursery Maintenance topics include: pruning, planting and stock production. Students w i l l successfully produce a transplanting, pest management, mulches, and methods number o f specific greenhouse and nursery crops. of fertilization. Students write the B . C . Ministry of HORT 106 Applicator pesticide certification examinations. The Environment General Dispenser and Landscape (2) (3,1,0) (S) Landscape Irrigation a n d Drainage majority o f the course time is spent on field installation This course is designed to familiarize the student with the basics o f turf and drip irrigation systems as well as basic landscape drainage systems. Students learn how to install, operate and maintain landscape irrigation systems. and maintenance work. A continuation of H O R T 107. HORT 107 (0) Park a n d T i l f o r d G a r d e n s Practicum HORT 115 (1.5) Basic Landscape Drafting (0,0,2) (F) This is an optional landscape maintenance work experience at Park and Tilford Gardens. The objectives of the practicum arc to develop a professional work ethic, to master basic gardening skills and to learn to complete tasks effectively and in a timely manner. HORT 108 Landscape Design (1.5) (1.5,3,0) (S) HORT 114 (0) (0,0,2) (S) Park a n d T i l f o r d Gardens Practicum (1.5,3,0) (F) Course topics include: drafting skills and equipment, site measurement and evaluation, plan reading, graphic presentation and introductory quantity take-offs. HSA. 110 (1.5) (2,0,1) (S) W o r k Role Concepts in H o m e S u p p o r t This course provides an introduction to community care, the home support industry and the role o f the A highly practical introductory course in design theory and practices; plan reading and revisions; and basic design skills. Course materials arc presented by means of lectures, visuals, projects and specific practicum labs. management skills needed for beginning home support practice. HORT 109 Plant Materials II HSA. 111 (3.0) (0,4,14) (S) H e a l i n g : Personal Care Skills for H o m e Support A continuation of H O R T 102 with the emphasis on This practical course offers students the opportunity to conifers, broadleaf evergreens, annuals and perennials. learn basic assistance skills following the Personal (4) (4.5,0,0) (S) H o m e Support W o r k e r . Students also learn h o m e Assistance Guidelines section I and section 2. HORT 110 (3) (4.5,1,0) (S) Turfgrass M a n a g e m e n t HSA. 112 A n introductory turfgrass course dealing with the Special Needs in H o m e S u p p o r t selection of grasses for turfs, turfgrass installation, and This course builds upon other course materials and maintenance (includes fertilization, irrigation, m o v i n g , cultivation, pest control practices) for residential and (1.5) (2,0,1^ (S) provides an introduction to the basic concepts and approaches involved in the care o f clients experiencing large area turfs. Course Descriptions 219 role o f the H o m e Support Attendant in special needs IBUS 340 International Trade L a w family situations. Prerequisite: changes in mental functioning. Students also learn the HSA. 113 Practical Experience (6.0) (0,54,0) (S) (3,0,0) (3) B A D M 107 International trade conventions and agreements, the legal processes o f importing and exporting, and the challenge of dealing with conflicting domestic laws This practice course provides an opportunity to apply between countries w i l l be studied. the caring philosophy with individuals and families at various stages o f the life cycle. Experience may be obtained in community and institutional settings with IBUS 357 International M a r k e t i n g (3,0,1) (S) (3) an emphasis on the application and integration o f Prerequisite: knowledge and skills learned in other courses. I B U S 321, B M K T 161 This course is an in-depth study o f marketing interna- IBUS 220 Directed Studies (1.5) (1.5,0,.5)(S) tionally. It assumes the student understands uncontrollable variables in a foreign market (as covered in I B U S Students w i l l be given the opportunity to research an 321) and goes directly into the controllable variables offshore company and, while working directly with the and the management o f marketing programs. instructor, prepare and present their paper to a faculty committee. IBUS 266 International Finance (1.5) (S) IBUS 399 (3) International Trade O p p o r t u n i t i e s (F) This course w i l l be delivered as a seminar series, and is designed to provide students with a broad perspective This course begins by reviewing basic accounting and of the trade opportunities available and the strategies financial analysis, then progresses to gaining an required to be successful in the world markets. understanding o f international finance. Students w i l l Industry leaders as well as government experts w i l l also learn about foreign exchange, trade finance, discuss topics which are relevant to the Canadian foreign securities, and foreign collections. Pricing in business people. Case studies w i l l be used to apply the the international forum as well as risk management w i l l concepts covered in the lectures. be discussed. • IBUS 321 International Business (3) (3,0,1) (F) This course w i l l be a blend of lectures, case studies and discussions o f current events affecting business. Students w i l l learn the terminology o f international business and the process managers go through in "internationalizing" their business, including how uncontrollable elements o f international markets can impact business. IBUS 334 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) C o m m u n i c a t i o n , Culture a n d International Business IND0102 (1.5) Introduction t o Indonesian I For Asia Pacific Management (3,1,0) (F) Cooperative program students only. T h i s course helps prepare A P M C P students to function in daily life in Indonesia by helping them to master basic language skills, sensitizing them to cultural differences, and teaching them to begin to read and write Indonesian. IND0103 (3.0) Introduction t o Indonesian II For Asia Pacific Management (3,1,0) (S) Cooperative program students only. The objective of this course is to increase the student's cross-cultural awareness in business settings. It looks at Prerequisite: how different cultures negotiate and regard contracts, tor. interpret commitments and deal with suppliers and This course is a continuation of I N D O 102. I N D O 102 or permission o f the instruc- consumers. INFO 145 (1.5) Internet Tools a n d Techniques (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l provide students with the necessary knowledge and experience with browsing and publishing on the Internet. Course 220 Descriptions INF0148 (1.5) Time-Based Data Integration II (3,0,0) (S) Data capture, compression, assembly and editing techniques and the issue o f synchronization are part o f this course. INFO 160 Self-Marketing (1.5) (3,0.0) (S) This course focuses on the basic principles o f marketing yourself and your ideas to the business community. It includes an overview o f marketing theory, application o f the theory into job market evaluation, prepara- INFO 150 C o n t e m p o r a r y Issues I (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) tion o f a personal marketing plan, and a selling skills workshop. A study o f cultural, ethical, political, economic and computers, as well as the impact o f new information INFO 161 Project M a n a g e m e n t systems on human understanding and society. Students This course teaches skills necessary to manage and aesthetic issues arising with the increasing use of (1.5) (3,0.0) (F) survey print and electronic media to research current produce interactive communications projects. Students comment on these issues; synthesize and analyze their consider management issues such as administration, findings: and present their work in both written and pre-production and production planning, copyright spoken forms. clearance, collaboration and team building. INFO 151 (1.5) Interactive Communications I (3.0,0) (F) This course first examines the concept o f interactive INFO 166 (1.5) A p p l i e d Telecommunications (3,0,0) (F) This course provides an introduction to the basics o f communications - the active involvement o f a human modems, communications software, telecommunica- mind with a computer - and the history o f develop- tions protocols, the use o f electronic mail and bulletin ments in the field to date. User interface design forms board systems. the basis for a model designed by each student. INF0154 (1.5) Electronic Research M e t h o d s (3.0.0) (F) INFO 167 Systems, Tools, Utilities (1.5) (3,0.0) (F) T h i s course familiarizes students with the design, This course w i l l explore research methods for the structure and operation of the Macintosh computer effective use o f print and electronic information system software, the basic concepts and use o f local sources, such as online library catalogs, periodical area networks, and related peripheral equipment. indexes, C D - R O M s , commercial databases and Students w i l l examine system-related utility programs resources on the Internet. and begin an introduction to data integration. INFO 155 (1.5) Interactive Communications II (3,0,0) (S) This project-based course expands on concepts covered in I N F O 151 and expands to include critical evaluation techniques for interactive communications products. INFO 156 (1.5) Technical Support: Foundation (3,0,0) (F) This is an introduction to programming concepts. Students learn about components in programming and INFO 171 (1.5) A p p l i e d Production M a n a g e m e n t (3,0,0) (S) This course w i l l allow the students to apply the project management skills they learned in I N F O 161 to integrated projects they undertake in the spring term. The students w i l l receive the benefit of an instructor's expert experience, guidance and supervision throughout the planning and production of these projects. INFO 172 (3.0) Technical Support: Concentration (3,0.0) (S) the approaches to structured programming using these The focus of this course is in developing expertise in components. the primary interactive multimedia authoring tool INFO 158 (1.5) Interactive Communications III (3,0,0) (S) chosen for the program; currently, M a c r o m i n d Director is our choice. In addition to concentrating on the specifics of this development tool, concepts in struc- A continuation of I N F O 155, the concept o f Beta testing is introduced and applied. Students design, produce, test and revise projects using the authoring tured programming from I N F O 156 w i l l be applied in support of projects from I N F O 155/158. tool Macromind Director in this course. Course Descriptions 221 INFO 173 (1.5) (3,0,0) (Su) Technical Support: A u g m e n t a t i o n INFO 185 (1.5) 3-D Production f o r M u l t i m e d i a (3,0,0) (S) After developing expertise in a primary multimedia This hands-on course introduces students to the world development tool, students w i l l be given the opportu- of 3-D graphics. Through a series of projects, the course nity to expand their repertoire o f development tools. material w i l l present students with concepts o f The focus is on the efficient application o f authoring modeling, lighting, textured creation and use, and 3-D knowledge from one environment to a different animation. Finally, the students w i l l integrate the 3-D environment. Authorware is currently our choice o f material into multimedia documents. development tool for courseware and computer-based gained in I N F O 156 and the expertise in Director INFO 186 (0.75) (3,0,0) (S) Introduction t o Database T e c h n o l o g y developed in I N F O 172), students turn their focus on This course provides instruction in the key processes Authorware. related to the development and maintenance o f database training. Building on structure programming concepts applications. Students are introduced to relational INFO 177 (4.5) Professional D e v e l o p m e n t (3,0,0) (S,Su) database technology and learn how to organize data in a manner that facilitates easy retrieval, reporting and This course prepares the student for work i n the field o f maintenance. information technology by establishing professional developing a professional portfolio for presentation to INFO 191 C D - R O M Mastering the public. This course is designed to provide the student with the contacts, cultivating a professional work ethic, and INFO 180 (3,0,0) (S) C o m p u t e r M e d i a t e d Communications (0.75) (6,0,0) (Su) technical skills and knowledge to produce compact disc masters. various aspects and issues of computer mediated JAPN 100 Beginning Japanese I communications. It w i l l enable the student to under- This course offers a comprehensive introduction to stand collaborative work in the world o f telecomputing, modern Japanese through the study o f vocabulary, experience a variety of planned computer mediated grammar and culture. The beginning of the course w i l l systems and link to other computer networks (via be devoted to learning the Japanese writing systems Internet and Telnet). (hiragana and katakana). Fifty to 100 Chinese characters This course is designed to introduce the student to the (3) (4,1.75,0) (F,Su) (kanji) w i l l also be taught. Students w i l l develop basic INFO 182 (1.5) Cross-Platform D e v e l o p m e n t (Su) This course focuses on the transfer o f multimedia language skills in a socio-culturally functional way * This is a very demanding course which requires serious commitment. projects from one computer platform to another. Topics include design and production consideration for crossplatform media integration, with comparisons between the Macintosh and I B M - P C compatibles. Students w i l l evaluate the Microsoft W i n d o w s user interface, JAPN 101 Beginning Japanese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) J A P N 100 or the instructor's permission. Windows-based multimedia and file translation This course is a continuation o f J A P N 100 and must be methods. Projects from the Macintosh environment taken in order to complete First Y e a r level of Japanese. w i l l be transferred to the equivalent W i n d o w s environ- Students w i l l learn more about the structure of modern ment. Japanese and further develop their language skills in a socio-culturally functional way. INFO 184 Portfolio Presentation (0.75) (3,0,0) (Su) A t the conclusion o f the Infotec program, students JAPN 102 (1.5) Introduction t o Japanese I addresses the planning, production and presentation of For Asia Pacific Management students only. the event. This course develops basic oral and written c o m m u n i c a - present their portfolios to the public. This course Cooperative (3,1,0) (F) program tive skills in Japanese through the study o f vocabulary, grammar and culture, including business culture. Course 222 Descriptions J A P N 103 (3) Introduction t o Japanese II For Asia Pacific Management (3.1,0) (S) Cooperative program modes, chord symbols, figured bass, roman numeral analysis, melodic inharmonics, phrase structure, diatonic triads and voice leading. students only. J A P N 103 continues developing basic oral and written communicative skills in Japanese. JAZZ 105 (1.5) R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g Prerequisite: J A P N 200 Intermediate Japanese I Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 103. Students w i l l undertake the study o f score preparation, notation, basic musical terms and articulations, and J A P N 101 or the instructor's permission. T h i s course provides students with further sociocultural knowledge at an intenncdiate level o f Japanese. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing a compre- writing for the rhythm section instruments. JAZZ 106 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Traditional Harmony a n d C o m p o s i t i o n hensive knowledge of modern Japanese through Prerequisite: JAZZ authentic materials and w i l l include reading and Corequisite: J A Z Z 107. writing practice. A study o f traditional principles o f voice leading with harmonic vocabulary extending to the secondary dominant, and b l l aug. 6th and including tonicization, simple modulation and pivot chords. Binary and ternary forms w i l l be introduced. J A P N 201 (3) Intermediate Japanese II Prerequisite: (4,1.75,0) (S) J A P N 200 or the instructor's permission. This course continues to develop higher skills at the intermediate level and provides the students with a solid foundation on which to base further study o f the language and to develop socio-culturally functional competence. J A P N 202 (1.5) Introduction t o Japanese III For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative (3,1,0) (F) program s'udents only. Prerequisite: Equivalent o f "Level III" ( A d v a n c e d Eeginner's Level) o f the Japanese Proficiency Test or higher, and instructor's permission. JAZZ 107 (1.5) Jazz Theory a n d C o m p o s i t i o n I Prerequisite: Corequisite: J A P N 203 (3) Introduction t o Japanese IV For Asia Pacific Management Siiidents Cooperative (3,1,0) (S) program only. Prerequisite: J A P N 202 or instructor's permission. (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 103 or equivalent. J A Z Z 106. A n introduction to jazz theory including: chord scales, extended chords, functional analysis of chord progression, primary and secondary root motion, and analysis and composition o f music in the style o f jazz standards and the blues. JAZZ 114 Class Piano I Corequisite: This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with intermediate practical Japanese communication skills for daily and job-related circumstances in Japan. 103 o r equivalent. (D (2,2,0) (F) J A Z Z 103. This course is designed for students who wish to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization arc the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts arc applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths of the major key, all major, minor and modal tctrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered in class. Students practise on the department's pianos. This course is a continuation of J A P N 202. JAZZ 103 The Language of Music Corequisites: 114. (3) (4,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 184 (or M U S . 112) and J A Z Z JAZZ 115 Class Piano II (D Prerequisite: J A Z Z 114. Corequisites: J A Z Z 106 and 107. (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of J A Z Z 114. In addition, keyboard An examination o f the basics o f tonal music including sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced the study of the overtone scries, intervals, scales, along with easy original repertoire. Course Descriptions 223 (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) JAZZ 203 (1.5) Jazz Theory & C o m p o s i t i o n II (2,0,0) (F) Material is prepared for performance with a keyboard accompanist. This class is open to students not major- Prerequisites: ing in V o i c e . Vocalists who are judged to be at a instructor. JAZZ 136 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Vocal M a s t e r Class I (by a u d i t i o n only) JAZZ 195 Small Ensemble II A n introductory course intended to develop the stu- A continuation o f J A Z Z 194. dent's solo vocal performance capabilities through exploration o f various popular and jazz musical styles. sufficiently advanced level at their audition may substitute music electives for this course. Successful completion does not guarantee acceptance into higher level vocal courses. Continued exploration of chord progression and melody including: analysis of popular chord progression, m i x e d mode chord progression, augmented 6th chords, tonicization, chord scales/harmonic extensions. (15) JAZZ 137 J A Z Z 106 and 107 or permission o f the (2,0,0) (S) Vocal M a s t e r Class II JAZZ 204 (1.5) Jazz Theory & Composition III Prerequisite: Prerequisite: J A Z Z 136. A continuation o f J A Z Z 136. JAZZ 170 History of Jazz (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 203. Continued exploration of chord progression and (3.0) (4,0,0) (F) melody including: analysis o f modern j a z z chord progression, parallel harmony, 70s jazz theory o f modal areas, modern voicing techniques, A survey o f jazz through styles and stylists from its reharmonization. roots in Africa to the present. JAZZ 172 Arranging I (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 103, to be taken with or after JAZZ 214 Class Piano III Prerequisite: (D (2,2,0) (F) J A Z Z 115. For students who have taken J A Z Z 115 or have had J A Z Z 107 and 105. previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced A study of four-part block harmonization arranging to c o m m o n idiomatic accompaniment patterns as well techniques. as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor JAZZ 184 (1.5) Sightsinging/EarTraining I Corequisite: (2,2,0) (F) repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight A u r a l and sight training concentrating on melodic, (1.5) reading skills at the keyboard. Emphasis w i l l be on developing the skills necessary to use the piano as a rhythmic dictation and sightsinging. tool in writing and arranging. (2,2,0) (S) JAZZ 215 Class Piano IV S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g II Corequisite: emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application in simple J A Z Z 10.3 JAZZ 185 scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are (D (2,2,0) (S) J A Z Z 106 and 107 Prerequisite: J A Z Z 214. A continuation of J A Z Z 184. A continuation o f J A Z Z 214 with increased complexity JAZZ 194 Small Ensemble I (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) of repertoire and technique. JAZZ 236 For all instruments, requirements include several hours of rehearsal a week plus a number of performances. (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Studio Vocal Performance I (by a u d i t i o n only) The styles studied are varied. Students are expected to Prerequisite: develop individual and ensemble performance abilities A course designed to develop the student's studio and a professional attitude to both performance and performance ability through preparation and perform- rehearsal. ance o f selected solo and ensemble material in the J A Z Z 137. College's recording studio. Course 224 Descriptions JAZZ 237 (1.5) S t u d i o V o c a l Performance II Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 236. JAZZ 273 M u s i c History II Prerequisite: A continuation o f J A Z Z 236. (3) (3,0,0) (S) M u s i c History I A continuation o f History I covering the classical period through the 20th century. A s in M u s i c History I JAZZ 238 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) V o c a l Jazz M a s t e r Class I (by a u d i t i o n only) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 137. repertoire w i l l be contextualized both within the framework o f European cultural history and in the broader context o f world music. This course is intended to develop the live performance toire. Students w i l l study style and interpretation and JAZZ 282 Improvisation I perform with some of V a n c o u v e r ' s top j a z z musicians. Prerequisites: JAZZ 239 A course to teach the basics of improvisation on chord changes. The first term w i l l be devoted to rhythmic concepts, basic chord-scale relationships and development o f technical exercises for basic chord progressions. abilities o f the student through the study of jazz reper- (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) V o c a l Jazz M a s t e r Class II Prerequisite: J A Z Z 238. A continuation o f J A Z Z 238. JAZZ 240 Form a n d A n a l y s i s Prerequisite: J A Z Z 106 or M U S . 101. A study o f complete works exhibiting the most significant formal designs of the 18th and 19th centuries, using a variety o f visual means to clarify the roles o f harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic structure in the articulation o f musical form. (1.5) J A Z Z 107, 115 and 185. JAZZ 283 Improvisation (1.5) A continuation o f J A Z Z 282. T h i s term w i l l be devoted to analysis o f chord progressions and more advanced chord-scale analysis. A t the end o f this term, students should have the basic theoretical knowledge necessary to analyze and learn to improvise on any "'standard" jazz tune. Counterpoint Prerequisite: Prerequisite: J A Z Z 185. Corequisite: J A Z Z 203. (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 240, 203. (2,2,0) (S) II JAZZ 284 (1.5) S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g III JAZZ 241 (2,2,0) (F) (2,2,0) (F) A study o f tonal counterpoint emphasizing its use from late Baroque through the c o m m o n practice period. JAZZ 271 M u s i c History I (3) (3,0,0) (F) Prerequisites: J A Z Z 106, 170, E N G L lOOor 102 plus one of E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106. A chronological exploration o f the repertoire, style, and social history o f music to 1770 for undergraduate students in the Jazz Studies program. Repertoire w i l l be contextualized both within the framework o f European cultural history and in the broader context of world music. A continuation o f J A Z Z 185. JAZZ 285 (1.5) S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g IV Prerequisite: J A Z Z 284. Corequisite: J A Z Z 204. (2.2,0) (S) A continuation of J A Z Z 284. JAZZ 294 Small E n s e m b l e III Prerequisite: (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) J A Z Z 195. A variety o f jazz styles/eras w i l l be studied, advancing chronologically from "bebop" and "mainstream" JAZZ 272 A r r a n g i n g II Prerequisites: Corequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) standards, through contemporary jazz of the 60s and 70s and jazz-rock fusion, to current jazz styles. Course J A Z Z 172 and J A Z Z 105. J A Z Z 203. operation is on two levels o f study; instructional and lab performance. Arranging projects for various combinations of instruments, plus a study of two and three-part writing. Course Descriptions 225 JAZZ 295 (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) JAZZ 372 (1.5) Small Ensemble IV A r r a n g i n g III Prerequisite: Prerequisites: J A Z Z 294. (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 204, 272. A study of vocal writing styles and techniques. T h i s A continuation o f J A Z Z 294. course is not always offered. JAZZ 300 (3) (4,0,0) (S) JAZZ 382 20th Century T h e o r y Prerequisites: (1.5) (1,2,0) (F) Improvisation III JAZZ 240, 204. A survey o f compositional techniques and theoretical Prerequisite: JAZZ 283. principles utilized from 1890 to the present coupled This course contains both a lecture and lab component. with an examination of various major composers and Content w i l l include: substitution of chord scales, masterpieces o f their music. tonicization, diminished chord scales, riff blues melodies, analysis and composition of solos i n various JAZZ 310 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) styles. JAZZ P e d a g o g y Prerequisite: JAZZ 383 JAZZ 204. (1.5) (1,2,0) (S) Improvisation IV Concepts, methods, and resources; examination and Prerequisite: comparison o f textbooks, recordings, tapes, and JAZZ 382. A continuation o f J A Z Z 382. Content w i l l include; materials related to the study o f jazz. altered and symmetrical scales, exploration o f the JAZZ 336 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: harmonic resources of scales, pentatonic and altered pentatonic scales, 4th chord stacks, polychordal triad Studio V o c a l Performance III relationships, outside playing, the philosophy o f free JAZZ 237. A continuation o f J A Z Z 237. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. jazz. JAZZ 394 (1.5) (0,3,1) (F) Small Ensemble V JAZZ 337 (1.5) Studio V o c a l Performance IV Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t this level the student w i l l receive instruction in JAZZ 336. ensemble performance for the recording studio. Students w i l l perform and produce under supervision. A continuation o f J A Z Z 336. JAZZ 338 JAZZ 295. (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) JAZZ 395 Vocal Jazz M a s t e r Class III Small Ensemble VI Prerequisite: Prerequisite: JAZZ 239. A continuation o f V o c a l Jazz Master Class II instruc- (1.5) (0,3,1) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 394 A continuation o f J A Z Z 394. tion with more emphasis on individual contribution and responsibility. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. JAZZ 410 Conducting I JAZZ 339 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisites: Vocal Jazz M a s t e r Class IV Prerequisite: JAZZ 204, 215, 240, 285 A study of basic conducting techniques. JAZZ 338. A continuation of J A Z Z 338. JAZZ 411 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) C o n d u c t i n g II JAZZ 370 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Jazz Styles Prerequisite: JAZZ410. A continuation of Conducting I with emphasis on vocal JAZZ 170. and instrumental approaches. A follow-up to J A Z Z 170. Detailed study ot the major figures in jazz from 1940 to the present, such as Charlie Parker, John Coltrane, B i l l Evans. • Course 226 Descriptions JAZZ 460 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) C o m m e r c i a l Relations in M u s i c L G A S 150 (3) Introduction t o the S t u d y o f L a w (4,0,0) (F) A course involving aspects of the music industry Introduction to legal concepts and legal reasoning. The including copyright, contracts, performing rights course w i l l cover the historical development of legal organizations and the recording industry. institutions and the principles of c o m m o n law and equity, the interpretation o f statutes, and an analysis of JAZZ 470 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) the system; its strengths and weaknesses. World Music Transferable to S F U . A study o f the musics o f the world outside the realm o f the Western European tradition. L G A S 151 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Evidence JAZZ 472 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A r r a n g i n g IV A n introduction to the law o f evidence. A l t h o u g h some statutes w i l l be considered, emphasis w i l l be on case Prerequisite: J A Z Z 272. Corequisite: J A Z Z 204. law and current developments in the law. Transferable to S F U . Course content includes writing techniques for large jazz ensemble. T h i s course is not always offered . JAZZ 494 (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) Small E n s e m b l e VII (by a u d i t i o n o n l y ) L G A S 152 L i t i g a t i o n Procedures I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to procedures in the courts o f B . C . The course covers basic procedures in pre-trial preparation A jazz performance ensemble for more advanced of documents, and the use o f precedents in litigation. players. Students w i l l be required to perform in public several times during the semester. JAZZ 495 (1.5) L G A S 153 (1.5) Basic C o r p o r a t e Procedures (0,3,0) (S) Small Ensemble VIII A continuation o f J A Z Z 494. KIN. 140 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) (2,0,0) (S) A n examination of the B . C . Company A c t and the C . B . C . A . and the various documents required to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Differences between reporting and nonreporting companies w i l l be studied. C o n t e m p o r a r y H e a l t h Issues Examination o f current health issues from a holistic perspective with emphasis on the role of personal behaviours and other factors influencing health. Critical analysis and evaluation of health information w i l l also be covered. KIN. 142 (3) Introduction t o K i n e s i o l o g y (4,2,0) (S) A n introduction to the range of subject areas encompassed in the discipline o f kinesiology, with basicassessment procedures for individual status and performance according to functional anatomy, biomechanics and exercise physiology. KIN. 143 (3) (2,2,0) (F) Exercise M a n a g e m e n t L G A S 155 (1.5) C o n v e y a n c i n g Procedures (2,0,0) (S) Introduce students to basic conveyancing procedures in B . C . , including the role o f the conveyancing assistant, the structure o f a real estate sale, the system o f registration in B . C . , and basic procedures when acting for a purchaser and/or vendor. L G A S 156 (1.5) Introduction to Evidence (2,0,0) (S) This course is an introduction to the law o f evidence including relevancy, materiality, admissibility, opinion evidence, etc. L G A S 157 (3) (4,0,0) (S) W i l l s a n d Probate Procedures A n introduction to exercise management and exercise A n examination o f the W i l l s A c t , the Estate A d m i n i s - physiology; conditioning methods, exercise techniques tration A c t , and W i l l s Variation A c t . Students w i l l and fitness appraisal prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate and Letters o f Administration. Students w i l l also learn how to deal with assets after Letters Probate or Administration have been obtained. Course Descriptions 227 LGAS 164 Litigation Procedures IV Prerequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) contract law, including offer and acceptance, certainty, intention, consideration, and privity. L G A S 152. A n introduction to Alternate Dispute Resolution, practice and procedure in the Small C l a i m s Court, use of the Freedom o f Information and Privacy A c t as a tool for discovery, and Chambers practice and procedures in the Supreme Court o f British C o l u m b i a . LGAS 181 Contracts II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F,S) L G A S 180. This course is a continuation o f L G A S 180. T o p i c s include misrepresentation, interpretation, mistake, duress, and remedies. LGAS 170 Legal Research (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Provides the student with the techniques and methodol- LGAS 182 Creditors' Remedies (3) (4,0,0) (F) ogy of legal research and w i l l include functions such as Discussion o f the principles, practice and information reading briefs and legal documents; using encyclope- gathering procedures necessary to realize on judg- dia, annotated reports, law reviews, case comments; ments. The case method w i l l be used and students are locating decisions. expected to be familiar with the documentation used in the above process. LGAS 172 Legal Drafting I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Course work includes drafting o f agreements, state- LGAS 199 Career Practicum (3) (2,0,0) (F,S,Su) ments o f claim and defences, letters and memos, and a Prerequisite: study o f the rules o f statutory interpretation. Emphasis This includes the work portion o f the Career Practicum w i l l be placed on developing different writing styles, which consists o f six months i n a law firm. It also 3.0 Cumulative G P A . rather than obtaining a detailed knowledge o f specific includes classroom seminars and instructor/student areas of law. consultations. Students w i l l be assisted by the instructor in finding a practicum, but it is the student's LGAS 174 Legal Drafting II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) practicum must be commenced within two years o f completing the Legal Assistant course requirements. L G A S 172. A continuation of the work begun in L G A S 172; students w i l l draft more complex documentation. LGAS 176 Legal Office Procedures responsibility to obtain a practicum position. T h i s (3) (4,0,0) (F) LGAS 252 Torts I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introductory study o f torts. Principal topic to be studied is the law o f negligence. Practical information about the organization of legal offices. Instruction in timekeeping, filing and c o m m u nications systems, use of data processing equipment in LGAS 253 Company Law (3) (4,0,0) (F) law offices, ethical responsibility of legal assistants and The law relating to business associations. A n examina- legal terminology w i l l be covered. tion o f rights and duties of officers, directors, and shareholders, as well as an analysis o f provincial LGAS 179 Legal Interviewing (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l give an understanding of the role o f the legal assistant and of the process o f legal interview- securities practice. LGAS 254 Torts II (3) (4,0,0) (S) ing. Students w i l l acquire skills in conducting various Prerequisite: types o f interviews. This is a continuation o f L G A S 252. Recovery of pure L G A S 252. economic loss, nuisance, liability o f statutory authori- LGAS 180 Contracts I (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) The objective of this course is to give the students a general understanding of the fundamental principles of Course 228 Descriptions ties, intentional torts and other areas are studied. L G A S 2 5 5 Real Property (3) (4,0,0) (S) A review o f the common law relating to real property as modified by legislation w i l l be studied in this course using the case analysis method. LGAS 256 Family L a w administrative tribunals. Emphasis w i l l be on provincial administrative tribunals and the effect o f The (3) (4,0,0) (S) Charter o f Rights in this area. LGST 105 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) T y p i n g S p e e d a n d Skill D e v e l o p m e n t This course w i l l build keyboarding speed and accuracy skills using both general business and legal materials. L a w and the family: marriage and its dissolution; rights and duties o f spouses and parents; custody; access, guardianship, and adoption. LGST 107 (3.75) Legal M a c h i n e Transcription (5,0,0) (S.Su) Students w i l l gain experience in preparing legal L G A S 257 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) W i l l s a n d Estates materials on a microcomputer from recorded material w h i c h has been dictated as i f from the desk o f a lawyer T h i s course w i l l cover substantive law issues that arise in a w i l l s and estates practice. Important practice issues w i l l also be covered, as well as a review o f applicable legislation. to a competent legal secretary. LGST 108 Family L a w Procedures (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to the procedures, rules and legislation L G A S 262 L i t i g a t i o n Procedures III Prerequisites: (3) (4,0,0) (S) L G A S 152, 162. T h i s course covers divorce, F a m i l y Relations A c t , and small claims procedures. L G A S 264 Insurance L a w I (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A n overview of Canadian insurance law including structure of the industry, insurable interest, valuation, subrogation, contribution and indemnity and duty to disclose. LGAS 265 Insurance Law II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Continuation of L G A S 264 covering agents' duties and responsibilities: form and formation o f the insurance contract; cover, including exceptions to cover; the claims process; I C B C insurance issues. LGAS 268 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Criminal L a w applicable to divorce and family law litigation. LGST 109 Basic L i t i g a t i o n (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to court procedures in the Supreme Court of B . C . The course w i l l cover procedures in pre-trial preparation, the preparation of documents, the use o f precedents in the Supreme Court. LGST 110 C o r p o r a t e Procedures (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A n examination of the B . C . Companies Act and the various documents that a legal secretary must be familiar with in order to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records Office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registration, etc., w i l l also be covered. LGST 112 (3) (4,0,0) (S.Su) Basic C o n v e y a n c e a n d M o r t g a g e Procedures This course covers the contract o f purchase and sale, Substantive elements o f selected criminal offenses and consideration of various defences. The effect o f The Charter of Rights on rights of the accused w i l l be also studied. L a n d Title A c t requirements for registration o f title in B . C . , search procedures, preparation of primary and secondary documents and forms involved in conveying title and registering charges. Emphasis w i l l be on preparing documents acceptable to the Land Title Transferable to S F U . Office, such as transfers, mortgages, and related forms for a residential conveyance. L G A S 271 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Administrative Law LGST 114 The law relating to administrative tribunals in Canada. The rules of natural justice and fairness w i l l be examined as well as judicial review o f decisions and W i l l s a n d Probate Procedures (1.5) (2,0,0) (F.S) A n examination of the W i l l s A c t , and Estate A d m i n i s tration A c t . Students w i l l prepare the necessary Course Descriptions 229 documents to obtain Letters Probate in the Supreme Court o f B . C . and be familiar with documentation required for issuance o f Letters o f Administration. LGST 116 (1.5) Introduction t o the Legal System (2,0,0) (F.S) T h i s course acquaints students with a w o r k i n g k n o w l edge o f the Canadian and B . C . Court System, ethics o f the legal profession and the rules o f the L a w Society relating to trust accounts, with added emphasis on legal solving and conflict resolution skills toward an organization's overall effectiveness. LING 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction t o General Linguistics: Language Structure This course provides a preliminary examination of the structural properties o f languages in general. It focuses on how sounds are articulated and function (phonetics and phonology), and how words and sentences are formed (morphology and syntax). It utilizes examples vocabulary. from a variety o f languages and discusses applications LGST 117 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) of these linguistic findings to language learning and Legal Office Procedures teaching. A course to prepare legal secretarial students for LING 101 (3) (4.0.0) (S) Introduction t o General Linguistics: Language Use positions in law offices. Instruction in time keeping, diary systems, use o f law library, ethical responsibilities, filing, and other procedures particular to the profession. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the structure o f a law office, the differences between large and small Prerequisite: L I N G 100 or permission o f instructor A continuation o f L I N G 100, this course focuses on offices, and the office procedures unique to the practice language use and other aspects o f linguistics. It pro- of law. vides an introduction to semantics, pragmatics, historical linguistics, sociolinguistics, language typology, LGST 119 (1.5) (2,0,60) (S,Su) Practicum writing systems and first and second language acquisition. W o r k experience involving 24 lecture hours and at least 60 hours o f related office experience in the legal field. A l s o covered is the resume, job application, LSP. 100 (1.5) (F) Introduction t o Economics f o r Trade Unionists A n economics course emphasizing both the simplicity cover letter and interview. of most economic ideas, and the relevance o f econom- LGST 122 (3) (4,2,0) (S.Su) C o m p u t e r Applications in t h e Legal Office operates. It focuses on the reasons why economists The student w i l l learn to identify the components of disagree about free trade, the role of government in the office automation. The student w i l l also require a economy and the role of unions, and isolates the ics to an understanding o f the way Canadian society practical knowledge and an understanding o f basic political nature of most economic arguments. Topics spreadsheet and data base concepts. discussed include the workings o f the market system, the idea o f competition and the reality o f monopoly LGST 123 (3.75) (5,2,0) (F.S) Legal D o c u m e n t Processing o n t h e Microcomputer Using WordPerfect software on an I B M compatible microcomputer, the student will be introduced to basic power, the potential benefits and costs o f "free trade", and the causes and consequences o f inflation and employment. LSP. 101 (1.5) (S) Labour Economics: A l t e r n a t i v e s & O p t i o n s through advanced word processing concepts. Proficiency w o r k i n g with the program w i l l be acquired This course builds on the material from L S P . 100 to through the production of various legal documents. provide information on alternative economic models LGST 124 on the development and nature o f capitalist economics including Marxist economic theory. Discussion focuses (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) O r g a n i z a t i o n a l Behaviour and the causes of short and long tenn economic crises. This course looks at the effects o f individual and group LSP. 105 (1.0) (F,S) Corporate Financial Statement A n a l y s i s behaviour in organizations. Topics include leader behaviour and power, motivation, attitude development, perception, work stress and conflict. Students A general introduction to reading and understanding w i l l also learn how to apply communication, problem financial statements focusing on corporate income Course 230 Descriptions statements and balance sheets. There is discussion of concepts such as the definition o f profit and investment return and h o w to determine the cost o f employee benefits. LSP. 116 (1.5) (F.S) Workers' Compensation Act and the WCB The course provides a general understanding o f the Workers' Compensation A c t and the W . C . B . The LSP. 109 Legal Research Skills (1.0) (F,S) statutory and administrative framework of the W o r k ers' Compensation Board and all phases o f claims handling arc examined. Students are provided with This course provides students with a general understanding o f the fundamental principles of legal research. Students learn the basics of legal research by doing a series o f specific research problems. The Labour Relations Board library and computers are used by the participants to undertake hands-on research assignments. LSP. 110 B.C. Labour L a w (1.5) (F,S) A basic but comprehensive course designed to acquaint union members as well as officers and staff with the essentials o f the provincial labour law. information required to represent workers with c o m pensation appeals with special emphasis on reviewing W . C . B . claim files, securing evidence, presenting the evidence by written submissions and at oral hearings. LSP. 117 (1.0) Introduction t o El Procedures (F,S) The Employment and Insurance A c t is a basic part o f Canada's "social safety net". H i g h unemployment makes employment insurance more important than ever to working people. This course is intended to help union officers and ordinary workers understand how employment insur- The course covers organizing, unfair labour practices, arbitration, strikes, lockouts and picketing, amongst other topics. ance works. M a n y topics are covered, from the determination of insurable employments to types of benefits, avoiding trouble with a c l a i m , and termination. The sessions include detailed examination o f the Labour Relations C o d e , important L a b o u r Relations Board decisions, as well as court decisions dealing with labour law issues. The complex appeal system is thoroughly discussed, LSP. 111 (1.5) The Canada Labour Code manual, umpire's decisions, and other research tools. and students arc offered a chance to take part in a simulated Board o f Referees hearing at the final session. Students become familiar with the E m p l o y ment and Insurance A c t and Regulations, policy (F,S) A broad examination o f the Code and decisions which affect unions under federal labour jurisdiction. Introduction o f labour law research methods and their application. Emphasis is placed on the policy underlying the code and the creation and effect o f the collective agreement. LSP. 113 (1.5) (F.S) Public Service Staff Relations A c t (PSSRA) A wide examination of the federal labour laws dealing specifically with the public sector worker and their impact. Emphasis on labour law research methods and their application, collective agreements, grievances and back-to-work legislation for "essential" service workers. LSP. 118 H u m a n Rights L a w (1.0) (F,S) A n examination o f the essential practices and procedures in human rights law focusing on sexual harassment and the duty to accommodate. T h i s course offers up-to-date legal information from the provincial and federal jurisdictions. It provides an assessment of legal protection under the Human Rights Code o f British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian Human Rights A c t , and the Canadian Charter o f Rights and Freedoms, as well as collective agreements and institutional policies. The course provides the participant with a thorough understanding o f liability, the process o f filing a complaint, and appropriate remedies in human rights law. LSP. 115 (1.0) (F,S) Issues in Occupational Health a n d Safety LSP. 119 (1.0) Civil Rights a n d t h e W o r k Place A general background to and overview of the main Specific c i v i l rights problems arising in the workplace, (F,S) social, medical, economic, technical and legal issues including issues of political, economic and legal rights facing B . C . workers in the field o f health and safety. of the worker; examination of legal remedies available Special attention is given to the W o r k e r s ' Compensation to trade unions and the employee to prevent infringe- Board. ment o f c i v i l rights in the work place; protection o f c i v i l rights under the provincial and federal legislation Course Descriptions 231 through contracting and in collective agreements. A gain the right to organize, obtain union recognition, problem-solving format with discussions of current bargain collectively and provide decent wages and c i v i l rights issues, "'right-to-work" legislation, race and working conditions. sex discrimination. LSP. 120 (1.0) Politics: U n d e r s t a n d i n g G o v e r n m e n t Bureaucracy (F,S) LSP. 141 (1.0) (F.S) Telling Y o u r Union's Story: A Course in Practical History This is a companion course for the larger course in A course which outlines how government operates in Labour History, but it can be taken separately. It is various spheres, the impact it makes on the citizen, designed to give some basic research skills, skills that how to utilize procedures for redressing grievances that can be applied toward learning the history o f your result from bureaucracy, and what channels arc open union - its development, policies, past struggles and for citizen participation. In addition, the course looks at victories. It is meant to be a practical course: the the civil servant and his/her relationship to other participants learn how to use resources, how to apply workers. them, and how to present the results to others. LSP. 122 (1.5) Politics: Labour Policy in Canada (F,S) LSP. 142 (1.5) History of the Labour M o v e m e n t in B.C. (F) Provides a basic understanding of the structures and The birth and growth o f trade unionism in B . C . processes of policy making in Canada with a direct Through a wide collection o f printed and visual focus on the formation of Labour P o l i c y . The partici- materials participants analyze the raw and vital strug- pant gains a specific knowledge o f the structures o f gles between B . C . ' s w o r k i n g people and the industrial- government in Canada, learns the impact federalism ists who opposed them. The major economic and has on policy formation, and becomes familiarized political issues o f the movement are traced; the right to with channels o f policital input. organize, the right to bargain, the demand for the nine and eight-hour day, the problems of racism and LSP. 130 Sociology of W o r k (1.5) (F.S) This course assists in the understanding o f the social context in which work occurs. A n attempt to develop tools to understand the various social settings in which work has been placed is undertaken. The different ways in which working people have been manipulated by the new social engineers is also studied. LSP. 131 (1.5) Race and Ethnic Relations immigration, the struggle to organize the industrial, public and clerical sectors, the fight for women's (F.S) The issue o f racism has been used in the past to weaken and divide unions. This course w i l l help unionists become sensitive to complexities o f race and ethnic rights, political expression. LSP. 150 (1.0) W o m e n in the W o r k Force (F.S) T h i s course focuses on what women want to do in their union. It encompasses the political realities o f the labour movement as it is today, as well as personal and emotional politics within the trade union movement as they exist in our sexist society. LSP. 151 (1.0) (F.S) Leadership Skills, Assertiveness a n d A d v o c a c y relations; give practical advice on integrating minority Attempts not only to provide women with the skills workers into the union and develop techniques to deal they need to take a leadership role in their trade union, with biases and prejudice at the work place and in the but also takes a careful look at the way sex role community. Approaches to combatting the disruptive stereotyping inhibits us from developing these skills. effects o f racism w i l l be discussed. This course covers the following areas: W o m e n and LSP. 140 (1.5) (S) History of t h e Labour M o v e m e n t in Canada G r o u p Dynamics. Power, Assertiveness, A d v o c a c y , Organizing and A survey o f the history of the labour movement in Canada from the formation of the working class in the 19th century through to mass industrial unionism. B y LSP. 155 (1.0) (F,S) Indian Land Claims a n d the Trade U n i o n Movement looking at specific conflicts, a good overview is T h i s course acquaints the participant with the position obtained of the struggles o f the labour movement to of native people on the issue o f land claims. A n Course 232 Descriptions understanding of the implications o f native land claims for the trade union movement and the history o f native people in Canada and British C o l u m b i a is gained. This history is studied in relation to the whole question o f land. Designed to meet the needs of active unionists and officers, this course combines principles and practice in a "learn while d o i n g " format Training in the following skills areas: 1. effective public speaking: including methods o f oral communication, effective listening and re- LSP. 160 (3.0) M e d i a f o r Trade U n i o n Education a n d Organization (F.S) sponse, confidence building, and style development. Role plays aid the participant in overcoming fears and speech anxiety while m a x i m i z i n g organization, The objective o f this course is to become familiar with objectives and analysis o f impact. simple media production skills for use in the labour 2. effective meetings: effective chairing, preparation movement. The participant learns how to record and of agendas, and building a good "process" with the dub audio material, use an instamatic or 35 m m still assistance of rules o f order. camera for slides, produce a simple slide-audio show, use portable video equipment for basic recording, write news releases, pamphlets, and internal newsletters and LSP. 180 S t e w a r d s ' Training (15) (F.S) edit audio and video tape. This course is intended to assist stewards and union LSP. 161 (1.5) W o r k i n g w i t h Mass M e d i a adequately represent their fellow workers at the office members in developing confidence in their ability to (F.S) or job site as well as provide the m i n i m u m technical This course is designed to acquaint trade unionists with the nature o f print and electronic mass media with a view to improving techniques for relating to the media. Specific topics which emerge from the classes w i l l be dealt with, typical o f which might be media ownership and the process of "newsmaking". LSP. 162 (1.0) (F.S) W o r k i n g Culture a n d History of Labour Arts Since its beginning, Canadian labour has worked to build a cultural life supportive o f the concerns o f working people. A t the same time, visual artists, film makers, dramatists, musicians, writers and other cultural workers have identified with the movement for social change embodied in organized labour. This course explores the history of Canadian labour culture, the influence o f various ethnic and international currents in creating a rich cultural identity and the limits and possibilities opened by the advent o f mass media. Examples o f f i l m , video, television, song, literature and visual art are used as focal points for discussion. LSP. 163 Media Workshop (1.5) (F.S) The aim o f this workshop is to acquaint learners with current multi-media presentation techniques. LSP. 170 (1.5) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s : Public Speaking a n d Parliamentary Procedures skills in advocacy and contract interpretation. In addition, the course provides a brief overview o f the history o f the North A m e r i c a n Labour Movement and its institutions as they have developed. LSP. 181 Collective Bargaining (1.5) (F.S) Technical and practical information for the union negotiator. Includes instruction on the bargaining process including preparation and development o f proposals; contract language and costing. Bargaining table advocacy skills are explored. Material is available for the specific needs o f public and private sector bargaining. A bargaining simulation is held as an integral part of the course. LSP. 182 (1.5) U n i o n Local A d m i n i s t r a t i o n (F.S) T h i s course is designed to provide union activists and local officers with basic skills in parliamentary procedures as well as the administrative duties o f officers and committee members in local unions. The course requires considerable student participation to develop debating and advocacy skills. LSP. 190 Contract Costing (1.0) (F.S) This course evaluates the "numbers game" played at (F.S) the bargaining table and in the media around bargaining issues. It deals with union and employer approaches to costing the different elements o f bargaining proposals and settlements. A l l the skills and techniques necessary for effective communications in active union involvement. Course Descriptions 233 T o p i c s discussed include: • wages and benefits and the concept of total compensation; • the effects o f inflation and design of C O L A clauses; • sources o f information for monetary negotiations and the uses and limitations o f external comparisons. Participants also consider issues such as strategy, the public relations aspects o f costing, and the relationship of costing to pay equity. LSP. 191 (1.0) Introduction t o Pension Plans (F.S) This'Course, useful for Pension Trustees, potential Trustees, union officers and pension plan administrative staff, is a thorough examination of pension plans and pension issues. Topics developed and discussed include defined benefit and money purchase plans; regulation o f pensions; the law o f trusts; investment principles and practices; the design, financing, administration and communication o f pension plans; strategic planning for pensions. LSP. 192 1.0) (F,S) Introduction t o Health & W e l f a r e Benefits This course has been developed to provide a w o r k i n g understanding o f the various aspects o f Health & Welfare/Benefit Plans. The following topics are incorporated: what is contained in a Health & Welfare Plan; government involvement; designing a benefit plan, costing components: methods of financing a benefit plan; benefit plan administration. LSP. 210 Arbitration (1.5) (F.S) This course, which is open to students who have previously completed L S P . 110, 111, 113 or any other Labour L a w course, is an advanced course dealing with matters such as rules o f evidence, procedures, selection of arbitrators, arbitration powers and a brief history o f arbitration. It deals with grievance arbitration arising out o f the collective agreement. Students are provided with practical skills for reviewing medical evidence and requesting medical legal opinions. A key part of the course is a case study that involves preparation of an appeal and the presentation of the appeal to a panel of the W o r k e r s ' Compensation R e v i e w Board. LSP. 226 (1.0) (F,S) Advanced Workers' Compensation - Appeal Preparation & Presentation The course is open to students who have previously completed L S P . 116, L S P . 216 or have experience in representing workers with compensation at the appeal level. This course provides detailed review o f A d vanced W o r k e r s ' Compensation Appeals to the A p peals Tribunal (Commissioners) and to the M e d i c a l R e v i e w Panel. Students review appeals procedures and policies for advanced appeals and complete practical skills exercises. (1.5) (0,3*,0)(Su,F,S) M A T H 009 Arithmetic A review o f the basic arithmetic operations. A p p l i c a tions to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas and volumes. This is a self-paced course primarily intended for returning students who require a basic math refresher. * Students are generally required to attend three scheduled hours per week for this course. M A T H 090 (1.5) (4*,0,0) (Su,F,S) Introductory A l g e b r a w i t h Functions Prerequisite: Math l l with at least a " C - " grade or permission o f a mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts o f introductory algebra with emphasis on the real number system, the algebra of exponents, and polynomial arithmetic at the elementary level. This course is intended for students who require a basic introduction to algebra. * This course meets four hours per week for seven weeks (half a term). LSP. 216 (1.5) (F,S) W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n A p p e a l s - Intermediate Level This course is open to students who have previously completed L S P . 116 or have experience in representing workers with compensation appeals. The course provides an understanding o f the Workers' Compensation appeals process with special emphasis on policies, procedures and practice by preparing and presenting appeals at the W o r k e r s ' Compensation R e v i e w Board. Course 234 Descriptions M A T H 095 (1.5) (4*,0,0)(Su,F,S) Intermediate A l g e b r a w i t h Functions Prerequisite: M A T H 090 or B M T H 045 with at least a " C - " grade, or Math 11 with at least a " C " grade, or permission o f a mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts o f intermediate algebra including polynomials, rational expressions, radical expressions, quadratic equations and an introduction to logarithms. This course is intended for students who have already completed a basic introduction to algebra. * T h i s course meets four hours per week for seven weeks (half a term) or two hours per week for the full term. Students who have completed within the past year M A T H 101 (3) Introduction t o Statistics rently. M A T H 090 with at least a " B - " grade O R M A T H 095 with a least a " C - " grade are pennitted to enrol in M A T H 107 only if they enrol in M A T H 095 concur- (4,0,0) (F,S) The mathematical models/applications in this course Prerequisite: Math 11 or M A T H 090 or B M T H 045 w i l l be mainly business/finance oriented. with at least a " C - " grade, or permission o f the instrucLinear and quadratic equations and inequalities, tor. absolute value, systems o f linear equations, functions A n introduction to the language o f statistics and some and graphs, inverse functions, mathematical modelling, statistical methods, including random variables and exponential and logarithm functions, circular and their distribution; random sampling, normal distribu- trigonometic functions, right-triangle trigonometry, tion, estimation o f parameters and testing hypotheses. arithmetic and geometric progressions, compound M A T H 102 Statistical M e t h o d s theorem. interest and annuities, summation notation, binomial (3) (4,0,0) (S) No duplicate credit for M A T H 105/107. Prerequisite: M A T H l()l with at least a " C - " grade. A study o f important statistical methods commonly used in the analysis o f research data, including t-tcsts and their non-parametric competitors, one and two-way analysis o f variance, chi-squarc tests and regression analysis. M A T H 108 (3) (4,0,0) (Su,F,S) Calculus I f o r Business a n d Social Sciences Prerequisite: Math Placement Test ( M P T ) O R com- pletion within the past year of: Math 12 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 105 or M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " grade. M A T H 105 (3) (4,0,0) (Su,F,S) Precalculus M a t h e m a t i c s A n introduction to the mathematics o f change; the N o t e : This course is not transferable to U B C except if concepts to business and the social sciences using a combined with MATH 110 or 108 (for some faculties). technology-based modelling approach; mathematical concepts o f calculus and the application o f these Prerequisite: Math Placement Test ( M P T ) O R comple- models o f data sets using continuous functions; using tion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with at least a " C " the derivative and integral to investigate change; grade; B M T H 045 with at least a ' B " grade; or M A T H interpreting and communicating results. 095 with at least a " C + " grade. Students who have completed within the past year M A T H 090 with at least a " B - " grade O R M A T H 095 with a least a " C - " grade arc permitted to enrol in M A T H 105 only i f they enrol in M A T H 095 concurrently. A review o f algebra and a discussion o f functions, graphs, mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms and exponential functions. Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses or who require a Math 12 equivalent course. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 108/110/ 116. M A T H 109 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Calculus II f o r Business a n d Social Sciences Prerequisite: " C - " grade. M A T H 108 or I 10 or 1 16 with at least a Trigonometric functions, applications o f the definite integral, integration techniques. Functions o f several independent variables, partial derivatives, cxtrema, Lagrange multipliers, multiple integrals, some techniques for solving differential equations, systems o f N o duplicate credit for M A T H 105/107. linear equations and matrix algebra. M A T H 107 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Precalculus f o r Business a n d Social Sciences N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 109/111/ 126. N o t e : This course is not transferable to U B C unless combined with MATH 108 (for some faculties). Prerequisite: Math Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m - M A T H 110 (4.5) (6,0,0) (Su,F,S) Calculus I pletion within the past year of: Math 12 with at least a Prerequisite: " C " grade: o r B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or pletion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with an " A " M A T H 095 with at least a " C + " grade. grade: or Math 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a " B " Math Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m - Course Descriptions 235 (3) (4,0,0) (Su.F.S) least a " C - " grade. M A T H 124 Discrete M a t h e m a t i c s I Limits, continuity, the derivative, rules of differentia- Prerequisite: tion, implicit differentiation, related rates, curve pletion within the last year of: M a t h 12 with an " A " sketching, optimization, differentials; definite integrals grade; or M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a " B " and anti-differentiation: logarithmic and exponential grade in each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at functions. least a " C - " grade. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 108/110/ A survey of fundamental topics in discrete mathematics 116 and 117. including: mathematical proofs using direct arguments, grade in each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m - indirect arguments, and induction; the algebra o f sets; This course way he completed by guided self-study combinatorics; functions and relations; and graph format using video and computer based instruction. theory. T h i s course stresses the special role o f discrete (6,0,0) (Su.F.S) mathematics in computing science. M A T H 111 Calculus II (4.5) Prerequisite: M A T H 110 with at least a " C - " grade. M A T H 126 Calculus II A study o f the anti-derivative: the integral, techniques Prerequisites: of integration, applications of the integral; polar grade. coordinates, parametric curves; sequences, infinite Corequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (Su,F,S) M A T H 110 or 116 with at least a " C - " M A T H 127 series and T a y l o r ' s Theorem. Course Content: A study of the anti-derivative, the No duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 109/111/ 126 and 127. integral, techniques o f integration, applications of the integral, differential equations, polar coordinates, M A T H 116 Calculus I (3) (4,0,0) (Su, F,S) Prerequisites: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R sequences, infinite series and T a y l o r ' s Theorem. Continued emphasis on the geometric interpretation o f the concepts o f calculus. N o t e : Duplicate credit will not be given for completion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with an MATH 1091111/126. " A " grade; or M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a " B " grade in each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " grade. Corequisite: (1,1,0) (Su.F.S) M A T H 117 Course content: Limits, continuity, the derivative, rules of differentiation, implicit differentiation, parametric curves, related rates, curve sketching, optimization, linear approximations, transcendental functions, indeterminate forms, anti-differentiation. Throughout the course a strong emphasis is placed on the geometric interpretation o f the concepts o f calculus. Note: Duplicate credit will not be given for Prerequisite: M A T H 110 or 117 with at least a " C - " grade or permission o f instructor. Corequisite: M A T H 126 Course content: Applications of integral calculus with an emphasis on the use of technology in mathematics. Topics include: numerical integration, introduction to a computer algebra system, applications in science, differential equations, sequences and series. MATH N o t e : Duplicate credit will not be given for MATH 111/127. 10X1110/116. M A T H 117 (1) Applications of Calculus I Corequisite: M A T H 127 (1) Applications of Calculus II (1,1,0) (Su.F.S) M A T H 152 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Linear A l g e b r a a n d Differential Equations M A T H I 16 Course content: Applications o f differential calculus N o t e : This course is intended for students in the with an emphasis on the use o f technology in math- Engineering program. ematics. Topics include: models, curve fitting, Taylor Corequisite: M A T H 111 or 126 polynomials, numerical stability, numerical derivatives, rates of change, optimization. N o t e : Duplicate credit will nor be given for MATH and MATH Course 236 117. Descriptions A n introduction to systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, 110 determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. The theory w i l l be applied to first order linear differential equations, first order linear systems * M A T H 215 to be offered in the fall or spring term and engineering topics. when sufficient student demand is evident. y e a r u n i v e r s i t y transfer p r o g r a m i n m a t h . M A T H 224 Discrete M a t h e m a t i c s II Students p l a n n i n g to take 200 level m a t h Prerequisite: T h e M a t h D e p a r t m e n t offers a full second- s h o u l d seek advice from M a t h i n s t r u c t o r s . (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) M A T H 124 with at least a " C - " grade. A continuation o f the study o f discrete mathematics from M A T H 124. The emphasis is on combinatorial M A T H 200 Linear A l g e b r a Prerequisite: (4.0,0) (F) (3) analysis, including generating functions, set theory and graph theory, with applications to computing science M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to systems o f linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. Theorems and proofs are an important component of the course. including representations, algorithms, and complexity. M A T H 230 Calculus III (3) Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C - " grade. Corequisite: M A T H 200 or permission o f instructor. Analytical geometry of three dimensions; partial M A T H 204 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S)* Probability and Statistics f o r Applications Prerequisite: M A T H 108 or 110 or 116 with at least a " C - " grade or permission of the instructor. A calculus-based introduction to classical and nonparametric techniques for inferences about means, variances and analysis of variance. The emphasis w i l l differentiation, applications; double and triple integrals; transformations to various coordinate systems. M A T H 231 Calculus IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) M A T H 230 and M A T H 152 or 200 with at least a " C - " grade in each. be on problem formulation, models, assumptions and Vector calculus; line and surface integrals; Green's interpretation. Regularly scheduled "labs" w i l l intro- Theorem; vector fields; divergence theorem; Stokes's duce course participants to appropriate supporting Theorem; applications. statistical software. * M A T H 204 to be offered in either the fall or spring M A T H 235 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction t o Differential Equations term. Prerequisite: M A T H 205 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction t o Probability a n d Statistics Prerequisite: grade. M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C - " A calculus-based study of probability, discrete and continuous random variables, mathematical expectation, moment generating functions, Central L i m i t Theorem, sampling from normal populations, confidence intervals, hypothesis testing. M A T H 200 and 230 with at least a " C - " grade in each. A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; higher order linear differential equations; linear systems; power series techniques; Laplace transform method; the phase plane, applications. M D I A 065 M e d i a Studies (3) (3,0,0) (F) A n introductory analysis and historical overview of media, especially f i l m , combining aesthetic concepts, M A T H 215 Introduction t o Analysis Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,S)* M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C + " grade or permission of instructor. A course for students who plan to proceed in mathematics. L o g i c , sets, functions, limits o f sequences and series; introduction to continuity, the derivative, Riemann Integral. production techniques, and theoretical foundations. See admission requirements in the M e d i a Resources Section. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. M D I A 100 (3) Introduction t o V i d e o Production (3,0,0) (F) This course concentrates on the basic skills involved in video production with an emphasis on camera techniques and visual sequencing. Course Descriptions M D I A 101 N e w M e d i a Literacy (3) (3.0,0) (F) M D I A 173 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Educational M e d i a A p p l i c a t i o n s : A u d i o T h i s course is an introduction to digital technology and A n introduction to the fundamental principles o f sound multimedia. It w i l l introduce students to the character- generation and reproduction, and to the terminology, istics, applications and analysis o f multimedia. T h i s is hardware, and systems related to audio components. a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. Applications o f audio technology, equipment maintenance, and critical analysis o f product specifications M D I A 102 Introduction t o (3) Photography (3,0,0) (F) This course is an introduction to photographic skills, emphasizing fundamental skills in camera and image arc given special emphasis. M D I A 181 Basic A u d i o P r o d u c t i o n (3) (3,6,0) (F) control. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program A n introduction to basic production techniques; course. components include interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, m i x i n g , and packaging. The course also covers M D I A 105 Project Design (1.5) (1.5,0,5) (F) the operation o f microphones, tape recorders and dub/ mix facilities. A n introduction to project design. Through the analysis of media production, students learn how to write an effective design plan for a media project. M D I A 182 (3) Advanced A u d i o Production (3,0,0) (S) The application o f production techniques in a variety of M D I A 142 (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) C o m p u t e r M a n a g e d Learning a n d Training documentaries, location recording, radio plays, film This course examines the concepts underlying the and video soundtracks and music recording, often learning process and how the computer can be used to using the department's sound production studio. situations, including multi-track recording and m i x i n g , enhance this process. The instructional design process w i l l be examined and w i l l provide a platform for the investigation and application of a process to plan, produce, implement, and evaluate computer-delivered learning and training strategies. M D I A 183 (3) (3,6,0) (F) T h e o r y and A p p l i c a t i o n s of P h o t o g r a p h i c Production A n introduction to the photographic base relative to audiovisual production, including the camera and its M D I A 150 Introduction t o (3) Animation (3,0,0) (S) als and their control, and visual reproduction. A n introduction to the theory and application of animation techniques. Computer animation is the primary medium in this course. M D I A 156 (3) C o m p u t e r s in M e d i a : Introduction controls, darkroom techniques, photosensitive materi- (3,0,0) (S) Basic computer skills in word processing and introduc- M D I A 185 Advanced Photography (3) (3,6,0) (S) The application o f photographic techniques, with emphasis on combining shot sequences to tell a story, as well as editing, layout, presentation, and basic studio operation. tory training in graphics and desktop publishing applications as they relate to media production. T h i s is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. M D I A 186 (3) C o m p u t e r s in M e d i a P r o d u c t i o n (3,3,0) (S) A n introduction to the use o f computers in pre-producM D I A 172 Video Technology I (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) A n introduction to video systems, including a history tion to increase productivity. Emphasis is placed on computer application in graphics, budgeting, storyboarding and planning for the media. of video technology, components o f a complete video system, and a comparison o f different formats. M D I A 195 Photography (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the areas o f darkroom maintenance, photographic chemistry, print finishing, small and medium format copy camera, and relevant c o p y i n g materials used in a variety o f media applications. Course 238 Descriptions M D I A 200 (3) (3,6,0) (S) Intermediate V i d e o I for all aspects of these productions from contact to completion. This course is designed to build on the basics of video recording and sequencing taught in M D I A 100. Students w i l l focus on lighting, audio recording and M D I A 300 (6) (6,3,0) (F) A d v a n c e d V i d e o Production editing for single camera productions. Workshops and This advanced production course develops students' exercises w i l l form a major part o f this course as well basic production skills (taught in M D I A 100, 200 & as a final production which students w i l l produce in 202) to a level suitable to produce for cablecast, production groups. broadcast and instructional and corporate settings. M D I A 202 (3) (3,3,0) (S) M D I A 303 (3) (3,6,0) (S) Intermediate V i d e o II The M e d i a Specialist in Education and Training In this course students w i l l learn the fundamentals o f A course concerned with the uses o f media for motiva- developing, writing, and presenting material suitable tion, information transmission, emotive learning, and self-awareness. A field practicum course exploring the for basic video documentary productions. relationship of the media specialist to education in M D I A 231 (3) Digital V i d e o Post P r o d u c t i o n (3,0,0) (S) general and the role of the media gcneralist in educational and instructional communication. This course provides the student with a hands on introduction to digital image manipulation for commercial video production. The A v i d non linear editing M D I A 304 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Educational Media Applications: Computers system w i l l be the main vehicle for teaching digital A theoretical and hands-on introduction to the use o f editing and effects. computers in education. Includes producing and evaluating computer-assisted instruction packages and M D I A 250 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) computer-assisted video instruction. A n overview o f the production planning process with M O A . 100 (3) M e d i c a l Document Processing I Documentary Scriptwriting an emphasis on the roles of scripts, concepts, treatments and storyboards in documentary production. Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (F) Keyboarding speed of 35 w p m Keyboarding skill development and introduction to M S M D I A 263 Production Resources (1.5) (1.5,6,0) (S) The comparative study o f media technical systems and their operation; evaluation of various resources available in the L o w e r M a i n l a n d ; design and/or modification of systems for media production and delivery; and interface of different types o f systems. M D I A 271 (3) Educational Television Systems (3,6,0) (F) This course assumes background in basic portable W o r d 6.0; basic to advanced applications. MOA. 102 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) K e y b o a r d i n g Skill and S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t Remedial drills, power drills, short and sustained timed writings to increase speed and accuracy in medical keyboarding. M O A . 103 (3) M e d i c a l M a c h i n e Transcription Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) M O A . 100 & 111 video tape equipment and operations covered in M D I A 200 and 202 and is designed to develop the students' ability to effectively use multi-camera studio setups for the production of educational programs. These programs are of a quality suitable for cablecast or broadcast on the Knowledge Network. M D I A 299 (1.5) Practice in transcribing medical consultation letters and hospital reports from dictation equipment. T h i s course entails a mandatory two-hour lab. MOA. 105 (3) (4,0,0) (F) M e d i c a l A d m i n i s t r a t i v e Procedures I (1.5,0,0) (S) M a j o r Projects Students w i l l work in production groups to produce programs for outside clients. Students are responsible Students will learn office procedures specific to the medical office including time management, medical ethics, appointments, patient record, filing, reception skills, and medical billing. Course Descriptions 239 MOA. 106 (0.75) (2,0,0) (S) M e d i c a l A d m i n i s t r a t i v e Procedures II Prerequisite: MOA. 115 (1.5) (2,0,54) (S) Directed W o r k Experience M O A . 105 F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f term two, a Continuation o f M O A . 105. Students w i l l be able to perform financial recordkeeping specific to the medical medical office/clinic or hospital work practicum is arranged for the student. Before the work placement, the student w i l l be required to attend career preparation office. lectures which w i l l include practice sessions for the MOA. 107 (1.5) (2,4,0) (F) employment interview. Clinical Procedures I MOA. Prerequisite: St. John's Standard First A i d Certificate Students w i l l learn about clinical procedures pertinent 121 (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) M e d i c a l D o c u m e n t Processing II Prerequisite: M O A . 100 to the doctor's office and the hospital setting. The course includes general information about physical and A d v a n c e d word processing applications are used in a mental health; medications and health products. medical environment. Students w i l l learn how to use and maintain medical office equipment. There is a mandatory lab component. M O A . 122 (1.5) C o m p u t e r s in H e a l t h Care MOA. Prerequisite: 108 (1.5) (2,4,0) (S) Clinical Procedures II a n d P h a r m a c o l o g y Prerequisite: M O A . 107 (2,0,0) (S) M O A . 105, M O A . 100. Students w i l l be introduced to the use o f computers in the medical office. Students w i l l acquire skills using a Continuation of M O A . 107. There is a mandatory lab microcomputer to gather patient demographic data, set component. up appointments, process claims for submission to MOA. able. M S P , process remittance reports and accounts receiv109 (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n a t o m y a n d Related P h y s i o l o g y and M.T. 320 Improvisation I Pathology I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A study o f structure, function and interrelationships of the organic systems o f the body. C o m m o n medical disorders, operative procedures and related terminology w i l l be studied in conjunction with the systems. M O A . 110 (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n a t o m y a n d Related P h y s i o l o g y a n d P a t h o l o g y II Prerequisite: M O A . 109 A continuation o f M O A . 109. MOA. 111 A n experiential study of free and structured improvisation forms for groups and solo work. M.T. 330 Basic Clinical Skills (3) A n introduction to the basic concepts o f observation, assessment and goal setting, including six weeks o f introductory field work and in-class observations. M.T. 340 (1.5) M i d i Synthesis T e c h n o l o g y (3) (3,0,3) (F) (2,0,0) (F) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the use of m i d i technology for the therapeutic setting. Medical Terminology I Introduction to Greek and Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining forms c o m m o n to medical M.T. 350 terminology. Students w i l l aquire the necessary skills The Influence of M u s i c (3) (3,0,0) (F) to define, pronounce and correctly spell medical terms. A study o f the physical and psychological impact of MOA. 112 (3) (4,0,0) (3) music, and its components for music therapy. A study M e d i c a l T e r m i n o l o g y II of healing and music in various cultures. Prerequisite: M.T. 360 MOA. I ll (3) (4,0,0) (F) Continuation, reinforcement o f terminology in M O A . Music Therapy I 111. This course presents the development o f music as therapy, the clientele groups and their needs, and the potential o f music as a therapeutic medium. Course 240 Descriptions M.T. 361 (3) (4,0,0) (S) M.T. 460 (3) (4,0,0) (F) M u s i c Therapy II M u s i c Therapy III This course presents three music therapy styles with a A continuation of the presentation o f music therapy focus on theory, analysis, and practice. Included are styles, for psychiatry, palliative care, music education Developmental M u s i c Therapy, Nordoff/Robbins and in healing, including the work o f Helen Bonny and improvisational style, and the use o f music therapy in M a r y Priestley. Assessment and treatment planning in-patient psychotherapy. w i l l be covered in depth. M.T. 364 D i s a b l i n g C o n d i t i o n s of (3) (3,0,0) (F) M.T. 461 (3) (3,0,0) (S) M u s i c Therapy IV Adulthood A n introduction to anatomy and physiology, normal This course focuses on professional attitudes, skills, and abnormal, and practical elements o f standard and awareness. Students learn job hunting skills, and treatment. practise leading workshops. M.T. 370 (3) (4,0,0) (S) M.T. 462 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Disabling C o n d i t i o n s of C h i l d h o o d Principles of Research A basic introduction to abnormal child development A n introduction to elementary research designs and and some major intervention approaches. basic statistical procedures. M.T. 380 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) M.T. 480 (1.5) Interpersonal Skills f o r M u s i c Therapists Improvisation III Communication and observation exercises to increase A continuation of Improvisation II. (1,0,0) (S) awareness of ingrained skills and habits, and to introM.T. 490 duce new alternatives. (6) (2,0,6) (F) Practicum III M.T. 391 Practicum II (6) (2,0,6) (S) Field work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.) Field work, in which students design, lead and docu- M.T. 491 ment music therapy sessions, in consultation with staff Practicum IV (6) (2.0,6) (S) supervision. Field work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.) W e e k l y seminars examine practicum issues. M.T. 510 M.T. 420 (1.0) (1.5,0,0) (S) (9) Internship Improvisation II - Guitar 1,000 hours of clinical field work, including monthly Group leading using guitar improvisation, plus exploring current popular styles and idioms. seminars. M.T. 450 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) M U S . 090 Digitized S o u n d (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) The Influence of Music II A u d i o is an important component in computer-based A continuation of lecture and experiential exposure to multimedia. In addition to the fundamental concepts o f the influence o f music in conjunction with the expres- digital audio, students learn the techniques for digitizing and editing sound samples for use in interactive sive arts. multi-media presentations. M.T. 451 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) M u s i c and the Creative A r t s A n experiential exposure to leading creative arts MUS. 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Theory I activities w h i c h can be used in conjunction with music: Corequisite: eg. dance, visual arts, poetry. A study of music from c. 1600 to 1800 with an empha- M U S . 112. sis on diatonic harmony up to simple modulation. The student w i l l learn control of chord progression and voice leading. Course Descriptions 241 M U S . 101 T h e o r y II (3) (4,0,0) (S) M U S . 120 M u s i c History I (3) (3.0,*) (F) Prerequisite: M U S . 100. The study o f music as an acoustical and structural Corequisite: M U S . IT3. phenomenon. T o survey the major monuments o f Continued study o f diatonic harmony, to include world music history in relation to the function o f music treatment o f all diatonic triads and sevenths, principles in a given culture. T h e aim w i l l be to introduce music of voice leading, and techniques o f contrapuntal as a global concept, drawing on musics from Eastern expansion. Analysis o f works in binary and ternary and Western musical traditions. forms. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. M U S . 110 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) MUS. 121 (3) Class Strings I M u s i c History II A practical study o f the violin family. Prerequisite: MUS. 111 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Class Strings II M U S . 120. A study o f music history o f the Medieval and Renaissance periods. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. A continuation of M U S . 110. M U S . 112 (1.5) Ear Training a n d Sight Singing I Corequisite: (3,0,*) (S) (3,0,0) (F) M U S . 122 (1.5) Lyric Diction: Italian a n d G e r m a n (2,0,0) A n exploration o f the application o f the principles o f M U S . 100. diction for singers in Italian and German through the Study of the aural recognition o f intervals, chords, and medium of the International Phonetic Alphabet ( I P A ) . harmonic movement. The student w i l l learn to: transcribe melodies and rhythms; sight sing using Solfege and scale degrees; read rhythms. M U S . 113 (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) Ear Training a n d Sight Singing II Prerequisite: M U S . I 12. Corequisite: M U S . 10I. (2,0,0) A n exploration of the application of the principles o f diction for singers in French and English through the medium of the International Phonetic Alphabet ( I P A ) . M U S . 200 (3) (4,0,0) (F) T h e o r y III A continuation o f M U S . 112. M U S . 114 Class Piano I M U S . 123 (1.5) Lyric Diction: French a n d English (D (2,2,0) (F) This course is designed for students who wish to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization arc the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Prerequisite: M U S . 101. Corequisite: M U S . 212. A study of advanced tonal procedures: review o f nonchord tones, mixture, seventh chords, applied V and V I I , diatonic modulation, seventh chords with added dissonance. A detailed study o f compound ternary and rondo forms. Investigation of the fugue. Theoretical concepts arc applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths o f the major key, MUS. all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab T h e o r y IV evaluates material covered in class. Students practise on the department's pianos. (D M U S . 115 (2,2,0) (S) Class Piano II Prerequisite: M U S . 1 14. A continuation o f M U S . 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. Course 242 Descriptions 201 (3) Prerequisite: M U S . 200. Corequisite: M U S . 213. (4,0,0) (S) A study o f chromaticism: the phrygian II, augmented sixth chords, other chromatic chords, chromatic voiceleading techniques, chromaticism in larger contexts. A detailed study of sonata, sonata-rondo, and variation forms. M U S . 210 Class W o o d w i n d s I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A practical study of the woodwind family. M U S . 211 Class W o o d w i n d s II (1.5) Prerequisite: (2,0.0) (S) M U S . 212 (1.5) Ear Training & Sight Singing III MUS. 113. Corequisite: MUS. 200. (3,0.0) (F) M U S . 213 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing IV MUS. 212. Corequisite: MUS. 201. (3,0,0) (S) (D (D (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) (1.5) Prerequisite: (3) OTEC 111 Business English I (3) (4,0,0) (F) The course will review the fundamental principles of grammar, spelling, and punctuation. Memo writing will be covered. OTEC 112 (1.5) Language Skill D e v e l o p m e n t (2,0,0) (F) This course will train students to apply the correct techniques of written communications to their proofreading, verifying, and editing. OTEC 113 (4.5) (6.0,0) (S) Business English and C o m m u n i c a t i o n s This course will train students in grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct word usage, proofreading skills and business writing. (2,2,0) (S) This course will review basic math skills and train students to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. (3,0,*) (F) OTEC 117 (3) A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I A practical study of the percussion family. M U S . 220 Music History III M U S . 361 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) M e t h o d Studies in M u s i c Education: Orff M e t h o d o l o g y OTEC 115 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Business Systems and Procedures A practical study of the brass family. M U S . 219 Class Percussion M U S . 360 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) M e t h o d Studies in M u s i c Education: Kodaly Methodology (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of MUS. 214 with increased complexity of repertoire and technique. M U S . 218 Class Brass A survey of music history of the Romantic period and the 20th century. (2,2,0) (F) For students who have taken MUS. 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to common idiomatic accompaniment patterns as well as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques arc emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application in simple repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. M U S . 215 Class Piano IV MUS. 220. This will provide a knowledge of Orff methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. A continuation of MUS. 212. M U S . 214 Class Piano (3.0,*) (S) This will provide a knowledge of Kodaly methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. A continuation of MUS. 113. Prerequisite: (3) * Some concert attendance will be required. A continuation of MUS. 210. Prerequisite: M U S . 221 M u s i c History IV MUS. 120 and MUS. I2l. A survey of music history of the Baroque period and Classical period. * Some concert attendance will be required. (4,0.0) (F.S) This course introduces students to the theory of accounting and to tasks performed in the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy, and thoroughness as well as on independent decision making. OTEC 123 (4.5) W o r d Processing Procedures (6,2,0) (S) This course w i l l instruct students in the theory and producing complex documents which require formatting, computer software operations, and language s k i l l decisions. practical applications o f a word processing program. This course w i l l also build keyboarding speed and OTEC 149 accuracy skills. M i c r o c o m p u t e r M a t h a n d Business (3) (4,0,0) (S) Applications OTEC 140 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S,Su) The students w i l l review the math functions related to A c c o u n t i n g A d m i n i s t r a t i v e Procedures spreadsheets. In addition, the students w i l l become Through simulations, students w i l l learn accounting proficient users o f spreadsheets in both D O S and administrative procedures for accounts payable, accounts receivable, payroll, and bank reconciliations. window environments. Students w i l l also receive an overview o f technological advances in office automation. OTEC 143 (6) (8,2,0) (F) Introduction t o M i c r o c o m p u t e r A p p l i c a t i o n s OTEC 150 (3) (4,0,0) (S) A d m i n i s t r a t i v e a n d Business Procedures T o introduce students to some o f the theoretical aspects of microcomputers, hardware and software, theory and practice o f word processing, and correct keyboarding techniques to increase speed and accuracy on a microcomputer. OTEC 144 (4.5) Microcomputer Applications This course w i l l introduce students to the basic office administrative procedures associated with the modern business office. The students w i l l develop the skills to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. (6,2,0) (S) OTEC 211 (4,0,0) (S) (3) Business W r i t i n g Prerequisites: O T E C 143 or equivalent. Prerequisite: This course provides students with an overview o f O T E C 111 or equivalent. technological advances in office automation, the use o f This course utilizes the computer to improve the database and spreadsheet microcomputer applications. student's quality of grammar, spelling, and word usage, and to develop and/or improve composition skills. OTEC 146 (6) (8,2,0) (F) OTEC 212 Microcomputer Applications I (4,0,0) (S) (3) Business English II This course w i l l train students in the theory and practical applications o f a word processing software program and a database program. This course w i l l also build keyboarding speed and accuracy skills. OTEC 147 (4.5) (6,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: O T E C 111 or equivalent. This course utilizes the computer to assist students in developing/improving their letter and memo writing skills. Emphasis w i l l be placed on sentence and paragraph structure and composition skills. M i c r o c o m p u t e r A p p l i c a t i o n s II Prerequisites: OTEC 215 (3) Computerized Accounting O T E C 146 or equivalent. (4,0,0) (Su) Students w i l l become proficient in the use of a word processing windows program. Students w i l l also be Prerequisite: introduced to spreadsheet programs for both D O S and This course is designed to instruct the student in the window environments. This course w i l l introduce use o f the accounting application program, A C C P A C , O T E C 117 or equivalent. students to technological developments and advances for entering, storing and retrieving records, and in office automation. producing standard financial reports. OTEC 148 (3) (4,0,0) (S) OTEC 217 (3) Administrative Applications A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II Students w i l l apply their knowledge of records control, Prerequisite: time management, and other administrative procedures grade or permission o f the instructor. to office simulations. This course w i l l provide reinforcement of procedures used in word processing by Course 244 Descriptions (4,4,0) (S.Su) O T E C 117 with a m i n i m u m of a " B " This course is a continuation o f O T E C 117 with emphasis on accounting systems and procedures. Business simulations are used extensively throughout the course. OTEC 218 (1.5) (2,2,0) (S.Su) A c c o u n t i n g - Comprehensive Project OTEC 251 Interpersonal Skills (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l provide students with an understanding o f interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence job performance. Students w i l l Students w i l l continue the study o f the accounting practice in-person and telephone responding, customer fundamentals begun in O T E C 117 and 217. Emphasis service and issue resolution skills in a supportive w i l l be placed on the application o f these fundamentals environment. to a comprehensive simulated business situation representative of those encountered in business. OTEC 219 (4.5) Microcomputer Accounting Prerequisite: (6,0,0) (Su) A C C P A C for completing accounting procedures, including accounts receivable, accounts payable, payroll, general ledger, and inventory control. Prerequisites: This course w i l l provide students with an understanding o f interpersonal communication techniques that can A hands-on course to develop proficiency in the use o f (3) (4,0,0) (S) positively influence performance on the job. This O T E C 117 or equivalent. OTEC 233 D o c u m e n t Design OTEC 252 (3) O r g a n i z a t i o n a l Behaviour (4,2,0) (Su) O T E C 146 and O T E C 147 or equiva- course w i l l also identify the positive administrative and supervisory skills that program graduates w i l l need as they wish to assume additional career responsibility in the future. OTEC 253 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) H u m a n Resource M a n a g e m e n t Skills This course describes the key activities o f a human resources department. A n H R assistant requires the lents. ability to help employees with personnel issues. Students w i l l use the graphics capabilities o f desktop publishing to enhance the appearance of letterheads, reports, tables, brochures, news releases, etc. OTEC 234 (3) Introduction t o N e t w o r k s Prerequisites: (4,2,0) (Su) O T E C 146 and 147 or O T E C 146 and 149, or equivalents. Problem solving, staff training, and interviewing are some o f the employee relations skills that w i l l be examined. OTEC 300 (1.5) Directed W o r k Experience I (2,0,70) (S.Su) This course involves both lectures on job search techniques and resume preparation. In addition, at least Students w i l l learn how a network operates, how to a 30-hour work practicum must be completed in an research information from bulletin boards, and some industry placement related to the student's program o f basic troubleshooting techniques. study. OTEC 235 (1.5) Document Transcription Prerequisites: (2,0,0) (S) O T E C 111 and O T E C 146 or equiva- P A D M 200 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Local G o v e r n m e n t A d m i n i s t r a t i o n in B.C. Prerequisite: Current employment in a Municipality, lents. First Nations Government, Regional District, Improve- The development of transcription skills to produce ment District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission o f mailable correspondence using microcomputers. the instructor. Spelling, punctuation, and grammar w i l l be reviewed. This course w i l l include discussion of the structures and administration of local governments, as well as OTEC 245 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introductory M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications current issues in local governance. Topics include: the Students w i l l learn to use spreadsheets for specialized governments arc organized and administered, their office procedures including the creation of forms, powers and limitations; issues o f sustainability; reports, and spreadsheets. relations with aboriginal governments; and issues o f history and purposes of local government; how local public participation such as interest group lobbying and public consultation. Course Descriptions 245 P A D M 201 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Local G o v e r n m e n t Services in B.C. asepsis, disabling conditions and their functional Prerequisite: limitations. Both course content and assignments are Current employment in a Municipality, include the principles o f body mechanics, medical First Nations Government, Regional District, Improve- integrated with lab and practicum placements in P C A D ment District or Supporting Agency and permission o f 019 and P C A D 039. the instructor. This course w i l l examine the services that municipali- PCAD 014 (1.5) Ethics a n d Values in Health Care (2,0,1) (F) ties provide to their citizens in British C o l u m b i a . Services to be discussed include: Public W o r k s , In this course the student develops the knowledge and Protective Services including Fire and Police, Regula- skills required to fill the role of a Personal Care tory Services, Water and Sewer Services. Refuse Attendant in a professional, ethical and caring manner Collection and S o l i d Waste disposal, Recreation and to ensure that people with disabilities are valued. Cultural Services, Environmental Protection Services, This course assists students to respect differences, demonstrate effective communication skills and understand the principles o f normalization, and integration. and Health Services. P A D M 202 (3) Municipal Finance in B.C. (3,0,1) (F o r S) Prerequisite: Current employment in a Municipality, First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission o f the instructor. This course w i l l examine the practices and issues o f PCAD 019 (1.5) A p p l i e d Theory - Practicum I (0,4,11) (F) The first part of the practicum course is a series of field trips designed to increase the student's awareness o f community resources. In the second part o f the course Municipal Finance in British C o l u m b i a and w i l l students spend two weeks in a practicum placement include discussion o f the M u n i c i p a l A c t as it pertains to arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and Financial Administration; the role o f provincial observes the student working in the practicum setting. government in Financial Administration, the role o f the Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and Municipal Finance Authority; the Finance Function at course work in P C A D 013. the M u n i c i p a l / R e g i o n a l levels; A c c o u n t i n g and Districts; The Financial Planning Process including P C A D 022 H u m a n Relations II Short Term Budgets and L o n g T e r m Financial Plan- This is the second course in human relations, in w h i c h Financial controls in Municipalities and Regional (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) ning; Financing Options: General Accounting/Treasury the student continues to develop knowledge, skills and Functions: Assessment, Taxation, Collection. values related to the needs of clients with disabilities. P A D M 203 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) M u n i c i p a l L a w in British C o l u m b i a teaching, I E P / I P P and community integration. Prerequisite: Current employment in a Municipality, First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission o f the instructor. Students explore behaviour, learning strategies, gentle PCAD 023 (1.5) Growth and Development (2,0,1) (S) This course is designed to introduce students to the major changes w h i c h occur in normal and abnormal This course focuses on legal principles pertaining to development. The learner identifies basic developmen- municipal government, with particular emphasis on its tal human needs, disabling conditions and techniques status, functions, and legal powers and constraints. It to empower people with mental handicaps and cogni- w i l l also introduce the principles of administrative law, tive disorders. how legislation is created, and the powers and duties o f administrative agencies. Course content includes role o f the family, sexuality, abuse and resources for support. PCAD 013 (3.0) (4,0,2) (F) Introduction t o Physical Disabilities Concepts PCAD 024 (3.0) (4,0,2) (S) A d v a n c e d Physical Disabilities Concepts Students learn the theoretical basis for the procedures This is a continuation o f P C A D 013. Students learn the needed by the Personal Care Attendant working with theoretical basis of advanced procedures essential to physically disabled clients of all ages. The procedures the role of the Personal Care Attendant. The course Course 246 Descriptions content is also integrated with lab and practicum m i n d and body, and others. The emphasis o f the course placements in P C A D 029 and P C A D 039. varies from instructor to instructor. PCAD 029 (6.0) A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum II PHIL 110 Critical T h i n k i n g (0,35,0) (S) The student spends seven weeks in three different (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A n introduction to the basic rules of clear and rational practicum settings arranged by the College. A clinical thought. The student w i l l be taught, through extensive instructor visits and observes the student while on examples, how to detect false reasoning, illegitimate practicum. Assignments are integrated with lab instruc- appeals to emotions, inconsistencies and contradic- tion and course work in P C A D 024 A N D 059. tions. The goal is to develop our logical awareness to the point that we can no longer be victimized by the PCAD 049 (2.0) (0,4,2) (F) A p p l i e d Theory: Lab for Personal Assistants I This course exposes students through simulations and paper problems/case histories to the functional limitation o f medical and physical conditions that may be rhetoric o f everyday life, and can develop our o w n arguments with clarity and confidence. PHIL 120 (3) Understanding Scientific Reasoning (4,0,0) encountered working as a personal atttcndant. Students This course w i l l provide students with an introduction demonstrate and practice skills that they need to work to modern formal logic, and then utilize that skill to with clients who have a physical disability. explore such topics as the nature and testing of scientific theories in both the natural and social sciences, the PCAD 059 (1.0) (0,4,2) (S) A p p l i e d Theory: Lab for Personal Assistants II This course enables students to integrate and apply the knowledge and skills o f a personal attendant working difference between causal relations and correlations, and rational decision making. Attention w i l l be given to both the problem-solving and philosophical aspects of scientific reasoning. with physically disabled clients. Students demonstrate, There are no prerequisites, but the course is a natural practice, and gain feedback on their skills. The purpose continuation of P H I L 110, and w i l l appeal especially to of the lab is to prepare students for w o r k i n g with students who have an interest in cither the natural or physically disabled clients on practicum placements. social sciences. PHIL 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Introductory Philosophy: Ethics PHIL 140 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Philosophy a n d L a w : Introduction t o Canadian Law A n introduction to ethical theory and applied ethics. The course addresses questions such as: What are the origins o f conscience? W h y should I be moral? A r c there objective moral values? What is good for human beings? What makes right actions right and wrong actions wrong? Issues o f applied e t h i c s that m a y be addressed include capital punishment, abortion, assisted-suicide, c i v i l disobedience and environmental responsibility. The emphasis of the course varies among instructors. A general introduction to the fundamental principles of jurisprudence and to the basic legal institutions o f Canada. In addition to addressing such philosophical questions as, "What is a law?", "Is it the case that law is what legislatures say it is, or what courts say it is?", and " H o w do you tell whether a law is good or bad?", the course also examines the history and theory of Canadian law (including the development of the Canadian Constitution), the system o f Canadian courts, and the roles of members of the legal profession. A s PHIL 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Introductory Philosophy: K n o w l e d g e a n d Reality w e l l , consideration is given to the nature o f legal A n introduction to the part o f philosophy concerned to the fields of contract, torts, administrative and with questions about the ultimate nature o f the world family law, as well as to the process of law reform. reasoning, the doctrine o f precedent, and principles of statutory interpretation, and an introduction is provided we live in and our knowledge of it (traditionally called Metaphysics and Epistemology). The issues discussed include: the existence and nature o f G o d , the place o f human beings in the universe, the nature of reality, human nature, human knowledge and skepticism, freedom and determinism, the relationship between PHIL 141 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Philosophy and L a w : Introduction t o t h e Criminal Justice System A n introduction to an analysis o f theories of punishment and rehabilitation through an examination of the Course Descriptions 247 operational practices o f the Canadian criminal justice business, the ethics o f hiring practices, advertising and system. In the course o f studying the structure and behaviour control, the conflict between employee operations of the criminal justice system in its various loyalty and moral independence, and the responsibili- stages from the moment o f initial police involvement to ties o f corporations and business professionals. The the correctional disposition of convicted offenders, the course w i l l also introduce students to a number o f course focuses on both theoretical and practical classical ethical theories and theories o f economic decision making. Theoretical concerns include: indi- justice. Open to anyone in first or second year; no vidual c i v i l liberties in relation to police procedures, prerequisites. notions of evidence, sentencing theory, and current correctional strategies. The above two courses are modelled on S F U ' s C r i m i - PHIL 208 E n v i r o n m e n t a l Ethics (3) (4,0,0) nology 131/135 and are intended for both philosophy T h i s course deals with ethical and political issues students and those interested in pursuing further studies arising from the relationship between humans and their in the field o f criminology. natural surroundings. Typical questions that w i l l be addressed are: D o animals have rights? Is using PHIL 170 Critical Thinking I (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) animals for food and clothing morally wrong? D o we have an obligation to the natural environment such as Basic concepts o f critical thinking and argumentation students examine the concepts o f argument, premise, conclusion, and argument structure and develop facility in using these concepts. T h i s course is specifically designed for A p p l i e d Information Techology program an obligation to preserve species? What are our obligations to future generations? What is sustainable development? A r e environmental problems fundamentally personal or are they fundamentally political and social? O p e n to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. students. PHIL 200 Political Philosophy (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course provides an analysis o f the rationale for political institutions and action. Some of the questions considered: A r e we really obliged to obey the law? C a n the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation o f law in the policeman's holster? Does the state have good reason for involving itself in compulsory programs o f education? This is not a study in the history o f political thought and every effort is made to view problems from a contemporary perspective. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 201 Political Philosophy (3) (4,0,0) (S) PHIL 209 Biomedical Ethics (3) (4,0,0) This course w i l l focus on ethical issues that arise in the health sciences, especially in medicine, but also in biology, psychology and other professions. A m o n g the topics to be considered are abortion and reproductive technology; euthanasia; paternalism and autonomy; resource allocation; involuntary hospitalization and behaviour control. A l l moral problems w i l l be examined from both an applied and theoretical point o f v i e w . Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 210 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology I Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) A t least one Philosophy course or This course examines the values and assumptions pemiission o f the instructor. behind the ideologies o f liberalism, communism, A n introduction to some o f the traditional problems o f meritocracy, conservatism, democratic socialism and metaphysics and epistemology. Some o f the questions anarchism. Topics include liberty and equality, power considered are: Does G o d exist? What is the relation- and authority, private rights and the public good, ship between faith and reason? Does free w i l l exist? Is sovereignty, democracy and justice. sense perception a reliable source o f knowledge? What is the nature of causality? Is materialism true? What is PHIL 207 Business Ethics (3) (4,0,0) the nature of mind? What is the relationship between m i n d and body? What is the scientific method? W h i l e This course is an introduction to contemporary philo- this is not a course in the history o f philosophy, it w i l l sophical thinking on ethical issues in business. It cover many o f the classical attempts to answer these covers such topics as the power of multinational questions. corporations, bribery and extortion in international Course 248 Descriptions PHIL 211 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology II Prerequisite: (4.0,0) (S) indeed, it is assumed that the quality of class discussion w i l l be a function of the degree to which the perspec- P H I L 210 or permission of instructor. tives of both genders are well represented. Open to anyone in first or second year. A continuation o f P H I L 210. PHIL 220 Philosophy in Literature (3) (4,0,0) (F) PHYS 104 Principles of Physics Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) N o physics prerequisite. Math 12 or A n examination o f the lively relationship between B M T H 046 or M A T H 105. M A T H (05 may be taken philosophy and literature. Philosophical theories w i l l concurrently. be approached and discussed v i a literary work w h i c h either embodies the theories or grounds them in human experience. Textual sources w i l l range from the classical Greek plays to last month's best seller. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 221 (3) Existentialism in Literature (4,0,0) This course is, in spirit, a continuation o f P H I L 220, but it is centred on the Philosophy o f Existentialism in This course serves as an introduction to physics for students with little or no background in the subject. Topics include mechanics, energy, geometrical optics and heat. (4.5) PHYS 108 Basic Physics (6,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Math 12 or B M T H 046 or M A T H 105. Corequisite: M A T H 110 or 116/117. literature. There w i l l be an introductory set o f lectures The course covers the material o f P H Y S 110, together on Existentialism as a philosophy. Textual sources w i l l with those topics from high school physics needed by a range from Dostoyevsky's "'Notes from the Under- student with no previous background in physics. A g r o u n d " to Sartre's ""Nausea." Open to anyone in first student passing this course should be able to enter or second year; no prerequisites. P H Y S 111 in the Spring. PHIL 222 (3) Philosophy of Culture (Aesthetics) (4,0,0) (S) PHYS 110 General Physics I (3) (4,2,0) (F) A n introduction to philosophical analysis o f cultural Prerequisite: Physics 11 or B P H Y 042. works. The course w i l l provide an exploration o f Corequisite: M A T H 110 or 116/117. aesthetic theory, examining both traditional works o f A survey o f mechanics covering vectors, statics, art as well as contemporary cultural productions in a kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, variety o f media. One o f the objectives o f the course is gravitation, vibration, and special relativity. to make sense of what a society is ""saying" through its popular culture. Open to anyone in first or second year: no prerequisites. PHIL 240 (3) Philosophy and G e n d e r Relations (4,0,0) Founded on a wide range o f philosophical readings, this course w i l l focus on questions such as: What is the good life and its relation to intimacy and family? What is the good person? A r e there different models for PHYS 111 General Physics II (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in cither P H Y S I K ) or 108 or l l 4 ; and M A T H U 0 or H 6 / H 7 . Corequisite: M A T H 111 or 126/127. A n y student who has attempted P H Y S 111 within the last year w i l l not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. different genders? What constitutes a good relation- Electricity and magnetism, waves, physical optics, ship? H o w important are mutuality, respect, affection, sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. sex, and interdependence to such a relationship? What (4,2,0) (F,S) such questions influence our views on such social PHYS 114 Fundamental Physics I issues as affirmative action, prostitution and pornogra- Prerequisite: Physics 12 or B P H Y 042 or P H Y S 104. phy? Corequisite: M A T H 110 or 116/117. The impact of "Women's Liberation" and the " M e n ' s A survey o f mechanics covering vectors, kinematics, M o v e m e n t " will be discussed, as w i l l varying sugges- dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, tions for overcoming the "gender gap". T h i s course vibration, waves and special relativity. counts as equality/equity? H o w should the answers to (3) should be of interest to men and women equally: Course Descriptions 249 This course, together with P H Y S 115, is particularly PHYS 210 suitable for students going into the physical sciences or Physics L a b o r a t o r y I engineering. Corequisite: PHYS 115 F u n d a m e n t a l Physics II Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 114 or with the sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. (3) (4,0,0) (S) Note: This course is intended for Engineering program to UBC. A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 114, or with P H Y S 115 and M A T H 111 or 126/127. Statics of particles, force-couple systems and rigid body statics. Extension of principles from P H Y S 114 and application to practical and more advanced problems. Thennometry, thermal properties o f matter, heat. Geometrical optics. (0,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: A s for P H Y S 201, which must be taken concurrently. A weekly three-hour lab in electricity and magnetism, PHYS 218 (4,0,0) (F) (3) Prerequisite: A t least a C - in either P H Y S 111 or 115; and M A T H 111 or 126/127. Corequisite: P H Y S 210, M A T H 200, 230. Use of computer software to solve numerical problems in physics. Applications include drag forces, the driven, damped oscillator, simulations o f chaotic systems, random variables, techniques for handling digital data and signal processing. T h e P h y s i c s D e p a r t m e n t offers a full second-year university transfer p r o g r a m i n physics. Students p l a n n i n g to continue i n a physics p r o g r a m at university m a y wish to consult with a P h y s i c s instructor. PHYS 200 (D C o m p u t a t i o n a l Physics permission o f instructor, P H Y S 108 or 110. Corequisites: ics. electronics and mechanics. F u n d a m e n t a l Physics III Prerequisite: A weekly three-hour lab in mathematical methods, Physics L a b o r a t o r y II Electricity and magnetism, A C circuits, physical optics, students transferring P H Y S 218. PHYS211 M A T H 11 or 126/127. PHYS 116 (0.3,0) (F) thermodynamics, electrical measurements and mechan- permission o f the instructor. Corequisite: (1) (3) (4,0,0) (F) Thermal Physics a n d W a v e s Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in either P H Y S 1 11 or 115; and M A T H 111 or 126/127. Corequisite: M A T H 230. Temperature, heat, the zeroth, first, second and third laws of thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and a mathematical treatment o f waves. This course, together with P H Y S 201, 210. 211, 218 PHYS 222 (4,0,0) (S) (3) Mechanics Prerequisite: A t least a C - in P H Y S 111 or 115; M A T H 200, 230. Newtonian mechanics o f particles and rigid bodies. Topics include rocket propulsion, collisions, central forces, rotating frames of reference, and rotation o f rigid bodies. PMI. (Various Numbers) (2) (1,0,0) (F.S) C o n c e n t r a t i o n Private M u s i c Instruction A course designed to permit students to pursue study o f his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists o f a series of one-hour lessons. and 222 is required for students majoring in physics. PMI. (Various N u m b e r s ) PHYS 201 (3) (4,0,0) (S) (1) (.5,0,0) (F.S) Secondary Private M u s i c Instruction Electricity and M a g n e t i s m This course consists of a series o f half-hour lessons on Prerequisite: the student's secondary instrument. A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 111 or 115; M A T H 230. Corequisite: N o t e : To enrol in any PMI. courses students must P H Y S 211, M A T H 231 (recommended). The study o f electric and magnetic fields; D C and A C circuits: l . R , R C , L R C circuits; resonance; M a x w e l l ' s Equations. Fourier Analysis and electromagnetic waves. Course 250 Descriptions receive written permission from the program Coordinator. PMI. Lab This lab involves attendance at a number o f concerts and is intended to broaden the musical experience o f POL. 110 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A n Introduction t o W e s t e r n Political T h o u g h t - Plato t o The Reformation students by exposing them to performances in a variety A n introductory examination o f the tradition o f West- of j a z z and popular styles. Attendance is mandatory for ern political thought from the Ancient Greeks to the graduation in the Jazz Studies program. emergence of the Nation State. The significance and contributions o f Plato, Aristotle, the medieval thinkers, P O L 100 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) Introduction t o Politics and G o v e r n m e n t This survey course is recommended for both Political Studies majors and those students interested in discovering how politics affects their lives and how they in and M a c h i a v e l l i concerning fundamental questions about the relationship between the individual and the state w i l l be explored from an historical and philosophical perspective. T h i s course is o f particular relevance to those in the Humanities - literature, drama, turn can affect politics. Students are introduced to the fine arts, philosophy - as the shared themes provide for basic concepts o f Political Theory, Comparative an interesting comprehensive analysis o f Western Politics, International Relations, Public P o l i c y , and Civilization. Canadian Government, offering Political Studies and issues inherent in the discipline. Non-majors w i l l POL. 111 (3) C o n t e m p o r a r y Ideologies find the course w i l l help them understand the local, This course explores the historical development of the national, and international political events which shape commonly recognized ideologies o f the modern era: their world. Liberalism, Conservatism, A n a r c h i s m , M a r x i s m , majors a firm foundation in the methods, approaches (This course is required for all students planning to transfer into the Political Science Department at S F U . ) POL. 102 (3) Comparative Government (4,0,0) (F.S) (4,0,0) (F,S) Fascism and Social Democracy. These underlying political ideas w i l l provide the backdrop for a critical discussion of the more recent ideological formations such as F e m i n i s m , E c o l o g i s m , Nationalism and the different movements associated with religious fundamentalism. Students w i l l be encouraged to think Throughout history, humans have organized them- critically about the role and impact o f political ideas in selves into many different types o f political systems, the world in which they live. from tribes to empires, city-states to nation-states. T h i s course w i l l introduce students to the wide range o f political systems that exist throughout the world today, be it A s i a , A f r i c a , Europe, or the Americas. B y studying these systems in detail, students w i l l gain an appreciation for how political behaviour varies throughout the world, as well as develop a better critical understanding of their o w n . POL. 104 Canadian G o v e r n m e n t (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) This course introduces students to the formal institutional structures and processes o f Canadian govern- POL. 201 International Relations (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Global warming, the debt crisis, child poverty, militarism, human rights violations, c i v i l , regional and global war - what arc the causes o f these international problems and what arc the possible solutions? Students who take this course w i l l examine these and many other international issues in detail. In short, International Relations is for those students wishing to explore events - and the explanations for those events - in a global system so much in flux since the collapse of the C o l d W a r and the rise of the global division of labour. ment and politics. Topics to be explored w i l l include political culture, the constitution, federalism, Quebec sovereignty and Aboriginal self-government and an examination of the institutions of government, political parties and their impact on the quality o f Canada's parliamentary democracy. Regardless of career goals or preferred disciplines, all students will benefit from an exposure to the politics o f their immediate society. POL. 202 (3) (4,0,0) (S) G o v e r n m e n t a n d Politics of British C o l u m b i a This course w i l l provide an understanding o f the political institutions, dynamics, and socio-economic processes of the provincial, regional, and municipal governments in B . C . Specifically, it is intended to familiarize students with the activities o f political parties and government institutions in B . C . It is designed to develop students' skills in critically analyzing the B . C . political process from several Course Descriptions 251 methodological perspectives within the discipline of political studies. POL. 203 (3) International Organizations (4,0.0) (F.S) POL. 207 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Selected Issues in C o n t e m p o r a r y Social a n d Political Theory Prerequisite: P O L . 111. This course transfers as a 300 level course at S F U . More and more these days, international organizations are no longer content with playing bit parts on the world stage. Be it the U N in Cambodia, N A T O in the former Yugoslavia, Greenpeace on the high seas, or the increased power o f regional organizations like the European U n i o n , A S E A N , and the O A S , international organizations seem to be challenging the sovereignty o f nation-states at every turn. But are international organizations really taking on a life o f their own? A r e new forms o f organization at the international level (such as international law or economic regimes) really taking root? O r is the state-centric system destined to continue as it has since 1648? These are some of the issues explored in this, the complementary course to Current themes and controversies in contemporary social and political thought is the subject o f this course. Topics w i l l shift from tenn to term to reflect either important issues or individual theorist's contributions to contemporary society. Areas o f interest might include, for example, the role o f the state in late capitalist societies, the significance o f the Frankfurt S c h o o l , the contradictions o f the welfare state, the current debates in democratic theory, the role and place of "new" social movements in contemporary society, an examination o f the meaning of liberty in complex societies, the renewal of nationalism, the place o f religion (Islamic fundamentalism), the persistence o f violence in c i v i l society. Alternatively, or in conjunc- International Relations. tion with these themes, students w i l l develop a thor- POL. 204 Canadian Public Policy Prerequisites: (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) P O L . 100 or 104 recommended. The centre o f the political process of any society is the creation of public policy. H o w governments arrive at and select policies from the various competing demands placed upon them - in the areas o f health, education, environment, economic development, immigration etc. - is the focus o f this course. Students are introduced to the basic concepts and theories associated with the making of public policy as well as an analysis of the processes by which policy is defined, addressed and implemented. POL. 206 (3) (4.0,0) (F) Scope a n d M e t h o d s of Political Analysis This course introduces the student to the variety of approaches and tools available to those studying politics. Students w i l l become familiar with the nature ough analysis o f a particular theorist: for example, Arendt, Gramsci, Marcuse, Foucault, Habermas, Offe, W i l l i a m s , R a w l s , Pateman, G o r z and M e l u c c i to name a few. PPMI ( various numbers ) (3) (1.5,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction f o r Performance Majors A course designed to permit students in the Performance Majors to pursue in-depth study of his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists of a series of one and one-half hour lessons or equivalent. PSYC 100 (3) Introduction t o Psychology (4,0,0) (F,S) A course designed to introduce the beginning psychology student to some of the major concepts and approaches necessary to an understanding o f human behaviour from a psychological perspective. Learning, development, and other selected issues are included. of and debates inherent to contemporary political studies, as well as the strengths and weaknesses of the various methods employed by students o f politics. B y developing their o w n research project, students w i l l struggle first-hand with the issues central to all types o f PSYC 101 Theories of Behaviour Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) P S Y C 100. social science research: selecting from alternative A course for those students who desire a complete models of explanation, attempting to isolate variables, survey o f the basic areas o f psychology (when c o m - and dealing with questions o f cause and effect to name bined with P S Y C 100), before proceeding to an in- but a few. Students may have the opportunity to depth study o f particular areas. Course content w i l l develop and work on a proto-type political studies cover research methodology and the remainder o f journal as well. N o t offered i n 1998/99. introductory topics not addressed in P S Y C 100. Course 252 Descriptions PSYC 200 Social Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. PSYC 206 A d o l e s c e n t Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) P S Y C 100 and 101. A study o f the dynamics and effects o f social influ- This course examines the biological, cognitive and ences on individual human behaviour. The course social transitions of adolescence and how they affect looks at such topics as attitudes and attitude changes, such developmental areas as identity, autonomy, social beliefs, roles, conformity, group processes, intimacy, sexuality and achievement. A s w e l l as being prejudice, interpersonal attraction and psychological exposed to basic research in the area, students w i l l be effects o f the physical environment. encouraged to explore their o w n identity development through group research. PSYC 201 G r o u p Dynamics Prerequisite: (3) (4.0.0) (F,S) PSYC 212 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Research M e t h o d s in Psychology P S Y C 100 and 101. A study of the behaviour of individuals in social groups and institutions, such as friendship groups, work Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and l ( ) l . A course for students who intend to major in one o f the groups, and families. This course provides an intellec- social sciences; psychology majors should take this tual and experiential approach to small group theory course and P S Y C 213. This course w i l l introduce the and allows the student to practice constructive interper- student to current research methods in major areas o f sonal skills in a supportive, small group setting. psychology. Students should understand the principles of research methodology, and be able to evaluate, PSYC 203 History of Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. design and conduct research in psychology. PSYC 213 (3) (4,0,0) (F o r S) Statistical M e t h o d s in Psychology This course w i l l examine the development o f psychological thought to gain a critical understanding o f contemporary psychology. Issues w i l l range from the Prerequisite: M a t h 12 or equivalent, P S Y C 100, 101. P S Y C 212 recommended. mind-body problem, and the nature o f science, to an A course recommended for psychology majors. T h i s analysis of historical and contemporary schools in course deals with descriptive and inferential statistics psychology. as applied in psychology. These w i l l be considered as they arc used in psychological research. PSYC 204 (3) Developmental Psychology Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. A study o f the c h i l d ' s development from infancy to adolescence, including the development o f social behaviour, personality, language and cognitive processes. Students w i l l be encouraged to do research projects and observations. PSYC 205 (3) The Psychology of A g i n g Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) P S Y C 100 and 101. A course dealing with the psychological development PSYC 220 Theory of Personality Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. This course w i l l examine theories of personality from Freud and Feminist revisions to Humanistic approaches, including an Eastern tradition. Included w i l l be a consideration o f the historical/cultural development o f the theory, what the theory says about the development, structure and dynamics of personality and examples o f empirical research. PSYC 222 A b n o r m a l Psychology (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) of the individual from early adulthood to death, with emphasis on intellectual and personality changes, and Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and 101. the social context of aging. A s well as being exposed to A study of the various models and perspectives for basic research in the area, students w i l l be encouraged viewing patterns and treatment of abnormal behaviour. to develop an cmpathic understanding o f the aging Included w i l l be an examination of the research as to process through such means as community projects. how the medical model, bchaviouristic school, humanistic school, psychoanalytic school, cognitive school and biological school view normal and abnormal Course Descriptions 253 behaviour. This course w i l l also focus on the historical and contemporary approaches to treatment. resident care and personal care attendants within the health care system. PSYC 225 (3) Biopsychology o f Behaviour RCAP 111 (7.0) (2,4,14) (F.S) A p p l i e d Theory: Lab Practicum and Clinical in Resident Care Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100 and 101. T h i s course w i l l expand on material introduced in In this practical course students learn the basic personal introductory psychology dealing with the biological and clinical skills required by the resident care attend- basis o f behaviour. Students w i l l examine functions o f ant in intermediate and extended care facilities. Stu- the nervous system, as well as studying brain anatomy dents spend one day a week in the College health lab and brain chemistry in relation to both normal and learning the practical skills needed to work with pathological behaviour. A s well, students w i l l discuss continuing care residents. The first part of the course is mind-body issues and develop an understanding o f a series o f field trips designed to increase students' broader ethical and other issues in neuroscience. awareness o f community facilities. In the second part of the course, the students spend two weeks in an PSYC 230 Cognitive Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) the students spend two days a week in an extended care unit placement, supervised by a clinical instructor. P S Y C 100 and 101. Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and This course w i l l address many of the issues relating to the thinking processes. Research into memory, problem solving, creativity and artificial intelligence w i l l be examined, as well as experiments in social cognition and cognition across the lifespan. RCAP 100 (1.5) Health: Lifestyle a n d Choices (2,0,1) (F,S) course work. A l l practicum and clinical placements are arranged by the college. RCAP 112 (3.0) Special Needs in Resident Care 2,0,1) (F.S) This course builds upon content in the other R C A This course is an introduction to the concept of health and the concepts o f a health enhancing lifestyle. Students reflect on their own experiences o f health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP 101 (3.0) (4,0,2) (F.S) Health a n d Healings: Concepts f o r Practice This course provides a theoretical framework for practice. Students examine significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical, psychological and physiological understandings o f competent practice. RCAP 102 (1.5) H u m a n Relations: Interpersonal Communications intermediate care facility. In the last part of the course, (2,0,1) (F.S) This course focuses on the development o f self aware- courses, to help students to understand concepts and approaches which apply to the care of residents experiencing changes in mental functioning. RCAP 113 (4.0) (0,35,0) (S,Su*) A p p l i e d Theory: Clinical Practice in Resident Care This four-week practical course provides an opportunity to apply the caring philosophy with older adults in an intermediate and/or extended care facility. Select, supervised experiences w i l l emphasize the application and integration of knowledge and skills learned in other courses. The final two weeks o f the course provide an opportunity for the student to become better prepared to take on the role of the Resident Care Attendant. Opportunities w i l l be provided for the learner to gain increased ness and increased understanding of others. Students self confidence in the work setting and to become explore basic communication concepts and practical socialized as a member o f the health care team. skills which contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. R C A P 110 (1.0) (2,0,1) (F.S) W o r k Role Concepts in Resident Care REC. 143 (3) (3,0) (F) O u t d o o r Recreation Delivery Systems A n introduction to various outdoor recreation delivery systems in British C o l u m b i a , the past and present T h i s course introduces students to the health care issues influencing and affecting their direction, and system including the roles and responsibilities o f the their career opportunities. The course w i l l examine the Course 254 Descriptions inter-relationships o f the various delevery systems, including the role o f government. patient assessment, recognition and treatment of injuries, medical emergencies, and environmental emergencies. REC. 144 (3) (3.3) (S) Outdoor Recreation Program Planning Topics w i l l include: philosophy o f programming, REC. 169 (3) Landscape Interpretation concepts o f planning, community interests inventory, Interpretation o f mountain environments, local geology the relationship of programming to customer service. and landforms. The course w i l l include field work. REC. 151 (3) The Outdoor Environment REC. 178 (3) Human Relations in Recreation (3,3) (S) (3,0) (F) (3,0) (F) Weather and climate and the impact of weather on This course focuses on leadership, motivation, c o m m u - outdoor recreation activities. Mountain weather and nications and group dynamics. It also deals with human personal forecasting w i l l be examined using field work. resource development including employee recruitment, selection, training and development, and performance REC. 152 (3) Environmental Stewardship I (3,3) (F) appraisal. professional in environmental stewardship. Topics REC. 252 (3) Environmental Stewardship II A n examination o f the role o f the outdoor recreation (3,3) (F) include: conservation issues, environmental ethics, A n examination of environmental stewardship concepts policy and planning and sustainability. The course w i l l and issues, and the development of nature interpreta- include field work. tion skills. This course w i l l include a field trip. REC.153 Leisure Issues (3) (3,0) (S) REC. 255 (9) Outdoor Recreation Practicum (9,0,0) (S) W o r k and leisure in the human life cycle, adolescence, The practicum is designed to integrate classroom aging, special needs and leisure, cultural variations in theory with working experience in the field. Students leisure, leisure-related social problems, lifestyle-based w i l l arrange with the faculty liaison person to spend variation in work and leisure, factors in lifestyle three and one-half months in an acceptable agency choice, consumerism and outdoor recreation, sociologi- placement and w i l l be responsible to a specific agency cal perspectives on present and future trends. supervisor. Students w i l l be provided with terms of reference for the practicum experience. Student work REC. 156 (3) (3,3) (F) Introduction to Environmental Studies performance and potential w i l l be evaluated by the A n introduction to ecological principles and their application to environmental issues. L o c a l ecosystems and their indicator species w i l l be examined through field work. students w i l l make a major presentation to the depart- REC.157 Applied Field Skills (3) (3,0) (F) ment at the conclusion of the practicum. RMCP 155 (3) Retail Event Management (3,0,1) (S) The emphasis in this course w i l l be to learn how to promote and produce a major event such as a trade Develops skills, knowledge and attitudes in overland travel, outdoor living, navigation and trip planning in a temperate climate. REC. 163 Wilderness First Aid I faculty liaison person and agency supervisor, and (3) (3,0) (F) Designed to meet the needs o f the outdoor recreation show. This course w i l l involve the planning, execution and promotion of such a retail event. RMCP 164 (3) Creative Retail Strategies (3,0,1) (F) This course is the creative component in the Retail Marketing program. Students w i l l learn visual market- leader or professional whose work takes them into ing, colour and design, retail store design, and a full isolated environments. Outdoor practical sessions play range o f merchandising skills. They w i l l relate product a large part in the delivery o f the course content w h i c h and placement within a store environment and learn to addresses basic life support techniques, situation and develop comprehensive display strategics. Course Descriptions R M C P 172 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Retail T e c h n o l o g y / S t o r e M a n a g e m e n t I SART 150 Drawing I Retail Technology is the introductory segment to Store Management I. This course provides the student with a working knowledge of cash register systems and point of sale terminals as well as the latest in Interac technologyStore Management I is a practical application to retail marketing. Students will be entirely responsible for operating the student store. The students act as store managers. They will do buying, display, promotion, accounting, scheduling and all those managerial skills involved in operating a successful retail store. An investigation of the conceptual, technical and perceptual aspects of the drawing process through a wide variety of methods, materials and stimuli. Design elements are a major component of this course. Experiences in current approaches and concerns, including representational, interpretive and experimental drawings in assorted media. Emphasis will be on developing the student's confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and control of media. Specifics to this course will be: study of design elements (line, tone etc.), media investigation, perspective, structural analysis (of natural form), life study. R M C P 173 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Retail Finance/Store M a n a g e m e n t II Prerequisite: R M C P 172 A continuation of Store Management I. This extension of the Store Management course exposes the student to daily systems analysis, banking procedures, monthly accounting practices and money management in a practical setting. The students will be responsible for making financial decisions as well as buying and promotional decisions for the student store. R M C P 181 Strategic Retail Buying (3) (3,0,1) (S) This course teaches the students to access their target and primary markets and to develop a strategy to enable them to be successful retail buyers. The retail buying component involves teaching the student to buy for department stores, chain stores, regional chain operations, and independent retail stores. What to buy, when to buy, from whom to buy, and how much to buy will all be covered in this course. RMCP 190 (3) Fall Co-op W o r k Placement ( D e c , Jan.) (F) Students will gain direct practical work experience through a paid co-op placement with an employer that is part of our Retail Registry. During December and January the student will work some 200 hours in a business related to their preferred area of retailing, merchandising or marketing. A faculty member will oversee this three credit course and both employers and the co-op employees will complete written reports. Students will return to their full-time studies at the end of the co-op placement. SART 151 D r a w i n g II (3) (3) (4,0,0) (F) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: S A R T 150. A continuation of S A R T 150, with the inclusion of the following specifics: composition and further design exploration, colour, collage and image development. An emphasis is placed on balance between control and expression. SART 163 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic A r t I An introduction to the use of clay as an expressive medium. Hand construction and wheel forming will be presented as well as glazing, firing and clay body technology. Design, history and conceptual theory will be reviewed as it relates to the ceramic object and to general art applications. SART 165 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic A r t II Prerequisite: S A R T 163. A continuation of S A R T 163 with greater emphasis on personal development. Casting, mould making, glaze preparation and application and firing technology will be fundamental aspects of this course. Contemporary applications of ceramics will be explored. SART 167 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture I An introduction to three-dimensional work as a means of expression, communication and discovery. Some basic sculptural techniques and materials will be explored; these will include: wood assemblage, clay modelling, mould making and casting. Sculptural content and subject matter will be considered in the context of the student's own work. An Course Descriptions 256 examination of historical sculpture developments w i l l be ongoing. Particular emphasis w i l l be given to the be a feature o f the class; however, the emphasis w i l l be relationship between printmaking and painting with the upon developing an understanding o f contemporary student producing a number of pieces demonstrating sculptural concerns. technical competency and creative potential. M o s t work w i l l be executed in black and white. SART 171 (3) (4,0,0) (F) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting I Through a combination of assigned studio work, SART 183 (3) (4,1.5,0) (S) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Printmaking II personal research projects and an introduction to recent Prerequisite: S A R T 182. and current trends in the visual arts, students w i l l gain an understanding o f how both abstract and concrete concerns may be expressed in terms o f imagery and through a variety of methods and materials. Participants w i l l learn about the dimensions o f colour and how to effectively indentify and replicate colour and form. A c r y l i c s w i l l be the preferred medium but students w i l l be encouraged to investigate the characteristics and possibilities o f other media according to their individual needs. Guest speakers, field trips and slide-lectures w i l l be a feature of the course and both individual and group critiques w i l l be conducted at regular intervals. A continuation of S A R T 182 with emphasis on printing procedures both in black and white and colour. The student w i l l also be introduced to mono and relief printing methods (including lino/wood blocks and etched plates) and editioning procedures. Discussion o f historical and contemporary approaches to imagemaking w i l l be ongoing. SART 250 (3) (4,0,0) (F) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting III Prerequisite: S A R T 172. Students w i l l be assigned painting problems relating to historically familiar genres; portrait, still life, land- SART 172 (3) (4,0,0) (S) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting II Prerequisite: S A R T 171. A continuation of S A R T 171 with added emphasis on developing personal areas o f interest and research in addition to designated painting problems which w i l l require students to express their ideas in multiple or mixed-media techniques of a more ambitious nature. There w i l l be opportunities for students to relate their painting activities to other areas o f study within the program and to become more responsible for detenuin- scape, figure and abstraction. W i t h i n these structured projects, students w i l l be given as much freedom as possible regarding content, methods, scale etc. Students w i l l be encouraged to re-define the painting process in terms of their o w n needs and priorities. Emphasis w i l l be placed o n relating work in this course to other areas of the program and to current trends in the visual arts. SART 255 (3) (4.0,0) (S) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting IV Prerequisite: S A R T 250. ing their o w n priorities and goals. There w i l l be further A continuation o f S A R T 250 but with an increased exposure to contemporary philosophies and activities need for students to define their o w n areas o f interest in the visual arts. and to extend their thinking in an innovative, selfchallenging fashion. A s in S A R T 250, guest speakers, SART 174 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture II course. There w i l l be a continuing stress on relating Prerequisite: work in this course to contemporary activities in the S A R T 167. A continuation of S A R T 167, but with the inclusion of the following materials and techniques: wood construction and jointing, steel welding, and plaster modelling. SART 182 (3) (4,1.5,0) (F) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Printmaking I field trips, slide lectures etc. w i l l be a feature o f the visual arts and to other areas of the program. Experiments with images, methods and materials w i l l be encouraged, with a view to the development o f personal modes o f expression. Towards the end o f the course, students w i l l be required to define their own areas o f research and visual articulation as they embark on a thcmatically linked scries of work. A foundation course for those with little or no experience. A n introduction to the basic techniques o f hardground, softground, drypoint and acquatint. Discussions regarding the image-making potential of printmaking and the creative processes in general w i l l Course Descriptions 257 SART 257 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture III SART 274 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic A r t IV Prerequisite: Prerequisite: S A R T 174. S A R T 273. A resumption o f the investigation of ideas, materiality The course w i l l include an increased emphasis on and form, to broaden the participant's visual, tactile craftsmanship and design o f functional and non- and conceptual abilities. Traditional and current functional forms. Architectural ceramic applications sculptural ideologies and techniques w i l l be examined w i l l be explored in greater depth. Glazes and other in the context o f 20th century developments. methods of decoration w i l l continue to be examined. SART 262 D r a w i n g III/ Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) SART 282 (3) (4,1.5,0) (S) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Printmaking III Prerequisite: S A R T 151. S A R T 183. Continued study o f drawing as a means o f discovery, A comprehensive study o f intaglio and relief printing expression and communication. Conceptual, perceptual methods, this course is primarily designed for the and technical aspects of drawing w i l l be examined. advanced printmaking student. Other areas that come Specifics to this course w i l l include advanced graphic under consideration w i l l include collographs, uninked elements, unconventional media, objective/subjective cmbos-sing and the practical application o f colour research. theory. Discussion o f current directions in printmaking and their relationship to painting and sculpture w i l l be SART 263 D r a w i n g IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 262. ongoing. SART 283 (3) (4,1.5,0) (S) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: P r i n t m a k i n g IV Further study o f drawing with an emphasis on the development o f personal modes of expression and Prerequisite: S A R T 282. image transformation. Orthographic drawings comprise Designed for the advanced printmaking student, the a small portion o f the course. The work o f the three main concern w i l l be combined colour printing tech- previous courses w i l l be reviewed, with the addition o f niques based upon the individual's need. A folio o f perceptual exploration and portfolio presentation in the work w i l l be produced to document this research. form o f a small series o f thematically linked work. Technical aspects that surface w i l l include photographic possibilities and dimensional prints. SART 265 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture IV Prerequisite: S A R T 257. A further study o f historical and current sculptural ideologies. Assignments require individual strategics to respond to social/environmental and interactive issues. Participation in group debates and critiques w i l l foster constructive dialogue and criticism. SOC. 100 Social Structures (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) The course systematically covers major topics and issues o f concern to anyone who wishes to begin to understand and come to terms with the modern world in a personally and sociologically relevant way. The basic theme o f the course is that we are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, produced, structured SART 273 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic A r t III Prerequisite: and run by the "social machine" or social or societal determinants. This structured aspect o f society is comprised o f institutions such as the family, religious S A R T 165. institutions, the mass media, educational institutions, Students w i l l undertake further exploration o f proc- for example, as well as rules, customs, laws, ideolo- esses and materials, including the development of gies, etc. O u r society is also embedded with structural original glazes and manipulation o f glaze characteris- inequalities related to gender, social class and ethnicity. tics. Students w i l l be encouraged to explore ways to U t i l i z i n g what has been termed "the sociological bring to ceramic art their personal expressive interests imagination." the course looks at how we are influ- within the context o f contemporary ceramic usage. enced by these aspects o f society and in turn how we react to these influences. Both S O C . 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major in Sociology at S F U or U B C . Course 258 Descriptions SOC. 101 (3) Concepts of Theories of Society (4,0,0) (F,S) placed in the context of the student's daily world, as it is happening now — this should develop the student's W i t h current social conditions in m i n d , this course sociological imagination. T h i s course can be taken by analyses the general development o f sociological itself, or as a complement to S O C . 211, S o c i o l o g y o f thought in the I9th and 20th centuries. W e w i l l look at the Third W o r l d . a variety of sociological theories and approaches to understanding society (structural functional ism, conflict theory, symbolic interactionism, feminism and others) and employ these approaches to analyze events SOC. 211 (3) Sociology of the Third World (4,0,0) (F) of current interest, importance and impact in society. Prerequisite: instructor. Both S O C . 100 and l()l arc required for students A study o f the major theories o f development and intending to major in Sociology at S F U or U B C . S O C . l O O o r l()l or permission o f the under development, social and cultural responses to under development, and the interrelationship o f social SOC. 200 Canadian Society Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (F) institutions in and between the "developed" and "under developed" societies. T h i s course w i l l provide students S O C . lOOor l()l or pennission o f the with an opportunity to better understand the social, economic and political causes and effects o f under development. Both sociological and " n o n - s o c i o l o g i c a l " A n introduction to the study o f Canadian society and culture, including an analysis of the major Canadian institutions studied on a national basis, with special emphasis on the dynamics of change in a complex literature on the meaning and effects o f "under development" w i l l be considered. T h i s course may be taken by itself or as a complement to S O C . 210, Current Social Issues. multicultural society. Issues that explore the intersection o f state, capital and labour with gender, class and ethnicity w i l l be discussed as they relate to such concerns as multiculturalism. Aboriginal peoples and Prerequisite: instructor. Quebec society. SOC. 201 (3) British Columbia Society Prerequisite: instructor. (4,0,0) (S) (3) (4,0,0) (F) S O C . lOOor 101 or permission o f the A sociological study of art and artists in western and non-western societies. The course w i l l relate the S O C . 100 or 10I or permission o f the various art forms (painting, music, literature) to the social context in which they exist and to their social A sociological approach to the dynamics o f Canadian society with special emphasis on British C o l u m b i a . Close attention w i l l be given to economic, historical and cultural developments which have shaped British C o l u m b i a from its early years into a modern industrial society. Contemporary social questions surrounding such issues as education, health, labour. Native land claims and resource questions w i l l be discussed. SOC. 210 Current Social Issues Prerequisite: instructor. SOC. 222 Sociology of the Arts (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . lOOor l()l or permission of the A study of social concerns and cultural problems c o m m o n to current conditions in the 20th century in our society and in global perspectives. Classical sociological concepts w i l l be used to examine current social issues in a global framework o f political, production; hence it w i l l develop an understanding of the interrelationships between ideas (aesthetic codes), social institutions, cultural politics and political economy. T h i s course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 101 or 223. Not offered 1998/99. SOC. 223 Media and Society Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A n intensive study o f the relationship between a society's communication systems as media and its technological, economic and political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. T h i s w i l l encompass current tonus of television, radio, magazines, all forms o f advertisement, news production and the movies. T h i s course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 222 or 100. economic, and cultural analysis, such as mass violence, the economics o f the arms race, the sociology o f war and peace, social inequality, etc. Current issues are Course Descriptions 259 SPAN 100 (3) (4.1.75,0) (F,S) survival-level fluency, and use only Thai for basic Beginning Spanish I This is a beginners' course which offers a comprehensive introduction to the Spanish language. Emphasis is placed on grammar and the development o f the students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. SPAN 101 (3) classroom routines. They are ready to learn to write. THAI 101 (4,1.75,0) (S.Su) (3) (4.1.75.0) (S) Beginnning Thai II Prerequisite: T H A I 100 or equivalent. This course reviews the basic material o f T H A I 100, and introduces the script. Students learn how to write Beginning Spanish II Prerequisite: A t the end o f the course students have better than the words they already know. S P A N 100, Grade 10 Spanish c o m - M o r e complex structures are introduced, along with pleted, or permission from instructor. A continuation o f the work of S P A N 100, this course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following S P A N 100. Recommended also for those who are considering taking S P A N 200 at a later date more idioms, common expressions, and exceptions to basic rules. Classes are conducted almost all in T h a i , except for occasional detailed historical or technical explanations. A t the end of the course students k n o w how to respond and need review work. to typical situations in Thai and to elicit basic everyday SPAN 200 (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: information from Thais. They can read simple T h a i passages and the basic road signs and are at a level o f Intermediate Spanish I reading and writing equivalent to Thai grade four S P A N 100/101, Grade 12 Spanish completed with a m i n i m u m of a " C " grade, or permission o f instructor. A review of Spanish grammar with special emphasis on problematic areas normally encountered by students of the language. The reading, writing and oral fluency of the student w i l l be improved through translations, students. THAI 102 Introduction t o Thai I (1.5) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative (3,1,0) (F) program students only. compositions and extensive conversation practice. T h i s course is designed to provide A P M C P students A l s o , the student w i l l be introduced to Hispanic with basic Thai language skills and sensitize them to Literature. Classes w i l l be conducted in the Spanish important cultural differences in concept and behav- language only. iour. SPAN 201 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) I n t e r m e d i a t e S p a n i s h II Prerequisite: v S P A N 200 with a m i n i m u m of a " C " THAI 103 Introduction t o Thai II (3) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative (3,1,0) (S) grade, or permission from the instructor. students only. A continuation of the work o f S P A N 200. This course Prerequisite: should be taken, wherever possible, in the term follow- This course is a continuation o f T H A I 102. program T H A I 102 or instructor's permission. ing S P A N 200. THTR100 THAI 100 (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Beginning Thai I (3) (2,4,0) (F) Acting I A n introduction to a methodical approach to script, and This course provides instruction and practice both in the basic skills necessary to perform and stage contem- beginning language and in the cultural background porary monologues and scenes. which is so necessary to place the examples into meaningful contexts. The international phonetic THTR 101 alphabet is used to avoid confusion of sounds. The A c t i n g II basic vocabulary and sentence structures are covered, and social routines and c o m m o n idioms are stressed as well. and are encouraged to initiate their own conversations. 260 (2,4,0) (S) Develops skills in non-scripted theatre. Areas o f exploration include improvisation, mask work, and playmaking. Y o u w i l l perform self-created work in Students have time to practise all structures introduced, Course (3) Descriptions class. THTR 120 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Elements of Theatre I acting styles in groups of representative plays. Topics, set by the Department, w i l l vary each term. A n introduction to play study and the history of theatre from its ritual beginnings to the 17th century. Lectures, seminars, play reading, and theatre attendance arc part THTR 205 (2,4,0) (F) (3) Bodywork A course in movement techniques. Students focus on of this course. T H T R 120 is normally taken with E N G L 100 in a combined seminar. THTR 121 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Elements of Theatre II Plays in the context of the history of theatre from the Restoration to the beginnings o f modern theatre. Lectures, seminars, play reading and theatre attendance are part o f this course. THTR 150 body awareness, alignment, strength, flexibility and coordination. THTR 207 (3) (2,4,0) (F) (2,4,0) (S) A course in voice production and oral interpretation designed to free the speaking voice and develop expressive communication. THTR 210 (3) (2,4,0) (F &/or S) A c t i n g for Film and T e l e v i s i o n A n introduction to the acting techniques and technical P r o d u c t i o n & Design I A n introduction to the basic elements o f technical theatre and theatre design. Topics include stage management, scenic carpentry, theatre lighting, and scenic design. skills needed to perform for the camera. THTR 220 (3) (2,4,0) (S) (3) (4,0,0) (F) Conceptual Approaches I Prerequisite: THTR 151 (3) Vocal C o m m u n i c a t i o n I T H T R 120 or 121 or a 100-level Arts course. P r o d u c t i o n & Design II A n in-depth study of a specific theatre topic which w i l l A continuation of T H T R 150. Topics include proper- be set each term by the Department. This is a thematic, ties, sound, costumes, scenic painting, and makeup. rather than a chronological, approach to the study of plays and theatre. Both theoretical and practical class THTR 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195 (1 each) (F.S) methods may be used. Practicum Prerequisite: Application to the coordinator at any time during the term. Students receive credit for intensive practical work on productions. The nature of the work and the amount o f credit w i l l be determined by the Department in consultation with the student. A l l who are cast in a department production or who arc assigned to a production crew must register in this course. THTR 200 Prerequisite: (3) (2,4,0) (F) T H T R 100 or permission o f the instruc- tor. A n intermediate scene study course focusing on text analysis and the performance o f scenes and very short one-act plays. THTR 201 (3) (4,0,0) (S) C o n c e p t u a l A p p r o a c h e s II Prerequisite: T H T R I 2 0 o r I 2 l or a 100-level Arts course. The same format as T H T R 220. This course studies a different topic. THTR 240 (3) P e r f o r m i n g Arts M a n a g e m e n t I (2,0,4) (F) A n introduction to the skills and organizational systems necessary to run a performing arts organization. A major emphasis w i l l be company and season marketing strategies. THTR 241 (3) (2,0,4) (S) P e r f o r m i n g Arts M a n a g e m e n t II (3) (2,4,0) (S) A continuation of T H T R 240 with an emphasis on resource development. A c t i n g IV Prerequisite: THTR 221 T H T R 200 or permission of instructor. A scene study course which explores style in classical and contemporary p l a y s . Scene study w i l l emphasize Course Descriptions 261 THTR 250 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Senior P r o d u c t i o n Responsibilities I THTR 340 (4.5) (0,0,12) (F) Introduction to the duties of senior production person- Internal Practicum in P e r f o r m i n g A r t s Management I nel including the Technical Director, Stage Manager, Prerequisite: Stage Carpenter, Head Electrician, Head Wardrobe, Head Sound, Head o f F l y s , and Head of Properties. THTR 251 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Senior P r o d u c t i o n Responsibilities II A continuation of T H T R 250. THTR 252 (1.5) A d v a n c e d Lighting & S o u n d I (2,0,0) (F) Teaches the advanced skills required to design and run the lighting and sound for both simple and complex shows. THTR 253 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A d v a n c e d Lighting & S o u n d II A continuation o f T H T R 252. THTR 254 (4.5) (0,12,0) (F) Practicum in Technical T h e a t r e / D e s i g n I Students receive credit for intensive practical work on interview. This is a seven-week practicum in which students rotate through various positions in the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre. THTR 341 (4.5) (0,0,12) (S) Internal Practicum in P e r f o r m i n g A r t s M a n a g e m e n t II Prerequisite: interview. A continuation o f T H T R 340. THTR 342 (6) (0,0,16) (F) M a n a g e m e n t S e m i n a r a n d External Practicum I Prerequisite: intcrview This is a seven-week placement with a professional performing arts organization in which the students can apply the knowledge and skills they learned in the classroom. A seminar is held at the end o f the practicums in w h i c h the students meet and share what they learned from their placement. the technical or design areas of productions. THTR 255 (4.5) (0,12,0) (S) Practicum in Technical T h e a t r e / D e s i g n II A continuation o f T H T R 254. THTR 260 (3) A n a l y s i s f o r Directing and D e s i g n THTR 343 (6) (0,0,16) (S) M a n a g e m e n t S e m i n a r and External Practicum II Prerequisite: interview. A continuation o f T H T R 342. (4,0,0) (F) Teaches script analysis for students o f directing and design. THTR 290, 2 9 1 , 292, 293, 294, 295 (1 each)(F,S) Practicum THTR 344 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) C o m p u t e r A p p l i c a t i o n s in P e r f o r m i n g A r t s Management Prerequisite: interview. This courses teaches the applications for computers in Performing Arts Management. Students gain an understanding o f basic word processing, database/ spreadsheet programs and desktop publishing. Prerequisite: Three credits o f T H T R 190 series and application to the coordinator at any time during the term. THTR 345 Students receive credit for intensive practical work on Public Relations, M a r k e t i n g a n d P r o m o t i o n productions. The nature of the work and the amount o f Prerequisite: credit w i l l be determined by the Department in consultation with the student. A l l who arc cast in a department production or who are assigned to a production crew, and who have three credits in the T H T R 190 series, must register in this course. Course 262 Descriptions (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) interview. In this course students examine how the image presented by an arts organization to the public affects their revenue potential. They learn how to shape that image and how to target and market to their potential audience. THTR 346 (1.5) (2,0.0) (F) Organizational Structures in the Performing Arts Prerequisite: THTR 361, 362, 363, 365, 366, 367 Prerequisite: audition or interview. Modules o f T H T R 360 and T H T R 364. interview. the organizational structures of a performing arts THTR 364 (1.5) Directed Studies in Theatre II organization. It examines the role o f boards of direc- Prerequisite: This course provides students with an understanding o f tors, volunteeers, and paid personnel, and teaches the skills necessary to build successful relationships between these sectors. THTR 347 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Financial Management for the Performing Arts Prerequisite: (4,0,32) (F.S) audition or interview. A continuation of T H T R 360 TOUR 100 (1.5) Tourism Co-op Preparation (1.5,.5)(S) T h i s course w i l l include a general overview o f the coop work experience. The specific areas covered w i l l be interview. goal setting, skills analysis, researching sectors and This course is designed to teach fundamental account- employers, job search techniques and preparation o f ing procedures such as the preparation of a general resume, cover letter and thank you letter. Assistance ledger, balance sheet, and income statement. Financial w i l l be given in job search by faculty. planning, budgeting, cash management, and payroll TOUR 111 (3.0) Tourism: An Industry Perspective w i l l also be covered. (3.0,1) (S) THTR 348 (1.5) (2.0,0) (S) Arts Advocacy, Grantsmanship and Fundraising A n introduction to the key concepts, language, and Prerequisite: profiles and demographic factors, key industry sectors, interview. issues facing the tourism industry. Trends, market This course teaches the skills necessary to become an tourism geography and key regional products in B . C . , effective advocate for the arts. The students learn how tourism's role in community development, social to successfully complete grant applications and how to impacts of tourism, transportation, communication, and plan and execute a successful fundraising campaign. legal issues in tourism. THTR 349 (1.5) Company and Tour Management TOUR 112 Tourism Marketing Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) The objectives o f this course are to examine the interview. The purpose o f this course is to provide students with an understanding o f how a performing arts organization operates and how tours are planned and executed. THTR 360 (1.5) Directed Studies in Theatre I (4,0,32) (F.S) existing tourism marketing system in Canada; to develop the student's understanding o f Canadian tourism marketing and the basics o f consumer marketing; and to enable the student to relate to current aspects of tourism business and how they affect Canadian tourism marketing. This intensive course is designed to meet the needs of TOUR 113 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Human Resource Management in Tourism students with several years o f post-secondary training/ Human resource issues, job analysis, recruitment, Prerequisite: audition or interview. experience in theatre. Students w i l l concentrate on one interviewing, orientation, training and development, of the four specialized areas of performance, produc- performance management, legislation, and labour- tion, sccnography or direction. They receive instruction management relations. through: l ) a series of master classes conducted by faculty and guest artists, 2) involvement in the Per- forming Arts Theatre season, and 3) the A d v a n c e d Certificate in Theatre ( A C T ) season, which is chosen and mounted by A C T students. TOUR 114 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Organizational Behaviour in Tourism Individual behaviour, interpersonal communication skills, decision-making, group dynamics and team building, service management, conflict resolution, negotiation, and giving performance feedback. Course Descriptions 263 TOUR 116 (3.0) Financial Planning in Tourism I (3.0.1) (F) TOUR 130 (10.5) Tourism Co-op W o r k Term (10.5,0) (Su) Financial control methods, inventory control, labour The co-op work term is designed to apply classroom costs and controls, employee scheduling, payroll, loss theory and skills through work experience. Students prevention, reporting, accounting applications, finan- w i l l spend four and one-half months in an acceptable cial statements, cash/credit transactions, basic financial industry placement and w i l l be responsible to a specific planning. industry supervisor. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates who are better able to assume productive TOUR 118 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) Special Events as Tourism Generators jobs. Summer work placements, are sought by the students, with faculty co-op advisors assisting them to This course w i l l cover all aspects o f event management find placement. Students apply for positions and are and event marketing: choosing the right event, design- selected by the employees and the College. ing a business (event) plan, event/cause marketing, Students' work performance and potential w i l l be sponsor proposals, managing the pre-event, event evaluated by the faculty and industry supervisor. U p o n day(s) management, and post event activities. Students completion of the co-op work term, each student w i l l w i l l design a new special event and prepare a business make a major presentation to the class and faculty at a plan for that event. The course w i l l also include case department retreat. studies from existing events. TOUR 120 (3.0) A d v e n t u r e and Eco-Tourism (3.0,1) (F) TOUR 131 (3.0) Tourism Product D e v e l o p m e n t (3.0,1) (S) W i t h today's intense global competition for tourists Adventure tourism products w i l l be examined: eco- combined with the subjective and tangible nature o f the nomic impact o f the industry, selling adventure tour- tourism experience, operations and destinations are ism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, now compelled to analytically and methodically organization and structure of the industry, govern- develop appropriate tourism products. T h i s course w i l l ment's role in area and activity management, resource examine how to effectively develop, package and management issues, protecting resource areas, eco- position tourism products for success in the market- tourism issues, land use planning, and product opportu- place. nities. TOUR 123 Tourism A d v e r t i s i n g (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) This course is designed to give the student an understanding o f the major aspects o f Canadian tourism advertising. The course w i l l cover advertising planning, creative strategies and execution as well as developing "real life" advertising campaigns. TOUR 125 (3.0) Financial Planning in Tourism II (3.0,1) (S) TOUR 139 (3.0) C o m p u t e r Applications in Tourism (3.0,1) (S) This course introduces participants to the creation o f word processed documents using PC-based W i n d o w s / Graphical software Microsoft W o r d 7.0, an introduction to spreadsheet concepts using Microsoft E x c e l 7.0, an Introduction to PowerPoint—a graphic presentation package. The course also introduces the student to Windows95 and the graphical user interface, to the basic computer hardware requirements and the use o f Internet Explorer to access the Internet and send mail. Designing a business plan, financial planning techniques, financial goal setting for tourism managers. TOUR 231 (3.0) Tourism Research a n d Consultancy (3.0,1) (S) TOUR 127 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) Tourism Resource a n d C o m m u n i t y Planning The role and function o f consultants in tourism w i l l be A n overview o f tourism resource management issues business, business ethics, politics of consulting, examined including the nature o f the consulting and approaches, including heritage and cultural tourism business planning, staffing, marketing your services, planning, tourism resource inventory and planning consultant resumes, nature o f competition, types of methods including G I S (Geographical Information clients and client expectations. A n a l y z i n g and respond- System) techniques, community tourism planning, and ing to requests for proposals, researching R F P s and sustainability issues in tourism. writing proposals. Course Descriptions 264 TOUR 232 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) International Tourism Policy a n d Planning A geographical overview o f the Asia-Pacific region including demographics, physiography, environmental issues, tourism destinations and travel patterns. A review of politics in tourism and Asia-Pacific region national tourism policies. Methodology and approach with media while learning more about line, value, structure, depth and space and composition as they work with various still life set-ups and the human figure. TXTL 154 Introductory D r a w i n g I (3) (4,0,0) (S) to tourism policy analysis, comparative tourism This course offers students drawing skills that w i l l be development case studies, regional tourism policy and useful in their practice. Concentration w i l l be given to planning. Role of development agencies and tourism the study of primary drawing media and basic techniques, including pencil, pen and ink, brush and ink, organizations. marking pens, conte and pastel. It includes the study o f TOUR 233 Cross Cultural Tourism (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) representational rendering techniques o f objects, A n overview o f cross-cultural issues in tourism. The nature of prejudice and racism is examined as are effective communication skills and behaviours in selected cultures: gender relationships, business and social customs, body language, negotiation skills and others. TOUR 233 Cross Cultural Issues perspective drawing from direct observation and (3) (3,0,) (F) structures, surfaces and textures. Students w i l l learn how to visualize in graphic terms, to symbolize and to stylize in terms of line and line characteristics, and to develop power o f observation and graphic sensibility. TXTL158 Design I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Basic design elements and principles of colour theory w i l l be studied. Sources of inspiration and imagery w i l l This course deals with the cultural aspects o f provid- be explored using a variety o f materials and processes. ing/delivering outdoor recreation activities to both Two-dimensional repeat design w i l l be studied for international clients c o m i n g to Canada and Canadian application to surface decoration and compositional clients going off-shore. A component w h i c h deals elements w i l l be investigated and adapted for textiles. specifically with First Nations cultures is also included. M a i n project w i l l be presented in textiles. In addition to acquiring practical knowledge about TXTL 160 Textile Surface Design I culture in general, participants research and present information on a variety o f specific cultures, with the link between cultural knowledge/skills and the success of Outdoor Recreation activities being stressed. TOUR 239 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) A d v a n c e d C o m p u t e r A p p l i c a t i o n s in Tourism This course introduces participants to the production of spreadsheet documents using PC-based W i n d o w s / (3) (4,3,0) (F) This is an introduction to traditional methods o f printing on fabric using found objects, blocks and stamps with pigment and dyes. W a x resists and bleach discharge effects w i l l be explored. Bound and tied resists w i l l also be used with natural and fibre-reactive dyes. Design possibilities w i l l be studied for each medium and traditional dye techniques from many cultures w i l l be examined. Graphical software, as well as database concepts using database management software. TXTL 153 Introductory D r a w i n g II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: T X T L 154 or any other drawing courses or by portfolio. TXTL 161 (3) Textile Surface Design II (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: T X T L 160. This is an introduction to printing fabric with stencils using pigments, fibre-reactive and natural dyes. Katazome techniques with rice paste resists w i l l be T h i s course is a further exploration o f drawing media and techniques in which students explore a balance between technical/perceptual skills and personal expression. Study includes both representational and demonstrated. Applique and stitching techniques w i l l be used for surface decoration and design possibilities for each medium w i l l be explored. Printed fabrics from different cultures and time periods w i l l be studied. interpretive work in assorted media, including charcoal, conte, ink and collage. Students w i l l develop confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and facility Course Descriptions 265 TXTL 168 Weaving I (3) (4,3,0) (F) This course is divided into two parts. One segment deals with basic fibre properties and construction techniques such as felting, yarn construction, dying and various off-loom weaving techniques. Twining and coiling for basketry will be studied and historical as well as contemporary objects from various cultures will be discussed. Tapestry is the subject of the second half of the course. A sampler is woven to learn the basic vocabulary of traditional techniques. Analysis of techniques used by medieval and contemporary artists helps students to explore the application of the basic techniques. Studies in tapestry include the discussion of the great mural tapestries of medieval Europe and the rebirth of tapestry during the 20th century. One finished piece is woven. TXTL169 W e a v i n g II (3) (4,3,0) (S) This introduction to loom weaving includes warping the loom and drafting pattern weaves on four harnesses. It will include samples and finished pieces, with an emphasis on colour relationships, textures, and use of different fibres. Controlled dye techniques will be introduced and historical and contemporary weaving from different cultures will be studied. TXTL178 Design II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) TXTL 267 W e a v i n g III Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) TXTL 169. Hand-manipulated structures, ikat and painted warps will be explored. The first part of the course emphasizes weave structures for use in three-dimensional work or for imagery, i.e. double weave and weft brocade; the second part looks at graphic imagery and weaving. Both technical skills and personal expression will be developed, and traditional and contemporary textiles will be discussed in class and through research. TXTL 268 W e a v i n g IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) TXTL 267. This is a further exploration of techniques and ideas in weaving and/or combinations with other methods of textile constructions. Students will develop a personal focus and necessary techniques for individually designed projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. Techniques can include rug-weaving, advanced multi-harness weaving, supplementary warp/ weft, as well as advanced projects in felt, basketry and off-loom techniques. Critical discussions will be encouraged in class. TXTL 284 (3) Textile Surface Design III Prerequisite: TXTL 158. (3) (4,0,0) (F) TXTL 161. Elements and principles of 2-D and 3-D design and advanced colour studies will be explored. Problem solving techniques and concepts focusing on themes will be used to explore sources of imagery and inspiration. Different design media with their adaptation to textiles will be used. This study of screen printing techniques using paper, wax, screen filler and direct emulsion stencils involves a variety of methods for producing a repeat design with different registration possibilities. There will be an option for using photographic stencils for projects. Light sensitive dyes will be used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with different dyes and pigments will be combined with screening techniques. TXTL 230 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Professional and Business Skills in Arts a n d Crafts TXTL 285 (3) Textile Surface Design IV Prerequisites: One year full-time study in a visual arts program or equivalent experience. This course addresses basic self-management practices in the arts; topics include the current cultural climate, networking, finding contracts, creating a business and action plan, developing a communications package, financial management and understanding legal issues. It gives an overview and practical hands-on experience of various careers in arts and crafts and provides the resources for setting up a self-employed career in the arts. Course 266 Descriptions Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) TXTL 284. Direct hand-painting techniques will be introduced and different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and synthetic fabrics will be used. Relief and 3-D fibre construction methods will be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dyeing techniques to create fibre structure. Basic paper-making techniques will be studied, exploring the possibilities of paper collage, cast paper, use of different pulps, colouring and making pulp from plants. TXTL 290 Precision Dyeing Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) First year of Textile Arts program or TXTL 385 (4.5) Textile Surface Design VI (4,6,0) Basic paper-making techniques w i l l be studied, exploring the possibilities of paper collage, cast paper, equivalent. This course teaches precision dye methods with a range of synthetic and natural dyes for use with different yarns and fabrics. It provides technical knowledge for the safe use of dyes, how to achieve a colour match and how to create various aged looks for applied situations use o f different pulps, colouring and making pulps from plants. Relief and 3 - D fibre construction methods w i l l be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dying techniques to create fibre structure. Direct hand-painting techniques w i l l be introduced and different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and in film or theatre or for a special project. synthetic fabrics w i l l be used. Chemical processes w i l l TXTL 367 Weaving V (4.5) (4,6,0) be introduced which alter the structure o f the cloth by distressing, shrinking, and destroying parts of it. Students w i l l expand their knowledge o f basic weaves through experimental pieces and finished projects. VIET 102 (1.5) Introduction t o Vietnamese I (3,1,0) (F) Hand-manipulated structures, such as double weave and brocading, w i l l be explored as well as working with colour through ikat, painted and printed warps. This course emphasizes graphic approaches to weaving; the use of figurative and symbolic imagery or abstract patterning. Both technical skills and personal expression w i l l be developed and traditional and contemporary textiles w i l l be discussed in class and researched. TXTL 368 W e a v i n g VI (4.5) (4,6,0) This is a further exploration o f techniques and ideas in weaving and/or combinations with other methods of For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program students only. This course is designed to offer A P M C P students a basic knowledge o f Vietnamese and to enable them to gain an appreciation of the Vietnamese culture and society. VIET 103 (3) Introduction t o Vietnamese II (3,1,0) (S) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program students only. Prerequisite: V I E T 102 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f V I E T 102. textile constructions. Students w i l l develop necessary techniques for individually designed projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. Topics can include loom-wcaving such as rug-weaving, computer assisted designing for advanced pattern weaving and special techniques designed for threedimensional weavings; non-woven techniques include felting, basketry and off-loom techniques. Students w i l l be encouraged to combine weaving with surface design processes and other media. TXTL 384 Surface Design V (4.5) (4,6,0) The study of screen printing using paper, wax and W M S T 100 (3) Introduction t o W o m e n ' s Studies (4,0,0) This course w i l l examine the status and role o f women in Canadian society. Topics w i l l include the impact o f W o m e n ' s Studies on traditional academic disciplines; the nature and origins of patriarchy; women and work; reproductive rights, pornography and sexuality. It w i l l investigate issues o f power centering around race, class and sexuality. It w i l l trace the development of gender role divisions in the family and other social institutions; examine the influence of education, media and art on the development o f women's social and legal status. direct emulsion stencils involves a variety of methods with different registration possibilities. Photographic W M S T 102 (3) Political Economy of W o m e n effects w i l l be explored in combination with discharge This course w i l l examine women's work from the prc- and resist processes. Light sensitive chemicals w i l l be industrial time until today. Topics such as participation for producing single images as well as repeat designs (4,0,0) used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with in the workplace, inequality in the labour markets, different dyes and pigments w i l l be combined with exclusion o f household production in the system of screening techniques. National Accounts and attempts to measure unpaid work w i l l be covered. The course w i l l also examine the Course Descriptions 267 impact of free trade, technology, privatization, and economic restructuring on women. Topics w i l l also include an examination o f the effects o f the mounting debt and economic crisis on women in the less developed countries. Issues o f current interest such as the comparable worth movement and the child care industry w i l l be discussed. W M S T 122 (3) W o m e n in A n t h r o p o l o g y (4,0,0) In this course the anthropological perspective w i l l be applied to women in different cultures o f the world: their role in economic, political, religious, kinship, and expressive systems: exploration o f the work o f women anthropologists and the effect o f theory on understand- W M S T 104 (3) (4,0,0) C o n t e m p o r a r y English-Canadian W o m e n Writers A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden the students' awareness of, and appreciation for, literature produced by women writers with emphasis on contemporary writers. It w i l l also introduce students to current feminist literary theory. ing women; women's experience in cultures o f the world. W M S T 130 W o m e n and A r t (3) (4,0,0) This course surveys the history o f w o m e n ' s involvement in Western art. The position o f women in the visual arts and art history w i l l be discussed and the methodological issues involved in reclaiming the W M S T 106 (3) (4,0,0) C o n t e m p o r a r y American W o m e n Writers history o f women artists explored. W o m e n ' s role as producers o f art w i l l be considered from A n t i q u i t y to the 20th century and the social, cultural and economic A discussion-oriented literature course intended to background o f each period w i l l be examined in order to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and understand the conditions under w h i c h these artists appreciation o f contemporary and recent important worked. The image o f women in art w i l l be looked at American women authors. There w i l l be brief consid- to reveal the underlying ideologies of each period. eration o f 19th and early 20th century works, but the focus w i l l be on works published since W W I I , including works o f the 1980s. Although the focus w i l l be on plays, stories, novels, and poetry, there w i l l be some exploration of those biographical matters and issues o f critical status that mark the rise o f women's writings from a sub-genre to full status acceptance by the best critics today. W M S T 110 W o m e n a n d Psychology (3) (4,0,0) In this course we examine the psychological construction o f gender-roles, their development in childhood and maintenance in adulthood. The course w i l l examine current research in biology, socialization, personality and mental health, and w i l l include issues of current interest such as sexuality, aging, violence against women, gender relations and the workplace. W M S T 113 W o m e n in Politics (3) (4,0,0) This introductory course in W o m e n ' s Studies w i l l examine women's political participation in the political process from a multidisciplinary feminist format. The course w i l l focus on Canadian examples and encourage students to examine the difficulties that affect women in particular. Students w i l l be encouraged to research possible solutions to increasing women's political participation. Course 268 Descriptions Students taking W M S T 130 w i l l not receive duplicate credit for A H I S 109. W M S T 140 (3) W o m e n , Science a n d Technology (4,0,0) This course w i l l provide an insight into the role that science and technology play in our society and their impact on the lives o f women. Topics w i l l include an historical review of the role women have played in the development of science, investigation o f the reasons for the traditionally low participation o f women in scientific and technical fields, the relationship between science and gender and discussion sessions on a variety of topics such as ccofeminism, ecology and the environment, reproductive technologies, sociobiology, information technology. W M S T 220 (3) (4,0,0) W o m e n and the Past: A n Historical Survey W e w i l l examine the lives o f women in the western world from the ancient times to 20th century North A m e r i c a . Private lives as well as public and political activities w i l l be studied. Topics w i l l include the origins o f patriarchy, the role of women in Early Christianity, women in monasticism, women and the family in pre-industrial Europe, the impact o f industrialization, pioneers and pathbreakcrs, and the rise and nature of women's movements. Academic probation Academic schedule Accelerated Accounting Management program Accelerated Computer Systems Management program Accelerated General Management program Accelerated Marketing Management program Accounting Assistant program Accounting Support program Achievement Resource Centre Add/Drop period Administration Administrative Assistant program Admission/readmission Admission requirements Adult Basic Education Advanced Certificate in Theatre program Advanced placement Advising Centre Alternative Career Training Anthropology Application dates Applied Information Technology program Art History Art Institute Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program Associate degree requirements Athletics and recreation Audio-Visual Services Awards Bachelor of Business Administration Bachelor of Ja/.z Studies Bachelor of Music Therapy Bachelor of Music Transfer Bachelor of Tourism Management Biology Bookstore Bursaries Business Administration Accelerated Diploma programs Advanced Certificate Advanced Diploma Certificate Degree Diploma programs Evening Certificate programs Business Administration Co-operative Education Diploma program Business Computing Certificate Business Computing Co-operative Diploma Business Fundamentals program Cafeteria Campus addresses Campus maps Canadian Studies Specialty C A N A S E A N program Cap Corner (student store) Capilano College Foundation Capilano Courier 39 21 116 117 116 117 104 104 43,59 28 55 105 22 23 60 96 26 40 62 73 23 106 73 163 163 33 48 42 44 111 131 90,147 88 159 74 50 45 107 116 120 112 119 ' I' 114 119 11 • 120 114 121 51 1 4.5 71 171 50 55 50 Capilano Review Capilano Students' Union Car pool Career Resource Centre Career/Vocational programs Certificate and diploma requirements Certified Financial Planner program Cheating and plagiarism policy Chemistry Child care Chinese College Board Commerce Commercial Animation program Communications Community Music School Computer system, misuse policy Computing Science Continuing Education Contract Services Co-operative education Copyright policy Counselling Course challenge Course change procedures Course descriptions Course overload Criminology Daycare Diploma requirements Disability Services Distance education Early Childhood Care and Education program Economics Education Council Eldercollege Employment Centre Engineering English English as a Second Language English Diagnostic Test (EDT) English language requirements Enrolment status Environmental Science program Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program 49 49 51 48 103 33 118,170 54 75 47 75 55 76 122 123 169 54 77 169 169 46,111 54 46 31 29 175 30 78 47 33 41 46 124 78 55 170 44 79 81 62 81 23,63 36 165 71 Faculty see specific program/departments Fees 31 Film and Television Studies 170 Financial A i d and Awards 44 First aid 47 First Nations College Preparation program 64 First Nations Student Services 41 Fisheries Science 127 Fitness Centre 49 Food and beverage service 51 Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act 37 French 82 Geography Geology German 83 83 84 Index 271 Governance Graphic Design and Illustration program Grades Graduation 55 128 38 33 Health Services History Home Support Attendant program Humanities Division 47 85 130 69 Instructional year International exchanges projects and initiatives student information International Student Centre International Business program Infotec 27 44 171 see Admission 43 120 1 0 6 Japanese 85 Jazz Studies 131 Kinesiology 86 Labour Studies program Landscape Horticulture program Legal Assistant program Legal Secretarial program Library Linguistics Loans Local Government Administration Professional Certificate program Lost and Found 139 140 141 143 41 86 44 Math Placement Test ( M P T ) Mathematics and Statistics Mathematics Learning Centre Media Production Services Media Resources program Medical insurance Medical Office Assistant program Mission and Values Music Therapy, Bachelor of Music Transfer, Bachelor of 120 51 27,87 86 43 42 145 22 146 12 90,147 88 Natural Science Educational Travel Network Specialist program 169 121 Office Assistant program Outdoor Recreation Management program 150 150 Parking Peer Support Centre Performing Arts Management program Personal Care Attendant program Philosophy 50 47 94 152 91 Physics 91 Physiotherapy 47 Plagiarism policy Policies Political Studies Post-graduate programs Pre-collcgc level courses Preparatory programs Prior learning assessment Professional Accounting Transfer Package Protection of privacy Psychology Pure and Applied Sciences Division Readmission Recreation Refunds Registrar's Office Registration Required to Withdraw Resident Care Attendant program Retail Marketing Co-op program 272 Capilano College Bookstore 22 48 see Fees 40 27 40 154 118 S A R A W program 66 Scholarships 45 Security 48 Sexual harassment 48,53 Social Sciences Division 69 Sociology 93 Spanish 94 Special Education Teacher Assistant program 170 Speech Assisted Reading and Writing program 66 Sports see Athletics Sportsplex 49 Streamkeepers Training 127 Students conduct policy i 52 employment centre 44 loans 44 newspaper 50 rights and responsibilities 51 services 40 student-operated store 50 student union 49 students with disabilities 52 Studio Art program 155 Summer session 27 Telephone numbers - departments Textile Arts program Thai Theatre Tourism Management Co-op program Transcripts (student records) Transfer credit Tuition 2 157 94 94 159 37 26 see Fees University Transfer 69 Visual and Performing Arts Division 69 Web site: www.capcollege.bc.ca Withdrawal period Women's Studies Writing Across the Curriculum Writing Centre index 54 36,51 92 128,163-165 59 59 27 117 37 93 69 29 70,98 71 43 Continuing ^ Contract Education***' Services at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c mnt On Us For: ^ Professional 1/ Lifelong ^ Innovative Development Learning Opportunities Programming for All Ages $/ Timely Response to Changing the Needs of Workplace lus: AWARD-WINNING PROGRAMS A SCENE-STEALING ENVIRONMENT You'll find us in the Continuing Education & Contract Services section of this calendar. GENERAL INQUIRIES Phone: (604)984-4901 Fax: (604)983-7545 C M Capilano C M College Providing Educational Opportunities for the Community Since 1968 oorren rne Plow I | " J u J J j ^ J j J J J 7 J J J That's right. Deposit this entry form at iny Cactus Club Cafe location for your :hance to win your tuition paid for a whole iarn year!!! No purchase, performance of strange and embarrassing acts or written examination required (except for a skill esting question). Just fill out this form and there you have it, a chance to win i year of education without the added sain of tuition payments. G o o d Luck! fjTRY FORM Jame: vddress: . 1 •** II. L_.ll" hone Number: ducational Institution: ) r a w Date December 1, 1 9 9 8 ie Fine Print: No purchase necessary. Draw winners must answer a skill testing jestion. Contestants must be currently enrolled at a postsecondary stitution. One entry to be drawn. See us for full contest details. 6 Free Wings. Use this coupon for 6 free and highly delicious hot wings anytime at any Cactus Club Cafe. Happy Landings Served D<2?ly Vancouver • Richmond • Delta North Vancouver • North & South Burnaby Nanaimo • Calgary '9 'OT0IJlf^> % \ ALMOSTEVERYWHERE^